diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67526-0.txt | 7136 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67526-0.zip | bin | 160519 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67526-h.zip | bin | 221843 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67526-h/67526-h.htm | 10148 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67526-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 56727 -> 0 bytes |
8 files changed, 17 insertions, 17284 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84bc30b --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #67526 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/67526) diff --git a/old/67526-0.txt b/old/67526-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 64277a1..0000000 --- a/old/67526-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7136 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of Letters on the Moral and Religious -State of South America, by James Thomson - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: Letters on the Moral and Religious State of South America - written during a residence of nearly seven years in Buenos Aires, - Chile, Peru and Colombia - -Author: James Thomson - -Release Date: February 28, 2022 [eBook #67526] - -Language: English - -Produced by: Brian Wilson, Adrian Mastronardi and the Online Distributed - Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was - produced from scanned images of public domain material from - the Google Books project.) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LETTERS ON THE MORAL AND -RELIGIOUS STATE OF SOUTH AMERICA *** - - - - - - -LETTERS ON THE MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE OF SOUTH AMERICA. - -DENNETT, PRINTER, LEATHER LANE, LONDON. - - - - - LETTERS - ON THE - MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE - OF - SOUTH AMERICA, - WRITTEN - DURING A RESIDENCE OF NEARLY SEVEN YEARS - IN - BUENOS AIRES, CHILE, PERU, - AND COLOMBIA. - - BY JAMES THOMSON. - - PUBLISHED BY JAMES NISBET, - 21, BERNERS STREET, LONDON. - Hatchard and Son, Piccadilly; Seeley and Son, Fleet Street; - Hamilton, Adams, and Co., and J. Duncan, Paternoster Row; - W. Oliphant; Waugh and Innes; and W. Whyte and Co., Edinburgh; - M. Ogle; and Chalmers and Collins, Glasgow; - R. M. Tims; and W. Curry and Co., Dublin. - - M DCCC XXVII. - - - - -TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE LORD CALTHORPE, _&c. &c. &c._ - - -MY LORD, - -Knowing the warm, solicitude which your Lordship feels in regard to all -endeavours, to promote the moral and religious welfare of the inhabitants -of South America, I dedicate these Letters to your Lordship; and I beg of -you to accept my sincere thanks for your Lordship’s kind permission thus -to give your name to the world, in connexion with the best and highest -interests of South America. - - I have the honour to be, - - MY LORD, - - Your Lordship’s - - Most obedient Servant, - - JAMES THOMSON. - - - - -PREFACE. - - -Soon after my return to England in 1825, I was solicited by several -friends to publish extracts from the letters I had written during my -residence in South America. To enable me to do this, I was kindly -furnished with these letters by the individuals to whom they were -addressed. I have at length attended to these solicitations, with this -view of creating a greater interest in this country on behalf of that -quarter of the world, and in the expectation that this increased interest -will turn out to the good of South America. - -I have to beg the indulgence of my readers in regard to these letters, -from the consideration that they were not written for publication. There -will appear also some indistinctness, on account of the letters being -addressed to various individuals, whilst they are here classed simply -in the order of time in which they were written. To which may be added, -among their defects, the abruptness arising from the circumstance of what -is here given being only extracts. If, however, some interest should be -excited in regard to South America by the publication of these letters, -and if there should arise from this some good to that country, I shall -not be sorry for thus having given them to the public, notwithstanding -the disadvantages under which they appear. - -I am now about to return to that quarter of the world, and trust that -the same gracious hand which protected me and guided me in my former -wanderings there, will still conduct me, and will enable me to sow seed -which may spring up unto eternal life. Ten days after this date, I embark -for Mexico, as the agent of the British and Foreign Bible Society. I go -fraught with a sacred treasure, with some thousands of copies of the -Holy Scriptures. Besides circulating these, which are nearly all in -the Spanish language, I am commissioned to procure translations of the -Scriptures into the native languages of that country, and which are still -spoken there by some millions of the inhabitants. - -In prosecuting these objects, I intend to travel over the greater part -of Mexico and Guatemala. Whilst traversing these parts, I shall probably -keep a journal of occurrences, illustrative of the state of the country -in a general point of view; and should the small volume now published be -favourably received, I may perhaps at some future period have something -for the press less unworthy of public attention. - -LONDON, 13th February, 1827. - - - - -LETTERS ON THE MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE OF SOUTH AMERICA. - - - _Buenos Aires, 5th June, 1820._ - -I cannot be very particular as to all that has occurred to me since my -arrival here, the outlines will be sufficient. I arrived on the 6th -October, 1818, after a voyage from Liverpool of twelve weeks and three -days, and except about a fortnight, was sick all the time. Soon after my -arrival, I made proposals to the Government, regarding the introduction -of the Lancasterian System of education. I received promises of meeting -with every encouragement in this matter, but these promises, through -neglect, were long in producing the desired effect. I was feeling the -truth of Solomon’s remark, “Hope deferred maketh the heart sad.” Under -these circumstances I was proposing to go into the interior, where I -had more positive encouragement held out to me. Just at this time, by -application at a better quarter than we had at first applied to, the -arrangement was formed by which I was engaged by the magistrates to put -their schools, in this city and neighbourhood, upon this plan. Since -that time we have been doing more or less in this business, but things -in general go on very slowly here, and besides, many political changes -have retarded our operations. Notwithstanding, however, I trust the -foundation of a good work has been laid, by pursuing of which, I hope -to see many thousands reaping the benefits of education, and imbibing -the soundest principles of religion and morality from lessons selected -from the Holy Scriptures. You will be surprised and pleased when I tell -you, these lessons are entirely of my own selection, and printed in this -place. In no case, regarding them, has there been any interference or -hindrance on the part of the clergy or others. We have now a school going -on, with upwards of 100 boys in it, and soon we expect to have others -set a going. These things, my dear friend, fill me (as they will do you) -with gratitude and thanksgiving. They are small things, in themselves -considered, but taking into consideration all the circumstances of -this country, they are great, and more especially when considered as a -foundation for future operations. In another respect also something has -been done, I mean regarding the circulation of the Scriptures. I have got -upwards of 400 Spanish New Testaments from the British and Foreign Bible -Society, and these I have been able to land here without the smallest -hindrance. Several of them have been already distributed, and have met -with a ready reception. I have been able also to send some of them into -various parts of the country here, and into Chile. Where the word of God -circulates, we have every ground to look for good effects, though it may, -like seed sown in the earth, appear for a while to be lost. By and by, -however, the seed springs up, first the blade, then the ear, and lastly -the full corn in the ear. So shall it be with the seed of the word of -God, which shall not return void, but shall accomplish the will of God in -turning men from darkness to light. - -We are in the midst of political commotions here at present, and have -been so for some time past. The Lord, however, is the security of his -people, he is the Governor among the nations, and all these changes will, -I trust, lead to the promoting of his kingdom. Let us join in the prayer, -“Thy kingdom come, thy will be done on earth, as it is done in heaven.” -For the present, farewell. - - * * * * * - - _Buenos Aires, 26th July, 1820._ - -I have got the information contained in your letters, and the printed -sheet translated into Spanish, and have presented it to the Magistrates, -who have ordered it to be printed in the Buenos Aires Gazette. - -I am happy to say the same favourable disposition towards our objects, -continues to prevail in this place; and that from Monte Video I have -lately received encouraging accounts, which, I hope, will lead to a -commencement in that place. I went there about three months ago, to see -what could be done. It so happened that General Lecor, the Portuguese -Governor, to whom I had letters of introduction, was absent at Maldonado, -with the two principal Magistrates. I explained my objects to the chief -clergyman, a liberal man, and a particular friend of the Governor’s. He -promised to do all he could towards promoting our system of education on -the Governor’s return; and I some weeks ago received from him a copy of a -letter, which the Magistrates addressed to him upon the subject, and of -which I subjoin a translation. - - “_Monte Video, 20th May, 1820._ - - “Sir,—We have read with peculiar pleasure and attention the - memorial which you had the goodness to send us, relative to - the system of instruction established in Europe by Lancaster. - We have the honour of communicating, that it has met with our - particular esteem; and that in consequence, we have resolved to - adopt the said system in this city, as soon as Mr. Thomson can - come here from Buenos Aires, to commence it. Please communicate - this to him, and express our sincere thanks to him for his - zeal towards the youth of this province. May God preserve you - many years.” - - * * * * * - - _Buenos Aires, 24th May, 1821._ - -I am now about to leave this city, and to proceed to Chile. I leave the -two principal schools going on as I mentioned in my last, and the masters -of the others instructed in the monitorian system. What principally -enables me to leave the schools here in the confidence that they will go -on well, is, that they are under the particular care of one who feels -much interest in the new system of instruction, and of general education. -This individual is very active, and well fitted to carry into execution -what he conceives useful. The person I am speaking of is a priest. We -have been associated together in the care of the schools for some time, -and have had much intercourse with each other, and we have always been on -the most friendly terms. - -It was my intention to leave this, at the latest, in October next. -Things, however, being favourably arranged, as above mentioned, I have -thought it my duty to set out for Chile without loss of time. From my -former letters you would learn that the Chilian government has requested -me to go there to establish schools on the Lancasterian plan. I had -promised to go as soon as the state of the schools here would permit. The -Chilian government, through their minister here, continues to shew the -same interest as before in regard to this matter, and has now made an -agreement with me. - -The season is now far advanced, and the Andes are covered with snow. -Besides this inconvenience of the mountains, the roads, in some places, -are nearly intercepted, so as to render travelling rather insecure. From -these considerations, I have resolved, with the advice of my friends, -to go by sea, and have taken my passage in the brig Dragon, Captain -Green, for Valparaiso, in Chile. Sailing round Cape Horn is by no means -so formidable a matter now as it was formerly considered to be. Vessels -frequently go round now, and at all seasons. This is now the middle -of our winter, and we expect the cold to be severe. I am accordingly -preparing myself for it, as well as I can, by providing warm clothing. -During the winter the winds are considered more favourable, and vessels -make quicker passages. We expect to sail in a day or two, and, I trust, -He who guided me over the ocean in coming to this place, will still be -with me to preserve me, and to bring me safely to my desired haven. - -I leave all my friends here on the best terms, and I leave the place, -in many respects with regret. I shall never forget all the kindness I -have met with in this city from the Magistrates, and from all classes -with whom I have had intercourse. May God reward them. When I gave in my -resignation, I said that it was my intention to return here next summer, -to visit the schools, and to see how they were coming on. In the kindest -manner I was requested not to forget my promise of returning. They were -sorry, they said, that it was not in their power to reward me in a -pecuniary way, from the lowness of their funds. They begged me to accept -of their sincerest thanks for establishing this system of education in -the country, from which they said they anticipated the happiest results, -in making education general throughout all classes of the people; and -they added that, as a mark of respect, they had requested the government -to confer on me the honour of citizenship, and which was accordingly done. - - * * * * * - - _Santiago de Chile, 6th Aug. 1821._ - -My letter to you of the 16th July, brought down my journal to the day -before my leaving Valparaiso. On the 17th I left that place in the -afternoon, and at two o’clock on the 19th I said, “Peace be to this -city!” I was going to give you some account of the road, and what I met -with upon it, but find I have got other things to write which will fill -my letter. I shall leave this description till a further opportunity. - -You know, already, that I was engaged to come here by this government, -and that my passage round the Cape was paid by the same. I therefore -looked for a fair and open reception. I have not been disappointed, or, -perhaps, I should rather say I have, for I have met with a reception -beyond my expectation, I might say to my wish. I have been introduced to -the Director and to the Ministers of Government, all of whom express much -desire for the speedy establishment of schools _throughout_ Chile. We -have got the largest apartment in the University for a school-room. The -joiners are busy at work, fitting it up, and we only wait their finishing -to begin our operations. - -I shall occupy the rest of my letter in giving you a translation of two -articles, which bear upon this subject. - -On my arrival here, I received a copy of the following order, issued by -the Government two days before I reached this city:— - - “By supreme authority of this date, I communicate to Don Manuel - Salas the following note. - - “Mr. Thomson, who has been engaged to establish in this city - the new system of mutual instruction, has already arrived in - Valparaiso. His Excellency, the Director, has a decided wish - that public education may be general, and is very anxious to - give all possible aid to this establishment for elementary - instruction, as preparatory to the higher branches. He has for - this end appointed you with full powers to forward this object, - in conjunction with Mr. Thomson, and the President of the - Board of Public Education. You will, therefore, do all in your - power to establish it as soon and as perfectly as possible.—A - copy of this order to be sent to the President of Public - Education, and to Mr. Thomson.” - - “Office of the Minister of State in Santiago - de Chile, 17th July, 1821. - - “JOAQUIN DE ECHEVARRIA.” - -Upon enquiring who this Don Manuel Salas was, I found he was a man very -highly respected by every one, and a modest but decided philanthropist. -I have since been frequently with him, and find him, indeed, as -described to me. I next give you an article from the Public Gazette of -the 4th current; I think it is from the pen of Salas, but this is only -conjecture. It is, however, either from him or from one of the Ministers -of Government. - - “PUBLIC EDUCATION. - - “Ignorance is one of the greatest evils that man can suffer, - and it is the principal cause of all his errors and miseries. - It is also the grand support of tyranny, and ought, therefore, - to be banished by every means from that country which desires - a liberty regulated by laws, customs, and opinion. None can be - happy unless he study religion, morality, and his own rights, - unless he improve by the knowledge of those who have preceded - him, and enter into social connexion, as it were, with those - who in former times, and in other places, cultivated the - sciences and the arts, and who have deposited in their writing, - the fruit of their studies for the improvement of others. The - only way by which we can form such an acquaintance with great - men is _by reading_. The happy day is now arrived when the - infinitely valuable art of reading is to be extended to every - individual in Chile. We have now the pleasure of announcing - this to all classes of the community. This will be considered - as the most interesting news, by those who know its importance, - and who consider it as the basis of solid prosperity. Deeply - impressed with this truth, our benevolent government has - brought to this place Mr. James Thomson, who has established in - Buenos Aires elementary schools upon that admirable system of - Lancaster, which has spread through the world. He is going to - establish schools on the same plan in this city, from which, - as a centre, this system will be propagated through all the - towns of the state. The readiness with which this mode of - education has been generally adopted, its economy, and the - quickness and order with which children learn by it reading, - writing, arithmetic, and the principles of grammar, strongly - recommend it. It has been particularly useful in those places - where rural or mechanical occupations allow but a short time - for instruction. There is, therefore, now no obstacle in - the way for every one in Chile to obtain education. Notice - will be given, from time to time, of the progress of the - central school, which is to serve as a model for others. In - it masters will be instructed, and those masters who show the - most attention in acquiring a knowledge of this system will be - appointed in preference to the other schools.” - - * * * * * - - _Santiago de Chile, 8th October, 1821._ - -I seize the opportunity of sending you a few lines by his Majesty’s ship -Owen Glendower, which sails for England from Valparaiso immediately. -I enclose you a copy of a letter of this date to Mr. Owen, which will -inform you of my concerns here, touching the Bible Society, to this -date. In addition to this, I shall now communicate to you some notices -regarding our schools here, bringing down my accounts upon the subject -from the 1st September (the date of my last letter to Mr. S.) to the -present day. - -I am happy to say, the favourable reception I met with here, and of -which I wrote you on the 6th August, was not a momentary feeling. It has -been kept up till now, and I might also say, it has rather increased -than diminished. Soon after my arrival in this city, a large room in the -University was pointed out to me as the place in which we were to begin -our school operations. This hall is capable of containing 200 children, -according to our plan, and this is a very good number for a model school. -This hall was to have been the University Chapel. The building I here -call the University, is not occupied at present in the way its name would -indicate, though intended for a place of learning. There is, however, -another building appropriated to the objects of a college, and of which I -may write you afterwards. My present object is to speak of our schools. -Through the delay of the joiners in fitting up this place, it was not -completed till the 17th September. On that day our school was opened. -From day to day our number increased, till, at the end of a fortnight, -our number (200) was completed. Since that time, we have been daily -importuned to admit others, which we are unable to do. We are, however, -about to commence fitting up another large hall in the University -buildings. At the present rate of applications, we shall certainly have -more in readiness for that second school, by the time it is prepared, -than it will contain. The fitting up of others is also talked of. From -the short time our school has been going on, it promises to do well. The -children are docile and agreeable. I am now so much familiarized with -the appearance and manner of the children in these countries, that I -feel myself quite at home among them. There is more resemblance to the -English or European face among the children and others here, in Chile, -than in Buenos Aires. I have been _this moment_ interrupted by one of my -scholars, who has called upon me, and brought me a ham, a present from -his mother. - -All classes seem to take an interest in our schools. We are daily -visited. The First Minister of the Government pays us a visit regularly -every afternoon. We have already four masters studying the system, and -these will be ready in a month or two to open schools on our plan, either -in this city or in the provincial towns. In Conception, Coquimbo, and -another town of inferior population, they are preparing for establishing -schools upon our system. The principal things we stand in need of for -the rapid extension of our schools, are slates and printed lessons. I am -expecting 2000 slates by the first vessel from England, and am at present -getting some lessons printed in the government printing office. To defray -the expense of these, we have opened a subscription, which I hope will do -well. I have already got upwards of 270 dollars among my English friends -here, and expect more. - -Thus, you see, the Lord is with us, and blessed be his name. May he, -in his own way and wisdom, make his great name glorious in the eyes of -Chile, and of all South America. - - * * * * * - - _Santiago de Chile, 8th October, 1821._ - -I wrote you a few lines on the 26th February, and then mentioned that -it was my intention to visit Chile. Through the gracious providence of -the God of the Bible Society, I have now effected my intention. I left -Buenos Aires on the 30th May, and sailing round Cape Horn, arrived safely -at Valparaiso, after a voyage of forty-four days. After a short stay in -that place, to recruit my health, which always suffers at sea, I came -to this city, the capital of Chile. Here, the moment of my arrival, I -met with a very encouraging reception. You know, of course, that my most -prominent object in South America is the promoting of education on the -Lancasterian plan. On this footing it was that I experienced so hearty -a reception in this place. Great and respected as your Society is, and -ought to be, in the eyes of England and of Europe, it would yet be an -imprudence to proclaim one’s self your agent here, with the sole or chief -object of circulating the Bible. This is not speaking very favourably of -the inhabitants of South America, you will say. I confess it, but at the -same time, I have told you the truth.[1] Whilst, however, I hold myself -forward in the eyes of South America, as a promoter of education and an -instructor of youth, I consider myself in all respects as the servant -of the British and Foreign Bible Society. I beg you to consider me in -this light, and to call upon me with the utmost freedom in whatever way -I can, directly or indirectly, promote your blessed work, in making the -inhabitants of this vast continent acquainted with the words of eternal -life. I have said, my prominent object here is the establishment of -schools. I freely and openly profess this, and in consequence am every -where hailed as a friend. The little influence I have thus acquired, and -the confidence reposed in me, enable me more effectually to promote the -circulation of the Scriptures, than if I acted ostensibly and exclusively -as your agent. One proof of this I shall give you. I brought with me -among my books from Buenos Aires, about sixty Spanish New Testaments. In -getting my luggage through the custom-house, I was told, that the books -must be inspected by the Bishop. I wished this might be dispensed with, -but it was insisted on. I then told the officers, that I was engaged to -come here by the Government to establish the Lancasterian schools. That -alters the case, said they, and immediately the papers for despatching -my books, &c. were signed, and not a single book was so much as looked -at either by the Bishop, or by any of the custom-house officers. I was -told, before coming here, that there was much less liberality in Chile, -as to the circulation of the Scriptures, than in Buenos Aires. I was, -therefore, anxious to avoid the inspection of the Bishop above noticed. I -understand he has it in his power to prohibit what books he chooses, and -that his prohibition holds, unless the Government give, in the individual -case, an order to the contrary. I am in expectation of receiving from -you very soon 300 of Scio’s translation of the New Testament. These I -shall let pass all the forms required, to make proof whether or not -the Scriptures are allowed to be introduced into Chile. This, you will -perceive, is an object worth ascertaining, and the knowledge of it will -be of considerable use in directing us in future. Should the Bishop demur -as to their circulation, and wish to keep them, I can, I think, obtain an -order of the Government to prevent it; so that we may consider there is -no great danger of losing them, in making the trial referred to. - -Notwithstanding what I have said above, no interruption to the -circulation of the Spanish New Testament has yet been experienced. Soon -after my arrival, I gave to an Englishman, who has a shop here, some -copies to sell. This man is a Roman Catholic, and I am happy to say, he -recommends the Scriptures to the natives of this country, who are of his -own religion. He has already sold about twenty. He is very anxious for -the arrival of the Spanish Bibles, which I told him I expected, as he -thinks he could sell many of them. - -In my letters to you, from time to time, when in Buenos Aires, I related -to you the state of the circulation of the Scriptures in that place. I -am happy to say, that at my leaving it, the prospects regarding this -important matter were more favourable than at any former period. I do -not mean to say by this, that there was any particular stir about the -word of God, or great demand for it; but I mean to convey to you this -encouraging truth, that the Scriptures are occasionally bought, and -more so than formerly, and that they are increasingly read from year to -year. I consider the word of God to have fairly got an entrance into -Buenos Aires; and that its prohibition, or any material hindrance to its -circulation, is not only unlikely, but, one might say, impossible. I give -you this as my opinion, after a residence in that place of more than two -years and a half, and an intercourse with various classes of society -during that time. - -I shall now mention some things not formerly noticed, regarding the -circulation of the Scriptures in Buenos Aires, and in the surrounding -country.—A military officer, commanding on a station a short distance -from the city, has been greatly delighted with the New Testament, and -in consequence, very anxious to make others acquainted with it. He -recommended the reading of it to several poor people who were unable -to purchase it, and requested to have copies to give them, which he -obtained. In this way he has distributed a number of copies. Besides -those given to the poor, some have been sold by him to those able to pay -for them. He used to take me very cordially by the hand when we met, -and to speak with pleasure on the beneficence of the Bible Society, and -of the great advantages that would arise to his countrymen by a general -reading of the Holy Scriptures. I told him I hoped soon to have the -whole Bible in Spanish, and in consequence he is all expectation for -it. On my leaving Buenos Aires, I gave twenty-four New Testaments to -this gentleman, in the confidence of their being distributed in the most -judicious manner. - -There is a military station and a small town on the east coast of -Patagonia, called Rio Negro, in about 42° south latitude. To this place -some copies of the New Testament have been sent. One individual, a native -of that place, was so pleased with the copy he got, that he requested -the person who brought it, to bring several copies on his return for -his family and friends. I am personally acquainted with the officer at -present commanding at that place, and am pretty certain he will not -throw any obstacle in the way of the circulation of the Scriptures. -This gentleman attended our school in Buenos Aires, and took with him -lessons, &c. to establish schools on his arrival in that place, for which -he sailed in May last. The lessons I have referred to I got printed in -Buenos Aires for our schools. They are selections from the Scriptures. -These lessons, now used in most of the schools, will greatly contribute, -I hope, to create a desire to possess the sacred volume, a book which has -hitherto been little known in this country. - -A Patagonian chief, called Cualli Piachepolon, in the very centre of -Patagonia, is in possession of one of your Testaments. This man has -been in the habit of visiting Buenos Aires for some years, in order to -exchange the few commodities which his country at present produces, for -those of Europe. He has hence acquired some knowledge of the Spanish -language. Upon hearing some passages of the New Testament read to him, he -requested to have the book, that he might, on his return, explain it to -his people. - -Some copies have been sent to Tucuman, to Salta, &c.; so that your -bounty is known, more or less throughout the provinces of the Rio de -la Plata; and I have no doubt but, some hundred years hence, the then -populous banks of that king of rivers, and the circumjacent country, will -gratefully remember the present Committee and Members of the British and -Foreign Bible Society. - -I close my account of Buenos Aires, for the present, by noticing, that -some individuals, upon obtaining the New Testament, and hearing of -your great and extended efforts in distributing the Holy Scriptures, -wondered how they had been taught that the English were not Christians. -When speaking on religion, it is common to use the word Christian and -Protestant in contradistinction to each other, meaning, by the former, -themselves or Roman Catholics in general, and by the latter, the English -or Protestants in general. - -A short time before I left the Rio de la Plata, I sent ten of the -Portuguese Bibles, and twenty New Testaments, to Bahia, in charge of a -person who, I think, would take care to see them safely lodged in that -place. I sent them to the care of the English Chaplain there. - -During the few days I stopped at Valparaiso, I met with a gentleman to -whom I had formerly intrusted twelve of the Spanish New Testaments. Upon -my enquiring about them, he told me they had been stolen out of his room. -Though this was to be regretted, yet one good effect would arise from it, -in as much as the person who stole them would no doubt take effectual -care to put them in circulation. - -In my letter of 26th February, I requested the Society to send me 200 -of Scio’s translation to Buenos Aires, and 300 to Valparaiso. I hope -these will respectively arrive in due time. I then noticed to you the -advantage that would arise from lettering them on the back, and varying -them in the binding. I particularly request your attention to this, as -I am sure it will contribute greatly to their sale. Let the binding be -in many cases elegant. They would thus be more expensive to the Society -at first, but they would be considerably less in the end. It is my -intention to _sell_ them in future, except when a favourable opportunity -occurs of giving the word of God to a person in real poverty. This I know -to be the uniform recommendation of the Society. I would beg leave to -suggest to you, that no Bibles or New Testaments be sent out in future -to Buenos Aires by the captains of ships. The captains, however well -intentioned they may be, cannot stay to distribute them. The Testaments, -in consequence, have not unfrequently come into hands who wish to get rid -of them in any way. By this means they become, as it were, of too little -consideration, and their _sale_ is thus also prevented, which no doubt -is the most effectual way of distributing them. In Buenos Aires several -persons objected to buying them, because they had formerly been got for -nothing. I shall, as I have said above, most readily act as your agent -in distributing the Scriptures in Buenos Aires, and in Chile. The most -judicious and effectual way of doing this is through the booksellers in -these places. Before leaving Buenos Aires I arranged for the continued -circulation of the New Testament, and here I shall make arrangements -to the same effect before I go. It is my intention to visit Peru before -long; and I shall there also, and indeed wherever I may be, zealously -endeavour to promote the good work in which you are engaged. - -In a few years South America will have large claims on your Society, but -she will pay you from her mines for all your kindness. Should the Lord -spare me ten or twenty years, I have no doubt I shall see wonderful and -blessed changes on this continent. It is my intention, through the grace -of our Lord Jesus Christ, to spend my life (long or short as it may be) -in South America; probably not in any fixed place, but residing from time -to time wherever I may most effectually promote the work of the Lord, in -establishing schools, in circulating the Scriptures, and in the use of -such other means as circumstances may direct. - -[1] Some letters towards the end will show, that this was too -unfavourable a conclusion, but it was the opinion I entertained from what -I had then seen of the country. - - * * * * * - - _Santiago de Chile, 1st Dec. 1821._ - -Before this reaches you, the taking of Lima by San Martin, will be known -in England. I need not expatiate upon this subject to you. You must see -at once how much our field is thereby extended. I may truly say, the fall -of Lima is as great a blow to the kingdom of Satan here, as it is to the -cause of Spain in South America. From what I have learned of San Martin, -I am sure he will prove a great forwarder of our cause there, and indeed -wherever he may be. The rejoicings here on account of the fall of Lima -have been very great, and they still continue. The fall of that strong -hold of the Spaniards, is at once the liberty of Peru, and the stability -of Chile; and I may add too, the independence of South America. - -We are about to form a School Society in this city, which I hope will be -attended with happy results. The Director condescends to be the Patron of -the Society, and his first minister is to be President. We are looking -around us for the most patriotic and liberal men of the city to form a -Committee. Our Society may not be able to do what a similar Society would -do in England; but it may, however, do something, and may considerably -forward our objects here on behalf of the inhabitants of Chile. Besides -the establishing and superintending of schools throughout the state, -there is another object to which the Society will greatly contribute, -I mean, the printing of some elementary works for the schools, and for -the children to read in their own houses. This is a part of our work, -which I consider of great importance, and to which I intend to turn a -considerable part of my time and attention, so soon as other matters will -allow. - -I believe I wrote you, before leaving Buenos Aires, that I had sent a -Master to Monte Video, or that I was about to send one. He had not left -Buenos Aires when I came away, as he was occupied in printing a grammar, -which he had written for the use of our schools. I have lately received -a letter from him, of which I shall give you an extract.—“On the 4th of -this month (July) I arrived in this city with the slates and lessons you -gave me for the schools here. On the following day, I presented myself to -Larañaga, (the chief ecclesiastic in Monte Video,) and he introduced me -to General Lecor, the Governor, to whom I gave your letter. I met with a -very hearty reception from the general, as also from Larañaga, and the -magistrates. On the 9th, we had assigned to us for a school-room, a large -hall in the Fort. This hall will hold 200 children. The general sent the -joiners and masons of the Government to prepare this school, and I am in -hopes we shall be able to open it in three weeks. I am making endeavours -to form a School Society here, which may take under its management -the schools of this city and province. I am in great expectation of -succeeding in this object, as the members of the Government are very well -disposed to it.” - -In the end of this month, I am thinking of crossing the Andes, to verify -my long intended visit to Mendoza. The printing of our lessons is nearly -finished, and I shall thus be enabled to take some with me for the -supply of that place. You will see by the extracts of letters I gave from -Mendoza, in my last letter to Mr. H. (Nov. 1st), that things there are -very promising. I hope my expectations regarding their improvements will -be more than realized. The snow still continues on the mountains, as I -am informed by a gentleman just come over them. I hope it will be nearly -all gone by the time I set out. It has continued, I understand, for an -unusual length of time this season. - -I shall leave the schools in my absence, under the care of an Englishman -lately come here from London. This gentleman was engaged by the agent -there of this Government, for the purpose of establishing Lancasterian -schools here. Upon his arrival, it was the intention of the Government to -send him to Conception. I thought, however, it would be better that he -should stay here to instruct the school-masters in grammar, geography, -&c., whilst they were studying the system in our school. To this proposal -the Government cheerfully agreed. We have in consequence a separate -class in the school, in which Mr. Eaton instructs the masters, and two -or three more who choose to attend. This arrangement will prove, I hope, -highly advantageous to the education of the country at large, as those, -who in future take charge of schools, will be better qualified for this -important office. - - * * * * * - - _Santiago de Chile, 30th Jan. 1822._ - -As I know you and your good friends of the British and Foreign School -Society take a deep interest in all things here relative to education, I -send you an extract from the Chile Gazette of the 19th current, by which -you will see that our endeavours to form a School Society here have not -been in vain. - - “The surest method of promoting the happiness of any country - is to make all the people in it well informed and industrious. - An end has at length been put to the obstacles which prevented - the natives of Chile from enjoying those blessings which are - enjoyed by other nations less favoured by nature, but who have - preceded us in the cultivation of literature and the arts. It - is hence necessary now to strain every nerve to regain that - time which in idleness and darkness has been thrown away. We - begin, then, by offering an opportunity of acquiring knowledge - to all classes of the community, without respect of rank or - fortune, of sex or age. - - “The Lancasterian system of mutual instruction, now introduced - in most parts of the civilized world, and to which many - places already owe an improvement in their habits, has been - established amongst us, and in such a manner as prognosticates - its beneficial effects. The propagation of this system holds - out the surest means of extirpating those principles formed - amongst us during the time of darkness. The government has - resolved zealously to protect this establishment, and, as - the best way of fulfilling its intention, has resolved to - unite with it in this object those persons who have the same - sentiments on the subject, and who, at the same time, possess - that activity, zeal, and energy, which this important matter - demands. In all places this system of instruction prospers and - extends itself under the fostering care of societies. This - circumstance at once determines me to follow the example thus - set before us, and immediately to establish a Society for this - object. Of this Society I shall be the protector and a member. - My first minister of state will be President. The Solicitor - General of the City, the Protector of the City Schools, and - the Rector of the National Institute, shall be _ex-officio_ - members of the Committee of Management. The other members of - the Committee will in future be chosen by the Society; but, for - the present, I nominate to this charge:— * * * * - - “The Committee will hold its meetings in the room belonging to - the Central School, on such days as shall be agreed on at the - first meeting, with no other formality than what is dictated - by good order. The Committee shall form rules for the Society, - and present them to the Government for approbation, and shall - name a Secretary, Accountant, and Treasurer, either from their - own number or otherwise. The object of this Institution is - to extend, in every direction throughout Chile, the benefits - of education; to promote the instruction of all classes, but - especially of the poor; to seize all the advantages which - this new system of education offers; and to point out those - means by which it may be best adapted to the circumstances - and necessities of the country. In short, this Institution - will be considered a good of the greatest magnitude, and whose - efficacies will, we trust, in some measure correspond to that - great extension of which it is susceptible. - - (Signed) - - “O’HIGGINS.” - -I trust this Society, which has thus been formed, will be extremely -useful in forwarding the great concerns of general education in this -rising nation. There are many circumstances here very encouraging in -regard to the future prospects and prosperity of Chile. It is probable -our Society will communicate with you before long, by way of claiming -alliance with you in the grand work of universal instruction. - - * * * * * - - _Santiago de Chile, 9th May, 1822._ - -You have heard, I dare say, that I left Buenos Aires some time ago, and -came to Chile. I have now been here ten months, and am much pleased with -this country. In as far as respects the climate, I believe no country -can be more desirable to live in than this. It rains a good deal in the -winter season, that is, from June to September inclusive. Frost and -snow are seldom or never seen in the plains; notwithstanding, a fire is -very desirable in the winter. The highest ridge of the Andes is full -in sight from this city. This is covered with snow all the year round. -When it rains here below, it uniformly snows on the mountains. In the -summer season, we have no rain at all, and very few cloudy days. The -common course of the seasons is four months of occasional rains, and -eight months of fair weather. In the summer it is pretty hot during the -day; but it is always very comfortable at night. In Buenos Aires, on -the contrary, the nights, during the summer, are generally very warm. -In another respect also, Buenos Aires differs very remarkably from this -country. There, not a mountain, nor a hill, nor a rock is to be seen; -here, all those abound. The natives of Buenos Aires, who have never -been from home, have no idea of what a mountain is like;[2] and of snow -they are equally ignorant, having never seen the one or the other. They -would also be ignorant of what a stone is, were it not that some have -been brought from the other side of the river, for paving the streets. -After what I have said of the scarcity of stones, you may judge of the -correctness of a very modern work on South America, in which it is said, -“All the houses in Buenos Aires are built of a fine white stone, found -in quarries in the neighbourhood.” There is not, in Buenos Aires, a -single house built of stone, nor is there any quarry on that side of the -river within 100 miles of Buenos Aires. The houses there are all built -of brick. The mentioning of this last, brings me back again to Chile. -All the houses here, or nearly all, are built of _unburnt_ brick, such -bricks as the Israelites made in Egypt; they are made of earth mixed with -straw. It is said, this material for building suits the country best, on -account of earthquakes, which are not unfrequent. Last night, just about -this hour, (eight o’clock) we had a smart shock. I was sitting writing, -when my attention was called by a rumbling noise, and a clattering of -the window shutters. In a few seconds, the whole house shook, and the -creaking of the beams and joists was very distinct. The noise continued -for a few seconds after the shock, when all ceased. This is now the -fourth earthquake we have had in less than a week. They prevail most, I -am told, in this month. - -We have now got our schools set on foot in this place, and I am thinking -of going to Lima in the course of a month or less, in order to prosecute -my objects there. According to the best information, the new state of -things in that country goes on wonderfully. Many reforms are taking -place of a very salutary nature. Gaming, which is carried on to a very -hurtful extent in all South America, has just been prohibited in Lima, by -the Government. Acts have passed for the gradual abolition of slavery. -Since the taking of Lima, all the children of slaves are born free. -The importation of slaves is entirely prohibited, and no infringement -of the Act takes place. The same state of things subsists here and in -Buenos Aires, regarding this shameful business. There is in South America -generally, I believe, a great desire for the increase of knowledge. I -can bear witness, that this is the case, in those parts I have been -in; and I doubt not of finding it so in Lima also. I am told, that -learning has prevailed there more than in places to the south of it, on -this continent. There are several men there, I am informed, who stand -tolerably high in literature. About three months ago, a literary society -was formed in Lima. I have sent a translation of the Act incorporating -the Society to Professor Jameson, of Edinburgh, and it may perhaps appear -in the Edinburgh Philosophical Journal. - -The fall of Lima decided, I think, the contest between Spain and her -colonies, fairly establishing the independence of the latter. If any -thing, however, was wanting to complete this state of things, it has now -been accomplished by the late occurrences in Mexico. The immediate and -solid advantages occurring from this independence, to the cause of our -fellow-men in this continent, are very great. Knowledge is now tolerated -in the country, and also patronized. A war of extermination has been -declared against ignorance, and is actually waged. Soon after San Martin -entered Lima, a provisional law was issued, until a new code should be -formed for the country. In this provisional law, religious toleration is -publicly acknowledged, for the first time, in South America. - -A most wonderful change has taken place in Buenos Aires since I left -it. War, anarchy, and confusion, have given place to a steady, firm, -and enlightened government. The principal cause of this happy change is -the present minister of state, Rivadavia. He arrived in Buenos Aires -a short time before I left it. For some years past he has resided in -London and in Paris; and the time he has spent in these places has been -well employed. He has there studied and is now practising the soundest -principles of political economy. If Buenos Aires goes on for a few years -as it has done for some months past, it will afford excellent lessons in -this interesting science to the nations of Europe, perhaps to the country -of Adam Smith. A fine emulation will be carried on, and is already -begun, between Buenos Aires and Lima. If an improvement is proposed in -one of these places, it is deemed sufficient to silence popular and low -prejudice, to publish that such a thing has already been done in the -other. As to the Chilians, they are, generally speaking, less enlightened -and more indifferent in respect to these subjects. Our Director is a -good man, truly desirous of the progress of Chile in every thing useful. -He has, however, but little activity or zeal. It is pleasing to see, -under these circumstances, the good effects produced on us here, by the -newspapers of Lima on the one hand, and of Buenos Aires on the other. -From these many articles are copied into our public journals; and some -things are already begun among us, in imitation of our friends in the -north and on the east. I lately crossed and recrossed the Andes on a -visit to Mendoza and San Juan. The cause of knowledge and of truth goes -on there also. In each of these places there is a printing-press, and -from these are likely to issue soon, many things which will contribute to -the general good. - -[2] The river La Plata, opposite Buenos Aires, is thirty miles wide, and -at times, under a very favourable state of the atmosphere, a dim outline -of the low mountains on the northern side is visible. To this extent the -Buenos Aireans know what a mountain is. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 11th July, 1822._ - -Through the unceasing goodness of God towards me, I have now arrived -safely in this city. On the 18th of last month I sailed from Valparaiso, -and after a pleasant passage of ten days we cast anchor in Callao Bay. -Callao is an excellent harbour, the best I have yet seen. It will hold -almost any number of ships riding in great safety. It is well defended -from all winds except the north, but it scarcely ever blows from that -quarter. In consequence of an order from the Government that no -passengers should be allowed to land until they receive a licence or -passport from Lima, I had to defer my coming here till the day after our -arrival; I got permission, however, from the captain of the port to go -on shore. After viewing Callao, I went to take a view of the place where -the former Callao stood, which was destroyed by the earthquake, of which -of course you have read. Its site is about half a mile from where the -present town stands. The destruction seems to have been complete. Not a -house is now standing; but walls of houses of considerable thickness are -to be seen scattered all over the place. Some of these are lying _flat_, -and others are half turned over. How weak is man, and all his works, when -God arises to shake the earth! - -On the day on which I arrived in this city, I called on San Martin, -and delivered him the letters of introduction which I had brought from -Chile. He opened one of the letters, and observing its purport, said “Mr. -Thomson! I am extremely glad to see you;” and he rose up, and gave me a -very hearty embrace. He would not, he said, be lavish in compliments, -but would assure me of his great satisfaction at my arrival; and said, -that nothing should be wanting on his part to further the object which -had brought me to Peru. Next day as I was sitting in my room, a carriage -stopped at the door, and my little boy came running in crying, San -Martin! San Martin! In a moment he entered the room, accompanied by one -of his ministers. I would have had him step into another apartment of -the house more suited to his reception; but he said the room was very -well, and sat down on the first chair he reached. We conversed about -our schools, and other similar objects for some time; and in going away -he desired me to call on him next morning, and said he would introduce -me to the Marquis of Truxillo, who is at present what is called the -Supreme Deputy or Regent. I called on him accordingly next morning, and -he took me with him and introduced me to the Marquis, and to each of the -ministers. - -From all the members of the government I have received great -encouragement. On the 6th current an order was issued relative to our -schools, and published in the Lima Gazette of the same date. I am going -to write Mr. Millar to-morrow, and shall give him a translation of this -order or decree, a copy of which will of course be sent you. By this -order one of the convents is appropriated to the schools, and is now in -our possession. I believe the convents here will decrease in number as -the schools multiply. There is no contest or balancing of powers between -the civil and ecclesiastical powers in this place. The former has the -latter entirely at their nod. The case in regard to this convent is a -proof of what I have said. The order for the friars to remove was given -on Saturday, on Monday they began to remove, and on Tuesday the keys -were delivered up. - -From all I have seen during the short time I have been here, I cannot -doubt of the great benefits which this country will derive from the new -state of things. San Martin and his first minister, (and also the others) -seem truly anxious to characterize the times by improvements—by solid -improvements. They wish to encourage foreigners, and to improve the state -of the country in every point of view. I have already mentioned to you my -representation made to the Chilian government just before leaving that -place, regarding the bringing out of tradesmen and farmers. I showed a -copy of this representation to San Martin; he read it very carefully -over, and concluded by saying, “Excellent!” He then told me what was his -opinion on the subject, and proposed a plan for carrying it into effect, -much more likely to succeed than the one I had stated. I am to draw up -this plan in order, and to present it to him, that it may be sanctioned -and carried into effect. I therefore consider this matter, so far as -regards Peru, as fairly begun. The particulars of the plan I may send you -afterwards. In the mean time, that you may see that in these matters I am -not losing sight of my chief object, I shall mention to you one sentence -of the representation referred to. It is this, “The men who will be most -useful to South America, are men truly religious and of sound morality.” -The minister of Chile, upon reading this sentence, said, “That is very -true;” and San Martin expressed himself in a similar manner upon my -stating the same thing to him. - -What an immeasurable field is South America; and how white it is to -the harvest! I have told you this repeatedly, but I have a pleasure in -telling it to you again. I do think that, since the world began, there -never was so fine a field for the exercise of benevolence in all its -parts. The man of science, the moralist, the christian, have all fine -scope here for their talents. God, who has opened such a door, will -surely provide labourers. - -My present intention is to continue here about six months, and then to -move on northwards. I may, however, be kept longer here than I intend, -but I am anxious to get to England as soon as possible. My stay here -will depend much on the facility or difficulty of obtaining good masters -for the school. This I find, from experience, a matter of so great -importance, that I intend to pay every attention to it; and I have it now -in my power more than ever to do so, having represented to the government -the necessity of encouragement, by offering employment and a good salary -to those who thoroughly study the system, and are able to put it in -practice; and this encouragement I am authorised to give. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 12th July, 1822._ - -My last letter to you was written a few days before my leaving Chile. I -then apprized you of the state of things there at that time, and of my -intention of setting out for this place. Through the blessing of God, I -arrived safely in this country on the 28th of last month, and have now to -state to you how things look here, in reference to that truly important -object—EDUCATION. - -I believe I told you, some time ago, that from various circumstances I -expected every encouragement would be given to our object here by San -Martin. I have not been disappointed in this. My expectations have all -been fulfilled, and more than fulfilled. San Martin is most _decidedly_ a -friend to general, to universal education. I hope none of the members of -the Committee of the British and Foreign School Society will be offended, -but rather gratified, when I say, that they are not more friendly to -this object than San Martin. Because I have come to Peru to promote this -object, I have received from him every mark of respect and personal -attention, as well as every encouragement to proceed in this work. The -Marquis of Truxillo, and each of the ministers of government, feel deeply -interested in the same object. Blessed be God for this encouragement. In -his hand are the hearts of all, and he inclineth them to whatsoever he -will. Surely the days draw nigh, when ignorance shall be ashamed to walk -about any where in open day. May the glorious war now waged against her -be a war of extermination. It will I trust be so, and when this enemy -of mankind shall be slain, the British and Foreign School Society shall -be clothed with her spoils, and be crowned with never fading laurel. Is -it wrong to indulge pleasing prospects of the future amelioration of -mankind? Is it sinful to cherish the hope of better times for this poor -unfortunate world? I think it is not. If it is right to pray “Thy will -be done on earth, as it is done in heaven,” it cannot be wrong to expect -that this prayer, daily reiterated from the mouth of thousands, will one -day be heard, and be answered in all its extent; and when the will of God -is done in this world, as it is done above, then shall the felicity on -earth resemble the felicity of heaven. - -The following is a translation of a decree of this government relative -to the Schools, and which was published in the Lima Gazette of the 6th -current. - -“Preamble.—Without education there is properly speaking no society. Men -may indeed live together without it, but they cannot know the extent of -the duties, and the rights which bind them one to another, and it is in -the right knowledge of these duties and rights that the well being of -society consists. The bringing of education to any degree of perfection, -is, from the nature of the thing, slow. To accomplish it, time is -required, and some degree of stability in the government, as well as some -other circumstances, both natural and moral. All these must combine, in -order that the education of the people may become general, and that thus -a foundation may be laid for the continuance of those Institutions which -may be established among them. Of the various improvements which the -government has been desirous of making, none has been more earnestly and -constantly kept in view since the moment of its commencement, than the -reformation of public education. In those intervals of tranquillity which -have been enjoyed from the clamour of arms, this object has occupied -their attention; and though the sun has not stood still, they have found -in activity the secret of doubling the length of the day. - -“It has already been announced, in various decrees of the government, -that the introduction of the Lancasterian system in the public schools, -was one of the plans in meditation. It is not yet possible to calculate -the revolution which will be produced in the world by this system of -mutual instruction, on its becoming general throughout the civilized -world. When this shall take place, ignorance shall come to an end, or at -least shall be reduced to certain limits, beyond which it shall never be -allowed to pass. The time is now arrived for setting this system agoing -in this place, and the commencing of it is worthy of the month of July—a -month in which posterity will record many events of importance; and we -trust they will do us the justice to declare, that we have desired to -make this time memorable by deeds which philosophy applauds, and which -spring from the noblest principles of all human actions, namely, the love -of glory, founded on promoting the prosperity and happiness of mankind. -The above are the reasons on which the following decree is founded. - - “The Supreme Deputy, with the advice of the Privy Council, - decrees— - - “1. There shall be established a central or principal school, - according to the Lancasterian system, under the direction of - Mr. Thomson. - - “2. The convent or college of St. Thomas shall be appropriated - to this purpose. The friars at present residing in it shall - remove to the large convent of St. Dominic, leaving only so - many as are necessary for the service of the church attached to - it. - - “3. In this establishment the elementary parts of education - shall be taught, together with the modern languages. The - teachers necessary for this purpose shall be appointed - agreeably to the arrangements which will be pointed out in the - plan for the National Institute of Peru. - - “4. At the expiration of six months all the public schools - shall be shut, which are not conducted according to the system - of mutual instruction. - - “5. All the masters of the public schools shall attend the - central school with two of their most advanced pupils, in order - to be instructed in the new system; and in studying it they - shall attend to the method prescribed by the director of the - establishment. - - “6. As soon as the director of the central school shall have - instructed a sufficient number of teachers, these shall be - employed, with competent salaries, in establishing public - schools on the same principles in the capital city of each - province of the state. - - “7. At the first public examination which shall take place in - the central school, those masters who have been most attentive - in learning the system, and shall have made such progress as to - be able to conduct schools according to it, shall receive the - reward of a gold medal, to be ordered for that purpose by the - Minister of State. - - “8. For the preservation and extension of the new system - the Patriotic Society of Lima is particularly requested and - commissioned to take such measures as may be considered - necessary for these purposes; and they are desired to make - known to the government those things in which its co-operation - may be required, in order effectually to carry forward this - important object. - - “9. In order that the advantages of this system of education - may be extended to the female sex, which the Spanish government - has always treated with culpable neglect, it is particularly - recommended to the Patriotic Society to take into consideration - the most likely means for establishing a central school for the - instruction of girls. - - “10. The salary of the director, and the other expenses - necessary for this establishment, shall be defrayed by the - government. The Minister of State is authorized to issue all - the orders necessary for the punctual fulfilment of this decree. - - “Given in the government palace in Lima, 6th July, 1822. - - (Signed) - - “TRUXILLO. - - “By order of his Excellency, countersigned, - - “B. MONTEAGUDO.” - -As we go on in our operations, I shall communicate to you the result. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 4th September, 1822._ - -The _first_ of September has returned, and has gone by. I have not, -however, failed in seizing an opportunity of writing you according to -our agreement. You know, I dare say, that we have not a post that leaves -Lima every morning for England. A vessel goes now and then from Callao -to Valparaiso, and through these two places, and across the Andes, and -through Buenos Aires, my letters to you are now obliged to travel. No -vessel has sailed for Chile since the 1st current; but in a few days the -French frigate lying here is to sail for Valparaiso. - -I have now been upwards of two months in this city, and have all the -while enjoyed my health very well. I am inclined to think this climate -is better than I was led to expect from the accounts I had heard of -it. The tertian ague, however, is a disease very common, especially -during summer. Of the Englishmen I know here, three have had it since my -arrival. The general opinion, I think, is, that with great regularity -of living, this place is not unhealthy; but that the effects of -irregularity in the general mode of living, is more hurtful here than -in most other places. A good police would certainly contribute greatly -to the healthiness of this city. This will be enjoyed, I believe, in -due time; but the Government has so many things at present to do, that -some time may elapse before that improvement takes place. This is the -largest city I have yet seen in South America, and I believe there is -none larger in it. I do not, of course, include Mexico, which is in -North America. The houses here, and the general appearance of the city, -have a more commanding and richer aspect than what is met with in Buenos -Aires or Santiago de Chile. The general appearance of the population, -however, I think, is considerably inferior to what is seen in these two -places, particularly in the latter. One thing which contributes to this -difference, is the considerable proportion of slaves here. In Buenos -Aires, there are a good many of this class of our fellow-men, but fewer -than in Lima and Santiago; and in Chile, in general, there are very few; -and this is one thing which inclines me to prefer the general appearance -of Santiago to the other two cities I have mentioned. - -About three weeks after my arrival here, San Martin set out for Quito, to -have an interview with Bolivar. They met in Guayaquil, as the President -of Colombia had left Quito, and reached that place before San Martin -landed. The interview was, I dare say, interesting, and I trust it will -be productive of good effects for the two countries of which they are the -Governors, and also for South America in general. A good understanding, -I trust, will be kept up between the nations of this continent, and war -in it I hope will be a thing as rare, and rarer than peace has been in -Europe. San Martin returned a few days ago, and has since re-assumed -the reins of Government, as “Protector of the liberty of Peru.” Every -exertion is making here for the formation of a congress. The greater part -of the representatives are already elected. All the liberated provinces -elect their own members for congress freely; the right of voting is, -I believe, much the same as in the United States. Representatives are -chosen for those provinces still under the dominion of the Spanish -army, from among the inhabitants of those places at present residing -in Lima. A fair representation seems to be desired and sought for, and -I hope will be attained in a considerable degree. All acts emanating -from such a body will, of course, give more general satisfaction, than -if the representation were partial. I do not trouble you with my views -of governments, whether monarchical or republican. Certainly, on this -subject, “much may be said on both sides.” Without fixing my mind for or -against this or that form of government, I am strongly in the opinion of -Pope, where he says, “Whate’er is best administered is best.” I do not -think, however, that all are fools, (as he insinuates) who, “for forms -of government contest.” The sum of the matter and the truth is, that -honesty and uprightness are more required, and have been less found in -all governments than any thing else. Wisdom, therefore, requires, that -such measures should be taken in arranging the form of government, as may -secure good conduct in governors, in the greatest possible degree. - -There were some suspicions, some time ago, and some flying words, which, -if true, would have led one to suppose that San Martin wished to form -Peru into a monarchy. Who was to be king according to these reports, -I need not inform you, as I suppose you will find no difficulty in -guessing it at the first trial. The prime minister was of course in -the secret, if there was any such thing in hand. With this individual, -on other grounds, there was a good deal of dissatisfaction. This -dissatisfaction openly broke out a few weeks ago, on account of his -interfering in the election of representatives for this city. The -consequence was, that a petition was presented to the Marquis of -Truxillo, requesting that the minister might be immediately dismissed. -This petition was signed by so many of the respectable and powerful -inhabitants of the place, and presented with such firmness, that it had -the desired effect. The minister resigned before the petitioners left -the palace, and in a few days after, he was sent off by sea to Panama. -All this took place in San Martin’s absence, and the leaders in it were -the republican party. San Martin has very wisely fallen in with these -measures since his return, and has confirmed the new minister in his -situation. A republic, I think, is the general wish of the people, and as -the form of government is to be determined by the Congress, I have little -doubt of what the result will be. - -You know, I dare say, that Colombia is free. The longest and severest -struggle of South America has been in that quarter. The first news -I heard on casting anchor in Callao, was that Quito had fallen into -the hands of the patriots. I think Bolivar, who has been the chief -instrument in the Colombian contest, is a great man. I was not at the -interview between him and San Martin, that I might take their comparative -dimensions at one view; but I may observe, that the general opinion, from -a view of the operations of both, is in favour of the Northern Chief. As -far as my own information and knowledge of each extends, I fall in with -this opinion. I do so, not from any dissatisfaction with San Martin. He -is to me, and has been uniformly, more than I could have expected, and I -may say, all I could wish. I believe both of these men are most sincerely -desirous of the real welfare of the countries which they respectively -govern, and of South America. There is no unholy alliance yet formed -in this country, and I think there never will. On all hands, light and -information are encouraged, sought after, and promoted. Knowledge, rich -with the spoils of time, has just unrolled her ample page in this city, -in a public library. This public institution is very respectably got up, -and already possesses a number of the best works in the various branches -of literature. It is inferior to the similar institution in Buenos -Aires; but superior, if we consider the short reign of civil, literary, -and religious freedom in Peru. Every individual is free to attend this -library every week-day, from 8 to 1, and from 4 to 6, without expense; -and every book in it is at his command during that time. This one view -of the present state of things here, shows at once the immense advantages -gained here by the revolution, and the blessings that tread in the steps -of liberty. I shall add one thing more to confirm what I have just said. -The Bible is now publicly sold at a short distance from the place where -used to sit the dreadful Inquisition. Perish all unrighteousness from the -earth! May the knowledge and love of God every where abound! - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 9th Nov. 1822._ - -A considerable time has now elapsed since I last wrote you, and a much -longer time has intervened since I had the pleasure of receiving a letter -from you. Although I have not communicated with you directly during this -time, yet I suppose you are well acquainted with my various circumstances -in this part of the world, through means of my letters sent from time to -time to my friends in Edinburgh. Since my leaving my native country, I -have experienced much of the gracious goodness of our heavenly Father, -in directing my steps, in making darkness light before me, and crooked -things straight. The encouragements I have met with in my endeavours to -forward the Lord’s cause in South America, have been much greater than -could have been expected before the trial was made. I think a door has -been opened here which will never be shut, but which will, I trust, -from one year to another, open wider and wider, until it become, in the -Apostle’s language, “great and effectual.” Should I say, there are no -adversaries, and that all goes on prosperously, without any difficulty or -discouragement from any quarter,—should I say this, it would be nearly -the same as telling you, that a great miracle had taken place here, and -had changed the nature of man. You, of course, expect no such wonderful -accounts. At the same time, it is a gratifying thing to be able to -state, that far less opposition has been met with than was expected. -Difficulties, I believe, of whatever kind, will grow fewer and weaker as -Time runs on, bearing in his hand the torch of heavenly light; whilst, -on the other hand, means and opportunities of doing good will greatly -increase. It is surely a gratifying sight to see darkness fleeing away, -and the light of heaven breaking forth. You know there is no fellowship, -in any sense, between light and darkness, the one must give place to the -other. Wherever, then, darkness prevails, let the people of God look to -him who said, “Let there be light, and there was light;” and let them -use those means which he has appointed, under the full assurance, that -midnight shall give place to the dawning light, and that again to noon -day. That a great and happy change is about to take place in our hitherto -unfortunate, unhappy world, the Scriptures predict; and the days in -which we live say, “Lift up your heads, for this happy period draweth -nigh.” You who live in the land of Israel, whence the word of the Lord -is sounding out on all sides, see these things better than I can do in -this far distant country. From every corner of the earth messengers -are daily landing on your happy shores with tidings of joy. One says, -Babylon is fallen; another cries, the gods of the heathen are famished; -whilst a third shouts aloud, Satan falls like lightning to the ground. I -almost envy this felicity of yours; yet I would not exchange conditions -with you. Solitary and alone as I am here, I would not wish myself -elsewhere, because I believe I am placed where God would have me to be; -and, I trust, his work, in one shape or another, is all my concern. I do, -however, wish myself otherwise circumstanced. I should be glad to have -with me one or more with whom I could always communicate in the ways and -work of the Lord, and whose counsels and labours might prove a blessing -to me and to many. You, my dear brother, who dwell in Mount Zion, have -never experienced the disadvantage of being _thus_ alone. Should I come -into your thoughts when you bow your knees unto the God and Father of our -Lord Jesus Christ, I beg you to pray that grace, and mercy, and peace may -be multiplied unto me, and that the Lord’s work may prosper in South -America. - -In my letters to Edinburgh since my arrival in this city, I have stated -the favourable reception I met with here from San Martin, and from -others in the government. Since that time, the state of affairs here, in -regard to politics, has considerably changed. San Martin has resigned -his authority in all its parts in this country, and is gone to Chile. -The Congress was installed on the 20th September, into whose hands he -delivered all the concerns of the government, and next morning, at four -o’clock, he set off for Chile. When he took the reins of government into -his own hands, under the title of “Protector of the Liberty of Peru,” -he promised to resign his authority as soon as a general Congress could -be assembled; and by his resignation at the time proposed, he justified -his sincerity in the eyes of the world. During the time he was in power, -reports were current that he was desirous to make himself king of -Peru. His conduct, however, has shown, that these reports were without -foundation. As far as my own affairs here are concerned, I should have -been glad that he had remained longer in the country, and, if I am not -mistaken, Peru would have been benefited by his stay. San Martin is an -intelligent and liberal-minded man. He is very desirous of promoting -the progress of South America in knowledge, and he is free from those -prejudices which hinder its advancement. The Congress has now been -assembled for several weeks, and has been occupied with various concerns -relative to the government of the country. From their own number they -have chosen three to discharge the duties of the executive government. -This triumvirate is to continue until a constitution be drawn up, and -a new Congress assembled, composed of representatives chosen in every -province of Peru. This complete representation of the country cannot -be obtained whilst the Spaniards are in possession of a considerable -part of it, as they actually are at this moment. At present there is -great distress felt here by the government, for want of money to carry -forward the operations of the war. This appears to be the chief obstacle -in preventing the general independence of Peru. Troops are not wanting, -as, in addition to those brought by San Martin, and those who have -since been raised in the country, General Bolivar has sent about 2,000 -well-experienced troops from Quito, as affairs in that part have now been -brought to a favourable conclusion. The English merchants here have just -given the government a loan of 70,000 dollars, by way of helping them out -of their difficulties. An expedition sailed some weeks ago for Arica, -and we anxiously look for the result. All that part of the country is in -possession of the Spaniards, as well as nearly all the best provinces -of the kingdom. Notwithstanding the possessions which Spain still -holds in Peru, the independence of the country is not at all doubtful. -It may, indeed, by the mismanagement of the Congress, or by some other -misfortune, be retarded, but it must ere long completely prevail. I -believe there are no remains of the Spanish arms now existing in America, -except those in our neighbourhood, and about 1500 men in the isles of -Chiloe. What a change, in this respect, has taken place within these few -years past! And let not this revolution be considered as a small matter -by the man of benevolence and the Christian. The interests of religion -and of humanity are very closely connected with it. That once dreadful, -now innoxious house, the Inquisition, reminds me, as I daily pass it, of -the happy change which has taken place. True it is, that the Spaniards -have now put down the Inquisition throughout their dominions; still, -however, there are many inquisitorial things yet subsisting in Spain that -do not exist in the independent states of South America. Every effort has -been used by Spain to retard the progress of knowledge in America. These -days, however, have now gone by, and light of every kind begins to dawn -on these countries. My own opinion is, that the nations of South America -in a few years will far outstrip many of the nations of Europe. The -people here, to a certain extent, are conscious of their ignorance, and -are desirous of wiping out that stain which Spain has left upon them. - -I have hitherto been speaking of the progress of knowledge in general -in South America, and its probable results. I shall now say something -of the progress making in the knowledge of religion. You know, of -course, that the Roman Catholic religion is the only religion professed -in this Continent—as it once was the only one in Great Britain. -Many are beginning to see through this system, and to find out its -inconsistencies. I wish I could also say, that all who see thus far, -have attained to the knowledge of the true religion, as laid down in -the New Testament. This, however, is not the case. On the contrary, I -am sorry to say, that deistical principles are espoused by the greater -part of those who get out of the trammels of popery. A good many in the -higher ranks, particularly in the army, are of this way of thinking. This -state of things need not surprise us. It is perhaps the natural result, -or transition, in those places where no other religion is known than -the one professed in this country. A man begins to see the absurdity -of the Catholic system, and from his infancy all that is religion with -him has been connected with it. In giving up this system, he gives up -with religion itself, as considering popery and it the same thing. -From these circumstances, I conceive this to be the most favourable -time for introducing, as far as can be done, the holy religion of -our Lord Jesus Christ. The present is the time for labouring in this -field, by introducing the Scriptures, and by every other means which -prudence may dictate. Prejudice is growing less every day, and this is -the result of the revolution. There is even a perceptible difference -between the different parts of this Continent in regard to the decrease -of prejudice. In Chile there is less than in Lima, because it has been -longer independent. Again, there is still less in Buenos Aires than in -Chile, for the same reason. Having mentioned Buenos Aires, I cannot -leave it without eulogizing it, in almost the highest degree, in regard -to the progress it is making. One reform succeeds another in rapid -succession. They are just about to put a stop to monachism, and to take -the church property into their own hands, paying the clergy out of the -public treasury. It is said also, that they are about to pass a law -for religious toleration. In every respect Buenos Aires now holds the -first rank among the cities and countries of South America. To have -one place thus stepping forward by way of pattern to the rest is of -immense advantage. There are several periodical works of a superior kind -issuing from the presses in that city. In these every subject is freely -discussed, prejudices attacked, and reforms proposed. The liberty of the -press is enjoyed and acted upon there in the same manner as it is in -England. The articles published in the Buenos Aires papers and magazines -find their way gradually into the papers of Chile and Peru, and thus -prepare the way in these places also for following up, ere long, the -same reforms and arrangements that are now going forward in the pattern -city I have mentioned. In this city, also, the liberty of the press is -enjoyed to a considerable extent. This, however, only commenced about two -or three months ago, upon the dethronement of the principal Secretary of -State. This individual, though a great friend to reform himself, and from -whom I met with every encouragement, wished to keep these things in his -own hand, at least for some time, and to grant the freedom of the press -by degrees. The plan of ecclesiastical reform published in Buenos Aires -was also published in the public paper of this city. Various other things -of a similar nature are thus indirectly brought under the consideration -of the people of Peru; and coming from Buenos Aires, they are better -received than they would be, coming from any part of Europe, especially -from a Protestant country. We had also an attack upon the friars of Lima -the other day, in one of the publications of this city, whose editor is -one of the Secretaries of Congress. These things you will consider as the -fruits of the revolution in South America; and the time fast approaches, -when we shall see still more abundant fruits, and those too of the best -kind. The Lord reigneth, let the earth be glad! - -With respect to the climate of this place, you know, we are here fairly -within the torrid zone, the latitude of this city being 12° 2′ 51″ S. -A few days ago we had the sun vertical here, as he passed us on his -way to the southward. Notwithstanding our proximity to the equator, we -enjoy a very agreeable temperature. In the winter the sun but seldom -makes his appearance; in spring he shows himself more frequently; and in -summer he throws off reserve, and from his vertical throne looks down in -all his magnificence. From ten o’clock till two, it is pretty hot, but -about this hour a refreshing breeze springs up from the south, which is -very agreeable. It is generally said, that it never rains in Lima. This, -however, is not quite correct. It does rain a very little in the winter -season; but the drops, when they can be recognised as such, seem to have -passed through the finest rain sieve. It is, in short, rather a kind of -mist than rain, although at times it may be called by the latter name; -and when it is so, the people of Lima call it a heavy shower. Before I -came here I frequently heard this climate denominated unhealthy. The -tertian ague prevails a good deal, but on the whole I do not consider -this an unhealthy place. For my own part, I never enjoyed better health -than I have done since my coming to this city. Blessed be God for this -precious blessing!—There is one thing of a rather terrifying nature to -which this place is subject, I mean earthquakes. There is no place, I -suppose, more subject to them than this city. We have had several shocks -since I came to it; the greatest was on the 14th September. I was awaked -at a quarter past three o’clock in the morning by a _most dreadful_ -noise. I was at no loss to know what this noise was, considering the -part of the world I was in. This noise continued for a few seconds, and -increased. The shock then followed, and made all the house shake, as if -the whole were coming to the ground. A loud hollow noise followed this -for a few seconds, and on its ceasing all was tranquil as before it -commenced, and those who had fled out of their houses quietly returned. -These phenomena are of frequent occurrence. There are, I believe, about -thirty earthquakes here in the course of a year. Those, however, which -throw down houses and produce other ravages are rare. Once in fifty years -seems to be about the period of those terrible visitations, and with -considerable regularity Lima has suffered severely at the return of this -fatal period. The city of Quito to the north, and of Arequipa to the -south, have also their periodical visitations. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 2d December, 1822._ - -Some weeks ago a Committee of the Congress was entrusted to draw up -the _outlines_ of a political constitution for the country. This has -been accomplished, has been presented to Congress, and ordered to be -printed. The Congress is just now engaged in discussing it, article by -article. A good deal of interest is thus excited and kept up regarding -the subject, and, in consequence, the Congress-hall is daily well -attended by all classes. The discussion of the article on the form of -government, and that on religion, have excited the most attention. The -form of government has been unanimously declared to be republican, -agreeably to what I hinted to you in one of my late letters.—In “the -outlines,” the article on religion runs thus: “The religion of the state -is the Catholic Apostolic Church of Rome.” One of the members of the -committee wished to add the word _only_ or _exclusive_, but the rest not -agreeing to it, he entered his protest. On this account, as well as from -the general interest of the subject, the matter was keenly discussed. -I went, as you may well suppose, to hear what should be said on both -sides, and to see the result. The first who ascended the tribune to speak -was a clergyman, carrying in his hand a book about the size of a New -Testament. He began by stating, that it was his sincere desire that all -men might be of the Roman Catholic church. He then stated that the only -proper way, in his opinion, of bringing men into the church was, not by -force, nor by persecution in any shape, but solely by persuasion, by the -force of reason. After speaking a few minutes to this effect, he went -on to treat of the article as stated in the “outlines.” He regretted -the divisions among Christians, and the distinctive names one body and -another had taken. He then opened the book he had in his hand, which I -now found to be one of the Bible Society’s New Testaments, in Spanish. -He read the 12th and 13th verses of the first chapter of the first -Epistle to the Corinthians, and proceeded to make some remarks upon the -passage, and to apply it to the article in question. It appeared to -him, he said, very like the divisions censured by the Apostle Paul, to -see the article stated in the words, _Roman_, _Catholic_, _Apostolic_. -Having done this, he proposed that the article should be stated in this -manner:—“The religion of Jesus Christ, is the religion of the state.” -He then made some observations upon the propriety of stating it in this -way, in preference to the way in which it stands in the outlines, and -so concluded. As might have been expected, this alteration or amendment -was opposed. My memory is not so faithful as to give you the various -speeches upon the subject, but a great deal was said on both sides of the -question. In particular, the member of the Committee who had protested, -defended what he had done in a long speech, in which he paid but little -respect and fewer compliments to us foreigners. He concluded his long -story by saying, that he was so full of matter upon this subject, and -felt so much interest in it, that he could still speak four whole days -upon it. Another speaker got up with a volume of the Bible in his hand. -He turned to two passages in the law of Moses, where the children of -Israel were admonished to deal kindly towards strangers and foreigners, -and concluded by a short comment upon the passages in reference to the -subject in hand. In a country like this, where all the natives are of -the Roman Catholic Church, every thing that is said upon toleration has -a direct reference to foreigners, for it is never for a moment supposed -that any of the natives will leave the Roman Catholic Church to become -Protestants. The introduction of foreigners into the country, and the -consequent advantages and disadvantages of it, entered deeply into the -debate. I shall refer only to one speech more upon the subject. An -aged member, and a clergyman, rose up and said, “Gentlemen, this is -the first time I have risen to speak in this house, and it is not my -intention to detain you long. I understand,” said he, “that the grand -and principal features of our religion are these two:—To love the Lord -with all our heart and strength, and to love our neighbour as ourselves. -We must then take care,” continued he, “that our zeal for the _first_ -of these two commandments does not make us overlook the _second_. Now -I ask, whether foreigners residing among us are to be considered our -neighbours or not. If they are, then we ought to love them. Gentlemen, -I have nothing further to add.” After being fully discussed, the votes -were taken. First, whether the article should stand as stated in the -outlines, or be altered. It was carried that it should remain as stated. -The next question was, if the word exclusive should be added, and it -was unfortunately carried in the affirmative. The article now stands -thus:—“The Roman Catholic Apostolic Religion is the religion of the -state, and the exercise of every other is excluded.” - -We are not to be surprised that the matter has ended in this manner; -perhaps we should rather wonder that there was any one of the members -of the Congress disposed to speak, or even to think on the side of -toleration. The members who are friendly to religious liberty, may amount -to one third of the whole, or, perhaps, somewhat more than one third, and -they are men of influence and respect in the country. These made a less -vigorous stand for toleration at the present time, from the consideration -that what is done now in regard to the sanctioning of the basis of the -constitution, is only provisional. The Spaniards, at present, possess -many of the best provinces of Peru, and these provinces have, strictly -speaking, no representatives in the Congress. The manner of proceeding, -in reference to these provinces, was this:—The natives of each province, -residing in Lima, met and chose members from among themselves to -represent the province, until such time as the enemy be dislodged, and -they have freedom to choose their own representatives. As soon then as -the country is free, the present Congress will dissolve itself, and a -general Congress will be immediately elected, and the outlines now under -consideration will be presented to the new Congress to be examined, and, -if judged necessary, altered. There is, therefore, still some hope, -that toleration may have a place in the Peruvian constitution. During -the interval, the press may forward the good cause, as there is perfect -freedom for speaking and printing any thing upon the subject, on both -sides of the question. We may, indeed, call this freedom of speaking and -writing upon the subject, a kind of toleration; at all events, it is a -prelude to it. - -Pamphlets of every shape, size, and name, are issued from the press. In -these every subject is handled, and abuses and prejudices are attacked -with freedom and courage. The poor friars are not overlooked in these; -almost every body is against them, and none seems to rise up in their -defence. One of the members of Congress has made a motion for the -reformation of the Convents. The bill he is about to bring in, contains -four articles. The first is to allow all those to leave the Convents who -wish to do so. The second is to allow no one in future to become a friar. -The third is, that the government should take possession of all their -property, and allow them out of it what is necessary for their support. -The fourth article is, to make them all live in _one_ convent, instead of -occupying _fourteen_, as they now do. This you see is a bold proposition, -and, if carried into effect, will be a great step in reformation. - -At the time the article on religion was under consideration, a certain -individual went about with a paper containing a petition to Congress, -praying that the Roman Catholic religion might be the religion of the -state, _and the only one tolerated in the country_. The last part of -the petition was the object he had in view. He obtained a number of -signatures to the petition, and without loss of time laid it before the -Congress. It was, however, not allowed to be read, and several were for -calling this individual to account for his officiousness. This medical -gentleman (for he is of that profession) has been sadly handled in the -pamphlets of the day for this conduct; so much so, I think, as to keep -him from being forward to engage a second time in such an undertaking. -I have already mentioned how freely all matters are discussed in these -pamphlets. One of them has just begun to give a history of the Popes. -From the specimens already published, this history promises not to be -very honourable to the personal character of the Popes, neither does it -appear intended to strengthen their pontifical authority and influence, -but quite the contrary. There was a monthly magazine published in London, -during the despotic reign of the present Ferdinand. In this work there -was given a history of the Popes, and I believe what is publishing here -just now is copied from the work I have mentioned. This magazine was -called El Español Constitucional. It was written by one of those who had -fled from Ferdinand’s despotic hands. He was a liberal man, and writing -in London he felt himself under no restraint in speaking of the abuse -of the Church of Rome. There was another periodical work in the Spanish -language, published some years before it, called El Español. This was -also printed in London, and was written with the same liberality and -spirit. Both these works have reached South America, and have been a good -deal read; and, as you may suppose, they have served considerably to -enlighten the people of these countries. - -I have mentioned, in some of my late letters, the very gratifying -circumstances of the rapid sale in this city of 500 Spanish Bibles, -and 500 New Testaments. These were all sold off in _two days_, and as -many more could have been sold in the two days following, but there -were no more, and thus many were disappointed. From this cheering -circumstance, I am daily looking with great anxiety for a considerable -number of both Bibles and Testaments, expected from the Bible Society. -The above-mentioned circumstance is truly encouraging, as no desire at -all comparable to it, has yet been manifested in any other part of South -America for the Holy Scriptures. From this, and some other occurrences, I -am led to anticipate that the word of God will, indeed, have free course -in this place, and let us pray that it may not be circulated only, but -that it may be glorified also. I have another thing to relate to you, -perhaps more cheering still. It is this: the nearly confident expectation -of getting the New Testament introduced throughout Peru as a school book. -I trust this expectation will not be disappointed, but verified in due -time. Every thing promises fair at present for its accomplishment. - -As soon as the Bibles got into circulation as above-mentioned, there was -some ferment excited from reports that it was not fairly printed from the -Spanish version of Scio, as indicated in the title page. This report was -raised, or at least increased, by the discovery of a typographical error -or two. An honest priest actually burned the Bible he had bought on the -discovery of one of these oversights in the printing. The consequence of -this stir was an examination of the Bible Society’s edition, by comparing -it with the edition printed in Spain. The result of this examination -was highly satisfactory, as the London edition was found to be an exact -reprint from the latest Spanish edition, with the exception of some -slight oversights in passing through the press. About the time this -matter was under consideration, the deputy Archbishop (for there is no -Archbishop here at present) having learned that a certain priest was -likely to say something from the pulpit against the reading of the Bibles -from London, sent a message to him, telling him “not to preach any thing -against the reading of the English Bibles.” By English Bibles he meant -Bibles from England, for the Bibles were in the _Spanish_ language. - -A curious little piece, in the poetic form, appeared about a fortnight -ago in one of the newspapers of this city. There is a great deal of truth -and force in it, and as it is but short, and will not occupy much room, -I shall give you a translation of it. To do it justice it should be put -in poetic dress, but as you know I am neither poet nor rhymester, you -will please accept of it in plain prose. “_Simon possessed a fishing -bark_, and just a fishing bark, nothing more he left to his sons. They -however were great fishers; they caught much and grew rich, and could -no longer be content with their small bark, but got a larger one. This -bark afterwards became a brig, and then a ship. At last it grew into a -man-of-war, and frightened the world with its cannon. How wonderfully is -this ship of war now changed! how different now to what it was in former -times! This great ship is now grown old, and, shattered by the storms it -has encountered, it now lies rotting in the harbour. A thousand times has -it been repaired, but at last it must be laid aside altogether, and its -owners must once more be content with _Simon’s fishing bark_.” You will -find no difficulty, I dare say, in applying this little piece, and, I -believe, you will join with me in wishing that the concluding part may -be verified as exactly as the preceding parts have. - -There is a great revolution going forward in South America. I speak not -of the revolt from under the Spanish yoke, for that in the present day -may be said not to be going forward, but accomplished. The revolution -I speak of, is a moral one. Those who have eyes to see this goodly -prospect, and those who have ears to hear the harmony of this moral -change, meet on every hand with indications of its approach. You will not -understand me as saying, that South America has become like the land of -Eden, like the garden of God. No. But a change has been begun, a happy -change. Let us put our hand to this work. Let us bear it onward, and God -Almighty will consummate it in due time. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 28th January, 1823._ - -A good while has elapsed since I mentioned to you any particulars of -my affairs in reference to the schools. During this time, however, I -have more than once thrown out hints, signifying that matters went on -but slowly. I had too much reason for these complaints. The truth is, I -was once and again on the point of leaving this place. My affairs here -have been such, since my arrival, that I may truly say, my hopes and -prospects in South America never were so high, and never were so low -as they have been, at different times, in Lima. I formerly stated to -you the very favourable reception I met with from San Martin, and from -the first Secretary of State, Monteagudo. Both of these left this place -a good while ago, although under different circumstances. To me their -loss was severely felt. I never mentioned a wish to San Martin, or to -Monteagudo, that was not granted, and granted immediately in the most -obliging manner. After their going away, I scarcely mentioned any thing -I wished done that was not refused. I should not, perhaps, say refused, -for I was not actually denied; I was told that the things I stated would -be done, but these promises were never fulfilled. Had I been plainly -refused, there is every probability that I should have left this place -long ago. After experiencing a number of delays, and when my little stock -of patience was all gone, I asked for my passport. The same individual, -however, who had so often put me off with fair promises, contrived to put -off my passport also, and kept me waiting days together, with every thing -nailed up for my departure. It was then agreed on between us, that since -the school plan we had in view could not be carried into effect from want -of funds, I should stop three or four weeks to instruct some individuals -in the Lancasterian system. About twelve came, in consequence of this, -to my lodgings once a day, for the instructions referred to. At the -close of the time mentioned, these individuals were much pleased with -the new plan, and some of them represented the matter to the minister, -who gladly entered into it, and it was agreed that I should stop, and -that what was wanting should be granted. I did think him for this time -sincere, and I believe he was so; but I was again subjected to be put -off from week to week, until I found that I was circumstanced exactly as -before. I petitioned anew for my passport, and in the mean time wrote a -letter to the Congress, detailing all that had happened from the time of -my arrival in Lima, and concluded by stating, that I intended to leave -this place by the first vessel that sailed, but that I would return or -send some person instructed in the plan of the schools, if a desire -should be expressed by the Congress to that effect. The result of this -communication was far beyond my expectation. Upon my letter being read, a -great deal of interest was taken in this matter, and it was unanimously -agreed to that the school should be commenced as soon as possible. An -order was accordingly issued, that every thing I wanted to set it agoing -should be immediately granted. When I wrote to the Congress, I had little -thought that they would be disposed to carry this object forward at the -time, having not long before resolved to use the utmost economy with the -public money, and to carry nothing forward that was not of an urgent -nature. This resolution was very necessary from the low state of the -public funds, owing to their limited resources, and the great expenses -of the war. In consequence of the decree of the Congress in our favour, -I at once gave up thoughts of leaving this place, and we have been -since that time getting on as fast as can be expected. There is another -circumstance of considerable importance, which has arisen out of this. -The person who brought together those twelve individuals to be instructed -in the system, as above mentioned, is a very respectable clergyman. This -gentleman has interested himself much in the matter, and has been named -by the Congress to take an active part in all the arrangements necessary -until a School Society be formed. I have had much intercourse with this -individual, and have good reason to esteem him highly. We go hand in -hand in our affairs most comfortably. As this gentleman’s name is now -connected with the schools, and being a clergyman, many prejudices are -thereby removed. This is a matter of no little importance, as there was a -strong idea, (whether well or ill founded, I cannot tell,) that the late -Secretary, of whom I spoke, was atheistical in his views. Perhaps his -atheism consisted in his making free with the convents and other church -affairs. However that may be, my being favoured by him probably excited -some prejudices, in addition to those arising from my being a Protestant. -The counteracting influence, therefore, of my connexion with my present -clerical friend will, I have no doubt, be greatly advantageous. When -I add to this, that it is through this respectable individual that I -expect the New Testament to be introduced into the schools, of which I -formerly wrote, you will see that I have great cause for thanksgiving -for the circumstances in which we now stand; and I am even inclined to -believe, from what I have seen, that our present encouraging prospects -have not been too dearly purchased by all the harassing delays that we -have experienced. We are very short sighted in all things, and can seldom -tell what string of circumstances may end most favourably. Hence it is -that we are often joyous, when we have not much real cause for being so; -and on the other hand, we are often sad, when every thing is going on in -the most prosperous manner. How consoling is the thought, that we are -permitted to cast all our cares upon God; upon him who knows the end from -the beginning, and in whose hands, sooner or later, every thing must turn -out well. - -I think I have perceived, during the time I have been in this place, a -greater desire to study the English language than I have met with in any -other part of South America. I have uniformly encouraged this desire -as much as possible, being fully persuaded that the knowledge of our -language, and of the excellent works it contains, will contribute in no -inconsiderable degree to the progress of this country in every point of -view. Want of books suitable for beginners in this language has formed -a considerable obstacle, as well as the want of suitable teachers. In -order to remove these difficulties to a certain degree, and to carry -forward this useful object, I some time ago set to work to prepare, in -Spanish, a grammar of the English language. This is now finished, and -nearly all printed. I have at the same time been getting ready a small -book, consisting of extracts from various authors in our language, for -something of this kind was equally necessary. This little work is also -pretty far advanced in the printing. In the next place, in order to carry -this object into immediate effect, I lately published my intention of -giving instructions in the English language, and I now have twenty-three -studying it with me, two of whom are members of Congress. - -Accounts have reached us, that on the 19th November last, a severe -earthquake was experienced in Chile. The first shock was felt about 11 -o’clock at night, and was preceded by a frightful noise. During the -night, and for several succeeding days, a number of shocks were felt, -less destructive, I believe, but sufficiently alarming. We have not -yet had full information as to the extent of country over which these -shocks have been experienced, but from what reports have reached us, -it seems to have extended over the greater part of Chile. The greatest -damage, we understand, has been done in Valparaiso. In that place several -houses have been thrown down, and all the churches have been severely -injured. Accounts say that more than two hundred people have perished in -Valparaiso alone. Many are the blessings which Providence has poured out -on Chile, and one would almost think that earthquakes have been added, -by way of giving to it its due proportion of evil. The same may be said -of this country, which has suffered still more from this cause than -Chile has done. We do not know _the moment_ we may be visited in this -city, by one of these dreadful calamities which have laid Lima nearly in -ruins at different times. To remind us of our danger, as it were, we are -visited by small shocks from time to time; a month rarely elapses without -one, and about a week ago we had two in one day. One would naturally -think that the being continually exposed to these catastrophes would -be productive of some happy moral effects upon the inhabitants of this -place. I am sorry to say there are no appearances of these good results. -If a comparison were to be instituted between the people of this place, -and those of other parts of South America, in regard to morals, I am -afraid Lima would appear in the back ground. The most imminent danger, -the most signal judgments, seem somehow or other to be productive of -nothing but momentary effects on mankind. Wherever this danger or these -judgments are, there the words of Jesus are verified; “If they believe -not Moses and the prophets, neither would they be persuaded though one -should arise from the dead.” I question much if we should, in one sense, -find fault with this disposition of mankind; or shall I say rather with -this arrangement of Providence. It points out to us, I think, how much -happier and more solid effects may be produced by the wielding of the -word of God, than by wielding the mountains, and casting them into the -sea. _The word of God_ is a _fire_, and is a _hammer_, and nothing shall -be able to stand before it; every thing that opposeth shall be reduced -into ashes or into dust; and these shall be blown away by the winds, to -be seen no more for ever. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 3d March, 1823._ - -I have more than once, my dear friend, within these few days past, -heard the exclamation, “happy are the countries that enjoy a settled -and secure government.” The truth is, we have just experienced one of -those occurrences which frequently happen in revolutionary times. I -wrote you formerly, that three individuals of the members of Congress -were exercising the executive power in this place. From events which -have lately occurred, a general dissatisfaction towards this triumvirate -was felt by the army in the neighbourhood of this city. The consequence -of this was, that the troops drew near to the walls and shut the gates, -sending at the same time a message to the Congress, requesting, or -rather ordering, a change in the government. After a good deal of -deliberation, the triumvirate was removed by the Congress. Another step -was yet necessary, as a certain individual was pointed out as the only -person capable of filling the vacant situation. There was no alternative -in this more than in the other proposition, as a part of the troops -kept their station, as before mentioned, whilst the rest or the greater -part came into the great square in the centre of the city. Indeed the -public opinion, not of the army only, but also of the great majority of -the people, seemed clearly expressed in favour of the person proposed. -The individual in question was accordingly appointed by the Congress as -“President of the Republic of Peru.” This was done on the first current. -The troops have retired, and there seems to be a general satisfaction -with this appointment. Our President’s name is Don José de la Riva Aguera. - -You will naturally wish to know how our new President is likely to -act regarding the schools, and other such matters. Respecting what -his conduct will be in these things, I have great confidence. I have -known him, and visited him occasionally since my arrival in Lima, in -consequence of a letter of introduction to him, with which I was favoured -on my leaving Chile. I have uniformly found him very obliging, and -much interested in our concerns. In short, he is the very individual -I should have named, had I been asked what person I wished to have in -this high station. I called on him this afternoon in company with my -clerical friend, whom I formerly mentioned to you. We were well received, -and encouraged to go forward in our work, with the assurance of his -protection and support. - -I forgot to mention to you in my last quarterly letter, that I had about -that time got one added to the number of my friends. This person is a -very respectable clergyman, and a member of the Congress. We have had -several conversations together, in a very open and friendly manner. I -have been much pleased with his candour and frankness. He told me that -when he first heard of my having come to Lima, he resolved to oppose me, -but that when he learned that I was not an opposer of religion, but a -friend to it, he changed his mind, and resolved to befriend me as far -as lay in his power. There is a kind of idea among several of those who -are the most religious in this country, that many or most foreigners who -arrive here are deists or atheists, or at least men no way friendly to -religion. Grounds have, no doubt, been given for forming this opinion, -although I think it is generalized among the class of people I mentioned, -with some degree of illiberality, as is, indeed, commonly the case. -The books which come here in favour of deism and atheism strengthen -the opinion. Most of these are printed in France, but some of them, I -am sorry to say it, are printed in England. From all I have seen here, -both in the Congress, and out of it, I am strongly inclined to think -that those who oppose toleration, or at least many of them, do so with a -view to prevent the influx into the country of such as oppose or scoff -at religion. As a proof of this, I refer to the member of Congress, -of whom I have just been speaking. This man opposed toleration when -it was discussed in the Congress, and spoke publicly against it; yet -when conversing with him upon the subject, he told me that he was not -opposed to the toleration of Protestants in the country. I have taken -occasion at different times to point out to some of the members, in -private conversation, that their law prohibiting the public religious -exercises of those who differ from the Catholic church, does not hinder -atheists and deists from settling in the country, as these have no form -of religion they wish to practise; and that this law serves only to -prevent the coming of those men who are sincerely religious and moral, -and who, as they themselves admit, would be of great use in the country, -by bringing into it many branches of the arts and manufactures. I think -I have observed some good effects arising from these conversations, and -I wish it may so appear when, the subject comes before Congress a second -time. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 26th May, 1823._ - -A considerable time has now elapsed since I last wrote you. I confess I -have acted wrong in delaying so long; but I know that yourself and the -Committee of the British and Foreign School Society are ready to forgive. -The truth is, I have had no heart to write you; I have had nothing -encouraging to communicate; and I am never fond of being a messenger of -evil tidings. I have been bandied about these many months past, without -being able to make any progress in those highly important affairs in -which you feel so deeply interested. I have been more than once on the -eve of leaving this part of South America, but one little encouragement -or another called me back just as I was going to embark, and flattered me -into a belief that all would go on well. I shall not detain you with a -long list of grievances, but shall pass at once to the more pleasing task -of calling on you to join with me in thanksgiving unto Him who comforteth -those that are cast down, and who hath turned my darkness into light. -Blessed be his name, the prospects of something being done in this place -brighten daily, and I hope yet to communicate to you something gladdening -from the land of the Incas. - -We have, at length, got our school fairly begun, and under very -favourable auspices. I formerly mentioned to you that the government had -given us for our schools, the College belonging to the Dominican Friars. -The whole of the edifice is at our disposal for school objects. We have -fitted up for our present school-room, a large apartment, formerly -the college dining-room, which will contain 300 children. The number -attending at present is upwards of a hundred; and we intend to increase -it gradually rather than rapidly, as we might do were we inclined. The -experience I have had has taught me the necessity of this. It is an easy -matter to tell what the system is, and to say things are to be managed in -such and such a way; but the great difficulty consists in reducing it to -practice, in training the children to method. - -The Congress and the Government here are decidedly in favour of -education. Their object is not merely the education of the few, but the -education of the many, namely, of every individual in Peru. The attention -of the Congress is, at present, engaged in drawing up a constitution -for the nation. One of the articles already sanctioned is, that no one -can vote for a member of Congress unless he can read and write. From -the consideration, however, of the shameful neglect of the Spaniards -in promoting education in the country, these literary qualifications -are not to be exacted until the year 1840. Time is thus given for every -individual to qualify himself in these matters; and the anxious desire of -the Congress is, I am fully persuaded, to carry forward education with -all possible rapidity. - -You are aware, I suppose, that the inhabitants of Peru do not all speak -the Spanish language. The descendants of the ancient Peruvians are very -numerous, and most of them speak the language of their ancestors. In -some parts of the country they have assumed the manners and the language -of their conquerors and oppressors; but in other parts, and these by -far the most populous, their ancient tongue is their only medium of -communication. I have long had my eye on this interesting part of the -population of this country. I have, at length, obtained a fair prospect -of being able to plant schools among them, and also to hand to them the -word of God in their native tongue. An officer belonging to a regiment, -called the Peruvian Legion, and who thoroughly understands the _Quichua_, -or Peruvian, language, has taken a great liking to our system, and -is extremely desirous of benefiting his countrymen by communicating -instruction to them. He is, at present, attending our school for this -purpose, and I entertain a pleasing hope regarding the future results of -his operations. - -I beg you to express to your Committee my sincere respect and gratitude -for the very obliging manner in which they have come forward in aid of -the great work of education in South America. - - * * * * * - - _Truxillo, 15th July, 1823._ - -When I wrote my last letter to Mr. S. I little thought my next letter -would be written in this place. Such, however, is the case, and I proceed -to mention the circumstances that have brought me here. It is probable -that what has lately taken place in Lima will reach your ears some days -before this comes into your hand. The Spanish army entered that city on -the 18th ultimo, the Government, the Congress, and a great number of -the inhabitants having left it on the preceding day. You will wonder -at this, I dare say, after the favourable account of our affairs in my -last letter. It has also been a subject of wonder unto us all, and of -consternation to not a few. I mentioned in my last, that the Spaniards -had collected a considerable force in Jauja. They had left Arequipa, and -collected in Jauja with the intention of coming down upon Lima. They had -made this movement when the independent army was sadly crippled, and -when there was no efficient force to oppose their taking possession of -the capital. When, however, reinforcements had arrived from Colombia, -and an expedition had been sent off to Arequipa, we little thought they -would persevere in their intention of attacking Lima. On the contrary, -we thought they would immediately retrace their steps with all speed -towards Arequipa or Cuzco, to secure to themselves the possession of -these valuable provinces. The event, however, has turned out otherwise, -and we now understand that they were badly informed as to the real state -of their opponents. The Spaniards crossed the Andes, and came down -towards Lima in a very rapid and unexpected manner, with a force of seven -thousand well disciplined men. Upon their presenting themselves in the -neighbourhood of the city, they were reconnoitred by the Independent -Generals, and as soon as the number and discipline of the Spanish army -were known, it was judged imprudent to risk a battle with them, as -the patriot army is but about five thousand strong, and many of them -recruits. The independent army considered it most advisable not only to -avoid a general battle, but also to avoid defending Lima, and chose to -retire to the forts in Callao. The Government and the Congress, together -with a great number of the principal inhabitants, retired at the same -time to Callao. A few days after, the President and Congress judged it -most suitable to remove from the scene of military operations, and to -take up a temporary residence in this city. They accordingly sailed for -this place, and arrived about a fortnight ago. - -We were going on with our schools in a prosperous way on the 16th (June) -when the reports of the rapid approach of the enemy, and the general -confusion throughout the city, induced us to suspend our operations on -that day for a week, till we should see what would take place. It was -on that day quite uncertain whether the city would be defended, (for it -is surrounded by a good wall,) or whether the army would retire from -the city to Callao. On the following day, however, all doubt on these -points was removed, as it was agreed in a council of war to abandon the -city, and the army accordingly left it on the same day. At three o’clock -I left Lima and went down to Callao, being assured that the enemy would -enter the city that night, or at all events on the following day. I -slept that night (the 17th) on board of an English vessel, lying in the -harbour. It was my intention to return to Lima in four or five days, in -which time I supposed the Spaniards would be in quiet possession of the -place, and that order would be again restored, so that as an Englishman -I might pass to Lima with a passport from the English Commodore on the -station. I accordingly remained some days, on board the vessel, but there -was no possibility of passing from Callao to Lima with any safety during -that time. On the 20th the vessel I was in cleared out for the port of -Casma, about 200 miles to the north of Lima, and I conceived it most -advisable to go along with her, as there was no prospect of re-entering -Lima for some time. I therefore supplied myself with some dollars from -a friend, as I had left Lima without money, and with scarcely any other -clothes than those I had on. In two days we arrived safely in the port -of Casma, and on the day after our arrival I went up to the village, -which is about 8 miles distant. I was accompanied from Callao by an old -friend, a priest, and a prebendary of the cathedral of Lima. We made -ourselves acquainted with the Vicar, and were most hospitably lodged -in his house. Here we staid a week. During this time the accounts from -Lima continued as unfavourable as before, and numbers of people who had -fled from it were arriving at Casma, and others coming on towards it. -I resolved, therefore, to come on to this city, where I arrived safely -after four days travel through roads of burning sand, which were very -fatiguing to our horses and to ourselves. The roads all along the coast -of Peru are of this description. Here and there, at distances of from -twenty to forty miles, there is a river, and in the valley through which -it runs, vegetation of every kind shoots out luxuriantly, and nothing is -wanting but hands of industry to raise cotton, sugar, coffee, and all the -tropical fruits. My friend, the prebendary, remained in Casma, but I was -accompanied to this place by two other emigrants from Lima, and on our -arrival here we found not less than a thousand people of all conditions -under similar circumstances with ourselves. Numbers have since arrived, -and reports say that nearly ten thousand have left Lima, some having gone -to one place and some to another. Notwithstanding these unfavourable -circumstances, we expect all to return to the capital before long; it -may, however, be three or four months. - -From what has been stated, you may perhaps think that the cause of -independence here is losing ground fast, or that it is in a hopeless -condition. This, however, is not the case. The Spaniards will, I believe, -be under the necessity of leaving Lima in the course of a very few -months; and in the mean time they have lost the valuable province of -Arequipa, as there are accounts of the safe arrival of the expedition -which sailed some time ago for that quarter, and of some advantages they -have already gained, and also of the speedy prospect of taking possession -of all that place, the Spanish force there being but small. The -independent army will probably march on towards Cuzco, where the Viceroy -is stationed with a force of about 3,000 men, and the ancient capital of -the Incas may very soon become the scene of the contest for liberty—the -contest of truth and freedom, with ignorance and oppression; and may the -righteous cause prevail. - -I have long had a great desire of visiting some of the interior parts of -this country, and present circumstances offer a favourable opportunity. -I intend, in a day or two, to leave this city for Caxamarca, and from -thence I purpose to go to Jaen de Bracamoros. If the accounts I there -obtain are favourable, I shall go down the great river Marañon or -Amazon, as far as the mouth of the Huallága or the Ucayáli. I may then -perhaps ascend some of the rivers which fall into the Marañon from the -north, and go on in this way towards Quito. If I should be able to get -on so far, I shall then descend from Quito to Guayaquil, and from thence -by sea to Callao. I have got leave of absence for four months, and have -obtained a letter of recommendation from the President to the governors -of those places through which I intend to pass. I trust this journey -is undertaken with the same views which induced me to leave my native -country. I trust the Lord will protect me from every evil, will surround -me with his almighty arm, and will guide and comfort me by his Spirit. - -P.S.—_21st July, 1823._——On the day after writing the above, some -accounts reached this place that the Spanish army was beginning to -retreat from Lima. In consequence of this, I deferred my journey until -certain accounts upon this subject should arrive. These accounts have -now been fully confirmed. The Spaniards began their retreat on the 8th -current, and the last division of their army was to leave Lima on the -evening of the 16th, or on the day following. - -As Lima is now open, from the retiring of the Spaniards, I have given up -for the present my journey to the river Amazon, and to-morrow I set out -for Lima overland. - -The day before yesterday the Congress was dissolved here, and a Senate -has been appointed in its stead. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 8th August, 1823._ - -My last letter to you was dated 9th November last, and which I hope came -safely into your hands. Though the interval between my letters to you be -considerable, yet I always suppose you acquainted with what occurs to me -here during these intervals, through my letters to our mutual friends -in Edinburgh. I therefore consider it unnecessary to go over all that -has happened here since I last wrote to you, and shall confine myself -to what is going forward at the present time. I am sorry that I have so -much to say that may be called of an unfavourable nature. In my letter -to Mr. H. from Truxillo, I stated the cause of my removal to that city, -and also the favourable change which had induced me to return. I arrived -safely in this place on the 2d instant, after an absence of nearly -seven weeks. I found, on my return, all that I had left behind safe, -nothing had been touched. The Spanish army continued in possession of -Lima just twenty-eight days, during which they did considerable injury -to the place, by levying contributions, confiscating property, &c. The -amount of the loss sustained, in one shape and another, is reckoned -at two millions of dollars. All the property belonging to the English -merchants, which was in their own warehouses, was respected, and no loss -was sustained thereon. What goods they had in the Custom-house they were -allowed to withdraw, upon paying a duty of forty per-cent. The other -goods in the Custom-house, belonging to the natives of the country, were -confiscated and sold on the spot. The favour thus experienced by the -English, was owing to the intervention of the British Naval Commander -in this place. The Spanish General, however, intimated to the English -merchants that although he had respected their property at this time, -yet in future he would not do so, but would confiscate all that belonged -to them, should he return again to Lima, and that thus they might -consider themselves as warned beforehand, of what they might expect. I -had heard in Truxillo that the Spaniards had destroyed the palace, the -mint, and some other public buildings. This, however, I am happy to -find, was incorrect: they have destroyed no buildings. The machinery of -the mint was destroyed; and they have carried off or destroyed all the -printing-presses and types they could lay their hands on. The government -printing-presses and types have escaped, as they had been removed to -Callao in good time. One or two presses also, belonging to private -individuals, have likewise been saved, having been hid at the time the -rest were carried off. I suppose you have read (and correctly too,) in -the descriptions of this city, that the churches are immensely rich in -silver. This, however, is not the case at present, I assure you. They are -now completely stripped of all their former grandeur in that respect. -The independent government at different times ordered considerable -quantities of the silver in the churches to be taken to the mint, which -was accordingly done. Upon their retreat from the city on the approach of -the enemy, a few weeks ago, nearly every thing of silver that could be -well spared from the churches, was carried to the castle in Callao, to -prevent its falling into the hands of the Spaniards. This proved a proper -foresight, for the enemy took almost every thing that had been left in -the churches, and thus thoroughly stripped them. A priest observed to me -the other day, that it should seem the time is now come when God chooses -to be served with less splendour, and with more humility. The observation -was good; and I wish the time were indeed come when the supporters of -this system would lay aside their own riches and righteousness in every -respect, and would clothe themselves with the righteousness of Christ, -and with true humility. That period is, I trust, advancing, although -perhaps not so fast as we could wish. The Lord, however, will bring -it about in due time. The way we generally wish to do things, in our -impatience, is to jump to our object; or in other words, to gain our -benevolent ends all at once. This, however, is not the way the Almighty -has established matters in the depth of his wisdom. The end, he tells us, -may be gained, yea, and shall be gained, but it can be gained only by the -use of the appointed means, and by patient continuance in well doing. - -The Spanish army has marched towards Arequipa along the coast. The first -division under General Valdes is already at some distance, but the second -division, under Canterác the Commander in chief, is only about 100 miles -to the south of us. There is, however, I believe, little danger at -present of his returning to Lima, as the main object of the Spaniards -is to attack as early as possible the patriot army in Arequipa. That -army is now of considerable strength, and much better equipped every way -than the former one in that place, which was so completely defeated by -the Spaniards at Moquegua. I wish the result may be favourable to the -independent cause, as much certainly depends on the result. - -I mentioned in my letter to Mr. H. that the Congress had been dissolved -in Truxillo, and that a Senate had been appointed in its place. This was -the single act of the President, and it was certainly a very bold and -imprudent step, not to say any thing of its injustice. The President has -not yet returned to Lima, and in the mean time a strong opposition has -been stirred up against him here for having dissolved the Congress. The -representatives now in Lima have solemnly protested against this measure, -have re-installed themselves as the supreme council and government of -the nation, and have elected the Marquis of Truxillo to exercise the -executive power. What will be the result of these operations I know not. -It is probable, I think, that Riva Aguera, the President, will give in, -and be banished from the country for some time, it is certainly a very -unfavourable time for internal disputes. A short time, I hope, will make -all things wear a more smiling aspect, and may the Lord who reigneth in -the earth, grant that this may indeed be our case. All things are in -his hand. He ever reigneth, although his benignant hand may at times be -invisible to us. - -During the time I was at Truxillo, I formed the plan of visiting some of -the aboriginal inhabitants of America, on the banks of the river Amazon. -I had calculated that the Spaniards would keep possession of this city -for about three months, and I supposed, that time would about suffice -me for my intended tour. I had bought a number of glittering buttons, -needles, scissors, knives, fish-hooks, ribbons, &c., for presents to -the natives. I had also taken out my passport, and was arranging for -setting out, when accounts reached Truxillo, that a part of the Spanish -army had evacuated this city. In consequence of this, I put off my -intended journey, though with regret, in order to return to my duties -in this place. I have long had a desire to visit those parts, and though -I have not been able to effect my object at this time, my purpose is -not laid aside, but only postponed until a more favourable opportunity -occur; and in the mean time I will go on collecting all the information -I can, regarding those quarters. I have a considerable desire to spend -the greater part of my remaining days on the banks of that great river, -or on the borders of some of its tributary streams. In the Mercurio -Peruano, a work of which I dare say you have heard, there are some very -interesting accounts of the entrance of the Jesuits and of the Franciscan -Friars into that part of the country. Their success was various. Numbers -of the missionaries lost their lives in prosecution of their object, -through the cruel hands of those whom they went to instruct. At length -the missions in those parts made some progress, but they never were very -flourishing; and even in their best state, missions under such a system -were open to many objections. One single Moravian village in the midst -of some wilderness would be a more gratifying sight than all the Jesuit -missions put together. Though we may thus condemn their system, because -truth requires it, yet the Missionaries themselves, generally speaking, -in point of zeal and devotion to their object, are worthy of great -commendation, and in many instances their conduct forcibly attracts our -admiration. The accounts they have published are extremely interesting. -In another point of view, also, the Missionaries have done a great -service, by their study of the original languages, and by the grammars -and dictionaries of these which they published. The whole of these works -are by the Jesuits, and not a volume has been published since their fall. -These grammars and dictionaries are now extremely scarce in this place. -It has cost me a great deal of labour to obtain some of them, and others -I have not yet been able to procure, but hope in time to get a copy of -all their writings on those subjects, as well as of the geographical -works they have published. - -I believe it is not generally known in Europe that a great part, the -majority of the inhabitants of Peru, are of the descendants of the -ancient Peruvians under the Incas. An idea is, I believe, pretty general -with you, that the Spaniards nearly exterminated this race, as they -did the inhabitants of St. Domingo and Cuba. That they destroyed vast -numbers of the indigenous inhabitants of this part of the world is, -alas! too true; still, however, the majority here are Peruvians, and -not Spaniards. There are, of course, a good many of a mixed race, and -on the coast there are not a few of the sons and daughters of unhappy -Africa, and their descendants. The Peruvians who live in the towns on -the coast, all speak the Spanish language, and know nothing of the -ancient language of Peru, called the Quichua. Between the coast and the -ridge of the Andes, called the Cordillera, there are many towns, the -inhabitants of which generally speak the Quichua and the Spanish, with, -however, a predilection for their own native tongue. On the east of the -Cordillera of the Andes, the Spanish language is but little spoken, and -both Peruvians and Spaniards speak the Quichua. It is spoken, of course, -with more or less purity, in these different places, a circumstance to be -fully expected of an unwritten language, and among an uneducated people. -I have had my attention turned to those parts of this country where the -Quichua language is spoken ever since I came to Peru. I have had a great -desire to communicate, in one way or another, to this ancient people, the -blessings of education and the light of the Sacred Word. The Spaniards -have kept them in the lowest state of mental existence, and it may be -truly said, that under the Incas, the Peruvians were less ignorant, and -more virtuous, than they are at this day. At the time the Spaniards -(these enemies of knowledge) drove us from our post here, on their -entrance into Lima, we had in our school two descendants of the ancient -Peruvians studying our system, with a view to carry instruction among -their countrymen; whilst another of the same people was actually engaged -in translating one of the Gospels into the Quichua language. I hope we -shall be able to muster our forces again, and to go on in this good work. -Pray for us that the blessing of the Almighty may be upon us, to crown -us with speedy and certain success. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 1st September, 1823._ - -I mentioned in a former letter, that the members of the Congress who were -in Lima had united and re-installed this assembly. Their number daily -increased, by the arrival of those who had fled to various quarters upon -the arrival of the Spaniards. Riva Aguera was left in Truxillo with a -very few only of those he had chosen for his senate. The public opinion -in favour of the Congress, is very strong, and all seem to rejoice in its -restoration. - -Several accounts have reached us of advantages gained by the patriot -troops in the south, but the good effects of these upon us are greatly -lessened by the continual dread we are in of the operations of Riva -Aguera, who has got collected together about 3,000 men. Fulminations by -the Congress have been issued against him, calling him tyrant, &c. &c. -and exhorting every good patriot to use his endeavours to bring him to -this city, dead or alive. - -This commencement of internal war is looked upon by all who feel an -interest in the independence of the country, as a very unfortunate -circumstance. A powerful enemy is at hand, and ready to seize every -opportunity which such divisions may occasion, in order to subject the -country to its former state. In fact we were, about a fortnight ago, in -great alarm for some days, from a rumour of the return of the Spanish -army. A happy circumstance, however, has this day taken place, which -will, I trust, unite all parties in one. This fortunate circumstance -is the safe arrival of Bolivar. He landed this morning in Callao, and -entered Lima this afternoon, to the very great satisfaction of all. He -has brought with him upwards of 2,000 men, and more it is said are to -follow. The general aspect of the war is now greatly in our favour, -and I think the Spanish army is rather critically placed. Some letters -have been intercepted from one of the Spanish Generals to La Serna, -giving rather a sad account of his situation, and mentioning some of his -officers of whose loyalty he had not great confidence. From all these -circumstances, I trust the time is not far distant when this unhappy and -destructive war will give way to peace and to liberty. - -When in Truxillo, I made some arrangements for the circulation of the -Scriptures in that quarter. There is a medical gentleman there, a native -of Ireland, of the name of O’Donovan. He is of the Roman Catholic -religion, but he has none of those prejudices against the Bible which -many of the Catholics have. So far is he from being prejudiced upon -this point, that he takes a very great interest in its circulation, -and recommends it strongly to all his friends. This is a very happy -circumstance, and I hope the results will be truly beneficial. Being a -Roman Catholic himself, what he says upon this subject has more weight -than the same things would have from a Protestant. Since my return to -Lima, I have sent him 50 Spanish New Testaments, and a number of Spanish -tracts, which I got some time ago. He mentioned to me the effects -produced by some tracts which he formerly had. He said he gave a few -of them to his neighbours, and some time after inquired how they liked -them. Some of them told him plainly that they did not like them at all, -and that these tracts were not _the Gospel_, because there was nothing -said about _the Sacraments_ in them. You would not, he replied, have the -Sacraments spoken of _every where_, and nothing but the Sacraments? Let -me read, continued he, a chapter of one of the Gospels to you. He then -took his New Testament, and read to them accordingly a chapter from one -of the Gospels. Now, said he, is there any thing about the Sacraments in -what I have just read to you? They said there was not. And is not _this_ -the Gospel, said he? They agreed that it was. Well then, he continued, -may not these tracts be Gospel too, although there is nothing of the -Sacraments in them. I trust the Lord will bless the exertions of this -worthy individual to circulate the knowledge of God around him. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 25th November, 1823._ - -What a cheering thought it is, to contemplate the glorious exertions of -the present day, to put the Sacred Scriptures into the hands of _all_. -The names of barbarian, Scythian, bond and free, have disappeared in the -distribution of this noble charity; and the only distinction known is, -those who have this volume, and those who have it not. The present mighty -efforts bid fair to make this only distinction among mankind disappear -also; and may it be soon fulfilled; thus leaving every soul in possession -of that treasure which can alone make his soul valuable. - -I am happy to say that something has already been done here, and that -the prospects for the future are encouraging. Perhaps there have been -circulated, during these few years past, about one thousand copies of the -whole Bible, in the Spanish language, and considerably upwards of that -number of New Testaments, in the same tongue. It is true, this is but a -small number among so many; yet it is a good beginning; and you know we -ought not to despise small things, but receive them with thanksgiving, -and as encouragements to perseverance. - -Immediately after the rapid sale of the 500 Spanish Bibles, and 500 New -Testaments in this city, as mentioned in my letter of October 18th, -I wrote to London for a large supply, although I was then in daily -expectation of some arriving. The supplies sent by the British and -Foreign Bible Society, and which I was then expecting, arrived, as I -afterward learned, in Buenos Aires and in Chile, but none of them reached -this place. I remained for a long time in great anxiety about the arrival -of a supply for this city, and country adjacent. After waiting for -several months, I received a letter from the Society, informing me that -the whole edition of the Bible had been disposed of, but that 5000 New -Testaments would be sent me as soon as they could be bound. These have -not yet arrived, but I am in hourly expectation of them. - -I come now to speak of a new translation of the New Testament, which I -am endeavouring to procure in this place. I suppose you are aware that -the greater part of the inhabitants of Peru are the descendants of the -ancient Peruvians. The language spoken by the Peruvian nation in the -time of the Incas is called the Quichua; and this language, with some -variation, continues to be spoken to the present day by two-thirds of -the inhabitants of this country. Since my arrival in Peru, I have been -desirous of procuring a translation of a part or the whole of the New -Testament into this language. I have, at length, got it begun, and -under favourable circumstances. Two of the Gospels, the Acts of the -Apostles, and the two Epistles of Peter, are already translated into -this ancient tongue. The translation of the rest of the New Testament -is going forward, while the parts I have mentioned are a revising by -four gentlemen, who have cheerfully offered to take this labour upon -them. I am much pleased to see the interest these individuals take in -this matter; and it will, as it were, authorize this translation, when -it is considered that they have revised it. All the four are members of -Congress, and one of them is a clergyman. The gentleman who is engaged in -the translation is a descendant of one of the Incas, or kings of Peru, -and a native of the city of Cuzco. As soon as the parts I have mentioned -are thoroughly revised, I intend to print them at the expense of the -British and Foreign Bible Society. In the mean time, the translation -of the whole New Testament will go forward until it is completed. I am -also desirous of beginning with the Old Testament as soon as the New is -translated. This translation of the whole Bible, and the printing of an -edition of two or three thousand copies, will cost a considerable sum, -especially as printing is expensive in this country. I have written to -the British and Foreign Bible Society, requesting their instructions -regarding the extent to which they might wish me to go in this matter at -their expense. I trust they will authorize me to go forward in this work, -and to carry it into completion. As this, however, is an _American_ work, -I believe the American Bible Society would gladly come forward with their -aid to carry it into effect. This language is spoken by about a million -of people; and no other inducement should be necessary to interest Bible -Societies in regard to it. There are also two other languages spoken in -this country, namely, the Aimará and the Moxa.[3] About four hundred -thousand people speak these two languages. I am desirous of getting, at -least, one of the Gospels translated into each of these, but have not -yet got any thing done. It is my intention to take a journey through the -interior of Peru; and, when passing through the places where these two -languages are spoken, I shall endeavour to procure the translations when -on the spot. - -Thus, you see, the Lord’s work goes forward, even in this remote corner. -South America has hitherto been a neglected and benighted country; but -thanks be to God, this long night of darkness is now far spent, and the -day is at hand. From the time I set my foot on board on my voyage to -South America, I have considered myself as an American. Ever since that -day the interests of America are the uppermost in my heart. You too, -my dear Sir, and the members of your Society, are Americans. I would, -therefore, call upon you, as my fellow-citizens, and would rouse you up -to the mighty importance of that sacred work in which you are engaged. -America, North and South, is the field for your operations. Lo! the poor -Indian, begging from you the “bread of life.” Can you shut up your bowels -of compassion?—“Come over and help us,” breaks upon our ears from every -quarter. Surely this is not the time to sit down with folded hands, to -rejoice in what has been accomplished. No. It is the time to blush, and -to be ashamed for our past supineness: it is the time for calling forth -all our energy, for plying every nerve, in order to make the Light of -Life shine from one end of the earth to the other. - -[3] Although I resided upwards of two years in Peru, yet during that time -I did not meet with any person qualified to translate the Scriptures into -either of these two languages. But after leaving that country, I met -with a person fitted for translating into the Aimará, in a place where -I little expected to find one. In London, last year, when in one of the -Paddington coaches, I perceived that one of my fellow passengers was a -foreigner, from his countenance and manner of speaking. After we had -conversed a little with each other, I took the liberty to ask him from -what part of the world he came. He told me he was from South America; and -upon inquiring more particularly, I found he was a native of La Paz, in -Peru, the very spot where the Aimará language is spoken. This individual -I found to be perfectly acquainted with this language, having spoken -it from his infancy; and from his education and other circumstances, I -conceived him to be a suitable person for translating the Scriptures into -that language. Our acquaintance increased, and led to his being engaged -by the British and Foreign Bible Society to translate the New Testament -into his native tongue; and he has now nearly completed this work. - -We call a meeting of this kind accidental, and it was truly so, in the -common sense of the term. But the Christian looks higher, and finds the -directing hand of God in such matters. What adds to the interest of this -circumstance is, that besides the person mentioned, there is not an -individual in England who understands a word of the language referred to. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 1st December, 1823._ - -I mentioned to you in my last, that Bolivar had safely arrived in this -city. Some days after his arrival, I was introduced to him, and was very -favourably received. He is, in appearance, a very modest unassuming man, -as far as I can judge from the short conversation we had together. He -appears very active and intelligent, but I could not read any thing of -an extraordinary nature in his countenance. He has not the eye of San -Martin, whose glance would pierce you through in a moment. Bolivar’s -weather-beaten face tells you that he has not been idle. No man, I -believe, has borne so much of the burden, or has toiled so hard in the -heat of the day, in the cause of South American Independence, as Bolivar. -His labours in his own country are already crowned with nearly complete -success; Colombia may be considered free and independent. According to -all the accounts which reach us, the Congress of that country is going -on with great steadiness. The following, I conceive, is a very pleasing -trait in Bolivar’s character. When invited to come here, he replied, that -he would very gladly come without a moment’s delay, but that he could -not allow himself to obey his feelings in the matter, as an article of -the constitution of Colombia prohibits the President from going out of -the state without leave from the Congress. From this circumstance, he -said, and from a desire to give an example of subjection to the laws, -he could not come until he should obtain leave. He accordingly wrote -to the Congress for permission, and although, from the distance of the -capital, he was long in receiving an answer, and in the interval was -urgently solicited from this quarter, yet he remained in Guayaquil until -the permission from the Congress came, and immediately after sailed -for this place. Since his arrival here, he has been chiefly occupied -in military occupations, and in endeavouring to make an accommodation -between the Congress and Riva Aguera. Every thing has been done by him -in this matter, and I am sorry to say without effect. The last remedy -only remains, and it has been resorted to; Bolivar in person and 6,000 -men have gone against him. I am told he is pretty confident of reducing -him in a very short time, and that he expects to return in three or four -weeks. - -Lima is no longer that city of wealth it formerly was. The number of -people who have been reduced from tolerably comfortable circumstances to -poverty, is not a few. The affairs of our school suffer greatly from the -present state of this place. The Government is very friendly towards us, -and very desirous of giving us succour, but they cannot do all they wish, -as this war rivets the attention of all, and devours all the resources. -But the Lord reigneth, and all shall yet be well. - -The Congress has, for some months past, been busily occupied in framing -a constitution for Peru, and which they have now brought to a close. A -few days ago it was published, and it has since been sworn to with great -formality by the members of Congress, the Members of Government, and -other public functionaries. It is very probable that this constitution -will be translated into English, and published in London. You will, in -that case, have an opportunity of seeing it, and of forming your opinion -regarding its merits. When you have passed your judgment upon it, I shall -be obliged to you to state particularly what that judgment is, in order -that I may inform my friends here of the result. In this manner you may -perhaps contribute to its improvement afterwards, as the opinions of -foreigners upon the subject will, I am persuaded, have some weight. To -find a perfect constitution would be as difficult, perhaps, as to find -a perfect man. The political constitutions of most countries might be -altered for the better, I believe, especially on your side of the world. -There is certainly a striking difference between the old world and the -new in reference to these matters. You Europeans, generally speaking, may -be compared to an old man, whose evil habits have grown up with him from -the days of his ignorance and foolishness, but which he either cannot -see, or seeing, is unwilling to correct. If you point out these to him, -he gets impatient and angry, and then draws his sword, by dint of which -he convinces you that he is in the right. We, on the other hand, who live -in a new world, have new ideas, and, I may add, true ideas, upon these -subjects. America may be compared to a young man just come of age, and -inexperienced, but who is endeavouring to learn wisdom from seeing the -stubbornness of old age on the one hand, and from the true principles of -philosophy on the other. We are not fettered down by old habits, and we -are endeavouring therefore, and I think with some success to look upon -the subject of government philosophically, and as free as may be from -the influence of prejudice. The single object, I believe, of the rising -states of South America is the forming such laws or constitutions as may -truly secure the liberty and protection of every member of the political -body, to the greatest degree possible. Political codes have been drawn -up with this view, and all of them, I believe, have an article of great -importance, namely, that the constitution shall be revised and improved -from time to time, in order that it may move on towards perfection, as -science and wisdom increase in the world. You will be saying to yourself, -perhaps, that I am too favourable to my new friends, and you will be -ready to produce against me the article upon religion as found in most -of the constitutions of this southern continent. You are likely, I -believe, to form an improper judgment of this country in reference to -that article. You may be sure I feel the want upon this matter more -than you do, but I endeavour to look upon the subject with as little -prejudice as possible. When toleration was obtained in England, it was -wrung from the government, I may say, by main force. The safety of the -state demanded it, and this I suppose had more weight in obtaining for -us this precious blessing, than any qualms of conscience or political -wisdom. Things are quite different here. There is nobody, I may say, who -needs toleration, and of course nobody is asking it for himself. I speak -of the inhabitants of America, exclusive of the few foreigners who reside -in it. One of the members of Congress, at the time of discussing this -subject, very pertinently said, “Why such ado about toleration? Who is -asking for it? or who stands in need of it? We, ourselves, do not need -any such thing, and foreigners, who are here, seem very little concerned -about the subject. It was not religion that brought them to this country, -but commerce. Give them money, therefore, in exchange for their goods, -and they will seek nothing else.” Now all this was very true, however -unpalatable. Yet, notwithstanding the real state of the country in regard -to the need of toleration, a very strong party exists in the Congress in -favour of it; so strong indeed, that it was thought at one time that it -would be gained; and when it was lost, a considerable number entered -their protest upon the subject; the first of whom was an aged priest, -and the head of the principal college in Lima. Now can you tell me when -such things took place in any other country, and originating wholly from -a philosophical view of the matter? Having seen these things take place, -under my own eye, and having conversed with several members of Congress -and others upon the subject, I feel confident in stating, that liberal -views upon it are pretty general, at least in this city, and I believe -that this evil will be removed from the Constitution ere long, perhaps at -the first revival of it. - -P.S.—Riva Aguera and his friends, are now prisoners, and his troops have -returned to their duty. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 1st March, 1824._ - -I stated to you, some time ago, my expectation of being able to introduce -the New Testament undisguised into our school. Blessed be God, that -object is now accomplished. I have sold several copies to the children -publicly in the school. In the usual course of our lessons, we have -occasion to speak of several incidents in the Gospel history. On these -occasions, I desire our pupils, particularly on Saturdays, to find out -in their New Testaments where such a thing is spoken of, giving them -certain limits. On the Monday following, a number are well prepared -with their New Testaments marked with slips of paper at the places in -question, and often through their pretty impatience to communicate their -discoveries, they tell me before we get into the school, that they have -found out the parable of the sower, the conversion of Paul, &c. You may -easily imagine that these circumstances are great sources of enjoyment -to me, and make up for many disadvantages. I have said that we have got -the New Testament introduced into our school _undisguised_. You probably -perceive what I mean by using the word undisguised. The truth is, the -New Testament, in one sense, has all along been used in our schools in -South America, not however in the open manner we now use it in Lima, -but, as I may say, disguised; that is, we have used for lessons extracts -from it, printed on large sheets, and in little books, thus introducing -the Scriptures as it were by stealth. Each part of these lessons I cause -to be read repeatedly in the classes, until the children can read them -readily. By the time they can do so, the substance of what they have -read, and the instruction contained in it, is tolerably imprinted on the -memory. Children, you know, have a habit of repeating to themselves what -they have been saying or reading frequently. In consequence of this, what -portions of Scripture they have read in the school, they repeat in this -way at home. My excellent friend and companion, the clergyman, already -well known to you, informs me that several of the parents of our scholars -tell him that their children are talking about the Gospel at home all the -day long. From other quarters I have heard the same thing, and always -with satisfaction expressed on the part of the parents. Some of the -elder boys, at times, have requested me to lend them the little books -of Scripture extracts, that they might read them at home; and sometimes -the request is, “My mother desired me to ask you for one of the little -books, as she wishes to read it.” These requests have been listened to -with satisfaction, and you may be sure, complied with. Seeing this good -disposition in regard to this matter, and considering the advantages -which might flow from this silent unpresuming introduction of the Holy -Scriptures, I intimated to the children that the little books would be -sold to them at a small expense, and the consequence was, that many of -them were bought immediately. I mentioned to my clerical friend what I -had done, and my motive for doing it, namely, that the children and the -parents might be improved. He replied, the books must prove useful to -both parents and children, as what they contain is _the word of God_. - -You will, perhaps, think I am lengthening out this subject too much, -in talking of our school affairs. It is a subject, however, of some -interest, considering where our school is, and I am persuaded you will -look upon it as such. I shall, therefore, proceed a little farther, even -at the risk of being tedious. We have, at certain times, an exercise for -the more advanced boys, which I conceive to be very useful, and in which -they take a great deal of interest. A Scripture narrative, or parable, -is proposed, which they are required to read over, by themselves, with -great attention, and to note in their memory all the circumstances and -instruction contained in it. Thus prepared, as many as _choose_ to -exhibit, sit down on a form by themselves, and one after another stands -forward, without book, and delivers the parable or narrative, not in the -very words of the text, but giving all the circumstances of the parable -in their own artless way. It is pleasing, and not uninstructive, to hear -them go over their exercise in this manner. Instead, for instance, of -saying that the servant in Matthew, chap. 18, owed his Lord ten thousand -talents, one will say, he owed him a thousand dollars, another, perhaps, -will say a hundred dollars; whilst, on the other hand, they will say -that the one servant owed the other “_unos pocos cuartillitos_,” or, as -we would say in English, a few halfpence. By this way of saying it, they -get into the sense of the passage themselves, and it is thus also brought -down to the level of the understandings of their younger companions, all -of whom are listening, whilst the attention of many is rivetted. One of -the boys the other day, in noticing the concluding verse of the 18th of -Matthew, made a very beautiful allusion to the corresponding petition -in the Lord’s Prayer, forgive us our trespasses as we forgive others. A -premium of two rials (equal to a shilling) was awarded to the boy who -delivered his parable in the best manner. Several times this reward was -proposed and given. One day they asked me what parable we should have. I -told them I was not sure that we should have any at all that day, because -money was very scarce with us, and I did not know if we could spare two -rials. But, said they, we may say the parable, although there be no -premium. You take a pleasure then, said I, in this exercise, do you, -independently of the premium? Yes, said they, with one accord. Well, I -continued, it gives me great pleasure to see you take so much interest in -this matter, and I can assure you, it is a very useful exercise, as well -as a pleasing one. - -I now go on to notice what has occurred here since my last, in reference -to supplies of the Holy Scriptures, and their distribution. I stated -to you formerly, that we were entirely without a supply of the Spanish -_Bible_ here, and that we had but a few New Testaments. In hopes of -obtaining some Bibles which were much sought after, I wrote to a -gentleman in Valparaiso, to whom some Bibles and Testaments had been -consigned some time before by the British and Foreign Bible Society, with -an intimation that they should be at my disposal, if I wished for them. -On learning this, I immediately wrote to Valparaiso upon the subject, -requesting the whole to be sent me without delay. After more than the -time necessary for their arrival had passed by without their appearing, -I wrote a second time, making the same request. I received an answer to -my second letter, as it seems the first had miscarried, but I was sorry -to learn that the Bibles were all gone. When I say I am sorry for this, -I speak rather in reference to the supplying of this place, than in -reference to the grand object of distributing the Scriptures in South -America. These Bibles, to the amount of 200, were all distributed, and -mostly by sale, in Valparaiso, so that, if I am sorry in not being able -to supply those who want here, I am, on the other hand, glad that my -friends in Chile have obtained so many copies of the sacred word in their -own tongue. - -After the accounts which I have now given you, which are of an -encouraging nature, I am sorry in being under the necessity of giving -a gloomy close to my letter. The Spanish army entered this city -yesterday. I feel as if I were no longer in South America, but as -_transported_ to Spain; and as one in the visions of the night, finds -himself in foreign climes, he knows not how, and sighs to return home, -so do I sigh to return to South America. My next letter may, perhaps, -inform you, that our school has been shut up, and that I have taken my -departure for—heaven knows where. There, however, I shall be, as now, -affectionately yours. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 3d March, 1824._ - -Soon after the arrival of the Bibles here, there were many observations -made regarding the faithfulness of this reprint from the Madrid edition; -and many observations were made also as to the reading the Scriptures -without notes, for the Spanish Bible had never been seen before without -these in this country. On one of these occasions, in the street one -day, when a priest was speaking freely to some people about him against -reading the Scriptures without the notes, a friar came up and joined -them; and, hearing the observations of the other against reading, the -Bible without notes, he took up the other side of the question, and -by strong arguments and some wit, he put his adversary to shame, and -convinced those who were present that it was the best and most natural -way to read the divine instructions just as they proceeded out of the -mouth of him who spoke as never man spoke, and just as they flowed from -the pens of the inspired messengers. - -I have very great satisfaction in stating, that many of the clergy in -this place encourage the reading of the word of God. This is a cheering -circumstance, and affords good grounds to expect a large diffusion of -divine knowledge; for the word of God cannot return unto him void, but -will accomplish his gracious will in the instruction and salvation of -mankind wherever it is read. I have leaned this friendly disposition of -the clergy upon this subject more particularly, since I set agoing the -translation of the New Testament into the Quichua language, as mentioned -in my last. All with whom I have talked upon this subject, both clergy -and laity, are pleased with the object, and I have not yet heard of any -one condemning the doing of it. - -I spoke to a canon, in this place, some time ago upon the subject, and -he voluntarily offered to correct the proof-sheets in passing through -the press, if I should be at any loss for one to do it. Blessed be God -for this encouragement. May he carry on and prosper this work, and make -it a blessing unto thousands. In about three months, or less, I expect -the whole of the New Testament will be translated into the Peruvian -tongue. The revision also is going forward, and from the character and -qualifications of those who are revising it, I trust the translation will -be very faithful, and at the same time adapted to the capacities of the -poor, to whom, in an especial manner, the gospel is preached. - -You will observe by my former letter, that besides the Quichua, there -are two other languages spoken in Peru, into which it would be desirable -to get a part or the whole of the New Testament translated. I mentioned -to you my application to the British and Foreign Bible Society for means -to carry forward these translations. I also hinted that this is properly -an _American_ work, and that it would not be unnatural to look for some -assistance in it to the American Bible Society. Will you therefore have -the goodness to lay this matter before the board of managers, and -request them to favour me with a communication upon the subject, as -early as convenience will permit. The object is, to translate the whole -Scriptures into the Quichua language, spoken by upwards of a million, and -also into the Aimará and Moxa languages, spoken each by upwards of two -hundred thousand souls. I add no more upon this subject for the present, -but at the same time, think it not improper to hint, that I shall -probably have another claim upon your liberality, in regard to the native -languages of Mexico. This claim may come before you perhaps some twelve -months hence, should our heavenly Father be pleased to uphold me so long. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 25th March, 1824._ - -My last letter to Mr. S. closed with a foreboding in regard to our -concerns here, from the circumstance of the Spanish army having entered -this city. On the 29th of February, the Spanish troops, to the amount of -about 2,500, took quiet possession of this place, there being not the -smallest opposition. The patriot troop had retired a few days before, -leaving us altogether unprotected, and exposed to those depredations -which never fail to take place in a large city where there is no -government to restrain. We were, in fact, in a very unpleasant state -for some days, and the first sound of martial music from the Spanish -army filled me with thanksgiving, as a deliverance from the anarchy and -confusion we had lived in for some time. - -A few days after the arrival of the Spanish army, and as soon as things -were a little tranquillized, I wrote to the Spanish General, in reference -to our school, telling him what we had done, and the state in which -we were at the time. I represented to him the nature of our schools, -and stated that establishments of a similar kind had been introduced -and encouraged in various parts of the world. I of course mentioned -particularly what had been done in Spain. After stating these things, I -requested him to inform me whether we should go on, or whether we should -immediately shut up our school. In answer to this, I received from him -a very polite letter, saying, that he was informed and fully persuaded -that the school under my direction was a very useful establishment, and -that he wished it to go on until the Viceroy should communicate his -mind upon the subject. In my letter to the General I inclosed a copy -of a letter, which I intended to forward to the Viceroy, and requested -his opinion of the letter, and whether I should send it on to Cuzco. He -replied, that he thought the letter was suitable, and that if I wished -he would himself forward it to the Viceroy, in order that it might go -with greater security. You may be sure, I thankfully accepted his offer, -and sent him immediately my letter to forward. Next day I called on the -General to thank him for his kindness in protecting our school, and in -taking the trouble of forwarding my letter to the Viceroy. I was very -kindly received by him, and encouraged to go on. Thus, you see we have a -new instance of the gracious goodness of our God in giving me favour with -the Governors of this quarter of the world, however much opposed to each -other. - -I informed you, I think, soon after my arrival in this place, that the -government had ordered the college belonging to the Dominican Friars -in this city to be put at my disposal, for the use of our school -establishment. The removal of the Friars, and the giving up of the -college, was accomplished without the smallest murmur, or at least -audible murmur, on the part of the monks. This college is an extensive -building, and very well adapted to the purposes of a central school. -We have a large school room, which will hold very conveniently 300 -children, and another large room connected with it, which would contain -200 more. We have also several other rooms, very suitable as lodgings for -the masters whilst studying the system, and there is convenience for a -printing office, &c. &c. The apartments formerly occupied by the Rector -of the college, have formed my own lodging the greater part of the time -I have been in Lima. Besides the places now mentioned, which are all -connected with each other, we have a large hall, finely adapted for a -female school, with rooms for the mistress and her assistants. These are -entirely separated from the parts mentioned before, so that though in the -same building, they are quite distinct places, with separate entrances -a gun-shot from each other. Our boys’ school contains, at the present -time, 230 children, and we have often been talking of commencing a girls’ -school as a thing greatly wanted in this place. But such has been the -unhappy state of public affairs here for so long a time, that nothing -has yet been done in it. From the description I have given you of the -building we occupy, and the use to which it was formerly destined, you -might naturally expect that the Friars gave it up reluctantly, though -without complaining, and that they would still have their eye upon it, -if a favourable opportunity should present itself for reclaiming it. -I am told, that when the Spaniards were in possession of this city in -June last, the Friars had resolved on petitioning the government upon -the subject, but the short occupation of the city by the Spanish troops -did not allow them to carry their purpose into effect. At the present -time, the Spaniards seem to have taken a more permanent possession of -the place, with the intention of continuing in it for some time, and -their possessing the fortresses of Callao will enable them to do so. -We were, therefore, in greater danger than ever of losing our college, -and indeed application, as I am informed, was actually made to that -effect to General Monet, the commander of the division in this quarter. -But from what I have stated above, you will see the happy resolution -of the General in our favour. I should have mentioned, when describing -the college, that there is a church connected with it, as there is with -all the colleges here. The church and the court connected with it, are -separated by a wall from the parts formerly mentioned. They were formerly -not entirely separated from each other, as there were two openings, like -gate ways, between the two places. These, however, I caused to be built -up, as I did not know what kind of companions I might have in the two -Friars who were left to perform the service of the church; and from the -character of some of this class, and the circumstance of the loss of -their college, and its being put into the hands of a Protestant, I did -not augur much good from their neighbourhood. We have, however, lived -all along on good terms, and our longer acquaintance with each other has -grown, I think, into friendship. I met with a proof of this friendship -since the entrance of the Spaniards, which I did not expect. The Friar -who has the principal charge called upon me one morning, and informed me -that he had heard that the Conde de Villar de Fuente was to be appointed -Governor of Lima. Now, says he, although he is a very good man, yet being -very friendly to the Friars, it is very likely they will press him hard -to regain their college. You should therefore, continued he, endeavour -to see the Governor as early as possible, lest they get the start of -you to your disadvantage. I thanked him very kindly for his intimation -and for his advice, and told him that I was very happy in having this -proof of our living in such friendship with each other. I called upon -the Governor soon after his appointment, agreeably to the advice of my -friend, and found him very well disposed to continue our establishment -and to encourage it. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 29th March, 1824._ - -The Grecian which brought your letter of 24th April, and the cases of -New Testaments therein mentioned, arrived at the port of Callao at a -very unfavourable time. The garrison in the castles of that place had -mutinied some ten days previous to her arrival, and every thing there -was in confusion. The fortresses and town of Callao were in the hands -of the Spaniards, whilst the patriots governed in Lima. Under these -circumstances, I thought it most prudent not to land the New Testaments, -but to wait some time to see what turn things would take, and for the -same reason I deferred writing you. On the 29th ultimo, the Spaniards -took possession of this city; they have continued here since, and seem -likely to do so for some time. From various circumstances, we have been -led to believe that the Spanish government will not allow those freedoms -which the Patriot government allowed, in reference to the introduction -of books, &c. In consequence of this, I still considered it hazardous -to land the New Testaments, and therefore kept them on board so long as -the Grecian continued here; and when she sailed for Chile, which she -did a few days ago, I got them put on board his Majesty’s ship Fly, now -lying in Callao. I shall thus keep them afloat until I see something -like a certainty of landing them safely. What I have just said refers -only to the 2,500 copies addressed to the care of Mr. Thwaites, as the -rest which were addressed to Mr. Lynch have been carried back to Chile -in the Grecian, and are to be delivered there according to instructions -given. After being landed in Valparaiso, they will be forwarded to -Santiago, the capital, and put into the hands of Mr. Christopher Collis -for sale. I have offered the whole to Mr. Collis at 850 dollars, to be -paid in one month after receiving them; or should he decline taking them -at the rate mentioned, I have desired him to sell them on my account, -charging the commission he usually takes. The price I have put upon the -New Testaments, when sold one by one, is eight rials each, and when sold -in quantities to sell again, at six rials each. This you see will about -cover the original cost and expenses if the whole are taken by Mr. -Collis, and if he retails them they will bring something more. I think -this is a rule that should pretty generally be attended to, and as few -as possible given gratis. What I have said, applies to these countries -of South America, but other rules may be better elsewhere. I do think it -injurious to make a general distribution gratis. Individual copies may be -given in this way by a time, but it should be only at times, and when a -clear case presents itself. The committee will correct me in this if I am -wrong. - -On the very day that I received the 610 New Testaments from Valparaiso, -I received a letter from Truxillo begging most earnestly, and “for God’s -sake” that I would send to that place without delay a supply of the -Holy Scriptures. With the writer I am well acquainted, and we had many -pleasing interviews during the few weeks I remained in that place, in -June and July of last year. My friend and correspondent in Truxillo is -a medical gentleman and a native of Ireland. He has been long in this -quarter of the world, and may be considered rather as a South American, -than a native of the British Isles. He is of the Roman Catholic religion, -but is free from those prejudices to be found among many of his own -communion. He studies the word of God himself, and recommends the study -of it most earnestly to all his friends around him. I found him with a -single Spanish New Testament of one of your earlier editions. This was to -him quite a family piece, and his wife and children take great pleasure -in reading it. A copy of the whole Bible in the Spanish language he had -not been able to procure at that time, but in the letter referred to, -he tells me he had obtained one from a friend who purchased it in Lima -at the time of Mr. Lynch’s sale. When we were together in Truxillo, I -inculcated upon him strongly the importance of doing every thing in his -power to make the Word of God have free course and be glorified as far -as in him lay. To this he most cheerfully agreed, and indeed was more -ready to enter into it than I could be to lay it before him. He told me -that he was personally acquainted with most of the rectors in the various -districts throughout the extensive province of Truxillo, which contains a -population of about 300,000 souls. To each of these rectors he promised -to write upon the subject, and was pretty confident that they would, -in answer to his letters, request large supplies of the Scriptures. I -promised on my part to supply him amply with New Testaments very soon, -and with Bibles as soon as I could have a supply from England. Upon my -return to Lima, I sent him 50 Spanish New Testaments, some of the Annual -Reports of the Society, some religious tracts, &c. These were sent -under the particular care of a mutual friend, who sailed for Santa, and -intended to send them overland to Truxillo. This happened to be at the -time of one of our civil commotions, and when our friend landed at Santa -all communication was interrupted between that and Truxillo. From Santa -he sailed to Guayaquil, and not finding a convenient opportunity for -sending them back to Truxillo, he sold them there, and wrote our friend -to that effect, saying he would account to me for the price of them. -This was a great disappointment to Mr. O’Donovan, for that is the name -of our fellow-labourer; and to remedy it, he wrote me the letter above -mentioned. He urges his claim from the circumstance of the great need -there is of the Word of God in that quarter, from his having promised to -send copies to his friends, the rectors, agreeably to what was before -stated, and from the circumstance of a number of copies of two infidel -books which had been just landed from a French ship in that place, and -which have done much evil in these countries. Often do I think, my dear -Sir, and often do I say, that this is a most critical time for South -America, in a religious point of view. - -Two days after having received his letter, I sent him off 250 copies, -in common binding, and ten in calf extra. The patience, however, of our -friend has again been put to the trial, for notwithstanding that the -box containing this supply was sent down to Callao immediately, yet on -account of the confusion in that place, as above mentioned, it only went -off a few days ago. I imagine him just now opening it, and satiating his -eyes with its sacred contents. In the conclusion of his letter, he says -he intends to go from house to house to urge these “ignorant but docile -Christians” to receive the treasure offered them. Let us pray that his -benevolent and zealous efforts may be crowned with happy success. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 30th March, 1824._ - -We have at present three masters learning our system, and whom we -expected to place in other schools before now; but this war literally -devours up every thing, and ties us down to a spot. When we shall clap -our wings and fly over the Andes, to teach the poor Peruvian in his -native tongue, I cannot tell: God may, perhaps, bring this about sooner -than we expect. In the course of a week, the whole of the New Testament -will be translated into the vernacular language of Manco Capac, and by a -descendant of that ancient race of kings. - -I have written to the Viceroy La Serna, who resides at present in Cuzco, -requesting to know his determination regarding the continuing of our -system, under his government, in this city, and whether he is desirous of -extending it throughout the country. In something less than two months I -shall probably hear from him, and shall communicate to you the result. -If the answer be favourable, I shall most likely repair immediately to -Cuzco, leaving one of the masters before mentioned in charge of this -school; and should his answer be unfavourable, I shall leave this place -and go northwards. - -We have often been very desirous of commencing a girls’ school in this -city, and we have very good accommodations in our college for this -purpose; but we have never been able to effect it, in consequence of the -extreme scarcity of money at present in this city. If Lima had been in -its former state of abundance, we could have effected it with great ease; -and it would have been a very great blessing to this place. We would, in -that case, have been very desirous of receiving a well-qualified teacher -from your Committee, to direct our female department. It would still -be preferable to send two, as one of them could attend to the public -school, and the other might keep a respectable boarding-school for the -higher classes. Regarding this last-mentioned part, several parents have -spoken to me; and on the whole, I think it would turn out well for those -who might come out for that purpose. Such an establishment I am sure -would be the means of doing a great deal of good in this country. Female -education, in my opinion, is the thing most wanted in every country; and -when it shall be properly attended to, the renovation of the world will -go on rapidly. Let us know if you could aid us in these matters, if we -were directly to apply to you. I notice these things that you may write -me upon the subject, and knowing, from experience, how ready you are, at -all times, to listen to every proposition which bears on knowledge and -benevolence. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 12th April, 1824._ - -You have, more than once, requested me to state to you any interesting -conversations I might have at times with individuals of this country, -upon the subject of religion. I have not, I believe, been very -communicative in my letters to you on this subject. I believe such -details might, in many cases, be interesting, but generally speaking, -the questions and answers upon these matters are so nearly what we might -expect them to be before hand, under the given circumstances, that little -of what can be called solid information is derived therefrom; besides, I -understand you print some of my letters, and there is some delicacy and -caution to be used under such a consideration, more especially as I have -never seen any of your printed accounts, and am thus unable to judge of -the freedom you use in such matters. I hope in your selections for the -press, you will be wise as serpents, and harmless as doves. - -I shall now detail to you a conversation which I had a few days ago, with -a particular friend, upon the subject of religion, and more particularly -upon the Catholic and Protestant controversy. The gentleman, with whom -I had the conversation, is a man of superior education and abilities, -and holds an important situation in one of our colleges. We have been -acquainted with each other ever since I arrived in this city. We have -visited each other occasionally during that time, and have talked upon -religious subjects, but almost always upon those things in which we were -agreed. A few days ago I had a visit from him, and we entered almost -immediately into a close conversation or controversy upon some of the -points of the Catholic religion. I had lying on the table one of the -Pope’s bulls, which a young man had brought me a day or two before, as I -had expressed to him a desire to see it. I enquired of my friend, where -I could obtain a set of these bulls, as I wished to see each of them, in -order to ascertain their nature, and what it was they promised to those -who should purchase them. After he had informed me where this article was -to be found, I told him that I understood that those who purchased one of -these bulls at a certain price, namely, eight dollars and a half, were -assured that they would get out of purgatory in two or three days after -death. He said it was so as I had stated. Do you then really believe, -said I, that the Pope can thus pardon the sins of men, and that men can -obtain the pardon of their sins by means of expending such a sum of -money in the purchase of this bull.—He said he believed the forgiveness -of sins could be obtained in the way mentioned, and that the Pope had -such authority in virtue of being the successor of the prince of the -apostles, to whom Jesus Christ had granted the keys of the kingdom of -heaven, and power to remit or to retain the sins of men. It is to be -supposed, however, continued he, that confession of sins is to be made -in order to this forgiveness. And in confession to whom can the penitent -go but to the minister of Christ, in order that they may instruct him -in the nature of repentance? To prevent him from deceiving himself, and -believing he has repented when he has not, it is necessary to show him -what are the signs of a sincere repentance; and when the priest finds the -penitent as he ought to be, then in virtue of the power given by Christ -to his ministers, they absolve him from his sins.—In answer to what he -said, I told him that I considered it to be the duty of man to confess -his sins unto God, as it is with him alone we have to do, and not with -one another; and that the Scripture assures us, that if we humbly and -sincerely confess our sins unto him, and beg forgiveness through the -Lord Jesus Christ, we shall obtain the mercy we ask for. I then said, -that I believed none could forgive sins but God only; and that as to -the power given to the apostle Peter, and also to the other apostles to -forgive the sins of men or to retain them, I conceived it to be a power -of doing this only in a certain way, namely, in the way corresponding -to the instructions which they had received from their divine Master. -I illustrated this by the case of an ambassador sent by his sovereign -with terms of peace to a neighbouring prince. The Ambassador, I said, is -authorized to make peace between the two nations, that is, to put an end -to the war or to continue it. He is not, however, at liberty to do this -in any way he chooses, but only in that way which the instructions of his -sovereign authorize. So was it, I continued, with the ambassadors whom -the Lord Jesus sent into the world; they were sent to proclaim and to -celebrate a peace between God and man, but they were to do so only in one -way, that is, in the way prescribed to them, and of which, I observed, we -shall presently speak. As to the superiority of the Apostle Peter, said -I, to which you refer, or to speak more properly, the superior honour -conferred upon him, it is easy to see in what it consisted, and how far -it extended. To him were promised the keys of the kingdom of heaven, and -also the power of remitting and retaining sins; this latter power was -also conferred upon the other Apostles, so that the difference, or the -superior honour conferred upon Peter, consisted in having the keys put -into his hands. Keys are for the unlocking of doors, that a free entrance -may be had to a place inaccessible before the gates were opened. Now, -said I, the Apostle Peter was honoured by his Lord, to open the gates -of the kingdom of heaven, in the first place unto the Jews, and which -he accordingly did in his sermon on the day of Pentecost, and by which -means three thousand entered the church of God at one rush. The same -individual was afterwards honoured _to open the door_ of faith unto the -Gentiles, by a special commission from heaven to that effect. Having -thus opened the gates of the kingdom of heaven unto the Jews, and also -unto the Gentiles, there was no farther use for these keys. The Apostles -of our Lord, in regard to authority in the church, were exactly upon a -level, none was superior and none was inferior. And now, I continued, -with regard to what we were speaking of before, namely, the forgiveness -of sins, I conceive the Apostles could do it only by making known the -message of peace and reconciliation to their fellow sinners, and by -declaring, in the name of their Master, to those who believed their -testimony, the remission of sins consequent upon their belief; and on the -other hand, they retained the sins of men, by declaring unto those who -disbelieved their testimony, that the wrath of God remained upon them. -Further, I said, regarding the successors of the Apostles, I conceived -that strictly speaking they had none, nor were there any required. In -their life time they exercised their authority, and fulfilled their -commission in the way I have stated. And knowing that they were not to -continue long upon the earth, and being desirous that these sacred truths -which they preached into men should always be held in remembrance, they -committed them to writing, and these writings, through the blessing of -God, remain unto this day. The Apostles, therefore, have made their own -writings their successors, and thus, through them, they continue still -to speak to mankind; they still publish the message of reconciliation, -and whose sins soever _they_ remit, they are remitted, and whose soever -sins _they_ retain, they are retained. I remarked a little before, I -continued, that it was at their peril that the Apostles acted in any -other way in the forgiving and retaining of sins, and I now add, that -it is at the peril of men to receive the remission of sins in any other -way than in that which the Apostles taught. The great and eventful day -that awaits us all, will declare on what authority and foundation we have -enjoyed peace in this weighty affair. The precious stones, the gold and -the silver will stand the fire which is to try them, but the wood, the -hay, and the stubble shall be burned up. - -When I had finished the observations which I have now mentioned, my -friend took his turn to speak, and stated his mind upon these topics -with great clearness and eloquence to the following effect:—My dear Sir, -in regard to the explanation of the passage on which you have now given -your opinion, and also with regard to the explanation of the Scriptures -in general, I conceive our best and surest plan is to have recourse to -the uniform explanation and judgment of the church. If every one is -at liberty to form his own opinion of the meaning of Scripture, there -will be nearly as many opinions as there are individuals. Witness the -divisions which exist among the Protestants, in consequence of this -liberty which they take of explaining the Scripture, every one as appears -best to him. One believes a certain thing, another denies it, and a third -believes something different from both. Every truth in the Scripture has -thus been defended and opposed, and torn in pieces by this principle, -of every one explaining according to his own judgment and fancy. Under -these circumstances, what a consolation it is to have an authority to -which we can in all cases recur, and in whose decision we can rest -fully satisfied. This authority is _the church_,—which Jesus Christ has -invested with full power on all these points. In consequence of this, -the noble truths of our religion continue as they were in the beginning. -The judgment of the church has never varied upon them as it has done -among the Protestants, neither can it vary. We have the promise of Jesus -Christ that he will be with his church to the end of the world, and that -whatsoever shall be bound by its judgment upon earth, shall be bound also -in heaven, and that whatsoever shall be loosed by it on earth, shall be -loosed in heaven. My dear friend, here is our foundation, here is our -authority and consolation. The Catholic church has continued since the -days of the Apostles and has had an uninterrupted succession of Bishops, -from St. Peter until the present day. The Protestants cannot plead such -a succession. They are but a sect which left the church a century or two -ago, and still occupy a small portion of the world; whereas the Catholic -church, descending from the Apostles, has spread on every side, and its -doctrines have continued pure and uncorrupted from the beginning until -now, yea, and they will continue so until the end of the world, for Jesus -Christ has promised it. Here, my friend, is firm footing, and all else, -be assured, is quicksand and uncertainty. I was born a Catholic, and I -adhere to the religion of my country, and in which I was educated. It is -not, however, from the circumstance of being brought up in this religion -that I now adhere to it. No, Sir, on the contrary, when I came of age I -began to entertain doubts about our religion. Upon this, I set myself to -examine the subject with diligence and attention, and the result was a -thorough persuasion of its firm and unalterable foundation, and of the -beauty and grandeur of the structure. I look upon the Catholic religion, -therefore, with great delight and confidence. It appears to me like a -great and majestic river running through an extensive continent. On one -hand it makes its way, tumbling over rocks, yet uninterrupted in its -course by such impediments; again, it meets in its course with shelves -and dykes, and after being retarded a little by these hindrances it -breaks its way over, and then holds its noble and majestic course until -it reaches the ocean, enriching and beautifying every place through -which it flows. Such is our religion, and I clasp it to my bosom and -esteem it my best and only treasure. - -When he had finished, I observed to him, that the plan of the Church -explaining all doubts and difficulties regarding the meaning of every -part of Scripture, and of our resting in that decision, had the -appearance of possessing many advantages. How desirable is it that we -should be able to set our minds at rest on subjects of such importance, -and wherein a mistake or an error might be attended with very serious -consequences. But there appears to me, I said, a great difficulty to be -got over, before we can allow our minds to enjoy the ease and confidence -referred to, by resting in an infallible interpreter. The difficulty -I speak of is this: How shall I know that the church has indeed the -authority you speak of? If I were fully satisfied that the church -possesses this authority, I would, I assure you, fully confide in it. -You remember that, in a former conversation, you promised to prove your -positions regarding the Catholic Church with evidence as satisfactory -as the proof, that the three interior angles of a triangle are equal to -two right angles. Now, I continued to observe, I cannot see evidence for -believing that the church has the power in question, and I cannot receive -it as a doctrine until I be convinced. On what then do you build this -doctrine? - -I build this doctrine, said he, in the first place, on the promises of -Jesus Christ to his church, which are these: “whose sins soever ye remit, -they are remitted, and whose soever sins ye retain they are retained; -whatsoever ye shall bind on earth shall be bound in heaven; and again, I -will be with you always even unto the end of the world.” In the second -place, said he, from the consideration that the promises of Jesus to -his church, must necessarily have been fulfilled, I maintain that the -church has been guided by the Spirit in the manner I have stated, and in -consequence thereof, she has held the same doctrine from the days of the -Apostles until the present time. - -I differ from you, I replied, regarding the meaning and application of -the passages you have quoted from the Scriptures. But as you will have -the church to explain them, and as the church does actually explain them -as you have stated, we cannot therefore meet each other here, on open -ground. Let us then pass on to the other fundamental principle which -you hold, namely, the fulfilling of this promise in the way you have -explained it. How then do you prove to me, that the church has never -varied in her doctrines?—I prove, said he, the constancy and stability -of the church by the uniform voice of ecclesiastical writers, from the -days of the Apostles until now. No sooner did any pastor or bishop broach -any new doctrine, than his own flock, and the whole body of Christians, -every where raised the cry against him. Errors now and then arose, -continued he, and errors too of great consequence, but in this manner -they were publicly reprobated, and the individuals who had erred were -thereby brought to repentance, or else expelled the church.—As I wished -to drive this subject to its proper issue, and to fix upon the very -point upon which we differed, and which point it was necessary to settle -before we could proceed farther with any advantage, I put this question -to him: Do you maintain that the writers upon ecclesiastical affairs, -from the days of the Apostles downward, have all held the same opinions -regarding the interpretation of Scripture? Not exactly so, said he, for -there have been differences among them regarding the interpretation of -several passages of Scripture; and he here instanced several opinions of -St. Augustine, St. Cyprian, &c. But so far, continued he, as respects -what are strictly and properly called the _doctrines_ of the church, I -maintain that there is no difference among them, although in points of -discipline they are not all agreed. You hold then, said I, do you, that -so far as the _doctrines_ of the Roman Catholic church are concerned, -the writers we speak of do not vary? I expected he would here give an -answer at once in the affirmative, but he withdrew a little farther, and -said that he would not affirm to the question I had put, as to _all_ -that these writers had said; but so far only, as they had given their -_testimony_ to the doctrines in question as existing among them, he -wished to speak, and not as to their own opinions of these doctrines. -He here stated some _opinions_ of the fathers, and said, that so far as -they acted as _witnesses_ to what existed among them, and in the ages -previous to their time, thus far and no further were their writings to be -considered respecting the argument in hand. I here reminded him by the -way, of what I had before urged, but which he did not concede, namely, -that there were a great variety of opinions among the Catholics as well -as among the Protestants. I stated, at the same time, that I did not -urge this particularly as an objection to their system, but merely as -a counterpart to his objection to the Protestants, arising from their -differences. I then put the question: Do you maintain then, that so far -as ecclesiastical writers have given testimony to the doctrines of the -church, they do not vary, nor can vary?—Yes, said he, I do maintain -that position.—I then replied, I am glad we have come at length to this -one definite point, and I am glad, also, that you have excluded the -opinions of the writers on these subjects, and that you rest solely on -them as witnesses. I now see the point you maintain, and here we will -come to issue. My answer, for the present, shall be short. This position -which you maintain, is a position which I believe to be insupportable, -and which, in consequence, I deny. Here, then, let the subject for the -present rest; we have got a great length in seeing the very line which -divides us, and we have now the matter free of mystery. It is reduced to -a mere historical question. We shall, therefore, decide it as such on -some future occasion, when I shall take in hand to prove that the church -_has varied_. - -We have now seen, said I, the very point in which we differ, let us also -see where we agree. I believe, said I, that all mankind are sinners, -and stand in need of a Saviour. I believe that God pitied our race, and -sent his only begotten Son to seek and to save the lost. I believe that -the Lord Jesus Christ is the true Mediator and Saviour of mankind, and -that there is no other name under heaven by which we can be saved. I do -sincerely believe, I continued, in the Lord Jesus Christ as my Lord and -my Redeemer; and, I trust, also that I desire to know all his precepts -and instructions, and to conform my thoughts, and words, and actions -thereunto.—I then said to him, is not this exactly what you believe?—He -said it was so. Well then, I replied, may not we look upon each other as -fellow disciples, and may not we each expect, if we hold on, that the -Lord will give unto us both that crown of righteousness which he hath -promised to them that love him? He here seemed to hesitate, and did not -give a direct reply. You see that I was here touching upon the point -of there being no salvation out of _their_ church.—He said that what I -had stated regarding my faith was well, but that there was something -farther necessary, and upon saying so, he seemed to digress a little, -or, at least, not to speak directly to the point in hand. My dear Sir, -said I, pray let us settle this point. Have the goodness to speak your -mind freely; speak out, what do I still want, what more must I believe, -than what I have stated, in order to obtain eternal life. Did not the -Lord Jesus himself concede eternal life to those who believed what I -have told you in my belief? And did not the Apostles, according to the -power invested in them, remit the sins of those who believed and acted in -the manner I have stated? He then said something about the necessity of -believing the church, in order to salvation.—Can I not look for salvation -without this? said I.—Take care that you do not put obstacles in the way -to heaven, which the God of our salvation has not put. Strait is the -gate, and narrow is the way which leadeth unto life, pray then, do not -with stumbling blocks fill up this narrow way. Let the Lord Jesus and his -Apostles guide us in this, and in all matters that concern the kingdom of -God. - -Upon arriving here we found our time was gone, and that we had been -upwards of two hours in a very close conversation. As my friend could -stop no longer, we broke up our conversation at this point, he still -stating it as necessary to salvation, that I should believe the church. -When we thus dropped our disputation, he arose, and as I accompanied him -out, he threw his arms around me, and said, “We shall yet, I trust, be -united together, and companions in our Lord Jesus Christ.” - -I have lengthened my account of this interview, perhaps unnecessarily, -and it may be till I have tired you. By way of excuse, I would say that -I felt real interest in the conversation, and my endeavour has been to -make you participate with me, as I believe what interests and pleases one -of us is not unpleasing, nor without interest, to the other. It often -happens, however, that what interests us in a conversation or narrative -loses its effect upon others by the imperfect way in which we repeat it. -In the present instance, this is very likely the case, but I leave you to -judge. - -I have only to remark, before I conclude, that the point in dispute -between us is now reduced to narrow limits; and it was my main endeavour -to bring it to this bearing, nor was he averse to it. He is, as I said -at the outset, a man of good talents, and reasons clearly. I do not -promise to you that we shall be able to set the subject at rest in -our next conference, notwithstanding all the accuracy and honesty of -my good friend. You know there are many things which prevent such an -anticipation. I shall, however, endeavour to prove to him, in the first -place, that the church _at_ Rome, and other churches in the days of -the Apostles, held the doctrines and followed the practices which are -contained in the New Testament. With these doctrines I shall then compare -the doctrines of the church of Rome in the present day; and if I can show -a disparity between them, I think impartiality should give the judgment -in my favour, even without entering upon ecclesiastical history; as I -shall thus have proved that the church _has varied_, and hence that those -passages he referred to, must be misinterpreted by Romish writers, and -that they do not apply to their church, whose infallibility must, of -course, fall to the ground, agreeably to the principles stated in the -preceding conversation. Should, however, justice not speak out in my -favour, I shall pass on to show, from ecclesiastical writers, that the -doctrines of the Church of Rome differ in the present day from what they -were in the first and second centuries, and even later. By this means I -hope to arrive at the same conclusion, as in the way before mentioned, -and thus to disprove my friend’s position of the church never having -varied, by the very means by which he maintains it. This I conceive, -is the only way of managing the controversy between the Catholic and -the Protestant. Until you settle this point about the authority of the -church, you can do nothing effectually. If you cite, for instance, a -passage of Scripture to disprove any one of the doctrines of the Catholic -church, you are met immediately with the interpretation which the church -puts upon that passage, and there is an end of it. If you should allege -that the passage plainly and evidently means something very different -from each interpretation, then you are reminded that our judgement is -weak and erring, and that the judgment of the church is infallible. So -that to whatever hand you turn, you never can get out of this circle. -It is therefore necessary to demolish this outwork entirely. What I -have said of course applies chiefly to the mode of reasoning with those -who are thorough-paced in their theological arguments; but with regard -to others, you can attack them in any particular part, and carry your -argument forward on the principles of common sense, and by the doctrines -of Scripture taken in their plain and obvious meaning. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 1st June, 1824._ - -In the conclusion of my letter of the 1st of March, I noticed that this -city had been taken possession of by the Spanish army. It is still in -their possession, and there does not appear, at present, any immediate -prospect of a change in this respect. You will not expect from me -political news under present circumstances, and I pass on to note what -little affairs have come under my observation during these two or three -months past, respecting that kingdom which cannot be moved by the strifes -of men, nor the clangour of war. - -My letter to Mr. H. of 25th March would inform you of the protection -which the Spanish General granted to our schools. In consequence of that -encouragement, I resolved to remain her some time longer, in order to put -our establishment upon as sure a footing as possible. Nothing material -occurred in our school upon the arrival of the Spaniards, except the -losing of some of our scholars. The cause of this was the dread their -parents were in, lest their children should be seized on their way to -and from the school by the recruiting parties, who not infrequently take -some of the bigger boys as they find them in the street, in order to make -drummers of them. Our number, in consequence of this, is less than it -was about three months ago. In these times, when party spirit runs high, -we endeavour in our school to maintain a strict neutrality in words and -actions. We found some difficulty during the first days, after our change -of rulers, to establish this neutrality among the children themselves. -They would, from time to time, be forming themselves into sides, and -calling each other respectively Patriots and Goths. We have in the -school, children whose parents have taken opposite sides in this contest, -and as might naturally be expected, the children on the one hand and on -the other have imbibed the sentiments of their parents. We succeeded at -length in putting an end to these strifes among the children, and we now -all live in peace and unity. The government holds out to us no immediate -encouragement, and on the other hand, it never in any shape interferes -with our operations. On the whole, this school is going on very well. The -children are making progress in their learning, and advancing in moral -dignity; and some are lisping out, and some are reading with readiness, -the gracious words which proceeded out of the mouth of our blessed -Saviour, as they were taken down by the Holy Spirit. I may add, that we -are not losing the estimation of our friends here, but on the contrary, -if I mistake not, we are gaining more friends in both parties, and making -advances in public confidence. - -About three weeks ago I was on the eve of leaving this place, and had, -as on a former occasion, every thing packed up with that intention. I -had indeed resolved to sail for Guayaquil with the first ship, and was -inquiring for a passage. My reasons for doing so were quite solid. My -salary, as I suppose you know, is paid by the government. Under present -circumstances, the payment of the troops is the first thing attended -to, and to procure funds sufficient for this purpose, requires great -exertions in the present exhausted state of this place. To obtain this -supply, all the ordinary sources of revenue are laid hold of, and -pretty heavy contributions also are laid on the inhabitants to make up -deficiencies. This being the case, there was no prospect of my obtaining -any supplies, more especially as persons in the immediate employ of the -government, and who have salaries assigned them, could obtain nothing. -To make certain, however, I made application, and found it impossible -to obtain any thing, on account of the circumstances mentioned. As you -know I have no supplies but what my own hands provide me with, it became -an imperative duty to remove when my usual resources were dried up. -These were my reasons for going, and I suppose you will consider them -sufficient, especially if you take into consideration the high price of -all kinds of provisions in this city. Sugar for instance, which grows -and is manufactured within a few miles of the city, is now selling at -twenty-pence and two shillings the pound. - -Being ready for setting off, as above mentioned, and having given notice -to the children to that effect, I waited only till the following day to -send my luggage down to Callao, and to follow it immediately. Whilst I -was thus prepared, my good friend the clergyman, whom I have frequently -mentioned in my former letters, called upon me, and said that he believed -I would not go away yet, notwithstanding all my preparations. I smiled at -what he said, and replied, that my going appeared very certain and very -near too, for I intended to send my luggage to Callao next morning.—Well, -I do not think you will go away for all that, said he.—Upon my asking -him what reasons he had for saying so, he stated, that he had been -speaking with some of the parents of the children, and that they had -expressed to him their concern at my going, and said they would very -willingly contribute what they could, and would speak to some others who -had children in the school, and that they hoped by that means something -might be raised, which might, in a great measure, remove the reasons I -had stated for my going. Whilst my friend and I were talking to this -effect, a person came in who had a son at school, and repeated the same -things. I replied, that I felt very much obliged by the confidence they -reposed in me, and for their friendly interference for my continuance -in this place. I noticed also that I had candidly stated my reasons for -going away at this time, and that though they had kindly proposed a way -of removing these difficulties, yet I felt a delicacy in calling on -the parents of the children on my own behalf. They replied to this by -saying that they would speak to some of their friends upon the subject, -and that in fact they had spoken to some of those of most influence who -were very cordial and anxious in the matter; and my friend the clergyman -proposed to write notes to others of the parents, in his own name, to -remove any delicacies I might have as to the application. Upon seeing -so much interest taken in this matter, I recognized the hand of God -in it, and agreed to their proposal. Their plan has been carried into -effect, and this has the Lord opened, as it were, a window in heaven, and -let down before me a sheet full of supplies. In this same manner, I may -say, has the Lord provided for me during the years of my pilgrimage in -this foreign land. He has set a table before me, he has anointed my head -with oil, he has made my cup to run over. Surely goodness and mercy will -follow me all the days of my life, and O may I dwell in the house of the -Lord for ever. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 15th July, 1824._ - -Your very acceptable favour of 6th January last, came safely into my -hands on the 22d ultimo, and I have now the pleasure of writing you a few -lines in reply. Your notice of the progress of Bible Societies in France -is very interesting, and it is not less so what you mention regarding the -circulation of the Holy Scriptures in Egypt, and in Jerusalem, the city -of the great King. To whatever quarter we turn our eyes, we behold the -word of God silently making its way into the hands of men of every nation -and of every language, saying unto all, Fear God, and give glory to his -name, for the day of his merciful visitation is come. The strains of the -Bible Society remind us of the song of the heavenly messengers upon their -announcing the Advent of our great Deliverer. The language of both is, -“Glory to God in the highest, and on earth, peace, good will towards men.” - -It affords me much satisfaction to observe the interest which the Society -takes on behalf of South America, and I hope the day is coming when we -shall be more sensible of your favours to us, and when we shall join -together in grateful acknowledgment of your godly benevolence. Have the -goodness to convey my sincere thanks to the Committee, for the readiness -with which they have acceded to my request respecting the translating -and printing of a part of the Holy Scriptures into the ancient Peruvian -tongue. I thought I should, by this time, have been able to give you a -very favourable account of the progress of this work, but we are subject -here to sad vicissitudes, for war rages in the land, and of late the -sword has reached unto our very soul. How long we shall be visited with -this scourge I cannot tell. The Judge of all the earth will do right, and -it is our duty to submit to his holy will. - -The translation of the whole of the New Testament into the Peruvian -language was finished about two months ago. The Gospel by Luke has been -very carefully revised and corrected by four individuals, one of whom -is a Clergyman, another is a Theological Tutor in one of the colleges -of this city, and the other two are of the medical profession. These -four, along with the gentleman who made the translation, went over this -gospel verse by verse, with great care. The present corrected version, -therefore, is the joint work of _five_ persons, and I trust it may be -relied on with some confidence. It has not yet been put to the press, -for we have not had a printing press in Lima during these four months -past. There are two indifferent ones in Callao, one of them in the castle -and the other under its guns, but I have not yet been able to ascertain, -since I received your letter, whether any thing can be done at these or -not. In my next I shall inform you more particularly upon this subject, -and if the printing shall be then begun, I shall forward you a copy of -the first sheet. - -In my letter to Mr. Ronneberg of 29th March last, I noticed the safe -arrival of the Grecian in Callao, bringing the 2,500 Spanish New -Testaments addressed to me, and the 1,592 addressed to Mr. Lynch. Of the -six boxes which came to me, I have sent two to Guatemala by a favourable -opportunity which offered. I have also sent one to Arequipa, and one to -Truxillo, and two yet remain on hand. A few weeks ago I received from -Captain Robson, of the Sesostris, two boxes of New Testaments, (Paris -edition,) containing about 500 each. These he received, I believe, from -the Merchants’ Bible Society, or from some other of the Societies in -London. - -In the letter already referred to, I noticed what had taken place with -regard to 50 New Testaments, which I sent to Truxillo some time ago. I -mentioned the impossibility of getting them conveyed to Truxillo under -the circumstances then existing in that place, and that in consequence -they were carried to Guayaquil. I have since received a very pleasing -letter regarding their reception in that place, of which the following is -an extract. - -“It is with the utmost pleasure I sit down to write these few lines to -you, to inform you of the hunger and thirst after the word of God in -this part of the world. You may remember, that when I last left Lima you -gave me a box containing Tracts and Testaments, for Dr. O’Donovan in -Truxillo, but from the then existing state of the country it was out of -my power to forward the above mentioned box to Truxillo, and as we were -not allowed to enter that port, we were consequently obliged to proceed -to Guayaquil. I wrote you from that place, saying, that I was bound for -the coast of Mexico, but as affairs would not permit it, I made a trading -voyage to Jipijapi, Monte Cristi, and the Bay of Caracas. But before -leaving Guayaquil some one got knowledge of my having these Testaments, -and the demand was so great, that it was almost out of my power to save -any of them, although it was my intention to do so, for the other above -mentioned parts; and as I had no likely opportunity of forwarding them -to Mr. O’Donovan, I thought it best to circulate them, and not to let -such a treasure lie hid in darkness; and I am convinced that it is in -general considered as a treasure; for with pleasure have I seen, in -passing through the streets of Guayaquil, not once or twice, but mostly -every day, the shopkeepers, and the poor people who have stalls, read in -the blessed Gospel of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ. If I had had ten -times as many, I am persuaded I could have sold them all. On my arrival -in this port, (Monte Cristi, latitude 3° south) I had no Testaments, but -a few tracts, and some of the instructions of the Lancasterian system of -teaching; I gave the latter to different school-masters, and likewise a -few tracts along with them. A day or two after it was known that I had -tracts on board, it was astonishing, but at the same time pleasing, to -see both old and young coming after me in the street, and to where I -lived, requesting me either to sell or give them one of each kind. There -was one tract in particular, which, to my knowledge, was sent twenty -leagues to a curate, an acquaintance of mine, and on my going to some of -the inland towns, which I had occasion at times to do, there was always -particular inquiry for Tracts and New Testaments. I had once, about four -years ago, distributed a few Testaments in Monte Cristi, one or two of -which I saw this time. Such is the thirst after the word of God, that the -Governor and two or three more, requested me as a particular favour, -that I would leave a New Testament I had for my own use, until I should -return, and begged and even offered money, so that I would bring either -the New Testament or the whole Bible on my return. The Governor, after -reading the rules of the Lancasterian plan of teaching, gave orders in my -presence to some of the school-masters to conform to some of the rules -as near as they could. He seems to be a young man very much inclined to -forward any thing that tends to promote the education of youth. At this -moment I am surrounded with children requesting tracts, but as my stock -is small, I am very particular to whom I give them, making every one read -a sentence or two before they get a tract.—It gives me infinite pleasure -to be thus employed in distributing the word of God to those that hunger -and thirst after righteousness; and after the fatigues of the day, I feel -refreshed to be thus employed.” - -The information contained in the above extract is very interesting, and -I trust many other instances will be witnessed upon this continent, of a -sincere desire to possess, and to read the Holy Scriptures. I shall take -care to seize the first opportunity of sending a supply of New Testaments -to Guayaquil and parts adjacent. It often occurs to me that it might -prove very useful to make journeys through various parts of this country, -in order to dispose of the Scriptures to the best advantage, and to the -greatest extent possible. I felt much inclined to employ a person in whom -I have confidence, in such journies, but did not like to do so at your -expense without orders, and my own funds at present cannot afford it.—I -have as yet received no answer to my letter to the Viceroy, and am quite -uncertain as to the time I remain here. I had almost forgot to mention to -you the safe arrival of the parcel containing the Brief View, in Spanish. -Many copies of this have already been circulated, and they have produced -a good effect. - -I conclude, my dear Sir, by praying that an abundant measure of the Holy -Spirit may be poured out upon yourself, and upon all your associates. - - * * * * * - - _Lima, 1st September, 1824._ - -Many feelings, my dear friend, rush upon my mind on the present occasion. -I shall, at once, give you to understand something of the number and the -nature of these, by telling you,—that I have just now shut up my house, -have taken leave of the children and of several warm friends, and go down -immediately to Callao, to embark for Truxillo and Guayaquil; and from the -latter place I intend to go to Bogotá; and thence onward from one place -to another, until perhaps, and if the Lord will, I shall see you face to -face. In consequence of these things, as you may easily suppose, I have -my mind full of past, and of present, and of future objects. I think of -my parting from you more than six years ago; I think of the wonderful way -by which the Lord has preserved me, and led me, and blessed me in this -foreign land; I think of the goodness of God in having allowed me to drop -a seed here and a seed there in this continent, which appears a world -of itself; I think of the affectionate parting I have this day had with -many warm friends, and who are mostly priests, and of their sincere and -earnest entreaties for my speedy return to them; and further, I think of -the prospect of sowing the word of God on my journey,—of the pleasure, if -such be the will of our Saviour, of seeing again all my dear brethren and -friends in England,—of spending a few months with you in endeavours to -forward the cause of our Redeemer in South America; and finally, I think -of parting from you once more, and of returning again to this quarter of -the world, to spend in it the remaining days of my life in seeking its -welfare. - -It is time to tell you the immediate cause of these projected movements. -I say the _immediate_ cause, for I suppose you know that these are not -new arrangements. The reason, then, of my setting off at the present time -is, because I conceive it the most favourable time I am likely to have of -reducing these arrangements to practice. You know how the war rages here, -and how it defeats every attempt to forward the education of youth, and -the promoting of general improvement. What I have said applies to Peru in -general, but more particularly to this city, where the sword has truly -reached to the heart. We are here, I may say, in a beseiged city, having -the enemy on all sides. Guerilla parties surround the city by land, and -have several times come in at night, and carried off people and property; -and on the other hand the port of Callao is actually blockaded by the -Peruvian squadron under Admiral Guise. The distress which prevails in -this city, in consequence of every thing being thus at a stand, is _very -great_, and it is augmented by heavy contributions. This, perhaps, in -former times, was, without exception, the richest city in the world, -but _now_, I may say with equal certainty, that it is the poorest. The -luxury and dissipation which prevailed, in consequence of this abundance -of wealth, may be easily imagined; and I have often thought upon that -passage in the 18th chapter of the Revelation, and have seen it applied, -I think, to our case, “How much she hath glorified herself, and lived -deliciously, so much torment and sorrow give her.” - -Until, therefore, some change take place here, nothing more can be done -than has already been done. Our school goes on, and I may say, with -as much prosperity as could be expected under the circumstances above -mentioned. The number of scholars has decreased from 230 to about 200. -There are two causes for this decrease; the one is, that the bigger boys -are afraid to go out lest they should be taken up by the recruiting -parties; and the other is, the real poverty which exists, and which -prevents many parents from sending their children, as they are unable to -procure them shoes and clothes to enable them to appear decently among -others. Whilst these two causes exist, the number may diminish, perhaps, -still more, but the school will continue to maintain itself, and to -support its character, I expect, in the progress of those who attend. -There are two masters in it, who are well instructed in the plan, and -the whole is under the direction of my good friend, the clergyman, of -whom I have often spoken to you. What I have said applies to the model -or central school. There is also another school in the city on the same -plan, with about eighty scholars, which, I hope, will also continue to go -on well, though subject, of course, to the same disadvantages. - -I have thought, then, that I was called upon to seize this time as the -most suitable for visiting other parts of this Continent, and for the -objects I have in England. My principal business upon my journey will be -the circulation of the Scriptures in the different places I may visit, -and I hope that something may be done in this way, so as to make my -journey not unprofitable. Of my progress on my road, and in my objects, -I shall endeavour to inform you from time to time. I shall only farther -observe, in regard to my intentions, that my route, &c. will be a good -deal determined by the circumstances which may occur in the way by which -the Lord may lead me. - -These movements have, I trust, been entered upon in the fear of God, and -after mature deliberation, and fervent supplication to the Father of -lights, who has promised to guide in judgment those who seek his face in -sincerity. - - * * * * * - - _Guayaquil, 5th October, 1824._ - -I arrived in this place a few days ago, and seize the earliest -opportunity to state to you the cause of my being here. You already know -that the single object which I have in view in South America, is the -promoting of the kingdom of our Lord Jesus Christ. There are, of course, -various ways of doing this, and I have thought it best to allow myself -to be guided in the manner of doing it, by the various circumstances and -occasions which the providence of God opens up to me from time to time. -The two things to which I have more particularly given my attention -all along are, the education of youth, and the circulation of the Holy -Scriptures. In regard to the latter, with which you are more immediately -connected, I have stated to the Society, at different times, my desire -of forwarding their work in this quarter, in every way which lies in my -power. I have also informed the Society, on various occasions, as to -the progress of their work in this continent. It has afforded me much -satisfaction to observe the interest taken by you all for supplying South -America with the sacred volume, and to read the repeated assurances you -have communicated to me of your desire to carry forward this object in -the most extensive and effectual way possible. The confidence I reposed -in the Society in regard to this country, induced me to commence the -translation of the New Testament on your account into the Quichua, or -ancient language of Peru, and the answer I received from you some time -ago, has shown me that I was not mistaken in regard to your views. - -The same confidence as to the views of the Society, and a hope of being -able to do something in the way of circulating the word of God, in places -not yet visited, or but very partially, by this messenger of peace, has -induced me to come to this city at the present time. It is my intention -to set out from this place in two or three days for Bogotá, the capital -of Colombia. In my way I shall pass through Riobamba, Ambato, Tacunga, -Quito, and Popayan, all of which are populous cities, and where I expect -to sell a considerable number of copies of the Spanish New Testaments. - -The present state of the war in Lima renders abortive every attempt to -forward education there, and very little can be done in the circulation -of the Scriptures by sale, on account of the very great pressure of -the war, which has reduced the city to much distress. Under these -circumstances, I thought the best time I could find for visiting the -quarters above mentioned, and perhaps for visiting my native land, was -the present. I set out then from Lima with this intention, and to perform -the part of an agent of the British and Foreign Bible Society. I am not -sure, but I may feel myself under the necessity of petitioning you for my -_travelling expenses_. I never intended to charge you for any services -I might be honoured in doing for your Society, if possible to avoid it; -but the low state of my funds at present, on account of the war here, may -urge me to do what otherwise I should not have done. I mention this at -present, only in case it should be necessary. The prosperous turn the war -has lately taken in Peru, encourages me to hope that what is due to me by -the government of that country will be paid in due time, and in that case -my little services shall cost you nothing. - -I left Lima on the 5th ultimo, and at that time the supply of New -Testaments, and of the four books of the Old Testament, printed with -a small type, of which you wrote me, had not arrived. I had anxiously -looked for their arrival for some weeks before my coming away, as by -the date of your letter, I thought there was sufficient time for their -reaching that place. I was very sorry in not having been furnished with -this supply before entering upon my present journey, as I think the -volumes printed with the small type would have been very acceptable, and -the whole Bible also would have been equally so, as it has been often -sought for. I have just one Bible with me to show as I go along, by way -of specimen, in order to incite curiosity, and a desire to possess it, -when it may be supplied to all those places. This copy I bought in Lima -for this express purpose, and hope it will serve the end in view. I have -brought about 800 New Testaments with me, and in this place I have found -the supply you sent by the Grecian to Mr. Lynch, and which I thought had -gone to Chile. I am glad at finding these here, as it enables me to send -a quantity to Guatemala by an opportunity which offers from this place in -a day or two. The rest I will dispose of otherwise. I mentioned to you -some time ago, that I had sent two boxes to Guatemala of those which came -to me by the Grecian. I have however learned, that the vessel in which -they were sent had changed her destination, and that they have not yet -arrived at that place. The accidental finding, in this place, the cases -brought by the Grecian, enables me now to supply this deficiency, and -also to send by the same person a supply to California. As to the boxes -formerly sent, though they did not arrive at the destination intended, -I entertain no doubt of their safety, and of their being profitably -disposed of somewhere, and of which I expect to hear in due time. - -I shall now state to you what has occurred in the part of my journey -already performed. The first object I had in view, was to visit Truxillo, -where I expected to find my good friends who take so much interest in -the Peruvian translation of the New Testament, and who had laboured so -diligently to accomplish it. I accordingly embarked on board a vessel -bound for that place, and where I safely arrived in due time. I was sadly -disappointed in not finding my friends there as I expected. Not one of -them was to be found, nor could I ascertain with certainty where they -were, but heard that one had been seen going to one place and another to -another. The suddenness of their leaving Lima prevented us from making -any arrangements about our translation, and we had not even time to bid -each other adieu. The abruptness of our parting, rendered more severe my -disappointment in not finding them in Truxillo, where I intended to make -arrangements with them for carrying forward thin work during my absence. -I had brought from Lima the manuscript of the whole New Testament in the -Quichua language, together with the Gospel of Luke, thoroughly revised -and prepared for the press. I mentioned to you in my last, that I would -endeavour to carry your resolution into effect regarding the printing of -1,000 copies of this revised part. I mentioned also that all the printing -presses had been removed from Lima, but that two were to be found in -Callao, and that I would ascertain whether the work in question could be -done there. Upon enquiry, I found it could not. In consequence of this, -I wished to get the Gospel of Luke printed in Truxillo, and for that end -carried the MS. to that place, that it might be carried through the press -there. And in regard to the MS. of the other parts of the New Testament, -I expected that our friends, in their exile, might go on revising and -correcting it. All these plans, as you see, have been frustrated. I -therefore carefully packed up the whole MS. and addressing it to one of -our translators, gave it into the hands of an English gentleman going -to Lima, to be delivered according to the address, when the expulsion -of the Spaniards from Lima (which is soon expected) would enable our -friends to return. I also wrote a few lines explaining my wish regarding -the revising of the MS., and regarding the printing of the part already -revised. The English gentleman of whom I have spoken, has kindly offered -to advance all the money that may be necessary for carrying this into -effect. From these arrangements I expect that the work will be set agoing -again in the course of two, or at most three months from this date; for -according to the _present_ aspect of the war, the Spaniards will not be -able to continue longer in possession of Lima, although they may, and -probably will, retain the fortresses of Callao till a later period. - -Having touched upon this subject of the Spanish cause here, I cannot -forbear mentioning to you the singular interposition of Providence on -behalf of the cause of liberty in this quarter. On the 6th of August -last the two armies came in sight of each other at a place called -Junin, between Pasco and Tarma. The consequence was, that a battle took -place between the cavalry of the two parties. There were 1,200 of the -Spaniards and 800 of the Patriots. An eye witness says, “The concussion -was tremendous, as they came up to each other at full gallop. In a -quarter of an hour, upwards of 400 men lay dead upon the field, more than -three-fourths of whom were Royalists. All this havoc and slaughter was -caused by the lance and sword, principally by the former. Not a shot of -any description, was fired.” In a short time victory begin visibly to -declare for the Spaniards, and the General at the head of the patriot -cavalry was made prisoner. At this critical moment, by some scarcely -explained movement, the Spaniards got somehow into disorder, and began to -give way. This was followed up by the Patriots, and in a very short time -they obtained a complete victory. The whole of the Spanish army was, in -consequence of this defeat, struck with a panic, and by forced marches -endeavoured to get out of the way of the enemy as fast as possible. -Bolivar immediately advanced, and the Spaniards continued to flee before -him with all speed. On the 22d August, only 15 days after the battle, the -advanced guard of the patriot army entered Guamanga. Five of the finest -provinces of Peru thus fell into their hands in the short period of about -a fortnight. The Spanish army has been sadly reduced and dispirited by -their rapid retreat, and the army of Bolivar has increased in numbers and -in strength. I consider this to be _a deadly blow_ to the Spanish cause -in this quarter of the world, from which I think and hope they will never -recover. With this cause will terminate, I trust, the reign of oppression -and violence, of ignorance and fanaticism in Peru, and by which it has -been borne down for these three hundred years. So perish all tyranny and -ignorance from the earth! - -I should perhaps beg your pardon for having drawn your attention so long -to the concerns of war and of politics, as you are men of peace and of -no party, and your only occupation is speaking peace to them who are far -off and to them that are nigh. Still, however, you will remember that -the book whose circulation we are engaged in, detains our attention in -many places with the account of wars and revolutions. But you will say -that all these are related there merely from their being connected with -the grand moral and religious revolution of the world through that great -prophet who was to come. This is certainly a right view of the subject; -and motives of a similar nature, I trust, and not party nor malicious -principles, have induced me to detain you a moment upon the wars of this -quarter of the world. I firmly believe that the deliverance of this -country from bondage and oppression, and the mental emancipation of its -inhabitants, depend upon the success of this revolution. The Spaniards, -as is well known, have greatly impeded, not to say prohibited, the -progress of knowledge and of true religion in America. It is not easy -therefore, nor is it proper, to remain indifferent as to the issue of -this struggle. - -I now return to our work of peace, and to Truxillo. I wrote the Society -some time ago, of having found a useful and zealous co-labourer in -that city, and that I had forwarded to him from Lima a supply of New -Testaments. At the first he met with some difficulties, owing to the -ecclesiastical authorities of the place. These were at length overcome, -and he was allowed to commence the sale of the Scriptures publicly. -When he had obtained leave to do so, he printed an advertisement, and -posted it up in the public places of the town, intimating the sale. The -consequence was, that he had sold when I was there about 100 copies. He -had also written to his friends the Vicars in the provincial towns, but -he had not then, from the shortness of the time, received the answers -to his letters. When these arrive, he expects several orders for New -Testaments to be sent to the various towns in the department of Truxillo, -which contains a population of upwards of 300,000. In addition to this -mode of circulating the Scriptures, my friend informed me that he was -about to put in practice a method of lending the New Testaments in the -different houses which he is in the habit of visiting, and in others -which he intends to visit for that purpose. Our friend’s medical duties -give him a facility for carrying this into practice. He intends to lend -the New Testament for a day, or for two or three days, as circumstances -may direct, and to call again for it himself at the given time. Upon -calling for it, he says he will ask them if they wish to purchase it, and -if so, he will sell it at a price corresponding to the circumstances of -the individual; and if they do not wish it, he will take it with him and -lend it to some other, to whom in turn he will put the same question, -and thus sell it or take it with him, as circumstances require. You will -easily see that this way of doing will cost him a good deal of labour and -care, but he seems to count nothing of these, if in this manner he may be -the means of circulating the word of God, and of drawing the attention -of the people around him, to its all-important contents. As he makes all -his rounds on horseback, he will, I hope, be enabled fully to verify his -benevolent purpose. He showed me a pair of saddle-bags, which he told me -he had got made for the very purpose of always carrying about with him a -supply of New Testaments. He gave me one hundred dollars to account of -sales, which was rather more than what he had received. - -The next thing I have to notice in Truxillo, is, I conceive, of some -importance, and will prove, I trust, the means of greatly extending the -operations and diffusing the blessings of the British and Foreign Bible -Society. What I refer to is, the finding of an additional agent who -takes a lively interest in the diffusion of the Scriptures, and in every -other means by which his countrymen may be benefited. The individual -in question is a clergyman, and a man of rank in that order. He is -Vicar-general to the army, and possesses a considerable influence. His -residence, at present, is at Moche, a little village about four or five -miles from Truxillo, and of which place he is rector. This, however, is -only a temporary residence, during the occupation of his home by the -Spaniards, and from which, in consequence, he was obliged to flee. The -place of his nativity and of his permanent residence is in the province -and near the city of Arequipa, towards the southern extremity of Peru. -It is this circumstance in particular, that will render his services -valuable, as we have already an active agent in Truxillo. He intends to -return to his native province as soon as the course of the war will -permit. Arequipa is in the centre of a populous country, and he will -have an extensive field of operation. Another circumstance renders the -acquisition of this gentleman very valuable, and that is his thorough -knowledge of the Indian or Peruvian language, which is very extensively -spoken in that quarter. To this I add another feature in his character -of yet more importance, which is, his compassion for the oppressed and -degraded state of the indigenous population of Peru, and the lively -interest he takes in ameliorating their condition, by his representations -to the government upon the subject, and by his personal labours. No -individual I have yet met with in these countries, has offered himself -so decidedly and so heartily to promote the cause of your Society, as -this gentleman; and from all the circumstances I have mentioned, you -will see that his good will and his services must be considered a great -acquisition. - -I considered the time spent in visiting Truxillo abundantly recompensed -in meeting with this fellow-labourer, and I found, in this circumstance, -some relief from the disappointment I had met with in not finding there -the friends I had expected. My falling in too with that individual was -perfectly accidental, for I had no knowledge of such a one being in that -place. But then again we must remember, that “all chance is but direction -which we cannot see.” Blessed be God who leadeth us by ways _we_ know -not, but which _he_ knows, and which will lead us to the glorifying of -his name, when that is our object. I must not omit to give you the name -and address of our fellow-labourer. It is “Dr. Don Manuel Fernandez de -Córdova, Vicario General del Ejército del Peru, y Cura de Salamanca del -Obispado de Arequipa.” I have given you this address in Spanish to enable -you to write direct to our friend, should you feel so inclined. - -I shall now leave Truxillo, but before I go on board, shall just notice -a little incident. Truxillo is about six miles distant from Huanchaco, -which is the sea port town of that quarter. In going down to this port, -I happened to get a very bad horse, which soon becoming restive, I was -obliged to leave it at a house upon the road, and to walk down under a -burning sun. After I had walked more than half the way, a person came -riding up to me and offered me a horse, which of course I accepted. -He told me he had observed me on foot from a distance, and had pushed -forward to offer me assistance. Upon entering into conversation I found -my obliging friend was a peasant, belonging to a neighbouring village, -where he had a family to which he was returning. We spoke a little about -education in general, and of his family in particular. I learned from -him that he could read, and was anxious that his children should be well -instructed. I asked him if he had ever seen the New Testament, to which -he replied in the negative, and from less to more, he intimated to me -that he would be glad to purchase one if he could find it, for the use -of himself and of his children. When we arrived at Huanchaco, he would -accept of no remuneration for his kindness, and as I found my luggage -there not embarked, I brought him a New Testament and made him a present -of it, in return for his unsolicited and friendly attentions. He received -it most thankfully, and we parted. - -On the 24th we sailed for Guayaquil, but as we carried a gentleman with -us at the request of the government, we had to call at Paita to land -him there. We cast anchor in that port on the 26th, after sun-set, and -early next morning I went ashore to see the place, and took three New -Testaments with me. I went into a store near the landing-place, and -being invited, took a seat upon a bale of cotton. After some general -conversation, I opened my treasure, and offered the New Testaments for -sale at one dollar each, and in a few minutes they were bought. Some -little time after, I was asked if I had any more. I replied that I had, -but that they were in the ship. I immediately went on board, and just as -we had got our anchor up, a boat came along-side, in which I recognized -the person who had asked me for more New Testaments. He came on board -and bought two dozen, for which he paid me eighteen dollars. As we were -by this time under way, the boat had to return ashore without loss of -time, whilst we, with a most propitious gale, made for this port.—On the -evening of the 29th we cast anchor off the small town of Puná, on the -island of the same name. You will remember that this island is famous -in the conquest of Peru, by the Spaniards. According to the accounts of -it that remain, it seems to have been very populous at that time. It -is not so now. There is, on the whole island, only one little village, -namely, the one I have mentioned, and which does not contain above 200 -inhabitants. We landed at this little place for a pilot to conduct -us up the river. I took with me, as I had done at Paita, three New -Testaments. When we landed, we found some people on the beach, to whom -we communicated intelligence of the rapid progress of Bolivar. We were -invited into one of the houses, and after having talked a little upon -various subjects, I opened my casket and presented my New Testaments, -which they were all very curious to see. Whilst they were looking through -them, one of the neighbours came in. “Here!” said one who was examining -the New Testament, “here is a book that will tell you about the beginning -of the world, and a great many other things.” His friend replied, that he -cared very little about the _beginning_ of the world, but that he wished -to know something about the _end of it_. Upon hearing this, I told him -that the book he had in his hands was the very book that would suit him, -as it would inform him particularly about the end of the world. I sold -the three New Testaments in this same house, and as our captain had by -this time made arrangements with the pilot, we got on board again, and -set sail. On the following night (the 30th) we arrived at this place, at -eight o’clock. Before we cast anchor, an English gentleman came on board, -to whom I had a letter of introduction. He kindly invited me to his -house, where I am comfortably lodged, and from which I now write you. - -I intend to stop in this place only a few days, during which I shall -endeavour to dispose of as many New Testaments as I can, and in the way -that may be most profitable. I now close this letter, and shall inform -you of the success I meet with here, in my next communication. - - * * * * * - - _Guayaquil, 11th October, 1824._ - -My letter of the 5th current will inform you of the motives and objects -which have brought me to this place. It will also inform you of what -progress I have made in the circulation of the Holy Scriptures, and in -objects connected therewith, from my leaving Lima till my arrival in -this quarter. I proceed, therefore, to state to you the occurrences of -Guayaquil in reference to these matters. - -Some time ago, and of which I believe I informed you, I sent from Lima -twenty New Testaments to a Gentleman here, to be sold at one dollar -each, if opportunities should offer, of disposing of them among his -friends. This gentleman holds a principal situation in the government, -and had been recommended to me by a relation of his in Truxillo, as a -person desirous of doing good. Upon my arriving here, I called upon him, -and found him to be a person worthy of the honourable appellation just -mentioned. He told me he had disposed of the New Testaments, and he gave -me twenty dollars which he had received for them. - -As soon as I had reached this place, I mentioned to some persons that I -had a supply of New Testaments for sale, and in consequence I sold one -hundred and sixty-eight copies. After thinking for some time upon what -would be the speediest and most effectual way of disposing of the New -Testaments, it occurred to me that the best thing I could do would be -to print an advertisement, and to give notice of the sale by posting -these up in the public places of the different towns I pass through on -my journey. This, you will see, would at once draw the attention of the -_public_. The only objection that occurred to me was, that it would be -a kind of challenge to our opponents, or at least an intimation of our -hostile operations. This obstacle I kept in mind, but did not think -our adversaries would be able to make any effectual resistance. More -powerful, I believe, are those who are for us than those who are against -us. The encouragement to make such an attempt as this, arises from the -great and happy changes already effected by the revolution going on in -this country, and, I trust, now concluding. I could not have ventured -upon such a thing under the Spanish government. What is going forward in -these countries is truly a _revolution_ in every sense of the word. - -I accordingly wrote out an advertisement, and got it printed in the -government printing-office in this place. Translated into English it runs -thus: “To be sold in (_a_) the New Testament of our Lord Jesus Christ, in -one volume, well printed, and neatly bound, at the low price of _eight_ -rials. This sale will continue for (_b_) days only, and it is expected -that those who wish to procure for themselves this sacred code of our -Holy Religion, will improve the occasion now offered them.” As this -advertisement was intended not for this place alone, but for others also, -I left the blank (_a_) to be filled up with the pen to suit each place, -and the blank (_b_) I leave for the number _one_, _two_, or _three_, -as my time will permit, and as the importance of the town visited may -require. When these notices were finished, I caused some to be put up -in this place, saying that the sale would be for _three_ days only. In -a few minutes after putting them up, I enjoyed the great satisfaction -of seeing it produce much better effects than I had anticipated. At -_noon_ the notices were put up and at _one o’clock_ I had sold _fifteen_ -copies. In the next hour I sold _forty-seven_. In the course of an hour -and a half during the time the store was open in the afternoon, I sold -_one hundred and twelve_. Next day I sold 262 copies. The day following, -which was also one of the three days of sale, happened to be a festival -day held to celebrate the declaration of independence in this town four -years ago. The stores in consequence were all shut, and public business -suspended. Nevertheless, there were _eleven_ copies sold during a few -minutes before breakfast, when the store was open for some particular -purpose. To-day I set out on my journey to Quito, bu I may perhaps -sell some before I go, as I cannot go off before four o’clock in the -afternoon, having to sail up the river with the flood tide. - -The whole number disposed of in this place is 615, and for these I have -received 542 dollars 2 rials.—The greater part were sold one by one at -eight rials each, but sometimes I sold a dozen or two together, and in -that case sold them somewhat cheaper. To the number of copies already -mentioned, I add the 30 disposed of, as noticed in my last, and three -copies sold in Truxillo of those in superior binding, making in all -648 copies since the commencement of my tour. To the amount of monies -received in the same time as above, I add, what I received from Dr. -O’Donovan, from the gentleman here as previously mentioned, and for those -sold in Paita and Puná, and the three just noticed, making 153 dollars, -amounting in all to 695 dollars 2 rials. Of this sum, I have remitted 500 -dollars to Messrs. Cochran and Robertson, of Lima, with whom I keep my -accounts. This sum will be applied to carrying forward the translation -and printing of the Scriptures into the _Peruvian_ language, agreeably to -your resolution upon the subject, communicated to me some time ago. - -Need I add anything to the above by way of comment or observation? Is it -not most gratifying to see so many seeds sown in this town? Let us join -together in prayer, that He who causeth the rain to descend from heaven -to fertilize the ground, and to raise into fruit the puny efforts of man, -may cause his blessing to be upon the seed sown in this place. As it is -sown in weakness may it be raised in strength, and produce at least a -hundred fold. - -P.S.—_12th October._—Our boat did not sail yesterday, and thus gave me -the opportunity of adding 71 to the number of copies formerly mentioned, -and 71 dollars to account. - -The preceding sentence was written in the morning, and now, in the -afternoon, I add 52 copies more, making in all, in Guayaquil, 738. - - * * * * * - - _Guaranda, 25th October, 1824._ - -My last letter to you was written in Guayaquil on the 12th instant. On -that occasion I noticed that I had taken that freedom with you in regard -to writing, which we often take with our friends without the danger or -the thought of offending on the one hand or on the other. The letter -referred to was short and could not well be longer from the circumstances -in which I was then placed. Before I had finished it, the master of -the canoe in which I was to leave Guayaquil, had knocked at the door -according to appointment, at four o’clock in the morning. Although, -however, that letter was short, I did not consider that I had left you -uninformed as to the circumstances that had occurred during my journey -from Lima to Guayaquil, as well as those that had occurred in the place -last mentioned. I wrote upon that subject two letters of some length, to -the British and Foreign Bible Society, detailing these matters with some -degree of minuteness. Of these two letters I requested Mr. B. to forward -you copies, and doubt not that such will be forwarded to you immediately -upon their arrival. - -In the two letters referred to, I stated the measures I had taken in -circulating the Scriptures in Guayaquil, and the unexpected and happy -results which followed in the sale of 738 copies of the New Testament. -It was gratifying, I assure you, to see in this manner almost the whole -city come together to hear the word of God, and it was not less so, to -pass along the streets and to count one, two, three, a dozen perhaps, -diligently engaged in reading their New Testaments. Who could pass along -under such circumstances, in any other frame than that of thanksgiving -and prayer?—thanksgiving to God for having disposed so many to attend -to the things which belong to their everlasting peace, and which I may -say, have been hitherto hid from their eyes,—and prayer, that the eyes of -their understanding might be enlightened, that they might be turned from -darkness to light, and might enjoy that inheritance which the Lord hath -prepared for them that love him. Nor could I feel otherwise, nor withhold -from expressing those feelings, as I walked over the spot where sin has -deposited his spoils won in that place. The small and the great are -there. My prayer to God was, that through means of the word of life then -circulated, many from that spot might, at the voice of the Archangel, -awake to life and everlasting glory. - -We read in the sacred page upon a certain occasion, some thousands of -years ago, when the sons of God came to present themselves before him, -Satan came also among them. The same seems to have been his practice -in Jerusalem, in Antioch, in Philippi, as well as upon other occasions -of ancient and modern date. That he was not absent on this occasion in -Guayaquil, we may _a priori_ be assured of. That he was successful, -however, I have not yet learned. I did, indeed, overhear that some -priest had said something against the reading of the New Testament, -but I had some suspicion that the information was not quite correct. -As a counterpart to this, several priests and friars bought of the New -Testaments. At one time, I think there were _five_ friars in the store -at one time to purchase, and one of these took _thirteen_ copies. At -another time, a friar, who had bought a New Testament, came afterwards -inquiring very anxiously for the whole Bible, and was much disappointed -upon learning that there was none. I told him that some two months after, -some Bibles might be expected, and that as only 50 copies were ordered, -he had better put down his name if he wished to secure one for himself. -Upon my telling him so, he immediately subscribed for _two_ copies. -This person told me that all the friars in his convent had bought New -Testaments, and that they were all highly pleased with them. It is really -encouraging to see the word of God circulate in this quarter with little -or no opposition.—I may add further regarding this matter, that I was -upon very good terms with the rector of Guayaquil during the few days I -remained there. I paid him a visit, accompanied by a friend to introduce -me, and next day I received a very courteous visit from him in return, -accompanied by the ecclesiastic next in rank to himself. He has, besides, -given me two letters of introduction, warmly recommending me to his -friends in Quito. Do not all these things, my dear friend, lay us under -obligations to give thanks unto him in whose hands are the hearts of all? -And are not such occurrences calculated to encourage us to labour in -this sacred cause and to ask of the Lord _liberal things_ according to -his promise? I am persuaded you so feel, and so act, but still it is not -unnecessary to remind you of these matters, to stir up your pure mind by -way of remembrance, and thus to add line upon line. Let us then continue -instant in prayer, that the Lord would pour out his blessing upon this -country, already white unto harvest. - -A little after four o’clock on the morning of the 14th, I got into the -canoe which was to conduct me from Guayaquil to Babahoyo. The river -Guayaquil is navigable at all seasons as far as the latter place, a -distance of about 40 miles, and in the rainy season, when the river is -high, boats pass some 15 miles farther up. The navigation is performed -in balsas, and in large and small canoes. The small canoes are made of a -single tree hollowed out, and the large ones are built like our boats, -and capable of carrying several tons, but made in the shape of the small -canoes. It was in one of the large ones I took my passage to Babahoyo. It -is in general by no means a pleasant voyage that is made between these -two places. On the one hand, the heat is very great; and on the other, -the mosquitos are numerous and active. The effects arising from the -bite of this troublesome insect are still, at the distance of more than -a week, very visible on my hands, and also on my legs, where they were -defended by the stocking only. On the first day, owing to the excessive -heat, I felt very unwell, but enjoyed good health on the following day. -On this occasion I experienced from some of my fellow-passengers those -friendly and soothing attentions which adorn the female character, and -which, on several occasions, I have seen exhibited in regard to myself -and to others during my residence in this country. We were nearly three -days in our passage. The river _abounds_ with alligators. I might almost -say, it is _full_ of them. Great numbers lie basking on the banks with -their horrible mouths wide open, and upon coming close up to them they -plunge into the river, and swim about like so many logs floating around -you. At one time I counted, in a very short distance, all at one view, -on one side of the river, to the number of forty, and at another time I -saw twenty, close together. Very few are found at or below Guayaquil, as -the water is salt for some miles above the town. In the rainy season, -however, when the great quantity of fresh water keeps the salt water -down below the town, the alligator is found farther down. I made several -inquiries as to the feeling of this animal towards man in this quarter, -but could not get any well authenticated information of its seizing upon -human kind, and the frequency of bathing in the river speaks the same -language. It seems, in this river, still to observe that fear and regard -to man which all the animal creation once possessed, but which has now -in regard to several animals been effaced, and in most cases, I believe, -through the cruelty of man towards the animal creation. All accounts, -however, agreed in affirming that the alligators here often seize upon -hogs, and other small animals, when found close to the river. Whilst -speaking upon this subject I may also notice, that in all the low lands -between the sea and the mountains in the parts subject to periodical -rains, lions, tigers, and serpents abound, particularly the latter. The -lions I am told do not attack man, nor does the serpent, except when -trode upon. - -Many topics of conversation occurred during our passage up the river. The -sale of our New Testaments was known to every body, and thus afforded a -subject of conversation in which we could all take a part. Of course I -had also something to say upon this subject, as it was well known that -I was the seller of them. Two copies were on board, one of which had -been purchased by the captain of our canoe, and the other by one of the -passengers. I have already told you of the evangelical aspect of the -streets of Guayaquil, and the same aspect at times was exhibited on -board, both of the New Testaments being frequently in use at the same -time. During the many things that were said, arising from what was read, -(the reading being frequently aloud,) a conversation took place, the -relation of which will probably interest you, and more especially as it -affords a specimen of the progress of _thinking_ upon religious subjects -in this country. The subject was a delicate one, but so much the better, -as a specimen. The worship of saints was the matter treated of, though I -do not remember what gave rise to it. I stated my views upon the subject, -appealing to the Scriptures and to common sense in support of my opinion. -A very keen and interesting conversation immediately took place, in which -four, besides myself, took a part, and you will be surprised when I tell -you that three of the four took my side of the question. The one who was -opposed to us happened to be a stout disputant, and thus gave occasion to -a thorough discussion of the matter. Among other things brought forward -to show the incongruity and sinfulness of the worshipping of saints, I -stated that the Apostle Peter himself, (who according to them is the -prince of Apostles and saints,) refused this worship, and in proof of -this, I referred him to the tenth chapter of the Acts. This passage was -turned up and read by one of the company, and it appeared to all of us, -except one, conclusive upon the subject. Our opponent, however, defended -himself, by alleging that although Peter, upon that occasion, refused -worship, he refused it because he was not glorified, but that after -death things were otherwise.—You agree then, I remarked, that worship -is not to be given to the saints when upon earth, but it is lawful, you -say, to give this worship to them after their death. Let us then go to -another passage, I said, and see who of the inhabitants of heaven are to -be worshipped. I then referred to the last chapter of the Revelation, -namely, “When I had heard and seen, I fell down before the feet of the -angel who showed me these things. Then saith he unto me, See thou do it -not, for I am thy fellow servant, and of thy brethren the prophets, and -of them who keep the sayings of this book: _Worship God_.” This passage -cut off the refuge which our friend had taken in his distinction between -worshipping a saint on earth, and a saint in heaven. He then took refuge -in _the church_, alleging that since authority had been given to it by -Jesus Christ to order and direct the concerns of his kingdom after his -ascension, it was our duty to obey its orders, and one of these orders -was, the praying to the saints. You know, of course, how _I_ would have -got rid of this objection, that is, by sweeping away this authority of -the church altogether, and I stated this to be my opinion. The captain -of our canoe, who took a large share in the conversation, and who saw in -the church an authority to which he considered himself bound to submit, -assailed our opponent by another argument, and a very effectual one. He -came close up to him, and with an air of having something in his mind -worth saying, “Is it not,” said he, “the duty of children to reverence -their parents, and to obey them readily and constantly?”—“Certainly it -is,” replied his friend. Our Captain continued: “And if a parent should -tell his child to steal, to lie, and such like things, should the child -obey?”—“Certainly not,” was the reply. “You are right,” says the Captain, -“and that is just our case with the church. It is our duty to obey it, as -it is our duty to obey our parents, but if our parents or the church bid -us do what is obviously wrong, in that case it is our duty to _disobey_.” -You see what an excellent argument this was, and it completely silenced -the other, and left him without any thing to say upon the subject, except -mere general talk and repetition. Our Captain having gained this triumph, -turned to one of the four, who seemed rather to acquiesce in the strength -of our arguments from the Scripture, than zealously to defend our side, -and put this question to him. “Can you tell me,” said he, “why the priest -reads all the service and prays in Latin, a language of which I do not -understand a word, and thus leaving me, when in church, as a mere statue, -without knowing what I am saying or doing?” This was a hard question, and -it was answered significantly, but without words. Our Captain next comes -up to me, and says, “You see every one sets up his little machine to gain -his dollar.” I thought I understood his meaning, although couched under a -figure, but as I wished it to be well understood by all, I asked him what -he meant by it. After a short delay he answered me, by stating, that the -church and the priests had made various laws and ceremonies for their own -benefit, and that they might thus put a dollar into their pocket.—Various -other things were said, and among which the New Testament was praised as -a book any one might read and understand, and not like the prayers of -the priests, which no one understood, perhaps not themselves. One of the -four alluded to, towards the end of the conversation, said, in a very -distinct voice, and in the hearing of all, “If I were going to die, this -is my faith; I believe that there is one God who made all things, and -that there is one Redeemer who died for us, and who rose again; and as -to the worshipping of saints, and all the rest of it, I know nothing.” I -should not omit an observation of one of our female passengers. When two -of us were debating about the worship of saints, she observed to me that -she did not like such conversation. Why so, I replied. Because, said she, -if saints are not to be worshipped, then it will follow that we are not -to pray to the Virgin Mary neither. I said, in reply, that I thought her -reasoning worth being heard, as it was a fair deduction, and requested -her to put it in the form of a question, to the one of the four who -appeared the coolest, and who, as I said before, rather acquiesced in the -strength of our arguments than defended our side. As soon as silence was -obtained, the question was put, and the answer returned was just what I -would have said if called upon to reply. - -You will see in the whole of this conversation a freedom of thinking and -of speaking, which you probably did not expect, and I confess that I was -myself greatly surprised at it, notwithstanding the many opportunities I -have had of observing the sentiments of the people of this quarter. In -the higher and more enlightened classes of society, I have often met with -liberal sentiments, but as the two persons who took the chief part in the -above conversation were of the lower class, it was both new to me and -interesting. - -On our arrival at Babahoyo, I found lodgings difficult to be procured, -as the houses seemed all occupied. As soon as this was known to one of -my fellow-passengers, he took me to his father’s house, where I enjoyed -comfortable bed and board, kindly bestowed and free of expense, during -the two days I remained in that town. As I intended to make no stay in -this place, but push on, I gave no public intimation regarding the sale -of New Testaments; yet, through means of my fellow-passengers it came -to be known that I had these for sale, and in consequence I disposed of -fifty-one copies for which I received fifty dollars, one copy being a -present. I may mention, before leaving this place, that it lies very -low on the banks of the river, and is overflowed in the rainy season. -The church stands upon a spot elevated some feet above the surrounding -parts; and I am told it is common for the people in that season to go up -to the church door in their canoes. The usual practice in passing from -Babahoyo to Quito, is to hire mules at the former place to Guaranda, and -again to hire anew from that to Quito. I accordingly hired mules for this -place, which cost me five dollars each, on account of the badness of -the roads, though four dollars is the usual charge. The weather at the -present time is very unfavourable, and it is singular to see it so at -this season of the year. I had counted upon fair weather in this quarter -during the whole time of my journey, according to the information which I -had obtained in Lima, and am thus less prepared for rain than otherwise -I would have been had I expected it. I may add also, that I like rain -now worse than ever, as during these two years past I have not seen any. -From Babahoyo to the base of the mountains the roads were very deep and -bad. When we began to ascend the mountains, we found ourselves still -worse situated. The very steep ascent, and the clayey slippery roads, -rendered the journey very unpleasant, and not a little dangerous from -the slipping of the mules, which were frequently brought down upon their -knees. I shall not detain you for the present with a minute account of -the journey to this place, suffice it to say, that I arrived, here, the -day before yesterday in the afternoon in perfect health and safety; and -I feel, I assure you, upon looking back upon the road over which I have -passed, a new motive for thanksgiving to the Father of mercies for my -daily and hourly preservation. I shall just farther add, as descriptive -of the mountains, that on the first day of our ascent, the barometer in -the valley, in the morning, stood at 29.950, and where we lodged in the -evening it stood at 26.141, which indicates a great rise. Where we lodged -on the evening following it stood at 22.085. On the next day we passed -the highest part of the ancient Indian road, where the barometer stood at -21.322. - -The situation of Guaranda, from which I now write you, is about ten miles -S. W. of the great Chimborazo. This king of mountains raises its majestic -hoary head full in view. It is deeply covered from the top, almost to -the base, with everlasting snow—snow which must have fallen, if not in -the days of Adam, at least in the days of Noah. To-morrow I set off for -Riobamba, when I expect to have a fuller view of it, as the road passes -along it close to the skirts of its snowy mantle. Guaranda contains about -1500 inhabitants, mostly Indians, who all speak the ancient Peruvian -language. There are several little towns in the glens within the -district, containing in all 14,000 inhabitants, and who all speak the -same language. You will recollect that this is the language into which -the New Testament has lately been translated in Lima, as mentioned in -my former letters, and you will see here a still more ample field of -usefulness for this translation, and the more so, when I add, that not -only in this district is the language spoken, but also in all the towns -in this quarter as far as Quito. What a wonderful extent and uniformity -must the ancient Peruvian empire have had. The inhabitants of this town -and the Indians of Peru have exactly the same features and countenance, -at well as language. - - * * * * * - - _Riobamba, 31st October, 1824._ - -Soon after my arrival in the town of Guaranda, I called upon the -Governor, and made known to him the object of my journey in this -quarter. I found him a man of intelligence, and a friend of the British -and Foreign Bible Society. Observing him to be a person worthy of all -confidence, and very desirous of the instruction of his countrymen, I -made known to him, without reserve, the plans and operations of the Bible -Society, and that I was travelling to forward its sacred object. He was -much pleased with the brief view of the Society which I gave him. He -wished to see the New Testaments, and became the first purchaser himself. -He also called upon those around to buy for themselves, by telling them -to come and learn to be Christians from this book. I received many -friendly attentions from him during the two days I remained in that -place, and I think we formed a kind of friendship which may contribute to -forward the objects of the Society in that quarter on future occasions. -Notwithstanding my printed notices, and the encouragement of the -Governor, I sold but a very few copies in that place, the whole number -being thirteen. One cause of there being so few sold is, that almost all -the inhabitants are Indians, and do not understand the Spanish language, -at all events cannot read it. To which may be added the general apathy -which always exists in small towns. The few copies, however, which have -been circulated in that town, will form a beginning (I may say of an -era) in that place, and will create a desire for more, both there and in -the villages around, when, on a future occasion, some pilgrim from your -Society shall climb the Andes to visit their abode. - -On the 29th I left Guaranda on my way to this town. You will see by -the map, that in visiting Riobamba, I was going out of the straight -road to Quito, but I was anxious to visit this place, if peradventure -the Lord would incline the hearts of some here, as in other places to -receive the word of God; and, generally speaking, my wish is to pave -the way for future operations, as well as to drop a few seeds whilst so -doing, and thus to be a pioneer in your service, in the service of this -people, and, I trust, in the service of God. I told you that Guaranda, -and the villages around it, lay upon the Andes; they are not, however, -at the top, but lie on the western side or declivity of the great ridge, -or Cordillera. After leaving Guaranda, there is nearly a whole day’s -climbing before you reach the top. Upon reaching the highest parts of -the ridge, you have something like a plain, though of no great extent; -and out of this plain, or rather this mountain, and from your very feet, -rises the great Chimborazo. From Guaranda we turned our faces towards -this great mountain, and began to ascend. As we approached it, it began -to frown, and to forbid our drawing nearer. The rain, in a little time, -began to fall very heavily; we pushed on; the hail succeeded, accompanied -by vivid lightning, whose rapid flight, from our elevated situation, we -could trace from heaven to earth. To crown the whole, the loud thunder -rolled along as if Chimborazo were tumbling down upon us. To pursue our -journey, under such circumstances, would have been foolish, and perhaps -fatal. We accordingly turned our backs upon the mountain, and began to -descend, and to seek refuge in the first hut we could come to. After some -little time we descried a thatched cottage, but we could not reach it, as -the descent to it from the ridge, along which the road lay, was too rapid -for our mules. Another and another we had to pass in this way, without -being able to take shelter from the storm. We at length found a house to -which we could descend, and I rode on towards it, and made inquiry if -we could be lodged there. I received an answer in bad Spanish, saying, -they did not understand what I said. I was obliged, therefore, to wait -till the guide arrived, who understood the Indian language, and upon his -putting the same question which I had put, we obtained refuge from the -storm, and found, in our circumstances, the cottage converted into a -palace. - -I thus found myself in a cottage belonging to one of the indigenous -inhabitants of the country, and had thus an opportunity of learning -some things which could not have been so well learned in any other -situation. I found that the inhabitants of this hut understood only their -native language; and learned that this was the case with all the rural -inhabitants of these quarters. The language spoken is that of Peru, into -which, through your beneficence, the New Testament has been translated, -and part of which will soon be printed. The need of having the word of -God translated into this language, is thus rendered more evident, and we -see the field to be watered by it increased. - -Towards the evening the sky cleared up, and as the sun was setting, the -aspect around became beautiful. I stepped to a little distance from the -cottage, and reached the road on the ridge which we had left some hours -before. As I walked backwards and forwards in this spot, enjoying the -serene and peaceful evening, I felt gratitude rise in my heart to the -Father of mercies, for my protection and shelter from the storm. I had -just gone over that beautiful hymn, of which the first and last verses -follow: - - “When all thy mercies, O my God, - My rising soul surveys; - Transported with the view, I’m lost, - In wonder, love, and praise. - - “Through all eternity to Thee - A joyful song I’ll raise; - For, oh, eternity’s too short - To utter all thy praise.” - -I had just repeated this companion of my travels, and was beginning to -descend to the cottage, when I observed a person coming up, mounted on -a very good horse, and leading another still better. I wondered to see -him bend his course to the uninhabited mountains at such a late hour, -and had the curiosity to wait his approach, to make inquiry. “Pray -friend,” said I, “where can you be going this way at so late an hour?”—“I -am seeking you,” was the reply.—“Seeking me!” I replied. “Yes,” said -he, “I have a letter for you from the Governor of Guaranda.” I received -and opened the letter, and read, in the language of friendship, that my -good friend, dreading that I should be worsted by the storm, had sent an -excellent horse for me, with orders to his servant to travel on until -he should find me, at whatever hour it might be, and to see me safe in -Riobamba. Whatever might have been my feelings before, they were, at -least, now “lost in wonder, love, and praise.” I should have mentioned, -also, that the servant delivered me a little basket, which I found to be -filled with provisions for our journey, and into which, also, the hand of -friendship itself had dropped a few sweet cakes. All these things, under -the circumstances in which I found myself, had a powerful effect upon -my mind, and encouraged me anew to hope in God and to persevere in his -service. - -In a few minutes we stepped down to the hut, procured some provisions -for the horses, some repast for ourselves, and passed the night as -comfortably as we could. Early next morning we began to prepare for our -journey. I had given our hostess a rial now and a rial then to give -her confidence in my honesty; for there is some distrust in regard to -provisions bestowed upon strangers, and it is founded, I believe, on -experience. Before setting out, I paid her all her demands, and gave her -a little more; upon which she lifted up both her hands, and prayed for -a blessing upon me, and thus we parted. After travelling for some time, -Chimborazo looked out from the clouds, the first appearance of which, I -confess, filled me with a kind of dread, more especially as I thought -it frowned upon us again. As we went on, however, the day brightened, -and we reached the mountain in due time, and took up our lodging in an -uninhabited house on the side of it. During my evening walk the clouds -entirely disappeared from the mountain, and it seemed to sit down in -beautiful splendour beside me, and thus we became more than reconciled to -each other. Next morning the same beautiful appearance was exhibited as -we set out on our way to Riobamba. - -At mid day we reached this place, which contains about 3000 inhabitants, -with a considerable population in the villages around. I called upon -the Governor, and presented him a letter of introduction which I had -brought from the Governor of Guaranda. In this gentleman I also found -a friend, and an encourager of our object. He directed me to the house -of a friend, where I have a comfortable lodging. Upon stating to him -my object, and showing him the advertisement which I wished to fix up -in the public parts of the town, he ordered his clerk to fill up the -blanks according to my directions, and then sent one of the Alguazils to -put them up. He bought six New Testaments himself, and during the two -days of my stay here, I have disposed of 35 copies. To-morrow I set out -for Ambato, accompanied by a soldier, which the Governor has ordered to -attend me by way of a guide and a guard. Considering the shortness of my -stay here, and considering that many more New Testaments would have been -bought had time been afforded, I thought it advisable to leave 50 copies -in the hands of the Governor, who kindly undertook to dispose of them as -circumstances offered. For the same reason I left 50 copies with him to -be forwarded by the first opportunity to the Governor of Guaranda. I have -also had another object in view in doing so, and that is to convert, as -it were, these individuals into members and agents of your Society, the -importance of which you will at once see. - -I have already noticed to you that the rural inhabitants of the district -of Guaranda speak the Indian language only. The same also may be said of -all the districts in this quarter, as far as Quito, I formerly stated to -you, that in Peru a million of souls stood in need of the translation -of the Scriptures into the Quichua language, and you now see how many -thousands more may be added to this number. I have no doubt but the -importance of the translation in question will lead you to extend your -beneficence to the translating and printing of the whole Scriptures into -this language. When I find persons, particularly clergymen, with whom -I can communicate with confidence, I state to them what has been done -in regard to this translation, and the use that may be made of it in -instructing the indigenous inhabitants of this quarter, which is by far -the most numerous class of the population. To such individuals I mention, -also, the happy effects produced by the schools in the Gaelic and Irish -languages. I have succeeded in convincing many of the importance and -practicability of educating the native population, and am much encouraged -by the interest I find taken in this matter, by many persons of name and -influence in the places I have visited. In this town, the prior of one of -the convents, and the rector of the town, have promised to forward this -object as far as lies in their power, and on my part I have promised to -forward them some copies of this translation as soon us they are ready. - -On the whole, there is great cause for thanksgiving, in seeing the -Scriptures meet with so ready a reception in this quarter, and the more -so when we consider that this is the first time this treasure has been -offered them. Let us pray that the word of God may have free course in -this place, and that it may be glorified. - - * * * * * - - _Quito, 8th November, 1824._ - -Through the tender mercies of the Lord I arrived in this city yesterday -morning in health and safety. The same gracious hand who has guided me -hitherto has provided for me a lodging in this place, in the house of -the Marquis de San José, where I enjoy all the comforts that kindness -and plenty can bestow. My last letter to you was dated the 31st ultimo, -from Riobamba, and detailed the various circumstances that occurred in my -journey from Guayaquil to that place. It now remains for me, therefore, -to state the particulars of my journey from Riobamba until my arrival in -this city. - -Early on the morning of the 1st current, I set out for Ambato, and -arrived there safely in the afternoon. Ambato is a larger town than -Riobamba, and may contain 5000 people. In this place I found myself -comfortably lodged in the house of the Governor. My luggage, along with -the New Testaments, did not arrive till the following morning. Upon the -arrival of the New Testaments, I showed them to the Governor, and told -him of my intention of advertising them for sale, and inquired in what -shop or store I could conveniently do so. He answered me, by saying, that -his own house was at my service for that purpose. I accordingly stated in -the advertisement, that the New Testaments were on sale at the house of -the Governor, and that the sale would continue but one day. It afforded -me much satisfaction to see the interest taken in this matter by the -Governor and by his lady, both of whom took great pleasure in showing the -New Testaments to those who came to buy, and when I had to go out to pay -or return a visit, they kindly supplied my place until my return. - -You cannot but have observed the liberality, kindness, and encouragement -I have met with from the Governors of Guaranda, Riobamba and Ambato, in -the service of the Society. These circumstances are very encouraging -as to your future labours and expectations in this quarter, and are -circumstances of which you will not fail to take advantage. The three -individuals mentioned, will be most ready, I am persuaded, on any future -occasion, to forward in the most obliging and effectual manner the holy -object of your Society. They will also readily lend their influence for -the establishment of Bible Societies in their respective districts, as -soon as a Society of a national character shall be formed in the capital, -to which they may become auxiliaries. Of this Society in the capital, -which I have much in view and at heart, I shall inform you afterwards, -should it please the Lord to conduct me safely to that place. That you -may not, however, lose the advantages already gained by the acquisition -of these gentlemen, as co-operators in your work, I shall here give you -their names and addresses in the style of the country. “Sᵒʳ Coronel -Carlos Araujo, Gobernador de Guaranda; Sᵒʳ Ambrosio Dávalos, Gobernador -de Riobamba; Sᵒʳ Nicolas Bácones, Gobernador de Ambato.” In the preceding -addresses, I have given you verbatim what you should write in addressing -any letter to them. The best manner of communicating with these gentlemen -will be through Guayaquil, as that is the nearest port, and with which -there is constant intercourse. During the time I remained in Guayaquil, I -stopped in the house of Messrs. Robinet and Wheelwright, and found there -every facility afforded me in forwarding the work of the Society. If you -would communicate with that house in your transactions with Guayaquil, -Guaranda, Riobamba, and Ambato, you will find, I am persuaded, all -attention paid to your concerns. - -I mentioned above, that my advertisement stated the sale to last for -one day only. I was, however, detained another day, and thus gave an -additional opportunity for purchasing. The whole number sold amounted to -forty-seven copies; but a small number, indeed, yet great as a beginning, -and as an encouragement. I may mention, also, that the rector and several -clergymen bought copies, and that I heard of no opposition. - -In one of my letters from Guayaquil I told you that the 200 Bibles you -had ordered me had not arrived in Lima when I left that place, and to -my no small regret. I have, however, regretted that delay a thousand -fold in the course of my journey. I mentioned to you at the same -time, that I had bought one Bible in Lima to carry with me, by way of -a specimen, and to excite an interest to purchase when a supply should -arrive. All my expectations in regard to this have been fully realized. -The many offers I have had to purchase this Bible, have filled me with -pleasure and with pain; pleasure to see so great a desire for the word -of God, and pain in not being able to satisfy that desire. Of the many -occasions in which I have been so placed, none was so pleasing, on the -one hand, nor so painful, on the other, as that which I experienced -with the Rector of Ambato. He had been to visit me, and I went to his -house to return his kindness. After experiencing much attention from -him, he in a very formal manner urged me to sell him the Bible. I stated -to him, upon this occasion, what I had been called on to state upon so -many other occasions, namely, that the Bible I had was a kind of common -property, that my object in carrying it with me was to show it to all, -and to encourage all who wished for it, by informing them that a number -of copies were coming, and that their desire would be realized in the -possession of this precious volume. He however renewed his request, -besought me to let him have it, and urged his claim in the name of all -his flock, for whose use he said he particularly wished it. My difficulty -here was great, yet I considered my reasons for not parting with this -volume still greater, and was thus obliged most unwillingly to withhold -what, under other circumstances I would most gladly have bestowed. He -said, among other things, to induce me to yield to his request, that I -would be able to find a copy in Quito, for he had learned that some had -been sold here some time ago, as was actually the case, for 40 copies of -the 500 sold in Lima were brought here. I told him that there were some -doubts as to my obtaining a copy in Quito, but that I would make inquiry -when I should arrive there, and in the event of finding one I should send -him my own copy, and at the price at which I purchased the other. Upon -these terms we came to an agreement, and he remarked that I should not -make any hesitation in regard to the price, for he would willingly pay -what should be charged. - -On the 4th current I left Ambato on my way to this city. There is a town -called Tacunga or Latacunga about 20 miles distant from Ambato, and on -the straight road to this place. From the consideration of having been -much detained in my journey from Guayaquil, I wished to reach this city -as quickly as possible, and on that account I intended not to stop at -Tacunga, but to push on to a village called Mulaló, and to pass the night -there, in order that I might reach Quito on the following day. I was -the more inclined to do so, as I understood that Tacunga was inhabited -almost wholly by Indians, none of whom could use our books. Another -arrangement, however, had been determined on by a higher authority than -mine, and for a purpose which you will presently see. I had scarce left -Ambato, when a Friar travelling for Quito, came up with me upon the road. -As he was accompanied by a servant only, and unencumbered with luggage, -he could get faster on his way than I could, accompanied as I was by -the loaded mules. We, notwithstanding, rode together for some time, and -fell into various conversation. He urged me to go forward with him, and -to leave the loaded mules to follow us, which, after some hesitation, I -complied with, and we went on together at a gentle trot. His intention -was to stop all night at Tacunga, as he had some concerns to arrange -there. He kindly invited me to stay there also during the night, in -order that we might go on together next day towards Quito, offering me a -hospitable lodging in the convent of St. Dominic, to which he belonged. -I still, however, thought it my duty to push forward, so as to reach -Quito next day, and which I could not do if I stopped all night at -Tacunga. Before we arrived at the place, in passing a river, my horse, -upon reaching the bank, which was rather difficult of access, stumbled, -plunged again into the river, and nearly threw me into it. I got safely -out, though considerably wet. This circumstance determined me to stop -at Tacunga till I got my clothes dried. Upon reaching the town, I went -with my friend to the convent, where I got myself comfortably dried, and -prepared for the journey. Before I was ready to set out, there came on a -thunder storm, and by the time the weather cleared up, it was too late -to set out. My good friends in the convent strongly urged me to pass the -night with them, and which I consented to do. - -I found this town larger than I expected, and as I was to pass the night -in it, I was anxious to seize the opportunity of offering the word of God -to them, although I had not much confidence as to the success I should -meet with. In carrying this purpose into effect, I found myself rather -embarrassed. I was lodged in a convent, and knew not what disposition -the friars might have to the distribution of the Scriptures, especially -to their being sold in the convent. I wished myself lodged elsewhere, -and indeed any where else, but could not with any decency remove, as my -friends loaded me with kindness. Had I known, upon my entering the town, -that I was to have a sale of the New Testaments there, I would not have -gone to the convent, more especially as I had a letter of introduction -to the Governor and to another gentleman in the place. After some -hesitation, I resolved to make an attempt where I was. I went pensively -to the case in which the New Testaments were, took out one, and went -direct to the Prior to show it to him, praying all the while as I went, -that the God of heaven would dispose his heart and the hearts of the -rest to befriend the circulation of his holy word. My prayer was heard. -The Prior was much pleased with the New Testament, and bought it. He -showed it to one of the rest, and recommended it, whilst I did not fail -to put in a word to the same effect, pointing out the advantages of -the Scriptures to all, and how more immediately it concerned them, as -ministers of religion, to possess it, and to recommend it to others. Yes, -said one of them, it is the very book which concerns us, and we would -gladly encourage others to receive it. I then told them that I had a -number of copies, and that I wished to expose them to sale in that town. -I showed the Prior the advertisement, and said, I should be glad to have -the sale in the convent, if it were agreeable to him. By all means, said -he, and immediately he filled up the blanks in the notices with his own -hand, and sent a person to fix them up. The advertisements were scarcely -up, when one, and another, and another came tripping in to purchase a New -Testament. In a little, the buyers thickened, whilst all the friars stood -around enjoying the sight, and warmly recommending the sacred volume to -all who came, and assisted me in the sale when occasion required. The -result was, that in two hours and a half, that is, till the night came -on, I sold _one hundred and four_ copies, which was more than I had sold -in Guaranda, Riobamba, and Ambato taken together, although I remained -two days in each of these places. You see, by this time, I dare say, why -superior arrangements called me to stop at this place, contrary to my own -intention. - -Among others, whom the sound of our horn brought together, came the -Vicar of the town _in propria persona_. Upon learning who he was, I -made my obeisance, and entered into conversation with him, as to the -advantages of the word of God, and the duty of making it known to all, -and to my great joy I found in him also a friend to this object. At -an early period of our sale, I brought out the Bible, of which I have -spoken above, and for the purpose there mentioned. It had the desired -effect. It arrested the attention, and could have been sold many a time. -I told all who wished to purchase it, that there would arrive in a few -months a number of copies, and that all would be supplied. None being -able to obtain it, a little circle resolved to improve the occasion to -learn what it contained, while a friar in the middle kept reading aloud -for a considerable time.—There was another attractive, namely, the -Brief View of the Bible Society. This also drew the attention, and was -eagerly read. Their approbation of the object of the Society, and their -wonder at the effects already produced by it, alternately drew forth -corresponding expressions. You need not be told that I relished the -scene before me, and enjoyed a high entertainment. I could not refrain -from silent thanksgiving to the God above, as I brought out another and -another parcel of New Testaments, to which I joined a fervent prayer, -that on this occasion the word of God might be sown in good ground, and -might produce in some thirty, in some sixty, and in some a hundred fold. -I felt also my heart warm within me, whilst the contemplation of the -British character, which was thus brought under review, called forth the -just praises of my native land. O favoured isle! garden of God! where -the fruits of righteousness grow more abundantly than in all the world -beside. Peace be upon thee! In thee may the will of God be done—_as it is -done in heaven_. - -By and by the night came on, and our sale closed. After which we -retired to one of the cells and entered into general conversation. We -were all pleased with each other. My friends, on the one hand, seized -every opportunity to show their kindness and attention, and I, on the -other hand, in return for their kindness, amused them with my mountain -barometer, thermometers, and pocket compass, all of which were perfectly -new to them, and highly entertaining. At a proper hour the friars retired -to their cells, and I also retired to mine, where I passed part of the -night in contemplating the scene which had just passed before me, and the -rest in repairing the fatigues of the day. - -I told the Prior of the convent and the others, that the sale which had -been effected in that place, so much greater than in the other places I -had visited in their neighbourhood, did great honour to their town. I -took occasion also to return them my sincere thanks for the very active -and friendly part they had taken in this matter, and told them I should -have great pleasure in communicating the same to the Society in London, -and which I accordingly now do. The Prior said that he should be very -glad, upon any future occasion, to forward the objects of the Society as -far as he could, and that in regard to any other supply of the Scriptures -destined for Tacunga, he would most readily take charge of them, and -dispose of them according to the directions which might be sent with -them. The other Friars heartily seconded the Prior in all these matters. -In conversing about the Bibles that were to come to them from Guayaquil, -it was agreed that not fewer than fifty copies would be required for -Tacunga, and I promised to write to Guayaquil in order that this number -might be sent to them upon their arrival there from Lima. At the same -time I write to Lima to forward a sufficient supply to Guayaquil of your -second edition, which must, I should think, be already in Callao, or near -it. - -In the preceding part of this letter, I gave you the names and address of -some persons who would gladly carry forward your object in the places -mentioned. I now add to this list another, namely, the Prior already -mentioned, “El R. P. Fr. Manuel Peñaherrera, Prior de Santo Domingo de -Latacunga.” The person just named, as well as all his colleagues, will be -most ready to establish an Auxiliary Bible Society in that place, when -the proper time comes for doing so. I give you also the names of some -others belonging to this convent, as my duty and my promise require of -me, and could wish that in some corner of one of your monthly extracts or -annual reports their names might be recorded, for I think they are worthy -of it; and in seeing their names in any of these publications I shall -feel myself as discharged from what nearly amounts to an obligation, and -which my feelings of respect and gratitude towards my friends led me -into. The names are as follows: Padre Mariano Quintana, Padre Narciso -Molina, Padre Matias Granja. To which I add, as the last, but not the -least, my travelling companion, Padre José Celio.[4] - -I conclude this letter, the writing of which has been the means of my -enjoying over again the encouraging scenes which I have endeavoured -to describe, and which I lay before you that you may comply with the -pleasing duty of rejoicing with those that rejoice.—I only add, May God -Almighty prosper you most abundantly in all your undertakings; and unto -whom in all things be glory for ever: Amen. - -[4] These names were not inserted in the Society’s Extracts, as the -Secretaries thought the doing so might, perhaps, compromise our friends -there with their superiors. A letter, however, was written to the Prior, -in the name of the Society, conveying to him those sentiments which -his conduct, on the above occasion, called forth. A few weeks ago an -answer was received from the Prior, in reply to this letter, in which he -expresses his continued interest in the object of the Bible Society, and -his desire to circulate the Scriptures in his native country.—It may be -mentioned here also, that a suitable letter was sent by the Society to -the Governor of Guaranda, and that a very friendly reply to it has been -lately received. This gentleman continues a warm friend to the Bible -Society. - - * * * * * - - _Quito, 19th November, 1824._ - -A considerable time has elapsed since the date of my last letter to you, -and during the same period, if I remember right, I have not been favoured -with any of your communications. So that, as far as mere exchange of -letters is concerned, I am not so much in arrear as you may perhaps be -thinking. It is true, indeed, that it is my part to write to you, rather -than yours to write to me, but that again supposes that I have something -worth communicating. Now, I am sorry to say that this has not been the -case during my partial silence, a silence arising from a very natural -cause, that of having nothing to say. I mean that I have had nothing to -say about the _progress_ of education in this quarter: and though I have -still very little to say upon that subject, yet, knowing you take a great -interest in the well being of this part of the world, and in my feeble -efforts to promote it, I think it my duty to let you know at least where -I am, and what I am doing. - -You will observe by the line at the top, that I am in the city of Quito, -and I shall now state to you why I am here, and what I am engaged in. You -know how the war has raged for some time past in Peru, and that Lima has -been for a considerable time in the hands of the enemy. I am not sure -that I have expressed myself correctly in saying _the enemy_, a term -applied by each party to the other, but which in the mouth of a neutral -is an impropriety of speech. I beg leave to justify myself in this, by -informing you that I am not a neutral in this contest, as all my feelings -and my wishes are on the one side, and of course the other side is the -enemy. I leave you to find out at your leisure what side I am on, and -shall proceed to give you what information I have to communicate relative -to our concerns, the concerns of education. - -I left Lima in the beginning of September, with the intention of not -returning to it for some time. The immediate cause was the impossibility -of moving forwards in our work under the pressure of existing -circumstances. The very utmost that could be done was to keep hold of -what we had obtained, and even that was done with great difficulty. -Our model school in Lima, at the time I came away, contained about 200 -children, a number somewhat less than what it contained some months -previous to that time. This decrease is owing to the great poverty that -existed there, on the one hand; and on the other hand it arose from a -natural fear in the parents lest their children should be picked up on -their way to the School by the recruiting parties, a fear not altogether -groundless. I may mention here, that there is another School on our plan, -containing about 80 children. - -You know that, for a considerable time back, I have had a desire to pass -through that part of this Continent where I now am, but I was prevented -from doing so, by the difficulty of leaving Lima in the state in which -things were, and by the prospect of making a rapid progress in extending -education over Peru. At the time I came away, the difficulty referred -to was removed, and the prospect in regard to the other circumstance -mentioned was altogether blasted, at least for a time. The difficulty -I have noticed was the want of a proper master, in whose hands I could -trust the school with confidence. The school, however, at my leaving -Lima, was in the hands of a good master, with an assistant to aid him, -whilst the superintendence of all is in the hands of my excellent friend -the Clergyman, of whom I have often spoken to you with approbation. From -this good friend, notwithstanding these favourable arrangements, I was -obliged to tear myself away. He urged me to stop, and would at length -only hear of my going away in the expectation of my early return, and -in the hope of my visit to England being turned to the advantage of the -schools in Peru, as I trust it will, should I have the happiness to reach -your favoured country. - -I thought it advisable, and my duty, to seize the time that thus offered -for verifying my long-intended journey. You know, I dare say, that it -was not the mere desire of jaunting that led me to propose this journey -to myself. The two objects which have hitherto more immediately engaged -my attention in South America are those which form the work respectively -of the British and Foreign Bible Society, and the British and Foreign -School Society. With these two objects in view, I left Lima for Bogotá -the capital of Colombia. Though I can never lose sight of any one of -these two objects, yet that of the Bible Society is the main one in this -journey. - -I have been very much pleased with my journey, in the prosperity I have -had in the distribution of the sacred volume. I have observed a very -general desire to possess this book, and I have had the pleasure of -seeing great numbers flock together, not to receive it as a present, but -to buy it. Of upwards of 1500 New Testaments which I had at the outset, -not many remain. I had no Bibles, and was very sorry for it, as, from its -being generally asked for, I am sure I could have sold many copies. It is -gratifying to know that a supply of them may be expected in the course of -a few months; and with this prospect I have revived the spirits of many -who evidently felt disappointed when I told them that I had none. - -It is truly a pleasing sight to see so many eagerly seeking after God; -and it cheers the heart of the poor traveller, as he moves along now -through the woods, now over the mountains, to think that he is the means -of cheering the hearts of others, by putting into their hands the only -book which can effectually cheer the heart with solid comfort. I refer -you for further particulars regarding the circulation of the Scriptures -to my letters upon the subject to the British and Foreign Bible Society. - -Before I speak of the state and progress of education in Quito, I shall -mention two circumstances which have occurred to me since I left Lima. I -notice these because they are encouraging, as it respects the progress -of education, and because they tend to prove what I have so often stated -to you,—that there is a very general desire throughout this country for -extending the benefits of education to all, and with all possible speed. -The circumstances referred to occurred in Truxillo and in Guayaquil. In -both these places I received proposals from the magistrates to remain -among them, in order to establish schools on our plan, and to promote -the objects of education in general. In both cases I had a struggle -with my feelings, though not with my judgment, in declining the honour -offered me. Though my duty bade me pursue my journey, yet, in consequence -of these proposals, I cannot help taking an additional interest in -the progress of education in the places mentioned; and through the -intercourse that took place upon this subject during my short stay in -these tours, I expect some good will result, of which I shall afterwards -inform you. - -I come now to speak of the state and prospects of education in this -city. The state of elementary education here is, at present, very low, -but its prospects are more encouraging. Perhaps you are aware that the -Colombian Government is taking active measures to extend education over -all their share of South America. Some time ago a Central School on the -Lancasterian plan was established in Bogotá, the capital. This school was -set agoing by a friar who had been banished from his native country on -account of his then-called revolutionary principles, and who had learned -the system during his exile. Upon his return to America he established -this school in the capital, which has now existed two or three years. It -is the wish of the government to put a model school in the capital of -each department, and from these schools to send out masters to all the -towns and villages the department contains. For this purpose the friar I -before mentioned, has lately arrived here, and is getting his school-room -prepared. I have had several conversations with this individual, and -have been much pleased in observing the very lively interest he takes in -the education of youth, as well as in the general progress of knowledge -throughout his native country. It is delightful to shake hands with such -persons, and to unite one’s heart with them wherever they are found. I -augur much good from the establishment and direction of schools by a -person of this character. I do from my heart wish him great success, and -a success equal to the desires of his own benevolent mind. The Intendant -or Governor of the department is an excellent man, and very desirous of -the progress of knowledge throughout this quarter. He is urging forward -the school with all diligence; and to supply the children with books, he -has bought of me 50 New Testaments. - -The next thing I have to notice is of some interest, and respects female -education. You are aware, that the education of this sex is very limited -in South America. It is so in Quito, as might be expected. From the -consideration that this is a large place, and the chief city of a large -and populous district of country, I was very desirous of doing something -towards establishing a female school or academy here. I spoke to the -Intendant and others upon the subject, and found them all willing to -do whatever was practicable in carrying into effect such a desirable -object. The plan I proposed was, to send for a well-instructed person or -two from England, in order to establish at once a school or academy of -the best description; and I promised to do, on my part, all I could to -procure such persons upon my arrival in England. My proposition was very -favourably received, and a plan was immediately thought of for carrying -it into effect. The want of funds was the only obstacle that occurred, -and where to find them was the object to which the attention of all was -directed. At length it was discovered that there was a certain religious -house in the city which had good funds belonging to it. This house is not -a nunnery, though it is somewhat allied to it. It is what is here called -a Beateria; and if one were called upon to give it a name corresponding -to its nature, it might be called a House of Idleness. This name, at all -events, would suit the character given me of it by the Intendant. To -get this house and its funds was now the object of consideration, and a -petition to the general government of Colombia was thought of for that -purpose. You know that respecting a matter of this kind, it is necessary -to interest the female sex themselves in it. I accordingly spoke with -some ladies upon the subject, and found them very anxious to lend their -influence to obtain the object in question. I am lodged and very kindly -treated in the house of the Marquis de San José, and I wished that the -Marchioness should take the lead in this affair, as a matter of courtesy -on my part, and principally because she is the person of most influence -in the place. I stated to her the plan proposed, of establishing a school -or academy in the style of those in England, and was happy to find that -she entered heartily into it. The way ultimately fixed upon for carrying -forward the plan is this: The lady before mentioned, along with some -female friends, is to draw up a petition to the Intendant, begging that -something may be done for establishing a female academy in Quito. As -soon as this comes into the Intendant’s hands, he will state his opinion -upon the subject, strongly recommending it, and pointing out where the -funds may be obtained for the purpose. The petition thus prepared is to -be put into my hands, and I am to have the honour of laying it before -the Vice-President in Bogotá upon my reaching that city; and such is the -interest taken by the Government in these matters, that I have no doubt -of its complete success. - - * * * * * - - _Quito, 24th November, 1824._ - -My last letter to you was written from this place, and dated the 8th -current, the day after my arrival. I then stated to you what had -occurred to me from Riobamba until my arrival in this city. I shall now, -therefore, proceed to give you an account of the reception your cause has -met with in Quito. - -When I set out from Guaranda on my way to Riobamba, I left four boxes -of New Testaments behind me, partly because I was going out of the -straight road for Quito, and partly because mules could not readily be -had to carry them. These boxes I left in the hands of my good friend the -Governor, who kindly undertook to forward them direct to this city. Upon -my arrival here, I found that these boxes had not arrived, although there -was more than sufficient time. I waited for them with some impatience, -especially as I had disposed of the contents of those I had brought with -me, so that there remained none in my hands for sale in this place. -During this delay of the New Testaments I had many inquiries for them, as -it had got abroad that I had brought with me a good supply for this city. -At length a part arrived, when I learned that the delay was owing to the -owner of the mules. I gave notice publicly of the sale, as I had done in -other places, and in a short time all were sold, amounting to 137 copies. -After these were all gone, the inquiries after them continued, and I had -to put off the inquirers, with telling them that there were two more -boxes expected every minute. Day passed on after day without the arrival -of these, until I was beginning a second time to think them lost. -Yesterday afternoon, however, they safely arrived, and as soon as they -were opened 80 copies were paid for and carried off by a highly respected -clergyman. Fifty of these were for the use of the schools here, and were -purchased on account of the government, agreeably to an order given to -that effect some days previous to their arrival. Twenty-five of the -eighty were purchased at the request of the Provincial of the Convent of -St. Francis, for the express purpose of putting a copy into the hands of -each friar in the convent. I noticed in my last the triumph of our cause -in the convent of St. Dominic, in Latacunga, and it affords me no small -pleasure to be able to record what I may call a triumph of a similar -kind, as just mentioned, regarding the Franciscans in this city. To which -I may add, that the respected clergyman I before referred to, has orders -from, I believe, all the convents to purchase one, two, or more _Bibles_ -for them at the moment of their arrival. The remaining five of the above -mentioned eighty were for particular friends. - -I have noticed to you, in my preceding letters, the desire manifested -in the places I have passed through, for _the whole Bible_. This desire -has also been manifested in Quito, and in a strong degree. In order to -increase this desire, rather than supply the wants of these places, I -have written to Guayaquil, directing the fifty Bibles which I formerly -ordered from Lima to that place, to be sent to these parts, in due -proportions; only ten or twelve of these will come to this place, and -these are already bespoken. I have also ordered to be sent to the -different towns mentioned in my former letters, a considerable number of -copies of the small New Testament, and of the Books of Psalms, Proverbs, -&c.; the proportion for Quito is 200 of the former, and 200 of the -latter; these I expect will meet with a very favourable reception, and -will fall short of the demand for them. I have thus, you see, distributed -the whole of the supply sent me as mentioned in your last letter, yet -this supply, so distributed, will prove inadequate to the wants and the -demands of these quarters. To meet this demand, we must have recourse to -your _second_ edition of the Bible, of which you have advised me, and of -which I expect a good supply is already on the way to Lima. In that city, -and also in Guayaquil, I have given the necessary directions for sending -proper quantities to each place. The city of Quito is large, and contains -upwards of 50,000 inhabitants. It is also surrounded by a populous -country, of which it is the capital and the centre. On this account I -have ordered to it 500 copies of the whole Bible, with a request to our -correspondent in Guayaquil to remit 500 more, if the wants of the latter -place will admit of it. I have mentioned to you the names of different -persons who offered to manage your concerns in some of the places I have -passed through, and I am happy in having it in my power to say, that -you have found a warm friend and an agent here in the Marquis of San -José, a gentleman of the first respectability in this city, on account of -his personal character, and on account of his large possessions in this -quarter. From this gentleman I have received every friendly attention -during my stay under his hospitable roof. He allowed me to sell the New -Testaments in his own house, and encouraged his friends to purchase them. -In consequence of his readiness to take the charge of the Society’s -concerns here, I have ordered the supplies for Quito, already mentioned, -to be forwarded directly to him. You will also please consider him as -your correspondent for this quarter, and can address to him accordingly. -His address is “Sᵒʳ Manuel de Larrea, Marques de San José, Quito.” I -spoke to this gentleman, also, regarding the formation of a Bible Society -for the district of Quito, whose seat should be in that city. Into this -matter he entered fully and cheerfully, and promised to do every thing -in his power to commence and to carry forward such an establishment, as -soon as a suitable opportunity should offer for doing so. I spoke also to -the Marchioness regarding a Female Bible Society, and had the pleasure of -being assured by her, that nothing should be wanting on her part to set -such a Society on foot. I have thus endeavoured to place things in such a -state as to induce the hope that the concerns of the Bible Society will -not be neglected here, but carried forward in a prosperous manner. I -should have mentioned also, that several gentlemen, with whom I conversed -about the circulation of the Scriptures, and about a Bible Society, -much approved of both, and expressed their readiness to lend their aid -in these matters, I trust these favourable circumstances, which form an -encouraging commencement in this interesting and populous district, will -be followed by results truly beneficial to all the inhabitants here, and -gratifying to the members of the British and Foreign Bible Society. - -There is a circumstance indirectly, or rather I should say directly, -connected with our main object, which I should not omit to state to you. -I carried with me two copies of the late Bishop of London’s Evidences -of Christianity, in Spanish. These I bought in Lima about the time I -set off, in the expectation of their doing some good in the course of -the journey. I showed this work to the Marquis, who immediately bought -it. This he eagerly read, and was highly gratified with its contents. I -could have sold the other copy frequently, but refused to sell it, as I -intend to carry it farther on, and to dispose of it in some other place. -The Marquis lent his copy to several of his friends, who were also much -gratified with perusing it. From less to more, the interest in this work -was carried, till it was resolved to print an edition of it in Quito by -subscription, and this subscription is to be solely among the ladies. -This, you see, is a feeling very friendly to the cause of religion, and -of the Bible Society. I suppose I need not to tell you, that a work on -the evidences of the christian religion is not a little wanted in many -parts in this country, as there are many who are verging towards, or -are already gone into, deism. On this account, as well as on others, it -behoves the friends of Christianity to bestir themselves in behalf of -South America. The present is a very interesting and also a very critical -period for this country. Much, very much, may be done at present, through -prudent and zealous means, to instruct and confirm the wavering, and even -perhaps to bring back those who have apostatized from the faith. If these -measures were connected with means of instruction, as far as can be done, -regarding the true principles and practices of Christianity, as taught -in the Holy Scriptures, a very plentiful harvest, through the blessing -of God, might be reaped. If it should please the Lord to spare me, and -to enable me to reach my native land, I trust I shall find many ready to -lend their aid towards such a sacred object. - -P.S.—_26th November, 1824._—I have now disposed of 360 copies of the -New Testament in this city. May the Lord follow with his abundant -blessing this seed which has been sown, and cause it to bring forth a -hundred fold. To-day I set off for Popayan, and trust that _He_ who has -preserved me thus far, will continue to me his blessing to that place, -and thence onwards. I shall endeavour to drop a few seeds as I go along, -and pray that these may fall into good ground. - - * * * * * - - _Popayan, 1st January, 1825._ - -You will perceive, by the date of this letter, that it is a month later -than it ought to be, according to our epistolary agreement. You will not -wonder at this delay, when you consider that I am in the middle of a long -and incommodious journey. The day on which I should have written you, I -was travelling from Otabalo to Ibarra, and of course had neither leisure -nor convenience for conversing with you. I now seize the opportunity of a -few days rest which I enjoy in this city, to write you a few lines. - -You will probably he expecting some account of the country in which I -now am, and through which I have lately passed. I shall endeavour to -satisfy your curiosity in some measure upon this point. I shall begin -with Guayaquil. That place contains from 12,000 to 15,000 inhabitants, -and is situated upon a river of the same name. There are regular tides -in the river opposite the town, twice in the 24 hours, and the same -also takes place for a considerable distance above the town. The spot -on which the town is built is very low, being only a very little higher -than the river at the time of high water. The weather here is very hot, -considerably more so than in Lima. This, together with a low and somewhat -marshy situation, makes the place unhealthy, particularly in the rainy -season. I could not help observing, however, during the short time I was -there, that the want of cleanliness in the streets, and on the banks of -the river, are circumstances which contribute, in my opinion, at least -one half to the unhealthiness of the town. This port is the place on the -Pacific which at present affords more articles of exportation than any -other, and every succeeding year will make it more so. The cocoa from -which the chocolate is made is the principal article, and of this several -ship-loads go annually to Europe, besides what is used in Peru, Chile, -&c. It is through this place that all the towns, as far as Quito, are -supplied with European goods, and through this place also should these -towns be supplied with the Holy Scriptures, and with other works which -may contribute to enlighten and to benefit them with respect to time and -to eternity. I have made arrangements there by which the Scriptures may -be supplied to these quarters in future. - -The town of Guaranda is high up on the Andes, and within a few miles -of the great Chimborazo. It enjoys a temperate and healthy climate, -notwithstanding its proximity to the Equator. I need not state to you the -causes of this, as you are well aware of them. I may, however, say that -Chimborazo exerts a considerable influence in moderating the heat which -might be expected in this quarter. If you should ask me more particularly -what I think of the climate, I would say, judging from my own feelings, -that it is cold. So I felt it to be, but that arose partly from my having -just come from a very hot climate. It is curious to observe the different -feelings of two persons met together on the declivity of the mountains, -the one ascending from Guayaquil, and the other descending from Quito. -If you ask one of them regarding the climate, or weather, he says it is -very cold; and if you ask the other, he says it is very warm; and so -they respectively feel from the opposite climates they have come from. -Guaranda is situated on the western side of the western Cordillera of -the Andes. You will observe that the word _Andes_, is the general name -of all these mountains, and _Cordillera_ means the high ridge or line of -mountains running nearly north and south. There are two great cordilleras -which extend from Cuenca to about 100 miles to the north of Popayan. To -the south of Cuenca and to the north of the department of Popayan, one -of the Cordilleras disappears. In going from Guaranda to Riobamba, you -first ascend the western cordillera to the top. On this _top_ is the -_base_ of Chimborazo. The road is close along the base of the mountain -and you would think you could lay your hand upon it. From _this spot_ it -does not appear a very high mountain, and the reason is obvious, as this -spot itself is at a great elevation.[5] The whole of Chimborazo, except -perhaps, a few yards, is covered with snow—everlastingly covered. Having -reached this top, you see, for the first time, the eastern cordillera, -vying with the western in height. You then descend down till you come to -Riobamba, which is situated in a _level_ plain between the two ridges, -and at nearly an equal distance from both. The whole of my journey, from -leaving Riobamba till my arrival in this city, has been in this great -valley, between the two cordilleras of the Andes. In two days or three -after leaving this place, I will have to cross the eastern cordillera on -my way to Bogotá. - -The two principal towns between Riobamba and Quito, are Ambato and -Tacunga, and of which I have spoken in my letters to Mr. B.; the former -may contain 5,000, and the latter 6,000. The greater part of this -population consists of Indians, who all speak the ancient Peruvian -language. The largest town in the whole of this extensive valley, between -the ridges of the Andes, is Quito. It is a city of 50,000 inhabitants -and upwards, and will not yield to any city in South America in point -of population, except to Lima and to Buenos Aires. Its public buildings -are much superior to those of the latter place, and not much inferior -to those of the former. Its site is unfavourable, as it is placed on an -uneven piece of ground. - -In travelling from Quito to Popayan you experience a great variety of -climate. Sometimes you have the unmitigated heat of the torrid zone; at -another time you might imagine yourself in the neighbourhood of one of -the poles rather than the equator; and again at other times you have a -climate of the most delightful kind, equally removed from the extremes -of heat and of cold. One of the coldest nights I passed on the journey, -was within a few yards of the line. You will wonder, perhaps, at this -variety, but I will explain it to you. Here and there, during the whole -course of this long valley, from Cuenca to Popayan, you have, rising out -of the one cordillera or the other, an enormous snow-capped mountain. -It is evident that the cold reigns uninterrupted on these towering -summits, as the snow, its certain signal, is ever spread over them. Of -course when the wind blows from these, it temperates (or perhaps somewhat -more) the heat of the sun wherever it passes. Any place situated near -these mountains is necessarily temperate, or cold. The coldest place in -the whole road, is a place called Tiupuyo, some 20 miles south of Quito, -because there you have Cotopaxi on the one side, and right opposite on -the other you have Ilinisa, both of which are always covered with snow. I -have thus noticed to you the cause of the cold, and shall now point out -what is the cause of the heat in those places where its effects are most -felt. Wherever there is a deep valley with sloping mountains around, and -no towering summits covered with snow, for a considerable distance, there -you have a climate of the same kind as is met with in the same latitude -on the sea coast. As to the temperate places I have spoken of, they are -always to be met with in the absence of these snow-covered mountains -on the one hand and the deep valleys on the other. In these tracts the -climate is delightful in the extreme, all the year round. In none of -these parts have you Spring, Summer, Harvest, and Winter, but one uniform -temperature from one end of the year to the other. In most of these -places there are periodical times of rain, which form what they call -the Winter, whilst the dry season is called Summer. The farmer there -may sow when he chooses, and may have his harvest in any month of the -year; notwithstanding, however, there is some order attended to in this -respect, but it is not uniform in all places. - -[5] The top of this ridge, or cordillera, cannot be less than 17,000 feet -above the level of the sea. On arriving at this height, I recollected -what I had often read of, that persons at great elevations felt much -difficulty in breathing. I resolved to try the correctness of these -accounts: and for this purpose, I alighted from my horse, and with a -heavy great-coat on, I walked with a quick pace for half an hour. The -result was, I felt not the slightest inconvenience in breathing. - - * * * * * - - _Bogotá, 8th February, 1825._ - -Since my last communication to you from Quito, I have had a long, and -by no means an agreeable journey. The distance from Quito to this place -is considerable, the roads are very bad, and in passing through one -district, there is no inconsiderable danger. On the 29th ultimo, I -arrived safely in this city, and now seize the first opportunity that -offers of writing you a few lines, to inform you of occurrences in these -parts since my last, of the 26th November. - -I intimated to you in the letter last mentioned, that it was my intention -to drop a few seeds as I went along, or in other words, to endeavour to -circulate the sacred volume, as opportunities might offer, in the course -of my journey. I accordingly posted up my notices in those places, where -I stopped for half a day, or upwards. In these country villages a great -sale was not to be expected. The inhabitants are in general poor, and -very few of them are addicted to reading. Some copies, however, were thus -put into circulation, and in such places, and under such circumstances, -I always think much has been done if a kind of beginning has been made. -I shall, in a future communication, state to you the number sold in each -place, and the respective sums received since my leaving Lima. I would -give you this account now, were it not that the scantiness of my time at -present will not allow me to extract these notices from among my notes. -I have now disposed of _all_ the New Testaments I brought with me from -Lima, and those which I found awaiting me in Guayaquil. I bless the Lord -for having counselled me to undertake this journey, and thus to put -into circulation a considerable number of copies of his holy word, and -which would not likely have been accomplished, but by means of making a -complete tour through these quarters. I have thus cause of gratitude to -Him who distributeth his favours to whom he will, for having honoured me -with a share of this angel-work, of communicating the revelation of God -to man. I shall be glad also to know, that the plan I have taken meets -with the approbation of the Committee of the British and Foreign Bible -Society. I thought much about this journey before undertaking it, and -prayed much to the Lord to counsel me in regard to it. And now, looking -back over the road I have travelled, and reflecting on the number of -copies of the word of life, now in the hands of many people who had never -before seen it, I feel my heart drawn out in thanksgiving and praise for -all the way by which the Lord hath led me. - -My labours in distributing the sacred volume on this journey must now -terminate, because I have no more to distribute. In the multitude of my -thoughts within me upon setting off from Lima, it occurred to me that I -might, after reaching this place, extend my journey in your service to -Guatemala, and from thence overland to Mexico. Two objects I had in view -in reference to this; the one was the circulation of the Scriptures, -and the other was the procuring translations of the New Testament into -the native languages of those parts. Of this latter object I wrote you -some time ago. This intended journey, however, must now be given up, -for various reasons. The first is, because I have no more copies of the -Scriptures to distribute; the second is, because I feel doubtful if it -would meet with your approbation to incur the expense of travelling -through those parts, with the single object of procuring the translations -referred to; the third reason is, the happy change which has taken place -in Peru, in the termination of the war there, and which induces me to -visit England as early as possible, that I may again return to Lima -without loss of time, in order to carry on the work of the Lord there, -according to the grace and strength he may be pleased to afford me. I -trust in the Lord that we shall have an opportunity of seeing each other -face to face, before many months elapse, that we may talk over all the -doings of the Lord, in making his word to circulate in this country and -in every place, and that we may make arrangements for benefiting South -America yet more extensively. - -I have spoken of the _termination_ of the war in Peru, and this to me is -no small subject of thanksgiving; for the deliverance of the country from -the Spanish yoke, and the rapid progress of the Lord’s work, are closely -identified. I wrote you from Guayaquil some months ago respecting this -identification. It was then I gave you an account of the battle of Junin, -and of the very important effects that followed. I then also ventured to -speak of what were likely to be the ultimate and no very distant results -of that battle. All these things the Lord hath now brought about, in -scattering those who delight in war and oppression, and in commanding -the destroying sword to return into its scabbard.—Rest and peace to this -destroying instrument—and for ever! May it never more be drawn in this -country, to cut in sunder afresh the peace and the progress of man! I -send you an account of this late event in Peru, which I think will prove -interesting to you and to your friends. - -I expected to find, on my arrival here, a large supply of Spanish New -Testaments, which I thought you would have found an opportunity of -forwarding to some correspondent in this quarter. I have spoken with -Mr. Henderson, the British Consul General here, upon the subject, and -he informs me that there are neither Spanish Bibles nor New Testaments -in this city, and that there is a demand for them. He also informs me, -that he wrote about three months ago to Mr. Dowson, a correspondent of -his, requesting him to forward some to this place. You will please make -inquiry of Mr. D., who lives in Welbeck Street, if he has sent any; and -in the event of none having been sent, have the goodness to forward to -this city, as early as possible, a supply of each of your editions of the -Spanish Scriptures. I have talked with Mr. Henderson upon this subject, -and think he will be a very suitable person to manage your concerns -here, and to correspond with you. He takes a particular interest in this -matter, and desires me to assure you of his readiness to do all that lies -in his power to forward your good work. - - * * * * * - - _Bogotá, 25th February, 1825._ - -I have noticed to you, more than once, the very favourable reception -given to the Scriptures in these parts. I am now to state to you an -exception, and it is in a quarter where it should not have been -found. The only person whom I found unfriendly to the circulation of -the Scriptures without notes, in the whole of the journey from Lima -to Bogotá, was the Bishop of Popayan. I have stated his opposition in -gentle terms, for truth requires it. I heard, soon after putting up the -advertisements for the sale of the New Testaments, that the Bishop had -spoken against the reading of them. I called upon him to know whether -it was so or not, and to learn what were his objections. I had visited -him before, and had had a visit from him in return, so that we were, on -this second visit, on terms of a friendly intercourse, and we therefore -entered freely into the subject of the sale and distribution of the -Scriptures. I mentioned to him what I had heard, and inquired whether -I had been correctly informed. He then told me the whole of what had -occurred upon the subject. He said, a person who had bought one of the -New Testaments, brought it to him and asked his opinion as to his using -it. The person was a priest, and he named him to me. The Bishop, upon -his opinion being asked, rose and brought the Acts of the Council of -Trent, and pointed out to the priest the article there, prohibiting -the use of the Scriptures without notes. He concluded, however, by -telling the priest that _he_ might keep his New Testament and use it. -This, said the Bishop, is all that occurred upon this matter. He said -farther, that it was not his intention to oppose the circulation of -the New Testaments in any other way. If any person chose to buy them, -he would not interfere; but if any one should ask his opinion upon the -matter, he would refer him to the same article, as his duty required him -to do. I said that I understood the article in question was as he had -stated it, but that when I considered how many among all ranks of the -catholic clergy made no account of that article, but freely encouraged -the circulation of the Scriptures among their flocks, I was inclined to -think that the article was qualified by something subsequent to it, or -that it was not generally considered as in force. He replied to this, -that there was nothing subsequent to alter the force of that article, -but rather to strengthen it, and that whatever others did, he considered -his duty to be, to follow the rules of the church in that and in all -such matters, as every good Catholic ought to do. I said that I saw the -force of what he said, considering what were the principles of his faith. -I added, that notwithstanding his reasons, I could not but be sorry to -see any opposition to the circulation of the Holy Scriptures, a book -which God had graciously given to all, and which should, of course, be -studied by all. I observed, also, that I was fully persuaded that very -great advantages would arise from a general reading of the word of God, -and from these considerations I conceived it to be my duty to put them -into the hands of all, and to call upon all to read them with serious -attention. “Amen,” replied the Bishop, “I also am of the same opinion. -I am sure that it would be advantageous to all to read the Scriptures, -but then let them be read with the necessary directions. If Bibles and -New Testaments were to come here with the notes, I would be the first -to promote their circulation.” Our conversation was extended a good -deal further upon this subject, and embraced the usual topics of this -question, but which it is unnecessary here to repeat. - -I am labouring what I can to establish a Bible Society here, and it is -that alone which keeps me longer in this city. I am not yet sure whether -I shall succeed or not, but my next letter will inform you. - - * * * * * - - _Bogotá, 1st March, 1825._ - -My last letter to you was written from Popayan on the 1st of January. I -informed you at that time of some of the circumstances that occurred to -me in the way, and gave you some account of the peculiar situation of the -country from Guayaquil to Quito. I shall now resume this description, -which I was obliged to break off abruptly in my last. I remained about -three weeks in Quito, experiencing the kindest attentions from many -friends. The remembrance of my short stay in that place will always be -agreeable. Thanks be to God for providing me friends in every quarter, -and may they all be fully rewarded for all their kindness. I had several -very interesting conversations with the Rector, and with some of the -Professors of the College in that city, upon religious subjects; and one -of the Professors who understands English begged me to let him have, -at any price, two works I carried with me. These were Jones’s Biblical -Cyclopedia and Stewart’s Philosophy of the Human Mind. He said that if -I could not spare both works, he particularly wished for the first, as -being in the line of his profession as a clergyman, and because he wished -to examine the subject of religion, not merely from their own writers, -but from ours also. I let him have both of them, with which he was much -gratified. These gentlemen belonging to the College, whom I have just -referred to, manifested an excellent and liberal spirit in regard to the -improvements necessary in their mode of education in the seminary to -which they belong. There are about 300 students in this college. - -Nothing very material occurred in the journey from Quito until arriving -at the province of Pastos. This province has been for a long time past -in a very unsettled state. It has repeatedly raised the standard of -rebellion against the existing Government, and has as often been reduced -to subjection by the force of arms. At each time it has suffered -severely, and at present it resembles a deserted country; the finest -fields and pastures are met with, without a single head of cattle. This -province is still but ill at rest, and may be said to be subdued and -reduced, rather than tranquillized. A proof of that is to be found in the -banditti which exist in it. At the time we passed, there were three or -four of these parties in different places, and one of them consisted of -one hundred men. On arriving at Tulcan, which is about three days journey -from the city of Pasto, the capital of the province, we had to take with -us a guard of ten men. We passed from Tulcan to Pasto, without meeting -with any enemy. But from what we heard afterwards, we may consider -ourselves as having made a providential escape, as there was a party of -16 men seen in these quarters, a few days after we passed. In the city of -Pasto, there is constantly kept a body of about a thousand men; some of -these are employed in searching out and in persecuting these banditti; -and some of them are employed in escorting the mail and travellers -from that to the province of Popayan. The Governor of Pasto gave us an -escort of forty men, and which was judged necessary from the general -state of the province, and from a recent occurrence. This occurrence was -the assault and murder of a merchant travelling from Popayan to Pasto, -notwithstanding his having an escort of twelve men with him. The soldiers -we brought with us behaved very well; we kept a good look out, and -mounted our centinels every night, particularly in that spot where the -murder was committed, and where we passed the night. Had we fallen in -with any of these parties we would have been hardly put to it, and had we -been worsted, we should certainly not have escaped with life. From this, -however, and from every other danger on the journey, the Lord delivered -us. For all these mercies, I feel my heart stirred up with gratitude and -thanksgiving, and I feel a desire more than ever to devote my whole life -to the service of God, and to the service of mankind. - -I have already stated to you the unquiet state of the Province of Pastos, -and its desolateness in consequence. The City of Pasto, the capital, -affords also a melancholy proof of this desolation. Its population has -been reduced from 15,000, to, perhaps, not more than 4000, and in every -street you meet with numbers of houses waste and uninhabited, with all -the wood of the doors and windows torn out, and which was used by the -military for firewood. You are not to consider this revolutionary spirit -as extending throughout the country, but as confined exclusively to that -province. - -Upon my arriving at Popayan, I found there an English medical gentleman, -of the name of Wallis, who has been upwards of twenty years in the -country. Dr. Wallis shewed me much kindness; he was very friendly to the -circulation of the Scriptures, and aided me therein as much as he could. -The number sold there was very small, considering the size of the place, -on account of some little opposition from the Bishop, of which I have -spoken in one of my letters to Mr. B. The topography of Popayan is worth -noticing. It is situated in a very large plain, called the valley of -Cauca. It is by far the largest plain in those quarters, the Cordilleras -separating farther from each other there than in any other part, and the -space between them is, in general, even, or nearly so. It is watered -by a beautiful river, called Cauca. The population in the whole valley -is exceedingly small, considering its size and fertility. There is -little doubt, I think, but it will one day become a place of great -population and importance. Its climate is healthy and delightful, with -an everlasting summer, and its productions, taking one part with another -include every thing, from wheat to the sugar-cane. There is no part of -Colombia which I have yet seen, nor, perhaps, of America, in which I -could wish to live in preference to Popayan. - -No part of South America, I believe, has felt more severely the effects -of the revolutionary war than the city of Popayan and its neighbourhood. -The city was taken and retaken, I believe, fourteen times, and there -is scarcely an individual in it who has not a long tale of woes to -relate, either of himself or of his friends. It has now enjoyed peace -for some time, and is beginning to regain its former state, but years -of tranquillity are necessary to restore it fully. There is a mint here, -which coins annually about one million of dollars, of the gold of Chocó, -and from the mines of the province of Popayan. There is also coined -there twenty thousand dollars of silver. The Director of the Mint is a -gentleman of the name of Pombo, a literary man, and who has published two -or three elementary works for schools, of considerable value. - -From Popayan to Bogotá there are two roads across the cordillera, but -the one to the south is the best. This is called the Pass of Guanacos, -and lies nearly east of Popayan; the other is called Quindiu, and lies -to the north. The cold on the top of the mountain is generally pretty -keen. The ascent from Popayan is gradual, but the descent on the other -side is rapid, and you pass quickly from a very cold climate to a hot -one. It is a frightful road in some places. You have frequently to -ascend and descend very steep places on this side of the mountain, from -the many deep glens made by the rivers which you pass. You may be said -to be riding up stairs and down stairs in these places, and in several -of them it is literally so. The mules are wonderfully steady, being -accustomed to these roads, so that they very seldom slip. Some years -ago an Italian doctor, passing that way, was so frightened with the -going down these stairs, that he mounted his mule the reverse way, with -his face backwards, and then leaned him down flat upon the mule. This -attitude, together with his three-cocked hat and queue, afforded no -little diversion to the muleteers who conducted him. This kind of road -continues till you come to the town of La Plata, and after that you have -a much better road, the greater part of which is in the great valley of -the river Magdalena, and one of its contributaries. The usual stages or -places where you hire mules, on the way between Popayan and Bogotá are, -La Plata, Neiva, and La Mesa. In most places the mules are scarce, on -account of the great number of these animals destroyed by the war. At -proper distances on the road there are houses called Tambos, which are -the inns of the place. These houses consist of a roof erected upon poles, -and without any walls, so that they afford shelter from the rain, but not -from the wind and the cold. The town of La Plata is pleasantly situated -on the banks of a river of the same name, on the first lowlands after -getting out from the great mountains. There is a great deal of fertile -land about the place, affording a great variety of productions, including -the sugar-cane, but these fertile lands are almost all lying waste. The -river La Plata, about ten miles below the town, joins the river Paez, a -river on the banks of which we travelled a good deal, and across which -we passed repeatedly. The La Plata and the Paez are nearly of the same -size, and make a fine stream when united. When these two streams unite, -the whole goes by the name of Paez. After travelling two days on the -banks of the Paez, we saw it fall into the Magdalena, and lose its name -there.—From the town of La Plata the heat begins, and when you reach the -Magdalena it is very great, and continues so all along the banks of the -river. This is decidedly the hottest place I ever was in. The thermometer -every day rose to 97½, and remained there two or three hours together. -I was in a constant state of perspiration during the 24 hours, except, -perhaps, from 2 o’clock in the morning till 8. This was the only respite, -if respite it might be called. At Neiva we left the road and the mules, -and took to the river, down which we went for some days. From Neiva -to Honda the river is navigable in what are called balsas. The balsa -consists of long poles or trunks of trees laid close to each other, with -others laid over then cross-wise, and again, above this row, or above -an additional one, is a kind of flooring, made of the bamboo flattened -out. The wood of which these balsas are made is exceedingly light, and -very well adapted for the use. In this vessel there is not a single nail -used, nor a single rope. The poles are tied together with what are called -bejucos, which is a species of plant that grows abundantly in these -quarters, and resembles a rope in length and thickness. With these, -which are of all sizes, the whole work of nails and ropes is performed. -Over the balsa is raised a roof, thatched with what the wood affords. -This protects the luggage as well as the passengers from the rain. In -this rude vessel we passed some days and some nights, sailing when we -had light, and at night fastened by one of these ropes to a tree. The -river was very shallow at the time we passed, so that we frequently got -aground in the middle of the stream, at which time our boatmen, or bogas -as they are called, had to get into the water and push us along. There -was another evil of a worse kind which we had to encounter, namely, -the trunks of trees sunk deep in the bottom of the river, sometimes -appearing above the water, and sometimes not. It requires a good deal of -dexterity to steer among these at times, as the current perhaps draws you -straight to them. Against one of these sunken trees we drove one day, and -fortunately broke it with the blow. The shock pitched our bogas into the -river in a moment, but they were immediately again on board. This blow, -however, broke some of our wooden ropes, and we were under the necessity -of fastening ourselves to a tree till we got repaired. The bogas got -into the wood, and got, quite at hand, other ropes of a similar kind, -cut them down, repaired the bark, and in an hour’s time we were again -at sea. The general landing place for travellers for Bogotá, is not as -far down as Honda, but at a place called Fusagasugá. Here you leave the -river, and begin to ascend the hills, and afterwards the mountains, and -sensibly to change your climate from extreme heat to temperature, but a -temperature which, under these circumstances, feels quite cold. On the -last day’s travel to this place, we began early in the morning to ascend -the mountain by a steep and rugged road, closely wooded on both sides. -We kept ascending till about noon, when we reached the top, and the wood -disappeared. Here I expected we would have had, as usual, to descend -again, but quite otherwise. On the top of this mountain is a large -beautiful plain, and at the farther end of it stands the city of Bogotá. - - * * * * * - - _Bogotá, 5th April, 1825._ - -I had the pleasure of writing you on the 25th of February last, and of -giving you an account of those places, in which the Holy Scriptures -were distributed in the course of my journey. I noticed to you at -the same time, the only instance I met with of opposition to the -circulation of the Scriptures without notes. I also informed you of my -endeavours to bring about the establishment of a Bible Society in this -city. By the last packet for England, I sent you a copy of No. 29 of -“The Constitutional,” a newspaper published in this place, and which -contained an advertisement relative to the subject in question. By that -advertisement, you would see that something was doing in the matter, -and from the respectability of the gentlemen who are there mentioned, -you would perceive that we had met with some valuable supporters, and -that there was a prospect held forth of succeeding in this object. I -now send you Nos. 30, 31, and 32, of the same paper, which will point -out to you the different steps we have taken, and you will be able to -notice also the progressive encouragement we obtained. You will perceive -by the two last numbers that our Society at length obtained a fair and -firm establishment. I say a _fair_ establishment, because the whole of -our transactions were done in open day, and because all who wished to -state their objections were not only permitted, but encouraged to do so. -Our meeting on the 24th was very well attended, and consisted of the -most respectable class of the community in this city, both clergy and -laity. We had, on that occasion, a very warm and interesting discussion -of the point in question. A professor in one of the colleges was the -first who spoke, a man of very respectable talents, and commendable for -his Christian virtues, but withal full of Catholic prejudices. This -gentleman opposed our object, as being contrary to the acts of the -general councils of the church, and as being injudicious and hurtful, -especially under present circumstances. The next who spoke was the -very respectable rector of the principal college of this city. In this -gentleman we met with a warm friend to our Institution, and we had the -pleasure of hearing him reply to the objections of the preceding speaker. -Both these individuals are clergymen. The next who spoke was also a -clergyman, a well known and eloquent preacher in this place, a man full -of zeal, and who adorns his profession by a very exemplary conduct. This -gentleman opposed our plans, as the first speaker had done, and even went -farther, and said, that under existing circumstances, he considered it -improper to have a general circulation of the Scriptures, even with the -notes affixed. This last observation relieved us a little, in respect to -the opposition we met with from this individual, as it was plain that, as -a Catholic, he proved too much, and thus overshot his mark, and injured -his cause, inasmuch as he carried things farther than either the Pope or -the Council of Trent. This ended our opposition, or at least finished -the list of our opponents, for no other individual present spoke on that -side of the question. The gentleman, however, who had spoken first, was -so full upon his subject, that he rose again and again to advocate his -cause, until it was necessary to reply to him from the chair as to -order, and to the giving an opportunity to others to speak as well as -himself. Several gentlemen spoke in succession, and warmly advocated the -cause of the Bible Society in general, and pointed out to the meeting -the consistency of the object of the Society to be established, with the -laws and customs of the people of Colombia, and stating at the same time -the great advantages that would certainly arise to their country, from -a general circulation and reading of the word of God, not encumbered -with notes, but in its own native simplicity, as it was delivered by -the Almighty to mankind. The two Ministers of Government who were -present, Mr. Gual, and Mr. Castillo, very ably, and at considerable -length, defended and supported the object of the Society, and pointed -out that there was nothing of a clandestine nature in the establishment -of this Institution, but that it had the full and open approbation of -the Executive Government of the country, and also of the ecclesiastical -authorities. - -After our plans respecting the Society had thus been clearly and openly -stated to the assembly, and nothing kept back, and after we had heard -all that was to be said in support of its adoption in Colombia, and also -the objections urged against it, the sense of the meeting was taken -by vote. The question put amounted to this: Is it compatible with our -laws and customs, as Colombians, and as of the Roman Catholic church, -to establish a Colombian Bible Society in this capital as a national -Society, and whose only object is to print and circulate the Holy -Scriptures, in approved versions, in our native tongue; and does such a -Society meet with the approbation of this assembly? This question was -triumphantly carried in the affirmative, and almost unanimously. - -I need not tell you how much pleasure I enjoyed in witnessing this -triumph, nor how many anxieties previously entertained respecting the -result of these meetings, were at once laid asleep, or were changed into -that tranquillity, that peace and joy, which arise from seeing the name -of the Lord glorified among men. I know you will participate in the same -feelings, and will hail the establishment of this Society as a new era -in South America. See here one of the happy effects of the political -revolution! and it is but one of many, some of which are already visible, -and the rest come on in their natural order and beauty. Blessed be God, -who doeth all things according to the counsel of his own will, who maketh -the wrath of man to praise him, and who in due time saith to the wars, -as to the winds and the waves, peace, be still! and thus leaving us in -the midst of the calm, to exclaim, Who is a God like unto our God, who -bringeth order out of confusion, and who maketh waters to spring up in -the wilderness, and streams to flow in the desert. - -Our last meeting to _establish_ the Society was held yesterday afternoon, -and consisted of those who had subscribed as members of this Institution. -The President, Vice Presidents, the Treasurer, and Secretaries, were -chosen at this meeting, and you will find their names in the paper, -No. 32, I now send you. These gentlemen, you will see, are of the most -respectable inhabitants of this place, and this gives at once a tone -and a stability to our Society. Besides the preceding office-bearers, -there was chosen a Committee, consisting of twenty, one half clergymen -and the other half laymen. The gentlemen elected into the Committee, are -also of the same highly respectable class as those whose names you have -mentioned in the paper. It is intended to publish, as soon as possible, -an account of the origin and actual state of the Society. Along with this -will be published the Rules and Regulations adopted, the names of the -office-bearers and committee, and a list of subscribers. To all of which -will be added a short address to the people of South America, upon the -object and the advantages of the Society. I have much pleasure in saying -that the subscriptions already amount to 1380 dollars. I should not omit -to mention to you, that all the meetings upon this matter have been held -in the chapel of the University, which is in the principal Dominican -Convent of this city. The Rector of the University and the Prior of the -Convent have been and are our very warm friends and supporters. With the -former the subscription paper lies, and is daily obtaining additional -subscribers. One of our secretaries is also a Dominican Friar, is -secretary to the University, and formerly filled the office of secretary -in the district tribunal of the Inquisition of this quarter. It is this -gentleman who has written all the articles in the Newspaper about the -Society, and what you read in the English part is merely a translation -from the same article in Spanish, as written by him.[6] - -I have now to say a few words respecting the conduct on this occasion -of Mr. Gual, Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs, and now President -of the Bible Society of Colombia. I wish to speak of the conduct of -this gentleman in the highest terms, and in doing so, feel that I am -not using the voice of flattery and adulation, but complying with the -precept of rendering to every one his due. It is an act of injustice to -withhold the praise that is due to any one, when a proper occasion offers -of mentioning it. I had occasion to call upon him at different times, -in regard to the preliminary steps for setting the Society on foot, and -notwithstanding the hurry of business in his public situation, I always -found him ready to spend a few minutes in listening to the propositions -made to him as to our mode of acting in this matter. He also cheerfully -attended and presided at all our meetings, and constantly defended, with -much judgment and eloquence, the glorious work of circulating the Holy -Scriptures in their natural beauty, in every corner of his native land, -over all this continent, and finally throughout the world. - -Mr. Castillo, the Minister of Finance, also warmly advocated our cause, -and these two gentlemen, as well as the Minister of the Interior, have -given 50 dollars each by way of donation, and are, besides, annual -subscribers of 20 dollars each. The Vice-President has also given us a -donation and his subscription of 24 dollars. - -I have much pleasure in noticing to you that Colonel Hamilton, H. B. -M. Commissioner to this Government, and Mr. Henderson, the British -Consul-General, have lent the influence of their names and of their -purses to the forwarding of our Society. Colonel Campbell also, the -British Chargé d’Affaires, just arrived in time to be present at our -last meeting, and both he and Mr. Henderson were chosen members of the -committee. - -I have requested Mr. Gual to write a few lines to Lord Teignmouth, by way -of introducing our new Society to a friendly correspondence with that -great and venerable Society over which he has so long presided, with so -much honour to himself, and with much advantage to mankind. I expect Mr. -Gual’s letter to-morrow, and shall forward it with this. He is going -also to write a few lines in order to begin a correspondence with the -American Bible Society. - -I have now been detained in this city considerably longer than I expected -upon my arrival here, but I have the satisfaction of thinking, that my -stay has been prolonged in the forwarding of a good work. I now set off -immediately, and expect soon to have the pleasure of seeing the friends -of the Redeemer’s cause in the United States; and not very long after, if -the Lord will, I hope once more to behold my native land, and to salute -there my friends and brethren in Christ Jesus. - -[6] These articles from the newspaper are added at the end of this -letter, as descriptive of the state of the country in regard to these -matters. - - _Articles regarding the Formation of a Bible Society in Bogotá, - extracted from “The Constitutional,” a weekly Newspaper - published in that City, in Spanish and English._ - - _17th March, 1825._ - - On the 15th instant, at half-past five in the afternoon, a - public meeting took place in the Chapel of the University of - this city, at which were present Dr. Pedro Gual, Secretary - of State for Foreign Affairs; Dr. Antonio Malo, Member of - the Senate; Dr. Joaquin Gomez and Dr. Mariano Miño, Members - of the Chamber of Representatives; Dr. Jose Maria Estevez, - Rector of the College of San Bartolomé; Father Joaquin Galvez, - Rector of the University; Father Mariano Garnica, Prior of the - Dominican Convent; Dr. Nicolas Quebedo; and the Secretary of - the University. The meeting was assembled at the instance of - Mr. Thomson, Agent of the British and Foreign Bible Society, - with the view of establishing a Bible Society in Colombia. - The Rules for the proposed Society were read, and after some - observations from Sr. Gual, it was resolved unanimously to call - a general meeting on Sunday next, the 20th instant, at four - o’clock in the afternoon, in the same place, in order to take - into consideration the advantages or inconveniences of such an - establishment in Colombia; to obtain the general consent for - the incorporation of a Society similar to that which has been - the source of so many spiritual benefits to the human race in - Europe, Asia, and Africa; and of which a correct idea will be - given to the public by means of the press. In the mean time, - it is distinctly stated, that the sole and exclusive object - of this Society is the dissemination of the Holy Scriptures - throughout the world. - - _24th March, 1825._ - - On Sunday last, the 20th instant, the meeting took place - which was advertised in the CONSTITUTIONAL of last week, - for the purpose of establishing this valuable and important - Institution. Upon this occasion eloquent and appropriate - speeches were delivered by Sres. Gual, Castillo, and Herrera; - and, after a debate of considerable length, it was agreed to - convene a general meeting, by means of circulars, for this day, - (Thursday,) at four o’clock in the afternoon. The principal - object of this invitation is to place the basis of the Society - on the most permanent and respectable foundation; to hear the - opinions, and be benefited by the judgment of the gentlemen - who may assemble; and to determine definitively upon what - may appear most suitable and in conformity to the state and - relations of Colombia. By the blessing of Heaven we hope to see - accomplished the desires of those who have devoted their wisdom - and love of their country to the promotion of so benevolent an - undertaking.—We will have the pleasure of publishing a report - of the speeches delivered on the occasion, also the rules and - regulations of the Society, together with the objections that - may be urged against it. - - _31st March, 1825._ - - At length the setting on foot of this establishment has been - obtained, and its advantages will soon be known to those who - are alike the friends of the religion of Jesus Christ, and - of the true enlightening of the people. Endeavours were made - to bring together all the principal persons of this city, by - issuing upwards of 300 cards of invitation; and notwithstanding - the smallness of the Chapel of the University, there assembled - in it two-thirds of those invited. It is our intention to - publish the speeches then made, together with the discourses - offered us by some gentlemen who had not time to deliver them - upon that occasion. This we promise to do with the greatest - correctness possible. The opposition which has been made to - this beneficent Institution by sinister interpretations of its - object, is not to be wondered at, nor that strife of opinion - which has already been manifested upon this important subject. - It is, however, strange that any public writer should have said - that it would be better to print two millions of copies of the - Catechism, (the only book of instruction afforded to the people - by our old oppressors,) than to print and circulate the Holy - Bible. It is not suitable in itself, nor is it consistent with - our upright motives to excite contention. The exclusive object - of the Bible Society which has been established in Colombia - is, to facilitate to all Colombians the reading of the divine - word, in our own native tongue, from approved versions, such - as that of Father Scio, or that of the celebrated Torres Amat, - which has just been published in Madrid with all the necessary - licences: and this object will be accomplished without in any - degree infringing upon the Articles of the Council of Trent. - If this plan draw forth opposition—if this object is capable - of producing bitter and extemporaneous censures, then we will - be under the necessity of classing the people of Colombia with - the most uncivilized people of the world. This Bible Society - has been established with the consent and approbation of - the most distinguished persons, actually entrusted with the - Executive Government of the Republic, and the Ecclesiastical - Government of the Archbishopric, to whom it belongs exclusively - and without dispute to watch over the spiritual and temporal - happiness of the people, and whose fidelity none without - injustice can call in question. - - _7th April, 1825._ - - On the 4th current there assembled in the Chapel of the - University, those Foreigners and Colombians who have so - generously contributed to the formation of this establishment, - and whose names will be furnished upon another occasion. - Rules and Regulations for this Society were read, and were - unanimously approved of as the laws of its organization. - In conformity to these Rules, the subscribers proceeded to - the election of President, Vice-Presidents, Treasurer, and - Secretaries, when the following gentlemen were duly elected. - - _President._ - - Don PEDRO GUAL, Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs. - - _First Vice-President._ - - Don JOSE MARIA CASTILLO, Minister of Finance. - - _Second Vice-President._ - - Doctor JOSE MARIA ESTEVEZ, Prebendary, and Rector of the - College of St. Bartholomew. - - _Third Vice-President._ - - Doctor JUAN FERNANDEZ DE SOTOMAYOR, Rector of the College del - Rosario. - - _Treasurer._ - - Don JOSE SANS DE SANTA MARIA, Senator, and Comptroller of the - department of Cundinamarca. - - _Secretaries._ - - Father ANTONIO MARCO GUTIERRES, Secretary of the University. - - Doctor R. N. CHEYNE. - - In the same manner the members present proceeded to vote for - a Committee consisting of twenty individuals, one half of - whom are Clergymen. The Society wished to place among its - principal office-bearers the virtuous and worthy Governor of - the Archbishoprick; but this gentleman, with his accustomed - moderation, declined this honour, and very properly noticed, - that the third article of the Rules reserved to the Ordinary - of each diocese, the right of examining the edition of the - Holy Scriptures that should be published by the Society, in - conformity with the decrees of the councils; and that the - exercise of this power would prevent him, as Governor of this - diocese, from accepting of the honour that this respectable - Society wished to confer upon him. - - It was then resolved on to print, as soon as possible, in the - form of a pamphlet, the speeches made at the last meeting, - the Rules and Regulations of the Institution, a list of - subscribers, and the transactions of the Society. It was also - agreed upon that the advertisements of the Society should - be made through “the CONSTITUTIONAL,” in consequence of its - Editors having cheerfully employed their pages in promoting - this Society. Finally, it was agreed on that the Subscription - List should lie with the Rector of the University, at whose - apartments all who wish to subscribe, may have an opportunity - of doing so, on any day from eight to nine o’clock in the - morning. - - * * * * * - -_To the Committee of the British and Foreign School Society._[7] - - _London, 25th May, 1826._ - -Gentlemen, - -Agreeable to your wishes I sit down to give you a sketch of the progress, -and of the actual state of education in South America. I shall begin at -Buenos Aires, and shall take the different states in the order in which -I travelled through them. When I left Buenos Aires, in May 1821, there -were eight schools for boys in that city, supported by the magistrates, -and all of them conducted, more or less, on your system. There were, I -think, about as many more schools in the small villages around the city. -These were also under the care of the magistrates, but had not been put -upon your system at the time mentioned. I had visited some of them for -the purpose of organizing them upon this plan, but the never-ending -revolutions of that unhappy period, prevented the proper measures from -being carried into effect for their improvement. - -Upon my leaving Buenos Aires, the schools were put under the direction -of a very respectable clergyman, who, I thought, would conduct them -with much advantage, but, from his not being well acquainted with the -system, or from his being peculiar in the application of it, the schools -did not improve, but rather grew worse. This state of things lasted -for several months, until the Society, which had been formed some time -before my leaving that place, becoming re-organized, and arousing from -its lethargy, began to take a particular interest in forwarding education -according to this system. Much was done through this means; and, I am -happy to say, that I have lately heard that the Society continues its -useful exertions, and is likely to become more efficient from year to -year. As you wish me to mention some individual or individuals in the -different countries in South America with whom you could advantageously -correspond in furtherance of your Christian object, universal education, -I give you here the name of the Secretary to the above-mentioned -Society, Don Bartolomé Muñoz. This individual is a clergyman of great -respectability, he possesses a spirit of active benevolence, and is a -warm friend to education. With this gentleman you may correspond with -great advantage to the furtherance of your object; and I am sure it will -afford much satisfaction to the individual mentioned, and to the rest of -the Society, to hear from you, and to labour with you in this good cause. - -I am not sure whether I mentioned to you in my letters from Buenos Aires, -the circumstances of the meetings at the first formation of this Society, -being held in the chief Franciscan convent of that city. This is worth -mentioning, as it shows the liberality of priests and friars on the -subject of education. The Provincial of the order, Don Hipólito Soler, -lived in this convent, and was very friendly indeed to our object. The -uniform kindness and courtesy which I experienced in my many calls upon -him in his cell, I shall never forget. The Prior of the convent was also -very friendly. To the list of our excellent friends among the priests, -I must not omit the highly respected Dean of Buenos Aires, Don Diego de -Zavaleta. The nephew of this gentleman, Don Ramon Anchorez, was also -a very particular friend, and often encouraged me to go forward when -obstacles lay in the way. - -I have mentioned the labours of the Society in promoting Schools -in that city. I must also mention, and very particularly, that the -interest taken by the government, under the direction of Don Bernardino -Rivadavia, greatly contributed to carry forward this noble object. The -labours of the gentleman now mentioned, in instructing his countrymen -in true political wisdom, by precept and by example, and his exertions -in forwarding the cause of knowledge and general education, have mainly -contributed to give to Buenos Aires, (what it indisputably enjoys) -the first rank among the new American states. His name will ever be -associated with the happiest part of the revolution of that country; and -he will long be looked upon as its best benefactor. Accounts have just -reached London, that this gentleman has been recently elected President -of the United Provinces of the Rio de la Plata, an honour justly due -to him as the regenerator of their independence of Spain, and of their -dependance upon each other. We may, I think, fairly augur, that much -good will be done in the advancement of education by this individual -throughout the various provinces of the Union, at the head of which he is -now placed. I think a letter of congratulation from the Society is justly -due to him, and, from what I know of his sentiments, I have no doubt of -his readily acceding to any plans the Society might suggest for the -establishing of schools throughout the provinces. - -Through the means above stated, the number of schools has greatly -increased in Buenos Aires since I left it. The Rev. Mr. Armstrong, in a -letter lately received by the Bible Society, reckons them to amount to -about _one hundred_, and thinks they may contain about _five thousand_ -scholars. In the letter now referred to, Mr. Armstrong states, that he -had presented 500 New Testaments to these schools on the part of the -British and Foreign Bible Society, and he expresses a hope that this -precious volume is likely to be generally used in all the schools before -long. - -At the time I left Buenos Aires, there was a very good girls’ school, -on the British system, containing 120 scholars. I have not heard -particularly of this school since that time, but hope it continues to -prosper as it then did. The person who organized this school was Don José -Catalá, a native of Spain, and a zealous promoter of education. This -gentleman was the first who studied the system at our schools in Buenos -Aires. He was afterwards appointed to be master of the central school, -and continued in that situation until a few weeks before I left that -place. - -I mentioned to you, in some of my letters, that I had paid a visit to -Monte Video, where I was kindly received by the first ecclesiastic of -that place, Don Damaso Antonio de Larañaga, a priest of a liberal and -enlightened mind, and a friend to education. This gentleman laid the -subject of the establishment of schools on the British system before -the magistrates, and, in consequence, I was authorized to send a master -to them, who was to receive a salary of 1200 dollars a-year, whilst -engaged in establishing and superintending the schools. The person most -qualified for this undertaking was Don José Catalá, already mentioned. -He was, accordingly, sent there with a supply of the necessary articles -for making a commencement. I received, whilst in South America, different -letters respecting his progress, which was at first slow on account of -the war in which that place was involved, and the scarcity of funds -consequent upon it. Afterwards he was enabled to get on better. The last -letter I had from him is encouraging, of which I shall give an extract:— - -“The school which I formed here has produced upwards of eighty children -well instructed in elementary education. These have given satisfaction -to those best qualified to judge, and to the public in general, in two -public examinations which have taken place. The number of children now -in the school is 208. Two years ago, I formed a private school upon the -Lancasterian system. It contains at present forty children belonging to -the best families of this city, who pay for each child six dollars a -quarter. The master of this school is a young man of excellent talents, -and of good conduct. He attended the central school for a whole year, -in order to learn the system well, and to approve himself capable of -conducting a school upon these principles. He expected to be employed in -one of the schools which the magistrates were about to establish, but as -it was impossible for them to carry forward their purpose, owing to the -disturbances of the times, I advised him to establish a private school. -The young man had not means to do this, as he was the son of a poor -widow. The Society, however, gave him lessons, slates, and pencils, and -Mr. Noble gave him the wood to make the seats and desks. Thus provided, -he offered to instruct, under the auspices of the Society, and by my -direction,—elementary education, and also the principles of geometry, -trigonometry, and geography, and to hold a public examination of his -pupils every year. I am happy to inform you that the children are making -very great progress, owing to the steadiness and fidelity of the master, -and to the six well instructed monitors whom I sent him from the other -school, each of whom knows more than any of the masters of this place. - -“I am sorry to inform you that the master of the central school died -about three weeks ago. In consequence of this misfortune, I have been -obliged to take the school into my own hands until another master be -appointed. - -“I mentioned to you, in a former letter, that I had organized Mrs. Hyne’s -school in Buenos Aires on the Lancasterian system, with this peculiarity -in the arrangement, that the children are taught in English one day, -and in Spanish the other; as she has scholars who speak these languages -respectively, I sent her some of the lessons printed here for the use of -her school.” - -The school here referred to is kept by an English lady, and was just -beginning when I left Buenos Aires. It was afterwards fully established -on your system as above mentioned. I have had frequent information -respecting the prosperity of this school, and am told that the youth of -that city show a great desire to study the English language, and are -making progress in it. Their parents have thus shown their desire for -the education of their children, in instructing them in our tongue, and -they have shown their liberality in sending them without scruple to be -educated by an English lady belonging to the Protestant church. - -In the preceding review of the schools in Buenos Aires, there is much -to cheer the minds and hearts of those who interest themselves in the -welfare of their fellow-men, and who use their best exertions for -this end, in the way in which they can be most effectual, namely, in -the instruction of the young. To see the youthful flocks increasing -in numbers, and growing in the knowledge of the purest religion and -morality, by reading and imbibing the sacred oracles, is a sight truly -gratifying, and to hear of this will, I am sure, afford much satisfaction -to the Committee of the British and Foreign School Society. It will also, -I trust, lead you to renewed exertions on behalf of that country, and, -knowing your readiness to do so, I beg leave to suggest the propriety -of sending out a person possessing good talents, and well acquainted -with your system, that he may be employed in extending education through -the various provinces of these United States; and, in recommending this -measure, I repeat my conviction, that the gentleman now elected President -of these States, Don Bernardino Rivadavia, will take a pleasure in -seconding your views. - -I now turn your attention to the provinces of Mendoza and San Juan, -as these form a part of the United Provinces of the Rio de la Plata. -In March 1822, I visited these places, and found a very great desire -existing there, in regard to education. Our excellent friend, Dr. -Gillies, was at that time (and still is) residing in Mendoza. He had -contributed much to create such a desire, and was very active in using -every means for satisfying it. It was through his very urgent request, -that I visited these places, I was much gratified with what I saw there, -as regards a growing spirit of knowledge and liberality. The governor -of Mendoza was very friendly to the establishment of Schools. A Society -for promoting them was established a few days after my arrival, and a -petition was presented to the Governor, that a small printing press, -belonging to the town, might be placed at their disposal, that they might -print lessons for the schools, and might otherwise gain a little for -promoting their objects. This request was immediately acceded to, and the -press and the types were transferred accordingly. A newspaper has been -printed at this press for some time, and it has greatly contributed to -enlighten that quarter. A girls’ school was begun whilst I was there, -and measures were taken for establishing schools for boys, which were -afterwards carried into effect. After these favourable circumstances -had been some time in operation, a storm overtook our worthy friends. -They were like to be overwhelmed by a spirit of fanaticism, which had -raised itself against the promoters of education and reform, by those of -a contrary mind. The enemies of righteousness prevailed for some time, -but at length they stumbled and fell, and truth and improvement again -appeared, and prevailed, and now reign in triumph. Those individuals who -had combined together to benefit their country, and whose benevolent -arrangements were thus for some time impeded; these very individuals are -now the chief persons in the government, and are thus enabled to carry -their measures into effect. - -In the Province of San Juan I found many enlightened individuals who were -warm friends of education. There were, no doubt, many of other feelings -and wishes. A printed circular was sent to the different persons of -note in that place by the Governor, inviting them to a meeting in his -own house, for discussing the subject of establishing schools on your -system. A good many attended, and some were for the measure, and some -against it. The Governor was a warm friend to the object, and the meeting -broke up by his signifying, that it was the intention of the government -to use its best endeavours to forward this object. I left some Scripture -lessons for the schools in that place, as I had done in Mendoza, the -price of which, together with the expenses of my journey there, were paid -by the Governors of these two places. - -Before I leave San Juan, I wish to notice the meritorious conduct of Don -Salvador Carril. In the meeting referred to, he was one of the principal -defenders of our objects, and strongly urged the adoption of the proposed -plan. Some time after, this gentleman was appointed Governor in that -province. When holding that situation, he wished to use all his influence -for the establishment of religious liberty in his native province. I have -great pleasure in stating that in this _he completely succeeded._ He has -thus had the honour of leading the way in this important matter, and of -making his own province _the first part of South America, to declare for -Religious Liberty_. The date of this _era_, for such it may be called to -this new continent, is the sixth of June, 1825. The province of Buenos -Aires has adopted the same wise and liberal policy, but the first honour -is due to San Juan, and to its Governor Carril.[8] I must not omit to -mention here, Mr. Rawson from the United States, and who has long -resided in San Juan. His name is connected with every measure for the -improvement of that country. - -In regard to the other provinces of the Rio de la Plata, I can say very -little, but I believe education is in a very low state in all of them. -The names of these provinces are, Santa Fé, Entre Rios, Corientes, -Paraguay, Salta, Tucuman, and Córdova. It is, however, very probable, -from the general spirit diffused through these countries, that plans -for the improvement and extension of education would be very favourably -received, particularly under the recommendation and fostering care of the -President, Don Bernardino Rivadavia. - -I omitted to mention before stretching across the Pampas, another -Lancasterian School and Society. This School and Society are situated -about 500 miles to the South of the City of Buenos Aires, at the -mouth of the Rio Negro, where there is a small fort and town. Colonel -Oyüela, who was appointed Governor of that quarter some months before -my leaving the eastern side of the continent, attended our central -school to get acquainted with our system, and on going to the place -of his appointment, he carried with him a supply of lessons for the -commencement of a school. I afterwards learned, that he had endeavoured -to interest the inhabitants of that place in the education of their -children, and that he had succeeded in establishing a school, and -in forming a small society for its support. To this small society, -contributions were made by the inhabitants of such things as they had, -and these were turned into money, and kept the school going forward. The -conduct of Colonel Oyüela in this matter is truly praiseworthy, as it -springs from a sincere desire to promote education, and to benefit those -over whom he is placed. If all governors, _far and near_, were to act in -the same manner, we should soon see ignorance turned into knowledge all -the world over. - -The British System was begun in Chile, in July 1821. The Director, Don -Bernardo O’Higgins, manifested a sincere desire to extend education -throughout the country over which he was placed, and was ready to listen -to any improvements in the manner of communicating knowledge, which might -be brought before him. The principal Secretary of State, Don Rafael -Echevarria, was also much interested in the subject. Three schools -were established in Santiago, the capital, one in Valparaiso, and one -in Coquimbo. Some months before I left Chile, Mr. Eaton arrived there, -having been sent from London, by Mr. Irisarri, to promote education -on the Lancasterian plan. The government intended to send Mr. Eaton -to Conception, in the south of Chile, to establish schools in that -province, but on representing to the director, that it would be better to -concentrate our labours in the capital, and from thence to send qualified -masters to the various provinces, it was acceded to that Mr. Eaton should -remain in Santiago. Our labours were continued there together until -I received an invitation from General San Martin to go to Peru. Upon -considering fully the importance of this invitation, as affording an -opportunity for extending the blessings of education, in that interesting -country, I thought it advisable to accept of it, considering that Mr. -Eaton would remain in Chile, and that thus what had been begun there, -would be maintained, and that by degrees, through his labours, the -system would be generally extended in that quarter. These expectations, -however, were not realized, as Mr. Eaton, in a few months after I went -to Peru, fell sick, and was obliged to return to England. In consequence -of this misfortune, the cause in Chile began to decline, and I believe, -at the present moment, the schools formerly established are in a very -low state, if not given up altogether. It is much to be regretted, that -things should remain in this state in Chile, and that the great work of -education should be retarded there, whilst it is making progress in other -quarters. During my stay in Peru, I had some notices of how things were -going on, and where they might probably end, unless I should accede to -their invitation to return there, or at all events send a well qualified -master to sustain the system. I could not go myself to Chile, although -I had a great desire to go, because my leaving Peru at that time, might -have occasioned a retrogression similar to what had taken place in Chile. -In consequence of this, I looked out for a well instructed master to -go there. Before I succeeded in obtaining one, the Spanish army took -possession of Lima, and General Rodil, who commanded the fortresses of -Callao, refused to allow the master to go when I called on him to obtain -a passport. - -From the representatives of the Chilian government, now in London, I have -learned that there is a great regret at the disappointment met with in -regard to the schools; and that there exists a sincere desire to remedy -the evil as much as possible, and without delay. I mention this to the -Committee agreeable to your request that I should point out the best -means for forwarding education in South America. I would suggest the -propriety of seeking out a well qualified person to go to Chile, and if -the one selected is well fitted for conducting education, I have no doubt -of his obtaining a favourable reception, and of his being the means of -greatly benefiting that country. For the encouragement of such a one, I -would say, that Chile enjoys a delightful climate, and its inhabitants -are, I think, more moral in general than in any other part of South -America where I have been. - -The persons you might correspond with in Chile upon this subject, -are the present Director, General Freire, Don Rafael Echevarria, Don -Henrique Camillo, and Don Manuel Salas. General Freire was Governor of -Conception when I resided in Chile; but, on a visit he paid to Santiago -when I was there, I had an interview with him, in which he manifested -his satisfaction at the progress of our schools on your system, and -his readiness to encourage the introduction of the same plan in the -province of Conception, when we should be able to send a master there. -I have, indeed, no doubt of his hearty co-operation with any measures -which the Society may adopt on behalf of Chile. The other three person -mentioned will lend all their aid in this good work. Mr. Echevarria -was First Secretary of State at the time I was there, and encouraged -education on this system by sending his own son to our central school, -and by a frequent attendance himself in the afternoons when his public -business was over. Mr. Camillo was, and I believe is, contributing -to the enlightening of his countrymen respecting education and other -improvements by publishing a periodical work which had these things for -its sole object. Don Manuel Salas is already known to you by my letters -from Chile. He is a man up in years, and his only desire is to benefit -his countrymen in every way he can, and he looks upon education as the -most effectual means of doing permanent good. - -I have only further to mention respecting Chile, that Mr. Egaña, the -present envoy from that government now in London, will be ready to -give the Committee any information or assistance in his power to the -furtherance of this object. - -My arrival in Peru, in the end of June 1822, and the favourable -circumstances in the establishment of schools there, is detailed in my -letters written about that period. Some time after these prosperous days, -the war in that country greatly hindered the progress of education. -We had often been scourged by this foe before, particularly in Buenos -Aires, but the occurrences in Peru were to me, at least, new. Our former -wars were among ourselves, and whatever party gained the ascendancy the -schools went on unmolested, or nearly so; but in Lima we came in contact -with the Spaniards, the well known encouragers of ignorance, at least so -far as South America is concerned. Twice was Lima taken possession of -by the Spanish armies during my residence there. On the first occasion -I left the city along with some thousands, who fled at that unhappy -time. The schools suffered an interruption of three months by the first -visit of the Spanish troops. On the second occasion, to prevent a like -interruption, I remained in the city, and the schools went on, though not -so prosperously as we could have wished. The protection we enjoyed at -this time was owing, I believe, in a good measure, to the general feeling -in the place in favour, of education. After remaining six months under -the Spanish dominion, in that city, and finding it impossible to advance, -I left that place on my way northward, and finally came to England. -Of the result of this journey you are already acquainted, through the -publications of the Bible Society. - -The Central School established in the College of the Dominican Friars -in Lima, contained, on the entrance of the Spanish army, 230 children, -and was going on well; there was another school on the same plan which -had 80 scholars in it. In both these schools printed sheets of extracts -from the Scriptures were used for lessons, the same as in Buenos Aires -and Chile. But in addition to this, in Lima the New Testament entire, -printed by the British and Foreign Bible Society in London, was used as -our principal school-book. In this precious volume the children in the -higher classes read, and were questioned as to its contents. The same -volume was carried home by the children, and read by them there, and -portions of it also were committed to memory. These portions were recited -in school, and premiums were awarded according to the accuracy of the -recitation, and the clearness of the views which the children gave in -their own language, of what they had recited. Besides the sheet lessons, -the Scripture extracts were printed and used in the form of little books. -Requests at times came from the parents to have a copy of these to read, -which requests were complied with, and thus the word of God became more -known, and I trust more revered and obeyed. - -I am not sure whether I mentioned to you or not, on former occasions, -_the name_ of an esteemed friend and an able coadjutor in the work of -education. It would in me be a dereliction of duty to pass over in -silence the name and the character of this individual. The gentleman I -speak of is Don José Francisco Navarrete, a clergyman in Lima. After -an acquaintance with him for about two years, and experiencing during -the half of that time his able co-operation, I beg leave to recommend -him to the attention of the Society, in reference to the furtherance of -education in Peru. I have had three letters from him since my return to -England, and am happy to find that he continues his exertions unabated in -promoting the instruction of youth, and that the schools left under his -charge are doing well. He informs me that a school has been established -in Huánuco, and that it is conducted by a native of that place, who -attended our school in Lima several months when I was there. Huánuco -is a very happy station for a school. It is situated in an interesting -country, and is the key to the large uncivilized population which inhabit -the banks of the Huallága, Ucayáli, and Amazon. From Huánuco as a centre -I am persuaded much may be done on behalf of these poor creatures, -who, though living in one of the richest portions of the world, wander -about almost naked, half fed, and in complete ignorance of the arts and -comforts of life; and what is still more to be regretted, no cheering -ray breaks in upon them of a world to come, and of the everlasting -felicity to be enjoyed there through our Lord Jesus Christ. Let us hope, -and let us pray for it, that education may soon begin among them, that -the Holy Scriptures may be put into their hands, and that the Spirit -of God may descend upon these poor Gentiles, as it did on us in former -days, that their sins may be washed away, and that they may enjoy an -inheritance among all them that are sanctified. - -Another favourable circumstance has taken place since my leaving Peru, -in regard to the quarter I am now speaking of. In Ocopa, not far distant -from Huánuco there has existed for many years a College of Friars, most -of whom were natives of Spain. This College has been made to change its -object, and instead of being as formerly a nursery of Friars, it has -become a seminary for the education of youth on the British System, and -its ample funds are now applied to this object. This happy change has -been effected entirely through General Bolívar. After mentioning this -circumstance, as bearing on the character of Bolívar, it might be thought -unnecessary to say more respecting him, as the instance now mentioned -very plainly indicates his desire to benefit South America, not by his -military exertions only, but also by the gentler, more effectual means -of early instruction. I must however add two circumstances more, in -proof of Bolívar’s deep interest and active exertions in the cause of -education. Some months subsequent to the decree referred to for changing -the object of the College of Ocopa, he issued a decree for establishing -a Central School on the Lancasterian System, in the capital city of each -province throughout Peru, and from which Central Schools, masters are to -be sent into all the towns and hamlets of the respective provinces. This -is a most effectual measure for speedily enlightening all the inhabitants -of that country. The other circumstance I have to mention in regard to -Bolívar is a decree he issued about a year ago for sending two young -men from every province in Peru to England, to receive here, at the -expense of the Government, the best education that can be obtained. After -finishing their studies in this country, these young men are to return -to their native land, and to fill important stations in the great work -of general illumination. I am sure the hearts of the Committee are by -this time warmly attached to this useful individual, whom God Almighty -has raised up to be so great a blessing to his country, in breaking -their chains of oppression and of ignorance. Ten of the young men sent -by Bolívar have arrived in this country, and are now pursuing their -studies in the neighbourhood of London. One of these was a monitor in our -central school in Lima. The rest of the young men are expected to arrive -here soon. I am happy in being thus able to confirm, by unexceptionable -instances, the opinion I formerly gave you of this great man, after -enjoying the pleasure of an interview with him, and conversing upon these -subjects.—To these things must be added the appropriation of 20,000 -dollars for promoting schools in Caraccas through Mr. Lancaster. - -In the lustre of Bolívar, I had nearly forgotten something more I had to -say of our friend Navarrete, a man who only needs the station of Bolívar -to do all that he does. In one of the letters I lately received from -him, he says, he has obtained from the Government the grant of part of a -nunnery for establishing a girls’ school. This nunnery is close beside -the college where the boys’ central school is. This school, about to -be established, is to be the model and the central establishment for -the education of the female sex, a branch of education very much wanted -in that country. May God speed the labours of our dear friend in this -matter, and may mothers, and daughters, and sisters, embalm his memory -for ages to come! - -I believe the Committee is now aware that I have given up any intention -of returning to Peru, and that I have fixed on another spot of South -America, where I intend to spend my remaining days. I would beg leave, -therefore, to solicit the attention of the Committee to Peru, and would -suggest the propriety of their sending out a fit person to that place, to -be actively employed in the establishment of schools. I have no doubt of -such an individual meeting with a favourable reception, and of his being -immediately employed by the Government in this work. - -Before leaving Peru, I wish to notice one of the articles of the -constitution of that state, as it has an important bearing upon the cause -of education. The article in question states, that the elective franchise -is open to all, but with the express preliminary qualification, that -the voter be able to read and to write. It is, however, added that in -consequence of the ignorance in which the Spaniards have kept the people -in general, this pre-requisite shall not be required until the year 1840. -The measures which the Government is pursuing for promoting general -education, bid fair, I think, to qualify all by the given time, in the -manner referred to.[9] - -In regard to education in Colombia, I have hitherto said but little, and -that little is contained in a letter to you from Quito, in November 1824. -In that communication, I mentioned a plan for establishing a seminary -for the education of the female sex in that city. The difficulties -of converting a monastery into such a seminary are considerable, and -although I am pretty confident of the ultimate success of that measure, -I cannot speak definitely as to its progress. The last notice I had -upon the subject, was in a letter from one of the members of Congress, -in which he says, that the question was to be forthwith discussed in -Congress. I hope no long time will elapse before we have the gratifying -intelligence of the complete success of this measure, and, in expectation -of this, I suggest the propriety of having a well qualified person -ready to occupy this station. I am thus particular upon this point, as -I conceive the carrying into effect the proposed plan, will have a most -beneficial tendency on the welfare of that large city (the largest in -Colombia), and on that of the populous and interesting district in which -it is situated. - -In passing along from Quito to Bogotá, I found three schools established -on the British or Monitorian System; one was in Yahuará, and the other -two were in Popayan; one of the latter was for boys, and the other for -girls. The establishment of these schools, in the provincial parts of -Colombia, is the result of a general plan of education upon this system -in connection with a central school established some time ago in Bogotá, -the capital. On arriving at that city, I visited this model school, and -hoped to meet there the director of the establishment, to converse with -him in regard to the number and efficiency of the various provincial -schools. I was however disappointed of seeing him, as he was then -actually engaged on a tour through some of the provinces to promote the -formation of new schools. I cannot, therefore, state how many schools -were then in operation, but I have good reason to think the existing -number is calculated to encourage the friends of education, and that it -goes on increasing. - -I received from Mr. Restrepo, the minister of the interior, a set of -the lessons used in the schools. One regrets to find the Scriptures not -there, nor any extracts from a volume so much calculated to benefit -us, in youth and in age, in time and in eternity. With this important -exception, the lessons are good, and every way superior to the trash -formerly used in the schools of South America. One part of the lessons -is worthy of notice. The constitution of the country is divided into -portions and sections, and is read in the schools. By this means -the children get acquainted in early life with the real nature and -circumstances of their native land, and thus become better citizens, and -more useful to each other. This plan is worthy of imitation in other -quarters. It is to be hoped that ere long this judicious plan, which has -been adopted for imbuing the early mind with a knowledge of the statutes -of their country, will be adopted also with regard to the statutes of God -unfolded in the Holy Scriptures. - -The next part of what was formerly called Spanish America is Guatemala. -This is properly neither in North nor South America, and it has, in -consequence, been denominated Central America. Not having visited that -quarter, all I have to say of it in regard to education is but little, -and that is, of course, from the information of others, I understand -several schools have been established in the capital and elsewhere, but -none of these are on the monitorian plan. In conversing with Mr. Zebadúa -the envoy of that government in London, and with Mr. Herrera, a gentleman -from that country who feels a great interest in education, I have learned -that they are very desirous of obtaining a person thoroughly versed in -this system, in order to establish a central and other schools in that -republic. I hope the Committee will have this quarter in view as well as -the others recommended above, when properly qualified teachers can be -obtained. - -The only other part that remains to be noticed is Mexico; and for -information respecting the state and prospects of education there, -I beg leave to refer you to the interesting communication of our -excellent friend, Don Vicente de Rocafuerte, Chargé d’Affaires from that -government.[10] - -In reviewing the state and progress of education in South America, there -is undoubtedly much that is calculated to gratify and to cheer the hearts -of those who delight in the progress of knowledge, and in the welfare -of man. Besides the pleasure that arises from seeing what has actually -been done in the few years in which these new states have enjoyed the -boon of liberty,—there is yet more to cheer us in contemplating the -general feeling which pervades the country upon the important subject -of education. During my seven years’ residence in that country, I have -had intercourse with all classes of society there, and, through repeated -conversations and otherwise, have come, I think, to understand what are -the actual feelings and desires of the people upon this point. _I have -no hesitation in saying, that the public voice is decidedly in favour -of UNIVERSAL EDUCATION_. I never heard, even once, what is still to be -heard elsewhere, “that the poor should not be taught.” The very opposite -feeling most undoubtedly exists and prevails among the clergy and the -laity, the governors and the governed. On a survey, therefore, of the -whole scene, and in looking into futurity, the brightest views may, I -think, be entertained as to the progress and best interests of man in -that large and interesting continent; and, from this view of things, I am -sure none will derive more real gratification than the Committee of the -British and Foreign School Society. - - _Report of Mr. Rocafuerte, Chargé d’Affaires in England - from the Government of Mexico, delivered in a Speech at the - Twenty-first Annual Meeting of the British and Foreign School - Society, May 15th, 1826._ - - The independence of South America is the consequence of that - growing spirit of modern civilization which, having crossed - the Atlantic Ocean on the wings of trade, has penetrated into - those remote countries, and liberated them from the Spanish - yoke. What more gratifying picture can there be for a true and - liberal Christian, than that which the new world now presents, - overturning a bad system, and establishing a good one, without - being attended with scenes of violence and cruelties. It may - truly be said that the characteristic feature of the Mexican - revolution is that spirit of moderation and generosity which - the maxims of the Gospel recommend, and which are the best - means for establishing true liberty. Our revolution, in its - object, its means, and end, is very different from that of - France: among us, it is not an overthrow of all principles; it - is a natural tendency to create a new order; it is a general - combination to promote the happiness of a vast continent; - it is a necessary transition from darkness to light, from - superstition to christian morality. From the ruins of Greece - and Italy, sprung some rays of light, which, illuminating - the darkness of the middle age, prepared the epoch of the - discovery of the printing-press, the mariner’s compass, and - the new world. From that time, the constant progress of the - arts and sciences has converted knowledge into power, and - nations have been more or less opulent and happy in the ratio - of their scientific attainments, of their industry, and above - all, of their moral and religious principles, which form the - solid basis of true freedom. To these effects of liberty, - England owes her greatness, her happiness, and that very first - rank which she holds in the catalogue of civilized nations. - Spain, that beautiful country, worthy of a better fate, has - been ruined by her ignorance and monkish superstition; she - has only one advantage over the Turkish nation, and that is, - that she lives under the glorious standard of the cross; and - this standard, I hope, will soon lead the valiant and heroic - Greeks to victory, and thus enable them at length to spread - Christianity over the land of their tyrants. - - Those lessons shall not be lost in South America. We are - convinced that the foundation of our future and permanent - prosperity rests on the moral improvements of the lower classes - of society. It is not enough for a man to know how to read and - write, and gain a livelihood; he must have religious habits, - must know exactly his duties towards God and towards society; - and no institution is so well calculated for obtaining those - great objects as the British and Foreign School Society. What - an admirable undertaking it is, to bestow the blessing of - scriptural knowledge on all mankind, to unite all the nations - of the globe, by the brotherly ties of science and religion. - Ye noble promoters of this institution! be assured you have - many warm friends in South America. The general desire with us - of all true and enlightened patriots, is for education; the - general cry all over our continent is, _give us education_. - This is the reason that the Lancasterian System has been - immediately adopted in almost every part of South America. - - Mr. Lancaster is now living at Caraccas, and promoting public - instruction there. - - In Mexico, the first Lancasterian School was opened on the - 22nd of August, 1822; and by one of those singular occurrences - in revolutions, the halls of the Inquisition, so inimical to - this Institution, were converted into a public school, into - a nursery of free men, into a true temple of reason. Three - hundred children are taught to read in this school according to - this new system of education, a system which will lead to the - moral perfection of the world, as the mariner’s compass led to - the geographical perfection of the globe. This first school was - called _Escuela del Sol_. - - Some time afterwards the Government granted to the Lancasterian - Association of Mexico the large and beautiful convent of - Bethlehem, and a second school was formed there. This - establishment is divided into three departments, and directed - by two professors well acquainted with the system; one of them - is a Frenchman, who went purposely for that object from Paris - to Mexico. - - The first department is calculated for six hundred and sixty - children; they learn to read, write, and _cypher_; they are - also instructed in the political and religious catechism, - orthography, arithmetic, and Spanish grammar. The parents of - the scholars who can pay, give a dollar a month, which is about - two pounds ten shillings a year; the children of the poor pay - nothing. - - The second department will contain four hundred scholars, who - pay two dollars per month, or nearly five pounds a year. It - is a model or central school for forming teachers and good - professors; and these are afterwards to be sent into the - different provinces, in order to fulfil the desire of our - Government, which is, to place in every village throughout - Mexico a Lancasterian school, a printing-press, and a chapel. - - The third department will contain three hundred scholars; and - these pay three dollars a month, or seven pounds a year. The - object intended in this department is, to teach Latin, French, - geography, and drawing, on the principles of the Lancasterian - system. This trial has been made, but I am not sure whether it - has answered or not. - - In 1823, there were introduced into the Lancasterian school - of Mexico, the lessons used in your school in London, taken - from the Bible, without note or comment. Some old priests - opposed the introduction of these, stating that it was - prohibited to read extracts from the Bible without notes. The - Secretary of the Lancasterian Association, Mr. Gandéra, a - very enlightened clergyman, and distinguished for his virtue - and zeal in the cause of religion, supported the opposite - opinion, and succeeded in establishing in the school the use - of these extracts. The consequence is, that our children are - acquiring a taste for the perusal of the Scriptures, and they - are hence learning to be virtuous, charitable, tolerant, and - free. This moral education will promote the cause of religious - toleration, and will effect that regeneration which our new - political system requires. We cannot remain as we are; we must - go forward; and, as said in Parliament by Mr. Canning, (whose - name is dear to all our hearts in South America,) “we must go - forward, and keep pace with the growing spirit of the times, - and the great change that has been wrought in the opinions - of the world.” This great change in the general opinion is, - that nations can only be happy under the banners of liberal - sentiments and true morality; that, in short, the combination - of political and religious freedom is as necessary for the - moral happiness of mankind, as that combination of the two - gasses, forming the atmospheric air which we breathe, is to - our physical existence. This vast plan of human improvement - is the great object of your noble Institution, an Institution - which truly deserves the gratitude of the world, and the most - cordial support of all who are influenced _by the love of their - country, and the principles of Christianity_. - -[7] Though this letter was not written in South America, as all the -preceding were, yet its evident bearing upon the subject in hand entitle -it, perhaps, to the place it occupies. - -[8] At page 32, it is stated that religious liberty was publicly -acknowledged in Peru, under San Martin. This acknowledgement, in Peru, -of this sound principle of policy and of justice, certainly preceded the -one here referred to in San Juan. But the circumstances were different. -In Peru it was the single act of General San Martin, as Protector, -or Dictator of Peru, and the people of the country had no share in -it, whereas in San Juan, the declaration of Religious Liberty was a -legislative act. - -[9] This notice, I find, is mentioned in a preceding letter, yet I leave -it here also, as I think the subject is not unworthy of a repetition. - -[10] This communication, bearing upon the subject of education in -Spanish America, will be added at the close of this letter. When this -communication is considered as the production of a native of that -country, a gentleman intimately acquainted with its concerns, and -actually holding a high official situation under the Government of the -most populous of these new states, it may tend to confirm the favourable -accounts from that quarter of the world contained in the preceding -letters. - -The enlightened and liberal mind of Mr. Rocafuerte, and his truly zealous -endeavours to raise his country high in political wisdom, in literature, -in morality, and in pure religion, are truly praiseworthy. - - -FINIS. - - - DENNETT, - Leather Lane, London. - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LETTERS ON THE MORAL AND -RELIGIOUS STATE OF SOUTH AMERICA *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/67526-0.zip b/old/67526-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7be6862..0000000 --- a/old/67526-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67526-h.zip b/old/67526-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6a3c4f5..0000000 --- a/old/67526-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67526-h/67526-h.htm b/old/67526-h/67526-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 4a19d2e..0000000 --- a/old/67526-h/67526-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10148 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Letters on the moral and religious state of South America, by James Thomson. - </title> - - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - -<style type="text/css"> - -a { - text-decoration: none; -} - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -h1,h2 { - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -h2.nobreak { - page-break-before: avoid; -} - -hr.chap { - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - clear: both; - width: 65%; - margin-left: 17.5%; - margin-right: 17.5%; -} - -div.chapter { - page-break-before: always; -} - -p { - margin-top: 0.5em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: 0.5em; - text-indent: 1em; -} - -.blockquote { - margin: 1.5em 10%; -} - -.center { - text-align: center; - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.footnotes { - margin-top: 1em; - border: dashed 1px; -} - -.footnote { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - font-size: 0.9em; -} - -.footnote .label { - position: absolute; - right: 84%; - text-align: right; -} - -.fnanchor { - vertical-align: super; - font-size: .8em; - text-decoration: none; -} - -.larger { - font-size: 120%; -} - -.noindent { - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.pagenum { - position: absolute; - right: 4%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - font-style: normal; -} - -.poetry-container { - text-align: center; - margin: 1em; -} - -.poetry { - display: inline-block; - text-align: left; -} - -.poetry .stanza { - margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em; -} - -.poetry .verse { - padding-left: 3em; -} - -.poetry .indent0 { - text-indent: -3em; -} - -.poetry .indent2 { - text-indent: -2em; -} - -.right { - text-align: right; - margin-right: 1em; -} - -.smaller { - font-size: 70%; -} - -.smcap { - font-variant: small-caps; - font-style: normal; -} - -.titlepage { - text-align: center; - margin-top: 3em; - text-indent: 0em; - line-height: 1.8em; -} - -.x-ebookmaker img { - max-width: 100%; - width: auto; - height: auto; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .poetry { - display: block; - margin-left: 1.5em; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .blockquote { - margin: 1.5em 5%; -} - - </style> - </head> -<body> -<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Letters on the Moral and Religious State of South America, by James Thomson</p> -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Letters on the Moral and Religious State of South America</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:1em;'>written during a residence of nearly seven years in Buenos Aires, Chile, Peru and Colombia</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: James Thomson</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: February 28, 2022 [eBook #67526]</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p> - <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Brian Wilson, Adrian Mastronardi and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from scanned images of public domain material from the Google Books project.)</p> -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LETTERS ON THE MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE OF SOUTH AMERICA ***</div> - -<h1>LETTERS<br /> -<span class="smaller">ON THE</span><br /> -MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE<br /> -<span class="smaller">OF</span><br /> -SOUTH AMERICA.</h1> - -<p class="titlepage smaller">DENNETT, PRINTER, LEATHER LANE, LONDON.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_i"></a>[i]</span></p> - -<p class="titlepage larger"><span class="larger">LETTERS</span><br /> -<span class="smaller">ON THE</span><br /> -MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE<br /> -<span class="smaller">OF</span><br /> -SOUTH AMERICA,<br /> -<span class="smaller">WRITTEN</span><br /> -DURING A RESIDENCE OF NEARLY SEVEN YEARS<br /> -<span class="smaller">IN</span><br /> -BUENOS AIRES, CHILE, PERU, AND COLOMBIA.</p> - -<p class="titlepage">BY JAMES THOMSON.</p> - -<p class="titlepage">PUBLISHED BY JAMES NISBET,<br /> -21, <span class="smaller">BERNERS STREET, LONDON.</span></p> - -<p class="center smaller">Hatchard and Son, Piccadilly; Seeley and Son, Fleet Street; Hamilton, Adams,<br /> -and Co., and J. Duncan, Paternoster Row;<br /> -W. Oliphant; Waugh and Innes; and W. Whyte and Co., Edinburgh;<br /> -M. Ogle; and Chalmers and Collins, Glasgow;<br /> -R. M. Tims; and W. Curry and Co., Dublin.</p> - -<p class="center smaller">M DCCC XXVII.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_ii"></a>[ii]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_iii"></a>[iii]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak"><span class="smaller">TO<br /> -THE RIGHT HONOURABLE</span><br /> -LORD CALTHORPE,<br /> -<span class="smaller"><i>&c. &c. &c.</i></span></h2> - -</div> - -<p class="noindent"><span class="smcap">My Lord</span>,</p> - -<p>Knowing the warm, solicitude which -your Lordship feels in regard to all endeavours, -to promote the moral and religious -welfare of the inhabitants of South America, -I dedicate these Letters to your Lordship; -and I beg of you to accept my sincere thanks -for your Lordship’s kind permission thus to -give your name to the world, in connexion -with the best and highest interests of South -America.</p> - -<p class="center">I have the honour to be,</p> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">My Lord</span>,</p> - -<p class="center">Your Lordship’s</p> - -<p class="center">Most obedient Servant,</p> - -<p class="right">JAMES THOMSON.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_iv"></a>[iv]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_v"></a>[v]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">PREFACE.</h2> - -</div> - -<p>Soon after my return to England in 1825, I was -solicited by several friends to publish extracts from -the letters I had written during my residence in -South America. To enable me to do this, I was -kindly furnished with these letters by the individuals -to whom they were addressed. I have at -length attended to these solicitations, with this view -of creating a greater interest in this country on -behalf of that quarter of the world, and in the -expectation that this increased interest will turn out -to the good of South America.</p> - -<p>I have to beg the indulgence of my readers in -regard to these letters, from the consideration that -they were not written for publication. There will -appear also some indistinctness, on account of the -letters being addressed to various individuals, whilst -they are here classed simply in the order of time in -which they were written. To which may be added, -among their defects, the abruptness arising from the -circumstance of what is here given being only extracts. -If, however, some interest should be excited -in regard to South America by the publication of -these letters, and if there should arise from this -some good to that country, I shall not be sorry -for thus having given them to the public, notwithstanding<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_vi"></a>[vi]</span> -the disadvantages under which they -appear.</p> - -<p>I am now about to return to that quarter of the -world, and trust that the same gracious hand which -protected me and guided me in my former wanderings -there, will still conduct me, and will enable -me to sow seed which may spring up unto eternal -life. Ten days after this date, I embark for Mexico, -as the agent of the British and Foreign Bible Society. -I go fraught with a sacred treasure, with -some thousands of copies of the Holy Scriptures. -Besides circulating these, which are nearly all in -the Spanish language, I am commissioned to procure -translations of the Scriptures into the native -languages of that country, and which are still -spoken there by some millions of the inhabitants.</p> - -<p>In prosecuting these objects, I intend to travel -over the greater part of Mexico and Guatemala. -Whilst traversing these parts, I shall probably keep -a journal of occurrences, illustrative of the state of -the country in a general point of view; and should -the small volume now published be favourably received, -I may perhaps at some future period have -something for the press less unworthy of public -attention.</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">London</span>, 13th February, 1827.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_1"></a>[1]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">LETTERS<br /> -<span class="smaller">ON THE</span><br /> -MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE<br /> -<span class="smaller">OF</span><br /> -SOUTH AMERICA.</h2> - -</div> - -<p class="right"><i>Buenos Aires, 5th June, 1820.</i></p> - -<p>I cannot be very particular as to all that has -occurred to me since my arrival here, the outlines -will be sufficient. I arrived on the 6th October, -1818, after a voyage from Liverpool of twelve -weeks and three days, and except about a fortnight, -was sick all the time. Soon after my arrival, I -made proposals to the Government, regarding the introduction -of the Lancasterian System of education. -I received promises of meeting with every encouragement -in this matter, but these promises, through -neglect, were long in producing the desired effect. -I was feeling the truth of Solomon’s remark, “Hope -deferred maketh the heart sad.” Under these circumstances -I was proposing to go into the interior, -where I had more positive encouragement held out -to me. Just at this time, by application at a better<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_2"></a>[2]</span> -quarter than we had at first applied to, the arrangement -was formed by which I was engaged -by the magistrates to put their schools, in this city -and neighbourhood, upon this plan. Since that -time we have been doing more or less in this business, -but things in general go on very slowly here, -and besides, many political changes have retarded -our operations. Notwithstanding, however, I trust -the foundation of a good work has been laid, by -pursuing of which, I hope to see many thousands -reaping the benefits of education, and imbibing the -soundest principles of religion and morality from -lessons selected from the Holy Scriptures. You -will be surprised and pleased when I tell you, these -lessons are entirely of my own selection, and -printed in this place. In no case, regarding them, -has there been any interference or hindrance on -the part of the clergy or others. We have now a -school going on, with upwards of 100 boys in it, -and soon we expect to have others set a going. -These things, my dear friend, fill me (as they -will do you) with gratitude and thanksgiving. -They are small things, in themselves considered, -but taking into consideration all the circumstances -of this country, they are great, and more especially -when considered as a foundation for future operations. -In another respect also something has been -done, I mean regarding the circulation of the Scriptures. -I have got upwards of 400 Spanish New -Testaments from the British and Foreign Bible<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_3"></a>[3]</span> -Society, and these I have been able to land here -without the smallest hindrance. Several of them -have been already distributed, and have met with -a ready reception. I have been able also to send -some of them into various parts of the country -here, and into Chile. Where the word of God -circulates, we have every ground to look for good -effects, though it may, like seed sown in the earth, -appear for a while to be lost. By and by, however, -the seed springs up, first the blade, then the -ear, and lastly the full corn in the ear. So shall it -be with the seed of the word of God, which shall -not return void, but shall accomplish the will of -God in turning men from darkness to light.</p> - -<p>We are in the midst of political commotions here -at present, and have been so for some time past. -The Lord, however, is the security of his people, -he is the Governor among the nations, and all these -changes will, I trust, lead to the promoting of his -kingdom. Let us join in the prayer, “Thy kingdom -come, thy will be done on earth, as it is done -in heaven.” For the present, farewell.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Buenos Aires, 26th July, 1820.</i></p> - -<p>I have got the information contained in your -letters, and the printed sheet translated into Spanish, -and have presented it to the Magistrates, who have -ordered it to be printed in the Buenos Aires Gazette.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_4"></a>[4]</span></p> - -<p>I am happy to say the same favourable disposition -towards our objects, continues to prevail in -this place; and that from Monte Video I have -lately received encouraging accounts, which, I -hope, will lead to a commencement in that place. -I went there about three months ago, to see what -could be done. It so happened that General -Lecor, the Portuguese Governor, to whom I had -letters of introduction, was absent at Maldonado, -with the two principal Magistrates. I explained -my objects to the chief clergyman, a liberal man, -and a particular friend of the Governor’s. He -promised to do all he could towards promoting our -system of education on the Governor’s return; and -I some weeks ago received from him a copy of a -letter, which the Magistrates addressed to him -upon the subject, and of which I subjoin a translation.</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p class="right">“<i>Monte Video, 20th May, 1820.</i></p> - -<p>“Sir,—We have read with peculiar pleasure and -attention the memorial which you had the goodness -to send us, relative to the system of instruction -established in Europe by Lancaster. We have the -honour of communicating, that it has met with our -particular esteem; and that in consequence, we -have resolved to adopt the said system in this city, -as soon as Mr. Thomson can come here from -Buenos Aires, to commence it. Please communicate -this to him, and express our sincere thanks<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_5"></a>[5]</span> -to him for his zeal towards the youth of this province. -May God preserve you many years.”</p> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Buenos Aires, 24th May, 1821.</i></p> - -<p>I am now about to leave this city, and to proceed -to Chile. I leave the two principal schools -going on as I mentioned in my last, and the masters -of the others instructed in the monitorian system. -What principally enables me to leave the schools -here in the confidence that they will go on well, is, -that they are under the particular care of one who -feels much interest in the new system of instruction, -and of general education. This individual is very -active, and well fitted to carry into execution what -he conceives useful. The person I am speaking of -is a priest. We have been associated together in -the care of the schools for some time, and have -had much intercourse with each other, and we have -always been on the most friendly terms.</p> - -<p>It was my intention to leave this, at the latest, -in October next. Things, however, being favourably -arranged, as above mentioned, I have -thought it my duty to set out for Chile without loss -of time. From my former letters you would learn -that the Chilian government has requested me to -go there to establish schools on the Lancasterian -plan. I had promised to go as soon as the state -of the schools here would permit. The Chilian<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_6"></a>[6]</span> -government, through their minister here, continues -to shew the same interest as before in regard to this -matter, and has now made an agreement with me.</p> - -<p>The season is now far advanced, and the Andes -are covered with snow. Besides this inconvenience -of the mountains, the roads, in some places, are -nearly intercepted, so as to render travelling rather -insecure. From these considerations, I have resolved, -with the advice of my friends, to go by sea, -and have taken my passage in the brig Dragon, -Captain Green, for Valparaiso, in Chile. Sailing -round Cape Horn is by no means so formidable a -matter now as it was formerly considered to be. -Vessels frequently go round now, and at all seasons. -This is now the middle of our winter, and we expect -the cold to be severe. I am accordingly preparing -myself for it, as well as I can, by providing -warm clothing. During the winter the winds are -considered more favourable, and vessels make -quicker passages. We expect to sail in a day or -two, and, I trust, He who guided me over the ocean -in coming to this place, will still be with me to -preserve me, and to bring me safely to my desired -haven.</p> - -<p>I leave all my friends here on the best terms, and -I leave the place, in many respects with regret. I -shall never forget all the kindness I have met with -in this city from the Magistrates, and from all -classes with whom I have had intercourse. May -God reward them. When I gave in my resignation,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_7"></a>[7]</span> -I said that it was my intention to return here -next summer, to visit the schools, and to see how -they were coming on. In the kindest manner I -was requested not to forget my promise of returning. -They were sorry, they said, that it was not in their -power to reward me in a pecuniary way, from the -lowness of their funds. They begged me to accept -of their sincerest thanks for establishing this system -of education in the country, from which they said -they anticipated the happiest results, in making -education general throughout all classes of the -people; and they added that, as a mark of -respect, they had requested the government to confer -on me the honour of citizenship, and which was -accordingly done.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Santiago de Chile, 6th Aug. 1821.</i></p> - -<p>My letter to you of the 16th July, brought down -my journal to the day before my leaving Valparaiso. -On the 17th I left that place in the afternoon, and -at two o’clock on the 19th I said, “Peace be to -this city!” I was going to give you some account -of the road, and what I met with upon it, but find -I have got other things to write which will fill my -letter. I shall leave this description till a further -opportunity.</p> - -<p>You know, already, that I was engaged to -come here by this government, and that my<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_8"></a>[8]</span> -passage round the Cape was paid by the same. -I therefore looked for a fair and open reception. -I have not been disappointed, or, perhaps, -I should rather say I have, for I have met -with a reception beyond my expectation, I might -say to my wish. I have been introduced to the -Director and to the Ministers of Government, all -of whom express much desire for the speedy establishment -of schools <em>throughout</em> Chile. We have -got the largest apartment in the University for a -school-room. The joiners are busy at work, -fitting it up, and we only wait their finishing to -begin our operations.</p> - -<p>I shall occupy the rest of my letter in giving -you a translation of two articles, which bear -upon this subject.</p> - -<p>On my arrival here, I received a copy of the -following order, issued by the Government two -days before I reached this city:—</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>“By supreme authority of this date, I communicate -to Don Manuel Salas the following note.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Thomson, who has been engaged to establish -in this city the new system of mutual instruction, has -already arrived in Valparaiso. His Excellency, the -Director, has a decided wish that public education -may be general, and is very anxious to give all possible -aid to this establishment for elementary instruction, -as preparatory to the higher branches. He -has for this end appointed you with full powers -to forward this object, in conjunction with Mr.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_9"></a>[9]</span> -Thomson, and the President of the Board of Public -Education. You will, therefore, do all in your -power to establish it as soon and as perfectly as -possible.—A copy of this order to be sent to the -President of Public Education, and to Mr. -Thomson.”</p> - -<p class="center">“Office of the Minister of State in Santiago -de Chile, 17th July, 1821.</p> - -<p class="center">“<span class="smcap">Joaquin de Echevarria.</span>”</p> - -</div> - -<p>Upon enquiring who this Don Manuel Salas -was, I found he was a man very highly respected -by every one, and a modest but decided philanthropist. -I have since been frequently with him, -and find him, indeed, as described to me. I next -give you an article from the Public Gazette of the -4th current; I think it is from the pen of Salas, -but this is only conjecture. It is, however, either -from him or from one of the Ministers of Government.</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p class="center">“PUBLIC EDUCATION.</p> - -<p>“Ignorance is one of the greatest evils that man -can suffer, and it is the principal cause of all his -errors and miseries. It is also the grand support -of tyranny, and ought, therefore, to be banished -by every means from that country which desires a -liberty regulated by laws, customs, and opinion. -None can be happy unless he study religion, morality, -and his own rights, unless he improve by the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_10"></a>[10]</span> -knowledge of those who have preceded him, and -enter into social connexion, as it were, with those -who in former times, and in other places, cultivated -the sciences and the arts, and who have deposited -in their writing, the fruit of their studies for the -improvement of others. The only way by which -we can form such an acquaintance with great men -is <em>by reading</em>. The happy day is now arrived when -the infinitely valuable art of reading is to be extended -to every individual in Chile. We have -now the pleasure of announcing this to all classes -of the community. This will be considered as the -most interesting news, by those who know its importance, -and who consider it as the basis of solid -prosperity. Deeply impressed with this truth, our -benevolent government has brought to this place -Mr. James Thomson, who has established in Buenos -Aires elementary schools upon that admirable -system of Lancaster, which has spread through the -world. He is going to establish schools on the -same plan in this city, from which, as a centre, this -system will be propagated through all the towns -of the state. The readiness with which this mode -of education has been generally adopted, its -economy, and the quickness and order with which -children learn by it reading, writing, arithmetic, -and the principles of grammar, strongly recommend -it. It has been particularly useful in those places -where rural or mechanical occupations allow but a -short time for instruction. There is, therefore, now<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_11"></a>[11]</span> -no obstacle in the way for every one in Chile to -obtain education. Notice will be given, from time -to time, of the progress of the central school, which -is to serve as a model for others. In it masters -will be instructed, and those masters who show the -most attention in acquiring a knowledge of this -system will be appointed in preference to the other -schools.”</p> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Santiago de Chile, 8th October, 1821.</i></p> - -<p>I seize the opportunity of sending you a few lines -by his Majesty’s ship Owen Glendower, which sails -for England from Valparaiso immediately. I enclose -you a copy of a letter of this date to Mr. -Owen, which will inform you of my concerns here, -touching the Bible Society, to this date. In addition -to this, I shall now communicate to you some -notices regarding our schools here, bringing down -my accounts upon the subject from the 1st September -(the date of my last letter to Mr. S.) to the -present day.</p> - -<p>I am happy to say, the favourable reception -I met with here, and of which I wrote you on the -6th August, was not a momentary feeling. It has -been kept up till now, and I might also say, it -has rather increased than diminished. Soon after -my arrival in this city, a large room in the University -was pointed out to me as the place in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_12"></a>[12]</span> -which we were to begin our school operations. -This hall is capable of containing 200 children, -according to our plan, and this is a very good -number for a model school. This hall was to have -been the University Chapel. The building I here -call the University, is not occupied at present in -the way its name would indicate, though intended -for a place of learning. There is, however, another -building appropriated to the objects of a college, -and of which I may write you afterwards. My -present object is to speak of our schools. Through -the delay of the joiners in fitting up this place, -it was not completed till the 17th September. On -that day our school was opened. From day to -day our number increased, till, at the end of a -fortnight, our number (200) was completed. Since -that time, we have been daily importuned to admit -others, which we are unable to do. We are, -however, about to commence fitting up another -large hall in the University buildings. At the -present rate of applications, we shall certainly -have more in readiness for that second school, -by the time it is prepared, than it will contain. -The fitting up of others is also talked of. From -the short time our school has been going on, it -promises to do well. The children are docile and -agreeable. I am now so much familiarized with -the appearance and manner of the children in these -countries, that I feel myself quite at home among -them. There is more resemblance to the English<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_13"></a>[13]</span> -or European face among the children and others -here, in Chile, than in Buenos Aires. I have been -<em>this moment</em> interrupted by one of my scholars, -who has called upon me, and brought me a ham, -a present from his mother.</p> - -<p>All classes seem to take an interest in our -schools. We are daily visited. The First Minister -of the Government pays us a visit regularly every -afternoon. We have already four masters studying -the system, and these will be ready in a month -or two to open schools on our plan, either in this -city or in the provincial towns. In Conception, -Coquimbo, and another town of inferior population, -they are preparing for establishing schools upon -our system. The principal things we stand in need -of for the rapid extension of our schools, are slates -and printed lessons. I am expecting 2000 slates -by the first vessel from England, and am at -present getting some lessons printed in the government -printing office. To defray the expense of -these, we have opened a subscription, which I -hope will do well. I have already got upwards -of 270 dollars among my English friends here, and -expect more.</p> - -<p>Thus, you see, the Lord is with us, and blessed -be his name. May he, in his own way and wisdom, -make his great name glorious in the eyes of -Chile, and of all South America.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_14"></a>[14]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Santiago de Chile, 8th October, 1821.</i></p> - -<p>I wrote you a few lines on the 26th February, -and then mentioned that it was my intention to -visit Chile. Through the gracious providence of -the God of the Bible Society, I have now effected -my intention. I left Buenos Aires on the 30th -May, and sailing round Cape Horn, arrived safely -at Valparaiso, after a voyage of forty-four days. -After a short stay in that place, to recruit my -health, which always suffers at sea, I came to this -city, the capital of Chile. Here, the moment of -my arrival, I met with a very encouraging reception. -You know, of course, that my most prominent -object in South America is the promoting -of education on the Lancasterian plan. On this -footing it was that I experienced so hearty a reception -in this place. Great and respected as your -Society is, and ought to be, in the eyes of England -and of Europe, it would yet be an imprudence to -proclaim one’s self your agent here, with the sole -or chief object of circulating the Bible. This is -not speaking very favourably of the inhabitants of -South America, you will say. I confess it, but -at the same time, I have told you the truth.<a id="FNanchor_1" href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> Whilst,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_15"></a>[15]</span> -however, I hold myself forward in the eyes of -South America, as a promoter of education and -an instructor of youth, I consider myself in all -respects as the servant of the British and Foreign -Bible Society. I beg you to consider me in this -light, and to call upon me with the utmost freedom -in whatever way I can, directly or indirectly, -promote your blessed work, in making the inhabitants -of this vast continent acquainted with -the words of eternal life. I have said, my prominent -object here is the establishment of schools. -I freely and openly profess this, and in consequence -am every where hailed as a friend. The little -influence I have thus acquired, and the confidence -reposed in me, enable me more effectually to promote -the circulation of the Scriptures, than if I -acted ostensibly and exclusively as your agent. -One proof of this I shall give you. I brought with -me among my books from Buenos Aires, about -sixty Spanish New Testaments. In getting my -luggage through the custom-house, I was told, -that the books must be inspected by the Bishop. -I wished this might be dispensed with, but it -was insisted on. I then told the officers, that I -was engaged to come here by the Government -to establish the Lancasterian schools. That alters -the case, said they, and immediately the papers -for despatching my books, &c. were signed, and -not a single book was so much as looked at either -by the Bishop, or by any of the custom-house<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_16"></a>[16]</span> -officers. I was told, before coming here, that -there was much less liberality in Chile, as to the -circulation of the Scriptures, than in Buenos Aires. -I was, therefore, anxious to avoid the inspection -of the Bishop above noticed. I understand he -has it in his power to prohibit what books he -chooses, and that his prohibition holds, unless the -Government give, in the individual case, an order -to the contrary. I am in expectation of receiving -from you very soon 300 of Scio’s translation of -the New Testament. These I shall let pass all -the forms required, to make proof whether or not -the Scriptures are allowed to be introduced into -Chile. This, you will perceive, is an object worth -ascertaining, and the knowledge of it will be of -considerable use in directing us in future. Should -the Bishop demur as to their circulation, and wish -to keep them, I can, I think, obtain an order of -the Government to prevent it; so that we may -consider there is no great danger of losing them, -in making the trial referred to.</p> - -<p>Notwithstanding what I have said above, no -interruption to the circulation of the Spanish New -Testament has yet been experienced. Soon after -my arrival, I gave to an Englishman, who has a -shop here, some copies to sell. This man is a -Roman Catholic, and I am happy to say, he -recommends the Scriptures to the natives of this -country, who are of his own religion. He has -already sold about twenty. He is very anxious<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_17"></a>[17]</span> -for the arrival of the Spanish Bibles, which I told -him I expected, as he thinks he could sell many of -them.</p> - -<p>In my letters to you, from time to time, when in -Buenos Aires, I related to you the state of the -circulation of the Scriptures in that place. I am -happy to say, that at my leaving it, the prospects -regarding this important matter were more -favourable than at any former period. I do not -mean to say by this, that there was any particular -stir about the word of God, or great demand for -it; but I mean to convey to you this encouraging -truth, that the Scriptures are occasionally -bought, and more so than formerly, and that they -are increasingly read from year to year. I consider -the word of God to have fairly got an entrance -into Buenos Aires; and that its prohibition, -or any material hindrance to its circulation, is not -only unlikely, but, one might say, impossible. -I give you this as my opinion, after a residence -in that place of more than two years and a half, -and an intercourse with various classes of society -during that time.</p> - -<p>I shall now mention some things not formerly -noticed, regarding the circulation of the Scriptures -in Buenos Aires, and in the surrounding country.—A -military officer, commanding on a station a -short distance from the city, has been greatly delighted -with the New Testament, and in consequence, -very anxious to make others acquainted<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_18"></a>[18]</span> -with it. He recommended the reading of it to -several poor people who were unable to purchase -it, and requested to have copies to give them, -which he obtained. In this way he has distributed -a number of copies. Besides those given -to the poor, some have been sold by him to those -able to pay for them. He used to take me very -cordially by the hand when we met, and to speak -with pleasure on the beneficence of the Bible -Society, and of the great advantages that would -arise to his countrymen by a general reading of -the Holy Scriptures. I told him I hoped soon -to have the whole Bible in Spanish, and in consequence -he is all expectation for it. On my leaving -Buenos Aires, I gave twenty-four New Testaments -to this gentleman, in the confidence of -their being distributed in the most judicious -manner.</p> - -<p>There is a military station and a small town on -the east coast of Patagonia, called Rio Negro, in -about 42° south latitude. To this place some -copies of the New Testament have been sent. -One individual, a native of that place, was so -pleased with the copy he got, that he requested -the person who brought it, to bring several copies -on his return for his family and friends. I am -personally acquainted with the officer at present -commanding at that place, and am pretty -certain he will not throw any obstacle in the way -of the circulation of the Scriptures. This gentleman<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_19"></a>[19]</span> -attended our school in Buenos Aires, and -took with him lessons, &c. to establish schools on -his arrival in that place, for which he sailed in -May last. The lessons I have referred to I got -printed in Buenos Aires for our schools. They -are selections from the Scriptures. These lessons, -now used in most of the schools, will greatly contribute, -I hope, to create a desire to possess the -sacred volume, a book which has hitherto been -little known in this country.</p> - -<p>A Patagonian chief, called Cualli Piachepolon, -in the very centre of Patagonia, is in possession of -one of your Testaments. This man has been in -the habit of visiting Buenos Aires for some years, -in order to exchange the few commodities which -his country at present produces, for those of Europe. -He has hence acquired some knowledge of the -Spanish language. Upon hearing some passages -of the New Testament read to him, he requested to -have the book, that he might, on his return, explain -it to his people.</p> - -<p>Some copies have been sent to Tucuman, to -Salta, &c.; so that your bounty is known, more -or less throughout the provinces of the Rio de la -Plata; and I have no doubt but, some hundred -years hence, the then populous banks of that king -of rivers, and the circumjacent country, will gratefully -remember the present Committee and Members -of the British and Foreign Bible Society.</p> - -<p>I close my account of Buenos Aires, for the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_20"></a>[20]</span> -present, by noticing, that some individuals, upon -obtaining the New Testament, and hearing of your -great and extended efforts in distributing the Holy -Scriptures, wondered how they had been taught -that the English were not Christians. When -speaking on religion, it is common to use the word -Christian and Protestant in contradistinction to -each other, meaning, by the former, themselves or -Roman Catholics in general, and by the latter, the -English or Protestants in general.</p> - -<p>A short time before I left the Rio de la Plata, -I sent ten of the Portuguese Bibles, and twenty -New Testaments, to Bahia, in charge of a person -who, I think, would take care to see them safely -lodged in that place. I sent them to the care of -the English Chaplain there.</p> - -<p>During the few days I stopped at Valparaiso, -I met with a gentleman to whom I had formerly -intrusted twelve of the Spanish New Testaments. -Upon my enquiring about them, he told me they -had been stolen out of his room. Though this was -to be regretted, yet one good effect would arise -from it, in as much as the person who stole them -would no doubt take effectual care to put them in -circulation.</p> - -<p>In my letter of 26th February, I requested the -Society to send me 200 of Scio’s translation to -Buenos Aires, and 300 to Valparaiso. I hope -these will respectively arrive in due time. I then -noticed to you the advantage that would arise from<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_21"></a>[21]</span> -lettering them on the back, and varying them in -the binding. I particularly request your attention -to this, as I am sure it will contribute greatly -to their sale. Let the binding be in many cases -elegant. They would thus be more expensive to -the Society at first, but they would be considerably -less in the end. It is my intention to <em>sell</em> them -in future, except when a favourable opportunity -occurs of giving the word of God to a person in -real poverty. This I know to be the uniform recommendation -of the Society. I would beg leave -to suggest to you, that no Bibles or New Testaments -be sent out in future to Buenos Aires by the -captains of ships. The captains, however well -intentioned they may be, cannot stay to distribute -them. The Testaments, in consequence, have not -unfrequently come into hands who wish to get rid -of them in any way. By this means they become, -as it were, of too little consideration, and their <em>sale</em> -is thus also prevented, which no doubt is the most -effectual way of distributing them. In Buenos -Aires several persons objected to buying them, because -they had formerly been got for nothing. I -shall, as I have said above, most readily act as -your agent in distributing the Scriptures in Buenos -Aires, and in Chile. The most judicious and -effectual way of doing this is through the booksellers -in these places. Before leaving Buenos -Aires I arranged for the continued circulation of -the New Testament, and here I shall make arrangements<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_22"></a>[22]</span> -to the same effect before I go. It is -my intention to visit Peru before long; and I shall -there also, and indeed wherever I may be, zealously -endeavour to promote the good work in -which you are engaged.</p> - -<p>In a few years South America will have large -claims on your Society, but she will pay you from -her mines for all your kindness. Should the Lord -spare me ten or twenty years, I have no doubt -I shall see wonderful and blessed changes on this -continent. It is my intention, through the grace -of our Lord Jesus Christ, to spend my life (long or -short as it may be) in South America; probably -not in any fixed place, but residing from time to -time wherever I may most effectually promote the -work of the Lord, in establishing schools, in circulating -the Scriptures, and in the use of such other -means as circumstances may direct.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_1" href="#FNanchor_1" class="label">[1]</a> Some letters towards the end will show, that this was -too unfavourable a conclusion, but it was the opinion I -entertained from what I had then seen of the country.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Santiago de Chile, 1st Dec. 1821.</i></p> - -<p>Before this reaches you, the taking of Lima -by San Martin, will be known in England. I -need not expatiate upon this subject to you. You -must see at once how much our field is thereby -extended. I may truly say, the fall of Lima is -as great a blow to the kingdom of Satan here, as -it is to the cause of Spain in South America.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_23"></a>[23]</span> -From what I have learned of San Martin, I am -sure he will prove a great forwarder of our cause -there, and indeed wherever he may be. The rejoicings -here on account of the fall of Lima have -been very great, and they still continue. The fall -of that strong hold of the Spaniards, is at once the -liberty of Peru, and the stability of Chile; and -I may add too, the independence of South America.</p> - -<p>We are about to form a School Society in this -city, which I hope will be attended with happy -results. The Director condescends to be the Patron -of the Society, and his first minister is to be -President. We are looking around us for the -most patriotic and liberal men of the city to form -a Committee. Our Society may not be able to -do what a similar Society would do in England; -but it may, however, do something, and may considerably -forward our objects here on behalf of -the inhabitants of Chile. Besides the establishing -and superintending of schools throughout the state, -there is another object to which the Society will -greatly contribute, I mean, the printing of some -elementary works for the schools, and for the -children to read in their own houses. This is a -part of our work, which I consider of great importance, -and to which I intend to turn a considerable -part of my time and attention, so soon as other -matters will allow.</p> - -<p>I believe I wrote you, before leaving Buenos<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_24"></a>[24]</span> -Aires, that I had sent a Master to Monte Video, -or that I was about to send one. He had not left -Buenos Aires when I came away, as he was occupied -in printing a grammar, which he had written -for the use of our schools. I have lately received -a letter from him, of which I shall give you an -extract.—“On the 4th of this month (July) I -arrived in this city with the slates and lessons you -gave me for the schools here. On the following -day, I presented myself to Larañaga, (the chief -ecclesiastic in Monte Video,) and he introduced -me to General Lecor, the Governor, to whom I -gave your letter. I met with a very hearty reception -from the general, as also from Larañaga, -and the magistrates. On the 9th, we had assigned -to us for a school-room, a large hall in the -Fort. This hall will hold 200 children. The general -sent the joiners and masons of the Government -to prepare this school, and I am in hopes -we shall be able to open it in three weeks. I am -making endeavours to form a School Society here, -which may take under its management the schools -of this city and province. I am in great expectation -of succeeding in this object, as the members -of the Government are very well disposed to -it.”</p> - -<p>In the end of this month, I am thinking of -crossing the Andes, to verify my long intended -visit to Mendoza. The printing of our lessons is -nearly finished, and I shall thus be enabled to take<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_25"></a>[25]</span> -some with me for the supply of that place. You -will see by the extracts of letters I gave from -Mendoza, in my last letter to Mr. H. (Nov. 1st), -that things there are very promising. I hope my -expectations regarding their improvements will be -more than realized. The snow still continues on -the mountains, as I am informed by a gentleman -just come over them. I hope it will be nearly all -gone by the time I set out. It has continued, I understand, -for an unusual length of time this season.</p> - -<p>I shall leave the schools in my absence, under -the care of an Englishman lately come here from -London. This gentleman was engaged by the -agent there of this Government, for the purpose of -establishing Lancasterian schools here. Upon his -arrival, it was the intention of the Government to -send him to Conception. I thought, however, it -would be better that he should stay here to instruct -the school-masters in grammar, geography, &c., -whilst they were studying the system in our school. -To this proposal the Government cheerfully agreed. -We have in consequence a separate class in the -school, in which Mr. Eaton instructs the masters, -and two or three more who choose to attend. -This arrangement will prove, I hope, highly advantageous -to the education of the country at large, -as those, who in future take charge of schools, will -be better qualified for this important office.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_26"></a>[26]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Santiago de Chile, 30th Jan. 1822.</i></p> - -<p>As I know you and your good friends of the -British and Foreign School Society take a deep -interest in all things here relative to education, -I send you an extract from the Chile Gazette of -the 19th current, by which you will see that our -endeavours to form a School Society here have not -been in vain.</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>“The surest method of promoting the happiness -of any country is to make all the people in it well -informed and industrious. An end has at length -been put to the obstacles which prevented the natives -of Chile from enjoying those blessings which -are enjoyed by other nations less favoured by -nature, but who have preceded us in the cultivation -of literature and the arts. It is hence necessary -now to strain every nerve to regain that time -which in idleness and darkness has been thrown -away. We begin, then, by offering an opportunity -of acquiring knowledge to all classes of the -community, without respect of rank or fortune, of -sex or age.</p> - -<p>“The Lancasterian system of mutual instruction, -now introduced in most parts of the civilized -world, and to which many places already owe an -improvement in their habits, has been established -amongst us, and in such a manner as prognosticates -its beneficial effects. The propagation of this system -holds out the surest means of extirpating those<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_27"></a>[27]</span> -principles formed amongst us during the time of -darkness. The government has resolved zealously -to protect this establishment, and, as the best way -of fulfilling its intention, has resolved to unite with -it in this object those persons who have the same -sentiments on the subject, and who, at the same -time, possess that activity, zeal, and energy, which -this important matter demands. In all places this -system of instruction prospers and extends itself -under the fostering care of societies. This circumstance -at once determines me to follow the example -thus set before us, and immediately to establish -a Society for this object. Of this Society I shall -be the protector and a member. My first minister -of state will be President. The Solicitor General -of the City, the Protector of the City Schools, -and the Rector of the National Institute, shall be -<i>ex-officio</i> members of the Committee of Management. -The other members of the Committee will -in future be chosen by the Society; but, for the -present, I nominate to this charge:— * * * *</p> - -<p>“The Committee will hold its meetings in the -room belonging to the Central School, on such -days as shall be agreed on at the first meeting, -with no other formality than what is dictated by -good order. The Committee shall form rules for -the Society, and present them to the Government -for approbation, and shall name a Secretary, Accountant, -and Treasurer, either from their own -number or otherwise. The object of this Institution<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_28"></a>[28]</span> -is to extend, in every direction throughout -Chile, the benefits of education; to promote the -instruction of all classes, but especially of the -poor; to seize all the advantages which this new -system of education offers; and to point out those -means by which it may be best adapted to the -circumstances and necessities of the country. In -short, this Institution will be considered a good of -the greatest magnitude, and whose efficacies will, -we trust, in some measure correspond to that great -extension of which it is susceptible.</p> - -<p class="center">(Signed)</p> - -<p class="right">“<span class="smcap">O’Higgins.</span>”</p> - -</div> - -<p>I trust this Society, which has thus been formed, -will be extremely useful in forwarding the great -concerns of general education in this rising nation. -There are many circumstances here very encouraging -in regard to the future prospects and prosperity -of Chile. It is probable our Society will -communicate with you before long, by way of -claiming alliance with you in the grand work of -universal instruction.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Santiago de Chile, 9th May, 1822.</i></p> - -<p>You have heard, I dare say, that I left Buenos -Aires some time ago, and came to Chile. I have -now been here ten months, and am much pleased -with this country. In as far as respects the climate,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_29"></a>[29]</span> -I believe no country can be more desirable to live -in than this. It rains a good deal in the winter -season, that is, from June to September inclusive. -Frost and snow are seldom or never seen in the -plains; notwithstanding, a fire is very desirable in -the winter. The highest ridge of the Andes is full -in sight from this city. This is covered with snow -all the year round. When it rains here below, it -uniformly snows on the mountains. In the summer -season, we have no rain at all, and very few -cloudy days. The common course of the seasons -is four months of occasional rains, and eight months -of fair weather. In the summer it is pretty hot -during the day; but it is always very comfortable -at night. In Buenos Aires, on the contrary, the -nights, during the summer, are generally very warm. -In another respect also, Buenos Aires differs very -remarkably from this country. There, not a mountain, -nor a hill, nor a rock is to be seen; here, all -those abound. The natives of Buenos Aires, who -have never been from home, have no idea of what -a mountain is like;<a id="FNanchor_2" href="#Footnote_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a> and of snow they are equally -ignorant, having never seen the one or the other. -They would also be ignorant of what a stone is, -were it not that some have been brought from the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_30"></a>[30]</span> -other side of the river, for paving the streets. After -what I have said of the scarcity of stones, you may -judge of the correctness of a very modern work on -South America, in which it is said, “All the -houses in Buenos Aires are built of a fine white -stone, found in quarries in the neighbourhood.” -There is not, in Buenos Aires, a single house built -of stone, nor is there any quarry on that side of the -river within 100 miles of Buenos Aires. The -houses there are all built of brick. The mentioning -of this last, brings me back again to Chile. All -the houses here, or nearly all, are built of <em>unburnt</em> -brick, such bricks as the Israelites made in Egypt; -they are made of earth mixed with straw. It is said, -this material for building suits the country best, -on account of earthquakes, which are not unfrequent. -Last night, just about this hour, (eight -o’clock) we had a smart shock. I was sitting -writing, when my attention was called by a rumbling -noise, and a clattering of the window shutters. -In a few seconds, the whole house shook, -and the creaking of the beams and joists was very -distinct. The noise continued for a few seconds -after the shock, when all ceased. This is now the -fourth earthquake we have had in less than a -week. They prevail most, I am told, in this -month.</p> - -<p>We have now got our schools set on foot in this -place, and I am thinking of going to Lima in the -course of a month or less, in order to prosecute my<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_31"></a>[31]</span> -objects there. According to the best information, -the new state of things in that country goes on wonderfully. -Many reforms are taking place of a very -salutary nature. Gaming, which is carried on to -a very hurtful extent in all South America, has -just been prohibited in Lima, by the Government. -Acts have passed for the gradual abolition of -slavery. Since the taking of Lima, all the children -of slaves are born free. The importation of -slaves is entirely prohibited, and no infringement -of the Act takes place. The same state of things -subsists here and in Buenos Aires, regarding this -shameful business. There is in South America -generally, I believe, a great desire for the increase -of knowledge. I can bear witness, that this is -the case, in those parts I have been in; and I -doubt not of finding it so in Lima also. I am told, -that learning has prevailed there more than in -places to the south of it, on this continent. There -are several men there, I am informed, who stand -tolerably high in literature. About three months -ago, a literary society was formed in Lima. I -have sent a translation of the Act incorporating -the Society to Professor Jameson, of Edinburgh, -and it may perhaps appear in the Edinburgh Philosophical -Journal.</p> - -<p>The fall of Lima decided, I think, the contest -between Spain and her colonies, fairly establishing -the independence of the latter. If any thing, -however, was wanting to complete this state of -things, it has now been accomplished by the late<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_32"></a>[32]</span> -occurrences in Mexico. The immediate and solid -advantages occurring from this independence, to -the cause of our fellow-men in this continent, are -very great. Knowledge is now tolerated in the -country, and also patronized. A war of extermination -has been declared against ignorance, and is -actually waged. Soon after San Martin entered -Lima, a provisional law was issued, until a new -code should be formed for the country. In this -provisional law, religious toleration is publicly acknowledged, -for the first time, in South America.</p> - -<p>A most wonderful change has taken place in -Buenos Aires since I left it. War, anarchy, -and confusion, have given place to a steady, firm, -and enlightened government. The principal cause -of this happy change is the present minister of state, -Rivadavia. He arrived in Buenos Aires a short -time before I left it. For some years past he has resided -in London and in Paris; and the time he has -spent in these places has been well employed. He -has there studied and is now practising the soundest -principles of political economy. If Buenos Aires -goes on for a few years as it has done for some -months past, it will afford excellent lessons in this -interesting science to the nations of Europe, perhaps -to the country of Adam Smith. A fine -emulation will be carried on, and is already begun, -between Buenos Aires and Lima. If an improvement -is proposed in one of these places, it is -deemed sufficient to silence popular and low prejudice, -to publish that such a thing has already<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_33"></a>[33]</span> -been done in the other. As to the Chilians, they -are, generally speaking, less enlightened and more -indifferent in respect to these subjects. Our Director -is a good man, truly desirous of the progress of -Chile in every thing useful. He has, however, -but little activity or zeal. It is pleasing to see, -under these circumstances, the good effects produced -on us here, by the newspapers of Lima on -the one hand, and of Buenos Aires on the other. -From these many articles are copied into our public -journals; and some things are already begun -among us, in imitation of our friends in the north -and on the east. I lately crossed and recrossed -the Andes on a visit to Mendoza and San Juan. -The cause of knowledge and of truth goes on there -also. In each of these places there is a printing-press, -and from these are likely to issue soon, many -things which will contribute to the general good.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_2" href="#FNanchor_2" class="label">[2]</a> The river La Plata, opposite Buenos Aires, is thirty miles -wide, and at times, under a very favourable state of the atmosphere, -a dim outline of the low mountains on the northern -side is visible. To this extent the Buenos Aireans know what -a mountain is.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 11th July, 1822.</i></p> - -<p>Through the unceasing goodness of God towards -me, I have now arrived safely in this city. -On the 18th of last month I sailed from Valparaiso, -and after a pleasant passage of ten days we -cast anchor in Callao Bay. Callao is an excellent -harbour, the best I have yet seen. It will hold -almost any number of ships riding in great safety. -It is well defended from all winds except the north, -but it scarcely ever blows from that quarter. In<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_34"></a>[34]</span> -consequence of an order from the Government that -no passengers should be allowed to land until they -receive a licence or passport from Lima, I had to -defer my coming here till the day after our arrival; -I got permission, however, from the captain of the -port to go on shore. After viewing Callao, I went -to take a view of the place where the former -Callao stood, which was destroyed by the earthquake, -of which of course you have read. Its site -is about half a mile from where the present town -stands. The destruction seems to have been complete. -Not a house is now standing; but walls of -houses of considerable thickness are to be seen -scattered all over the place. Some of these are -lying <em>flat</em>, and others are half turned over. How -weak is man, and all his works, when God arises -to shake the earth!</p> - -<p>On the day on which I arrived in this city, I -called on San Martin, and delivered him the letters -of introduction which I had brought from Chile. -He opened one of the letters, and observing its -purport, said “Mr. Thomson! I am extremely -glad to see you;” and he rose up, and gave me a -very hearty embrace. He would not, he said, be -lavish in compliments, but would assure me of his -great satisfaction at my arrival; and said, that -nothing should be wanting on his part to further the -object which had brought me to Peru. Next day -as I was sitting in my room, a carriage stopped at -the door, and my little boy came running in crying,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_35"></a>[35]</span> -San Martin! San Martin! In a moment he -entered the room, accompanied by one of his ministers. -I would have had him step into another apartment -of the house more suited to his reception; -but he said the room was very well, and sat down -on the first chair he reached. We conversed about -our schools, and other similar objects for some -time; and in going away he desired me to call on -him next morning, and said he would introduce me -to the Marquis of Truxillo, who is at present what -is called the Supreme Deputy or Regent. I called -on him accordingly next morning, and he took me -with him and introduced me to the Marquis, and to -each of the ministers.</p> - -<p>From all the members of the government I have -received great encouragement. On the 6th current -an order was issued relative to our schools, and -published in the Lima Gazette of the same date. -I am going to write Mr. Millar to-morrow, and -shall give him a translation of this order or decree, -a copy of which will of course be sent you. By -this order one of the convents is appropriated to -the schools, and is now in our possession. I believe -the convents here will decrease in number as -the schools multiply. There is no contest or -balancing of powers between the civil and ecclesiastical -powers in this place. The former has -the latter entirely at their nod. The case in regard -to this convent is a proof of what I have said. The -order for the friars to remove was given on Saturday,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_36"></a>[36]</span> -on Monday they began to remove, and on -Tuesday the keys were delivered up.</p> - -<p>From all I have seen during the short time I -have been here, I cannot doubt of the great benefits -which this country will derive from the new -state of things. San Martin and his first minister, -(and also the others) seem truly anxious to characterize -the times by improvements—by solid improvements. -They wish to encourage foreigners, -and to improve the state of the country in every -point of view. I have already mentioned to you -my representation made to the Chilian government -just before leaving that place, regarding the bringing -out of tradesmen and farmers. I showed a -copy of this representation to San Martin; he read -it very carefully over, and concluded by saying, -“Excellent!” He then told me what was his opinion -on the subject, and proposed a plan for carrying it -into effect, much more likely to succeed than the -one I had stated. I am to draw up this plan in -order, and to present it to him, that it may be -sanctioned and carried into effect. I therefore -consider this matter, so far as regards Peru, as -fairly begun. The particulars of the plan I may -send you afterwards. In the mean time, that you -may see that in these matters I am not losing sight -of my chief object, I shall mention to you one -sentence of the representation referred to. It is -this, “The men who will be most useful to South -America, are men truly religious and of sound<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_37"></a>[37]</span> -morality.” The minister of Chile, upon reading this -sentence, said, “That is very true;” and San Martin -expressed himself in a similar manner upon my -stating the same thing to him.</p> - -<p>What an immeasurable field is South America; -and how white it is to the harvest! I have told -you this repeatedly, but I have a pleasure in telling -it to you again. I do think that, since the world -began, there never was so fine a field for the exercise -of benevolence in all its parts. The man of -science, the moralist, the christian, have all fine -scope here for their talents. God, who has opened -such a door, will surely provide labourers.</p> - -<p>My present intention is to continue here about -six months, and then to move on northwards. I -may, however, be kept longer here than I intend, -but I am anxious to get to England as soon as possible. -My stay here will depend much on the -facility or difficulty of obtaining good masters for -the school. This I find, from experience, a matter -of so great importance, that I intend to pay every -attention to it; and I have it now in my power -more than ever to do so, having represented to the -government the necessity of encouragement, by offering -employment and a good salary to those who -thoroughly study the system, and are able to put -it in practice; and this encouragement I am authorised -to give.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_38"></a>[38]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 12th July, 1822.</i></p> - -<p>My last letter to you was written a few days -before my leaving Chile. I then apprized you of -the state of things there at that time, and of my -intention of setting out for this place. Through -the blessing of God, I arrived safely in this -country on the 28th of last month, and have now -to state to you how things look here, in reference -to that truly important object—<span class="smcap">education</span>.</p> - -<p>I believe I told you, some time ago, that -from various circumstances I expected every encouragement -would be given to our object here -by San Martin. I have not been disappointed -in this. My expectations have all been fulfilled, -and more than fulfilled. San Martin is -most <em>decidedly</em> a friend to general, to universal -education. I hope none of the members of the -Committee of the British and Foreign School Society -will be offended, but rather gratified, when -I say, that they are not more friendly to this -object than San Martin. Because I have come -to Peru to promote this object, I have received -from him every mark of respect and personal -attention, as well as every encouragement to proceed -in this work. The Marquis of Truxillo, and -each of the ministers of government, feel deeply -interested in the same object. Blessed be God -for this encouragement. In his hand are the hearts -of all, and he inclineth them to whatsoever he will. -Surely the days draw nigh, when ignorance shall<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_39"></a>[39]</span> -be ashamed to walk about any where in open -day. May the glorious war now waged against -her be a war of extermination. It will I trust -be so, and when this enemy of mankind shall -be slain, the British and Foreign School Society -shall be clothed with her spoils, and be -crowned with never fading laurel. Is it wrong -to indulge pleasing prospects of the future amelioration -of mankind? Is it sinful to cherish -the hope of better times for this poor unfortunate -world? I think it is not. If it is right -to pray “Thy will be done on earth, as it is -done in heaven,” it cannot be wrong to expect -that this prayer, daily reiterated from the mouth -of thousands, will one day be heard, and be -answered in all its extent; and when the will -of God is done in this world, as it is done -above, then shall the felicity on earth resemble -the felicity of heaven.</p> - -<p>The following is a translation of a decree of -this government relative to the Schools, and which -was published in the Lima Gazette of the 6th -current.</p> - -<p>“Preamble.—Without education there is properly -speaking no society. Men may indeed live together -without it, but they cannot know the extent -of the duties, and the rights which bind them -one to another, and it is in the right knowledge -of these duties and rights that the well being -of society consists. The bringing of education<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_40"></a>[40]</span> -to any degree of perfection, is, from the nature -of the thing, slow. To accomplish it, time is required, -and some degree of stability in the government, -as well as some other circumstances, -both natural and moral. All these must combine, -in order that the education of the people may -become general, and that thus a foundation may -be laid for the continuance of those Institutions -which may be established among them. Of the -various improvements which the government has -been desirous of making, none has been more -earnestly and constantly kept in view since the -moment of its commencement, than the reformation -of public education. In those intervals -of tranquillity which have been enjoyed from -the clamour of arms, this object has occupied -their attention; and though the sun has not -stood still, they have found in activity the secret -of doubling the length of the day.</p> - -<p>“It has already been announced, in various -decrees of the government, that the introduction -of the Lancasterian system in the public schools, -was one of the plans in meditation. It is not -yet possible to calculate the revolution which -will be produced in the world by this system -of mutual instruction, on its becoming general -throughout the civilized world. When this shall -take place, ignorance shall come to an end, or -at least shall be reduced to certain limits, beyond -which it shall never be allowed to pass. The<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_41"></a>[41]</span> -time is now arrived for setting this system agoing -in this place, and the commencing of it is worthy -of the month of July—a month in which posterity -will record many events of importance; -and we trust they will do us the justice to -declare, that we have desired to make this time -memorable by deeds which philosophy applauds, -and which spring from the noblest principles -of all human actions, namely, the love -of glory, founded on promoting the prosperity -and happiness of mankind. The above are the -reasons on which the following decree is founded.</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>“The Supreme Deputy, with the advice of the -Privy Council, decrees—</p> - -<p>“1. There shall be established a central or principal -school, according to the Lancasterian system, -under the direction of Mr. Thomson.</p> - -<p>“2. The convent or college of St. Thomas shall -be appropriated to this purpose. The friars at -present residing in it shall remove to the large -convent of St. Dominic, leaving only so many as -are necessary for the service of the church attached -to it.</p> - -<p>“3. In this establishment the elementary parts of -education shall be taught, together with the modern -languages. The teachers necessary for this purpose -shall be appointed agreeably to the arrangements -which will be pointed out in the plan -for the National Institute of Peru.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_42"></a>[42]</span></p> - -<p>“4. At the expiration of six months all the -public schools shall be shut, which are not conducted -according to the system of mutual instruction.</p> - -<p>“5. All the masters of the public schools shall -attend the central school with two of their most -advanced pupils, in order to be instructed in the -new system; and in studying it they shall attend -to the method prescribed by the director of the -establishment.</p> - -<p>“6. As soon as the director of the central school -shall have instructed a sufficient number of teachers, -these shall be employed, with competent salaries, -in establishing public schools on the same principles -in the capital city of each province of the state.</p> - -<p>“7. At the first public examination which shall -take place in the central school, those masters who -have been most attentive in learning the system, -and shall have made such progress as to be able to -conduct schools according to it, shall receive the -reward of a gold medal, to be ordered for that purpose -by the Minister of State.</p> - -<p>“8. For the preservation and extension of the new -system the Patriotic Society of Lima is particularly -requested and commissioned to take such measures -as may be considered necessary for these purposes; -and they are desired to make known to the government -those things in which its co-operation may -be required, in order effectually to carry forward -this important object.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_43"></a>[43]</span></p> - -<p>“9. In order that the advantages of this system -of education may be extended to the female sex, -which the Spanish government has always treated -with culpable neglect, it is particularly recommended -to the Patriotic Society to take into consideration -the most likely means for establishing -a central school for the instruction of girls.</p> - -<p>“10. The salary of the director, and the other expenses -necessary for this establishment, shall be -defrayed by the government. The Minister of -State is authorized to issue all the orders necessary -for the punctual fulfilment of this decree.</p> - -<p>“Given in the government palace in Lima, 6th -July, 1822.</p> - -<p class="center">(Signed)</p> - -<p class="right">“<span class="smcap">Truxillo</span>.</p> - -<p class="center">“By order of his Excellency, countersigned,</p> - -<p class="right">“<span class="smcap">B. Monteagudo</span>.”</p> - -</div> - -<p>As we go on in our operations, I shall communicate -to you the result.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 4th September, 1822.</i></p> - -<p>The <em>first</em> of September has returned, and has -gone by. I have not, however, failed in seizing -an opportunity of writing you according to our -agreement. You know, I dare say, that we have -not a post that leaves Lima every morning for -England. A vessel goes now and then from<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_44"></a>[44]</span> -Callao to Valparaiso, and through these two places, -and across the Andes, and through Buenos Aires, -my letters to you are now obliged to travel. No -vessel has sailed for Chile since the 1st current; -but in a few days the French frigate lying here is -to sail for Valparaiso.</p> - -<p>I have now been upwards of two months in this -city, and have all the while enjoyed my health very -well. I am inclined to think this climate is better -than I was led to expect from the accounts I had -heard of it. The tertian ague, however, is a disease -very common, especially during summer. Of -the Englishmen I know here, three have had it -since my arrival. The general opinion, I think, is, -that with great regularity of living, this place is -not unhealthy; but that the effects of irregularity -in the general mode of living, is more hurtful here -than in most other places. A good police would -certainly contribute greatly to the healthiness of -this city. This will be enjoyed, I believe, in due -time; but the Government has so many things at -present to do, that some time may elapse before -that improvement takes place. This is the largest -city I have yet seen in South America, and I -believe there is none larger in it. I do not, of -course, include Mexico, which is in North America. -The houses here, and the general appearance -of the city, have a more commanding and richer -aspect than what is met with in Buenos Aires or -Santiago de Chile. The general appearance of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_45"></a>[45]</span> -the population, however, I think, is considerably -inferior to what is seen in these two places, particularly -in the latter. One thing which contributes -to this difference, is the considerable proportion of -slaves here. In Buenos Aires, there are a good -many of this class of our fellow-men, but fewer -than in Lima and Santiago; and in Chile, in general, -there are very few; and this is one thing which -inclines me to prefer the general appearance of -Santiago to the other two cities I have mentioned.</p> - -<p>About three weeks after my arrival here, San -Martin set out for Quito, to have an interview with -Bolivar. They met in Guayaquil, as the President -of Colombia had left Quito, and reached that -place before San Martin landed. The interview -was, I dare say, interesting, and I trust it will be -productive of good effects for the two countries of -which they are the Governors, and also for South -America in general. A good understanding, I -trust, will be kept up between the nations of this -continent, and war in it I hope will be a thing -as rare, and rarer than peace has been in Europe. -San Martin returned a few days ago, and has since -re-assumed the reins of Government, as “Protector -of the liberty of Peru.” Every exertion is -making here for the formation of a congress. The -greater part of the representatives are already -elected. All the liberated provinces elect their -own members for congress freely; the right of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_46"></a>[46]</span> -voting is, I believe, much the same as in the -United States. Representatives are chosen for -those provinces still under the dominion of the -Spanish army, from among the inhabitants of those -places at present residing in Lima. A fair representation -seems to be desired and sought for, and -I hope will be attained in a considerable degree. -All acts emanating from such a body will, of -course, give more general satisfaction, than if the -representation were partial. I do not trouble you -with my views of governments, whether monarchical -or republican. Certainly, on this subject, “much -may be said on both sides.” Without fixing my -mind for or against this or that form of government, -I am strongly in the opinion of Pope, where -he says, “Whate’er is best administered is best.” -I do not think, however, that all are fools, (as he -insinuates) who, “for forms of government contest.” -The sum of the matter and the truth is, -that honesty and uprightness are more required, -and have been less found in all governments than -any thing else. Wisdom, therefore, requires, that -such measures should be taken in arranging the -form of government, as may secure good conduct -in governors, in the greatest possible degree.</p> - -<p>There were some suspicions, some time ago, and -some flying words, which, if true, would have led -one to suppose that San Martin wished to form -Peru into a monarchy. Who was to be king -according to these reports, I need not inform you,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_47"></a>[47]</span> -as I suppose you will find no difficulty in guessing -it at the first trial. The prime minister was of -course in the secret, if there was any such thing -in hand. With this individual, on other grounds, -there was a good deal of dissatisfaction. This -dissatisfaction openly broke out a few weeks ago, -on account of his interfering in the election of -representatives for this city. The consequence was, -that a petition was presented to the Marquis of -Truxillo, requesting that the minister might be -immediately dismissed. This petition was signed -by so many of the respectable and powerful inhabitants -of the place, and presented with such firmness, -that it had the desired effect. The minister -resigned before the petitioners left the palace, and -in a few days after, he was sent off by sea to -Panama. All this took place in San Martin’s -absence, and the leaders in it were the republican -party. San Martin has very wisely fallen in with -these measures since his return, and has confirmed -the new minister in his situation. A republic, I -think, is the general wish of the people, and as -the form of government is to be determined by the -Congress, I have little doubt of what the result -will be.</p> - -<p>You know, I dare say, that Colombia is free. -The longest and severest struggle of South America -has been in that quarter. The first news I -heard on casting anchor in Callao, was that Quito -had fallen into the hands of the patriots. I think<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_48"></a>[48]</span> -Bolivar, who has been the chief instrument in the -Colombian contest, is a great man. I was not at -the interview between him and San Martin, that -I might take their comparative dimensions at one -view; but I may observe, that the general opinion, -from a view of the operations of both, is in favour -of the Northern Chief. As far as my own information -and knowledge of each extends, I fall in -with this opinion. I do so, not from any dissatisfaction -with San Martin. He is to me, and has -been uniformly, more than I could have expected, -and I may say, all I could wish. I believe both -of these men are most sincerely desirous of the -real welfare of the countries which they respectively -govern, and of South America. There is -no unholy alliance yet formed in this country, and -I think there never will. On all hands, light and -information are encouraged, sought after, and promoted. -Knowledge, rich with the spoils of time, -has just unrolled her ample page in this city, in a -public library. This public institution is very respectably -got up, and already possesses a number -of the best works in the various branches of -literature. It is inferior to the similar institution -in Buenos Aires; but superior, if we consider -the short reign of civil, literary, and religious -freedom in Peru. Every individual is free to -attend this library every week-day, from 8 to 1, -and from 4 to 6, without expense; and every -book in it is at his command during that time.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_49"></a>[49]</span> -This one view of the present state of things here, -shows at once the immense advantages gained -here by the revolution, and the blessings that -tread in the steps of liberty. I shall add one -thing more to confirm what I have just said. -The Bible is now publicly sold at a short distance -from the place where used to sit the dreadful -Inquisition. Perish all unrighteousness from -the earth! May the knowledge and love of God -every where abound!</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 9th Nov. 1822.</i></p> - -<p>A considerable time has now elapsed since -I last wrote you, and a much longer time has intervened -since I had the pleasure of receiving a letter -from you. Although I have not communicated -with you directly during this time, yet I suppose -you are well acquainted with my various circumstances -in this part of the world, through means of -my letters sent from time to time to my friends in -Edinburgh. Since my leaving my native country, -I have experienced much of the gracious goodness -of our heavenly Father, in directing my steps, in -making darkness light before me, and crooked -things straight. The encouragements I have met -with in my endeavours to forward the Lord’s cause -in South America, have been much greater than -could have been expected before the trial was<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_50"></a>[50]</span> -made. I think a door has been opened here which -will never be shut, but which will, I trust, from -one year to another, open wider and wider, until it -become, in the Apostle’s language, “great and -effectual.” Should I say, there are no adversaries, -and that all goes on prosperously, without -any difficulty or discouragement from any quarter,—should -I say this, it would be nearly the same as -telling you, that a great miracle had taken place -here, and had changed the nature of man. You, -of course, expect no such wonderful accounts. At -the same time, it is a gratifying thing to be -able to state, that far less opposition has been -met with than was expected. Difficulties, I believe, -of whatever kind, will grow fewer and -weaker as Time runs on, bearing in his hand the -torch of heavenly light; whilst, on the other hand, -means and opportunities of doing good will greatly -increase. It is surely a gratifying sight to see -darkness fleeing away, and the light of heaven -breaking forth. You know there is no fellowship, -in any sense, between light and darkness, the one -must give place to the other. Wherever, then, -darkness prevails, let the people of God look to -him who said, “Let there be light, and there was -light;” and let them use those means which he has -appointed, under the full assurance, that midnight -shall give place to the dawning light, and that -again to noon day. That a great and happy -change is about to take place in our hitherto unfortunate,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_51"></a>[51]</span> -unhappy world, the Scriptures predict; -and the days in which we live say, “Lift up your -heads, for this happy period draweth nigh.” You -who live in the land of Israel, whence the word of -the Lord is sounding out on all sides, see these -things better than I can do in this far distant -country. From every corner of the earth messengers -are daily landing on your happy shores -with tidings of joy. One says, Babylon is fallen; -another cries, the gods of the heathen are famished; -whilst a third shouts aloud, Satan falls -like lightning to the ground. I almost envy this -felicity of yours; yet I would not exchange conditions -with you. Solitary and alone as I am -here, I would not wish myself elsewhere, because -I believe I am placed where God would have me -to be; and, I trust, his work, in one shape or -another, is all my concern. I do, however, wish -myself otherwise circumstanced. I should be glad -to have with me one or more with whom I could -always communicate in the ways and work of the -Lord, and whose counsels and labours might prove -a blessing to me and to many. You, my dear -brother, who dwell in Mount Zion, have never -experienced the disadvantage of being <em>thus</em> alone. -Should I come into your thoughts when you bow -your knees unto the God and Father of our Lord -Jesus Christ, I beg you to pray that grace, and -mercy, and peace may be multiplied unto me,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_52"></a>[52]</span> -and that the Lord’s work may prosper in South -America.</p> - -<p>In my letters to Edinburgh since my arrival in -this city, I have stated the favourable reception -I met with here from San Martin, and from others -in the government. Since that time, the state of -affairs here, in regard to politics, has considerably -changed. San Martin has resigned his authority -in all its parts in this country, and is gone to Chile. -The Congress was installed on the 20th September, -into whose hands he delivered all the concerns of the -government, and next morning, at four o’clock, he -set off for Chile. When he took the reins of government -into his own hands, under the title of -“Protector of the Liberty of Peru,” he promised -to resign his authority as soon as a general Congress -could be assembled; and by his resignation -at the time proposed, he justified his sincerity in -the eyes of the world. During the time he was in -power, reports were current that he was desirous to -make himself king of Peru. His conduct, however, -has shown, that these reports were without -foundation. As far as my own affairs here are -concerned, I should have been glad that he had -remained longer in the country, and, if I am not -mistaken, Peru would have been benefited by his -stay. San Martin is an intelligent and liberal-minded -man. He is very desirous of promoting -the progress of South America in knowledge, and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_53"></a>[53]</span> -he is free from those prejudices which hinder its -advancement. The Congress has now been assembled -for several weeks, and has been occupied -with various concerns relative to the government of -the country. From their own number they have -chosen three to discharge the duties of the executive -government. This triumvirate is to continue -until a constitution be drawn up, and a new Congress -assembled, composed of representatives chosen -in every province of Peru. This complete representation -of the country cannot be obtained whilst -the Spaniards are in possession of a considerable -part of it, as they actually are at this moment. At -present there is great distress felt here by the government, -for want of money to carry forward the -operations of the war. This appears to be the chief -obstacle in preventing the general independence of -Peru. Troops are not wanting, as, in addition to -those brought by San Martin, and those who have -since been raised in the country, General Bolivar has -sent about 2,000 well-experienced troops from Quito, -as affairs in that part have now been brought to a -favourable conclusion. The English merchants here -have just given the government a loan of 70,000 -dollars, by way of helping them out of their difficulties. -An expedition sailed some weeks ago for -Arica, and we anxiously look for the result. All -that part of the country is in possession of the -Spaniards, as well as nearly all the best provinces -of the kingdom. Notwithstanding the possessions<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_54"></a>[54]</span> -which Spain still holds in Peru, the independence -of the country is not at all doubtful. It may, indeed, -by the mismanagement of the Congress, or -by some other misfortune, be retarded, but it must -ere long completely prevail. I believe there are -no remains of the Spanish arms now existing in -America, except those in our neighbourhood, and -about 1500 men in the isles of Chiloe. What a -change, in this respect, has taken place within these -few years past! And let not this revolution be -considered as a small matter by the man of benevolence -and the Christian. The interests of religion -and of humanity are very closely connected -with it. That once dreadful, now innoxious house, -the Inquisition, reminds me, as I daily pass it, of -the happy change which has taken place. True it -is, that the Spaniards have now put down the Inquisition -throughout their dominions; still, however, -there are many inquisitorial things yet subsisting -in Spain that do not exist in the independent -states of South America. Every effort has been -used by Spain to retard the progress of knowledge -in America. These days, however, have now gone -by, and light of every kind begins to dawn on -these countries. My own opinion is, that the nations -of South America in a few years will far -outstrip many of the nations of Europe. The -people here, to a certain extent, are conscious of -their ignorance, and are desirous of wiping out that -stain which Spain has left upon them.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_55"></a>[55]</span></p> - -<p>I have hitherto been speaking of the progress of -knowledge in general in South America, and its -probable results. I shall now say something of -the progress making in the knowledge of religion. -You know, of course, that the Roman Catholic -religion is the only religion professed in this -Continent—as it once was the only one in Great -Britain. Many are beginning to see through this -system, and to find out its inconsistencies. I wish -I could also say, that all who see thus far, have -attained to the knowledge of the true religion, as -laid down in the New Testament. This, however, -is not the case. On the contrary, I am sorry to -say, that deistical principles are espoused by the -greater part of those who get out of the trammels -of popery. A good many in the higher ranks, -particularly in the army, are of this way of thinking. -This state of things need not surprise us. It -is perhaps the natural result, or transition, in those -places where no other religion is known than the -one professed in this country. A man begins to see -the absurdity of the Catholic system, and from his -infancy all that is religion with him has been connected -with it. In giving up this system, he gives -up with religion itself, as considering popery and it -the same thing. From these circumstances, I conceive -this to be the most favourable time for introducing, -as far as can be done, the holy religion of -our Lord Jesus Christ. The present is the time for -labouring in this field, by introducing the Scriptures,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_56"></a>[56]</span> -and by every other means which prudence may -dictate. Prejudice is growing less every day, and -this is the result of the revolution. There is even -a perceptible difference between the different parts -of this Continent in regard to the decrease of prejudice. -In Chile there is less than in Lima, because -it has been longer independent. Again, -there is still less in Buenos Aires than in Chile, -for the same reason. Having mentioned Buenos -Aires, I cannot leave it without eulogizing it, in -almost the highest degree, in regard to the progress -it is making. One reform succeeds another in rapid -succession. They are just about to put a stop to -monachism, and to take the church property into -their own hands, paying the clergy out of the public -treasury. It is said also, that they are about to -pass a law for religious toleration. In every respect -Buenos Aires now holds the first rank among -the cities and countries of South America. To -have one place thus stepping forward by way of -pattern to the rest is of immense advantage. There -are several periodical works of a superior kind -issuing from the presses in that city. In these -every subject is freely discussed, prejudices attacked, -and reforms proposed. The liberty of the -press is enjoyed and acted upon there in the same -manner as it is in England. The articles published -in the Buenos Aires papers and magazines find -their way gradually into the papers of Chile and -Peru, and thus prepare the way in these places<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_57"></a>[57]</span> -also for following up, ere long, the same reforms -and arrangements that are now going forward in -the pattern city I have mentioned. In this city, -also, the liberty of the press is enjoyed to a considerable -extent. This, however, only commenced -about two or three months ago, upon the dethronement -of the principal Secretary of State. This -individual, though a great friend to reform himself, -and from whom I met with every encouragement, -wished to keep these things in his own hand, at -least for some time, and to grant the freedom of -the press by degrees. The plan of ecclesiastical -reform published in Buenos Aires was also published -in the public paper of this city. Various -other things of a similar nature are thus indirectly -brought under the consideration of the people of -Peru; and coming from Buenos Aires, they are -better received than they would be, coming from -any part of Europe, especially from a Protestant -country. We had also an attack upon the friars -of Lima the other day, in one of the publications -of this city, whose editor is one of the Secretaries of -Congress. These things you will consider as the -fruits of the revolution in South America; and the -time fast approaches, when we shall see still more -abundant fruits, and those too of the best kind. -The Lord reigneth, let the earth be glad!</p> - -<p>With respect to the climate of this place, you -know, we are here fairly within the torrid zone, -the latitude of this city being 12° 2′ 51″ S. A few<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_58"></a>[58]</span> -days ago we had the sun vertical here, as he passed -us on his way to the southward. Notwithstanding -our proximity to the equator, we enjoy a very -agreeable temperature. In the winter the sun but -seldom makes his appearance; in spring he shows -himself more frequently; and in summer he throws -off reserve, and from his vertical throne looks down -in all his magnificence. From ten o’clock till two, -it is pretty hot, but about this hour a refreshing -breeze springs up from the south, which is very -agreeable. It is generally said, that it never rains -in Lima. This, however, is not quite correct. It -does rain a very little in the winter season; but the -drops, when they can be recognised as such, seem -to have passed through the finest rain sieve. It -is, in short, rather a kind of mist than rain, although -at times it may be called by the latter -name; and when it is so, the people of Lima call -it a heavy shower. Before I came here I frequently -heard this climate denominated unhealthy. -The tertian ague prevails a good deal, but on the -whole I do not consider this an unhealthy place. -For my own part, I never enjoyed better health -than I have done since my coming to this city. -Blessed be God for this precious blessing!—There -is one thing of a rather terrifying nature to which -this place is subject, I mean earthquakes. There is -no place, I suppose, more subject to them than this -city. We have had several shocks since I came -to it; the greatest was on the 14th September.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_59"></a>[59]</span> -I was awaked at a quarter past three o’clock in -the morning by a <em>most dreadful</em> noise. I was at -no loss to know what this noise was, considering -the part of the world I was in. This noise continued -for a few seconds, and increased. The shock -then followed, and made all the house shake, as if -the whole were coming to the ground. A loud -hollow noise followed this for a few seconds, and -on its ceasing all was tranquil as before it commenced, -and those who had fled out of their houses -quietly returned. These phenomena are of frequent -occurrence. There are, I believe, about -thirty earthquakes here in the course of a year. -Those, however, which throw down houses and -produce other ravages are rare. Once in fifty years -seems to be about the period of those terrible visitations, -and with considerable regularity Lima has -suffered severely at the return of this fatal period. -The city of Quito to the north, and of Arequipa to -the south, have also their periodical visitations.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 2d December, 1822.</i></p> - -<p>Some weeks ago a Committee of the Congress -was entrusted to draw up the <em>outlines</em> of a political -constitution for the country. This has been accomplished, -has been presented to Congress, and -ordered to be printed. The Congress is just now -engaged in discussing it, article by article. A good<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_60"></a>[60]</span> -deal of interest is thus excited and kept up regarding -the subject, and, in consequence, the Congress-hall -is daily well attended by all classes. The -discussion of the article on the form of government, -and that on religion, have excited the most attention. -The form of government has been unanimously -declared to be republican, agreeably to -what I hinted to you in one of my late letters.—In -“the outlines,” the article on religion runs thus: -“The religion of the state is the Catholic Apostolic -Church of Rome.” One of the members of the -committee wished to add the word <i>only</i> or <i>exclusive</i>, -but the rest not agreeing to it, he entered his protest. -On this account, as well as from the general -interest of the subject, the matter was keenly discussed. -I went, as you may well suppose, to hear -what should be said on both sides, and to see the -result. The first who ascended the tribune to -speak was a clergyman, carrying in his hand a -book about the size of a New Testament. He -began by stating, that it was his sincere desire that -all men might be of the Roman Catholic church. -He then stated that the only proper way, in his -opinion, of bringing men into the church was, not -by force, nor by persecution in any shape, but -solely by persuasion, by the force of reason. After -speaking a few minutes to this effect, he went on to -treat of the article as stated in the “outlines.” He -regretted the divisions among Christians, and the -distinctive names one body and another had taken.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_61"></a>[61]</span> -He then opened the book he had in his hand, which -I now found to be one of the Bible Society’s New -Testaments, in Spanish. He read the 12th and -13th verses of the first chapter of the first Epistle -to the Corinthians, and proceeded to make some -remarks upon the passage, and to apply it to the -article in question. It appeared to him, he said, -very like the divisions censured by the Apostle -Paul, to see the article stated in the words, <i>Roman</i>, -<i>Catholic</i>, <i>Apostolic</i>. Having done this, he proposed -that the article should be stated in this manner:—“The -religion of Jesus Christ, is the religion of the -state.” He then made some observations upon the -propriety of stating it in this way, in preference to -the way in which it stands in the outlines, and so -concluded. As might have been expected, this -alteration or amendment was opposed. My memory -is not so faithful as to give you the various -speeches upon the subject, but a great deal was -said on both sides of the question. In particular, -the member of the Committee who had protested, -defended what he had done in a long speech, in -which he paid but little respect and fewer compliments -to us foreigners. He concluded his long -story by saying, that he was so full of matter upon -this subject, and felt so much interest in it, that he -could still speak four whole days upon it. Another -speaker got up with a volume of the Bible in his -hand. He turned to two passages in the law of -Moses, where the children of Israel were admonished<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_62"></a>[62]</span> -to deal kindly towards strangers and -foreigners, and concluded by a short comment upon -the passages in reference to the subject in hand. -In a country like this, where all the natives are of -the Roman Catholic Church, every thing that is -said upon toleration has a direct reference to -foreigners, for it is never for a moment supposed -that any of the natives will leave the Roman Catholic -Church to become Protestants. The introduction -of foreigners into the country, and the -consequent advantages and disadvantages of it, -entered deeply into the debate. I shall refer only -to one speech more upon the subject. An aged -member, and a clergyman, rose up and said, “Gentlemen, -this is the first time I have risen to speak -in this house, and it is not my intention to detain -you long. I understand,” said he, “that the grand -and principal features of our religion are these two:—To -love the Lord with all our heart and strength, -and to love our neighbour as ourselves. We must -then take care,” continued he, “that our zeal for -the <em>first</em> of these two commandments does not make -us overlook the <em>second</em>. Now I ask, whether foreigners -residing among us are to be considered -our neighbours or not. If they are, then we ought -to love them. Gentlemen, I have nothing further -to add.” After being fully discussed, the votes -were taken. First, whether the article should -stand as stated in the outlines, or be altered. It -was carried that it should remain as stated. The<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_63"></a>[63]</span> -next question was, if the word exclusive should be -added, and it was unfortunately carried in the affirmative. -The article now stands thus:—“The -Roman Catholic Apostolic Religion is the religion -of the state, and the exercise of every other is excluded.”</p> - -<p>We are not to be surprised that the matter has -ended in this manner; perhaps we should rather -wonder that there was any one of the members of -the Congress disposed to speak, or even to think on -the side of toleration. The members who are -friendly to religious liberty, may amount to one -third of the whole, or, perhaps, somewhat more -than one third, and they are men of influence and -respect in the country. These made a less vigorous -stand for toleration at the present time, from the -consideration that what is done now in regard to -the sanctioning of the basis of the constitution, is -only provisional. The Spaniards, at present, possess -many of the best provinces of Peru, and these -provinces have, strictly speaking, no representatives -in the Congress. The manner of proceeding, in -reference to these provinces, was this:—The natives -of each province, residing in Lima, met and chose -members from among themselves to represent the -province, until such time as the enemy be dislodged, -and they have freedom to choose their own representatives. -As soon then as the country is free, -the present Congress will dissolve itself, and a general -Congress will be immediately elected, and the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_64"></a>[64]</span> -outlines now under consideration will be presented -to the new Congress to be examined, and, if judged -necessary, altered. There is, therefore, still some -hope, that toleration may have a place in the Peruvian -constitution. During the interval, the press -may forward the good cause, as there is perfect -freedom for speaking and printing any thing upon -the subject, on both sides of the question. We -may, indeed, call this freedom of speaking and -writing upon the subject, a kind of toleration; at -all events, it is a prelude to it.</p> - -<p>Pamphlets of every shape, size, and name, are -issued from the press. In these every subject is -handled, and abuses and prejudices are attacked -with freedom and courage. The poor friars are -not overlooked in these; almost every body is -against them, and none seems to rise up in their -defence. One of the members of Congress has -made a motion for the reformation of the Convents. -The bill he is about to bring in, contains four articles. -The first is to allow all those to leave the -Convents who wish to do so. The second is to -allow no one in future to become a friar. The -third is, that the government should take possession -of all their property, and allow them out of it -what is necessary for their support. The fourth -article is, to make them all live in <em>one</em> convent, instead -of occupying <em>fourteen</em>, as they now do. This -you see is a bold proposition, and, if carried into -effect, will be a great step in reformation.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_65"></a>[65]</span></p> - -<p>At the time the article on religion was under -consideration, a certain individual went about with -a paper containing a petition to Congress, praying -that the Roman Catholic religion might be the -religion of the state, <em>and the only one tolerated in -the country</em>. The last part of the petition was the -object he had in view. He obtained a number of -signatures to the petition, and without loss of time -laid it before the Congress. It was, however, not -allowed to be read, and several were for calling -this individual to account for his officiousness. -This medical gentleman (for he is of that profession) -has been sadly handled in the pamphlets -of the day for this conduct; so much so, I think, -as to keep him from being forward to engage a -second time in such an undertaking. I have already -mentioned how freely all matters are discussed -in these pamphlets. One of them has just -begun to give a history of the Popes. From the specimens -already published, this history promises not to -be very honourable to the personal character of the -Popes, neither does it appear intended to strengthen -their pontifical authority and influence, but quite -the contrary. There was a monthly magazine published -in London, during the despotic reign of the -present Ferdinand. In this work there was given -a history of the Popes, and I believe what is publishing -here just now is copied from the work I -have mentioned. This magazine was called El -Español Constitucional. It was written by one of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_66"></a>[66]</span> -those who had fled from Ferdinand’s despotic hands. -He was a liberal man, and writing in London he -felt himself under no restraint in speaking of the -abuse of the Church of Rome. There was -another periodical work in the Spanish language, -published some years before it, called El Español. -This was also printed in London, and was written -with the same liberality and spirit. Both these -works have reached South America, and have been -a good deal read; and, as you may suppose, they -have served considerably to enlighten the people -of these countries.</p> - -<p>I have mentioned, in some of my late letters, the -very gratifying circumstances of the rapid sale in -this city of 500 Spanish Bibles, and 500 New -Testaments. These were all sold off in <em>two days</em>, -and as many more could have been sold in the two -days following, but there were no more, and thus -many were disappointed. From this cheering circumstance, -I am daily looking with great anxiety -for a considerable number of both Bibles and -Testaments, expected from the Bible Society. The -above-mentioned circumstance is truly encouraging, -as no desire at all comparable to it, has yet been -manifested in any other part of South America for -the Holy Scriptures. From this, and some other -occurrences, I am led to anticipate that the word -of God will, indeed, have free course in this place, -and let us pray that it may not be circulated only, -but that it may be glorified also. I have another<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_67"></a>[67]</span> -thing to relate to you, perhaps more cheering still. -It is this: the nearly confident expectation of -getting the New Testament introduced throughout -Peru as a school book. I trust this expectation -will not be disappointed, but verified in due time. -Every thing promises fair at present for its accomplishment.</p> - -<p>As soon as the Bibles got into circulation as -above-mentioned, there was some ferment excited -from reports that it was not fairly printed from the -Spanish version of Scio, as indicated in the title -page. This report was raised, or at least increased, -by the discovery of a typographical error or two. -An honest priest actually burned the Bible he had -bought on the discovery of one of these oversights -in the printing. The consequence of this -stir was an examination of the Bible Society’s -edition, by comparing it with the edition printed in -Spain. The result of this examination was highly -satisfactory, as the London edition was found to be -an exact reprint from the latest Spanish edition, -with the exception of some slight oversights in -passing through the press. About the time this -matter was under consideration, the deputy Archbishop -(for there is no Archbishop here at present) -having learned that a certain priest was likely to -say something from the pulpit against the reading -of the Bibles from London, sent a message to him, -telling him “not to preach any thing against the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_68"></a>[68]</span> -reading of the English Bibles.” By English -Bibles he meant Bibles from England, for the -Bibles were in the <em>Spanish</em> language.</p> - -<p>A curious little piece, in the poetic form, appeared -about a fortnight ago in one of the newspapers -of this city. There is a great deal of truth -and force in it, and as it is but short, and will not -occupy much room, I shall give you a translation -of it. To do it justice it should be put in poetic -dress, but as you know I am neither poet nor -rhymester, you will please accept of it in plain -prose. “<em>Simon possessed a fishing bark</em>, and just a -fishing bark, nothing more he left to his sons. They -however were great fishers; they caught much and -grew rich, and could no longer be content with their -small bark, but got a larger one. This bark afterwards -became a brig, and then a ship. At last it -grew into a man-of-war, and frightened the world -with its cannon. How wonderfully is this ship of -war now changed! how different now to what it -was in former times! This great ship is now grown -old, and, shattered by the storms it has encountered, -it now lies rotting in the harbour. A -thousand times has it been repaired, but at last it -must be laid aside altogether, and its owners must -once more be content with <em>Simon’s fishing bark</em>.” -You will find no difficulty, I dare say, in applying -this little piece, and, I believe, you will join -with me in wishing that the concluding part may<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_69"></a>[69]</span> -be verified as exactly as the preceding parts -have.</p> - -<p>There is a great revolution going forward in -South America. I speak not of the revolt from -under the Spanish yoke, for that in the present -day may be said not to be going forward, but accomplished. -The revolution I speak of, is a moral -one. Those who have eyes to see this goodly -prospect, and those who have ears to hear the harmony -of this moral change, meet on every hand -with indications of its approach. You will not -understand me as saying, that South America has -become like the land of Eden, like the garden of -God. No. But a change has been begun, a happy -change. Let us put our hand to this work. Let -us bear it onward, and God Almighty will consummate -it in due time.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 28th January, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>A good while has elapsed since I mentioned to -you any particulars of my affairs in reference to -the schools. During this time, however, I have -more than once thrown out hints, signifying that -matters went on but slowly. I had too much -reason for these complaints. The truth is, I was -once and again on the point of leaving this place. -My affairs here have been such, since my arrival, -that I may truly say, my hopes and prospects in -South America never were so high, and never were<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_70"></a>[70]</span> -so low as they have been, at different times, in -Lima. I formerly stated to you the very favourable -reception I met with from San Martin, and -from the first Secretary of State, Monteagudo. -Both of these left this place a good while ago, -although under different circumstances. To me -their loss was severely felt. I never mentioned a -wish to San Martin, or to Monteagudo, that was -not granted, and granted immediately in the most -obliging manner. After their going away, I -scarcely mentioned any thing I wished done that -was not refused. I should not, perhaps, say refused, -for I was not actually denied; I was told that -the things I stated would be done, but these promises -were never fulfilled. Had I been plainly -refused, there is every probability that I should -have left this place long ago. After experiencing -a number of delays, and when my little stock of -patience was all gone, I asked for my passport. -The same individual, however, who had so often -put me off with fair promises, contrived to put off -my passport also, and kept me waiting days together, -with every thing nailed up for my departure. -It was then agreed on between us, that since the -school plan we had in view could not be carried -into effect from want of funds, I should stop three -or four weeks to instruct some individuals in the -Lancasterian system. About twelve came, in consequence -of this, to my lodgings once a day, for -the instructions referred to. At the close of the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_71"></a>[71]</span> -time mentioned, these individuals were much pleased -with the new plan, and some of them represented -the matter to the minister, who gladly entered into -it, and it was agreed that I should stop, and that -what was wanting should be granted. I did think -him for this time sincere, and I believe he was so; -but I was again subjected to be put off from week -to week, until I found that I was circumstanced -exactly as before. I petitioned anew for my passport, -and in the mean time wrote a letter to the -Congress, detailing all that had happened from the -time of my arrival in Lima, and concluded by -stating, that I intended to leave this place by the -first vessel that sailed, but that I would return or -send some person instructed in the plan of the -schools, if a desire should be expressed by the -Congress to that effect. The result of this communication -was far beyond my expectation. Upon -my letter being read, a great deal of interest was -taken in this matter, and it was unanimously agreed -to that the school should be commenced as soon as -possible. An order was accordingly issued, that -every thing I wanted to set it agoing should be -immediately granted. When I wrote to the Congress, -I had little thought that they would be disposed -to carry this object forward at the time, -having not long before resolved to use the utmost -economy with the public money, and to carry -nothing forward that was not of an urgent nature. -This resolution was very necessary from the low<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_72"></a>[72]</span> -state of the public funds, owing to their limited resources, -and the great expenses of the war. In -consequence of the decree of the Congress in our -favour, I at once gave up thoughts of leaving this -place, and we have been since that time getting on -as fast as can be expected. There is another circumstance -of considerable importance, which has -arisen out of this. The person who brought together -those twelve individuals to be instructed in the -system, as above mentioned, is a very respectable -clergyman. This gentleman has interested himself -much in the matter, and has been named by the -Congress to take an active part in all the arrangements -necessary until a School Society be formed. -I have had much intercourse with this individual, -and have good reason to esteem him highly. We -go hand in hand in our affairs most comfortably. -As this gentleman’s name is now connected with -the schools, and being a clergyman, many prejudices -are thereby removed. This is a matter of no -little importance, as there was a strong idea, (whether -well or ill founded, I cannot tell,) that the -late Secretary, of whom I spoke, was atheistical in -his views. Perhaps his atheism consisted in his making -free with the convents and other church affairs. -However that may be, my being favoured by him -probably excited some prejudices, in addition to -those arising from my being a Protestant. The -counteracting influence, therefore, of my connexion -with my present clerical friend will, I have<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_73"></a>[73]</span> -no doubt, be greatly advantageous. When I add -to this, that it is through this respectable individual -that I expect the New Testament to be introduced -into the schools, of which I formerly wrote, you -will see that I have great cause for thanksgiving -for the circumstances in which we now stand; and -I am even inclined to believe, from what I have seen, -that our present encouraging prospects have not -been too dearly purchased by all the harassing delays -that we have experienced. We are very -short sighted in all things, and can seldom tell what -string of circumstances may end most favourably. -Hence it is that we are often joyous, when we have -not much real cause for being so; and on the other -hand, we are often sad, when every thing is going -on in the most prosperous manner. How consoling -is the thought, that we are permitted to cast all -our cares upon God; upon him who knows the -end from the beginning, and in whose hands, sooner -or later, every thing must turn out well.</p> - -<p>I think I have perceived, during the time I have -been in this place, a greater desire to study the -English language than I have met with in any -other part of South America. I have uniformly -encouraged this desire as much as possible, being -fully persuaded that the knowledge of our language, -and of the excellent works it contains, will contribute -in no inconsiderable degree to the progress -of this country in every point of view. Want of -books suitable for beginners in this language has<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_74"></a>[74]</span> -formed a considerable obstacle, as well as the want -of suitable teachers. In order to remove these difficulties -to a certain degree, and to carry forward this -useful object, I some time ago set to work to prepare, -in Spanish, a grammar of the English language. -This is now finished, and nearly all printed. I -have at the same time been getting ready a small -book, consisting of extracts from various authors -in our language, for something of this kind was -equally necessary. This little work is also pretty -far advanced in the printing. In the next place, -in order to carry this object into immediate effect, -I lately published my intention of giving instructions -in the English language, and I now have -twenty-three studying it with me, two of whom are -members of Congress.</p> - -<p>Accounts have reached us, that on the 19th November -last, a severe earthquake was experienced -in Chile. The first shock was felt about 11 o’clock -at night, and was preceded by a frightful noise. -During the night, and for several succeeding days, a -number of shocks were felt, less destructive, I believe, -but sufficiently alarming. We have not yet -had full information as to the extent of country -over which these shocks have been experienced, -but from what reports have reached us, it seems to -have extended over the greater part of Chile. The -greatest damage, we understand, has been done in -Valparaiso. In that place several houses have -been thrown down, and all the churches have been<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_75"></a>[75]</span> -severely injured. Accounts say that more than two -hundred people have perished in Valparaiso alone. -Many are the blessings which Providence has poured -out on Chile, and one would almost think that -earthquakes have been added, by way of giving -to it its due proportion of evil. The same may be -said of this country, which has suffered still more -from this cause than Chile has done. We do not -know <em>the moment</em> we may be visited in this city, by -one of these dreadful calamities which have laid -Lima nearly in ruins at different times. To remind -us of our danger, as it were, we are visited by -small shocks from time to time; a month rarely -elapses without one, and about a week ago we had -two in one day. One would naturally think that -the being continually exposed to these catastrophes -would be productive of some happy moral effects -upon the inhabitants of this place. I am sorry to -say there are no appearances of these good results. -If a comparison were to be instituted between the -people of this place, and those of other parts of -South America, in regard to morals, I am afraid -Lima would appear in the back ground. The most -imminent danger, the most signal judgments, seem -somehow or other to be productive of nothing but -momentary effects on mankind. Wherever this -danger or these judgments are, there the words of -Jesus are verified; “If they believe not Moses -and the prophets, neither would they be persuaded -though one should arise from the dead.” I question<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_76"></a>[76]</span> -much if we should, in one sense, find fault with this -disposition of mankind; or shall I say rather with -this arrangement of Providence. It points out to -us, I think, how much happier and more solid effects -may be produced by the wielding of the word of -God, than by wielding the mountains, and casting -them into the sea. <em>The word of God</em> is a <em>fire</em>, and -is a <em>hammer</em>, and nothing shall be able to stand before -it; every thing that opposeth shall be reduced -into ashes or into dust; and these shall be blown -away by the winds, to be seen no more for ever.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 3d March, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>I have more than once, my dear friend, within -these few days past, heard the exclamation, “happy -are the countries that enjoy a settled and secure -government.” The truth is, we have just experienced -one of those occurrences which frequently -happen in revolutionary times. I wrote you formerly, -that three individuals of the members of -Congress were exercising the executive power in -this place. From events which have lately occurred, -a general dissatisfaction towards this triumvirate -was felt by the army in the neighbourhood of this -city. The consequence of this was, that the troops -drew near to the walls and shut the gates, sending -at the same time a message to the Congress, requesting,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_77"></a>[77]</span> -or rather ordering, a change in the government. -After a good deal of deliberation, -the triumvirate was removed by the Congress. -Another step was yet necessary, as a certain individual -was pointed out as the only person capable -of filling the vacant situation. There was no -alternative in this more than in the other proposition, -as a part of the troops kept their station, as -before mentioned, whilst the rest or the greater -part came into the great square in the centre of the -city. Indeed the public opinion, not of the army -only, but also of the great majority of the people, -seemed clearly expressed in favour of the person -proposed. The individual in question was accordingly -appointed by the Congress as “President of -the Republic of Peru.” This was done on the -first current. The troops have retired, and there -seems to be a general satisfaction with this appointment. -Our President’s name is Don José de la -Riva Aguera.</p> - -<p>You will naturally wish to know how our new -President is likely to act regarding the schools, and -other such matters. Respecting what his conduct -will be in these things, I have great confidence. I -have known him, and visited him occasionally -since my arrival in Lima, in consequence of a -letter of introduction to him, with which I was favoured -on my leaving Chile. I have uniformly -found him very obliging, and much interested in -our concerns. In short, he is the very individual<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_78"></a>[78]</span> -I should have named, had I been asked what person -I wished to have in this high station. I called -on him this afternoon in company with my clerical -friend, whom I formerly mentioned to you. We -were well received, and encouraged to go forward -in our work, with the assurance of his protection -and support.</p> - -<p>I forgot to mention to you in my last quarterly -letter, that I had about that time got one added to -the number of my friends. This person is a very -respectable clergyman, and a member of the Congress. -We have had several conversations together, -in a very open and friendly manner. I have been -much pleased with his candour and frankness. He -told me that when he first heard of my having come -to Lima, he resolved to oppose me, but that when -he learned that I was not an opposer of religion, -but a friend to it, he changed his mind, and resolved -to befriend me as far as lay in his power. -There is a kind of idea among several of those who -are the most religious in this country, that many or -most foreigners who arrive here are deists or atheists, -or at least men no way friendly to religion. -Grounds have, no doubt, been given for forming -this opinion, although I think it is generalized -among the class of people I mentioned, with some -degree of illiberality, as is, indeed, commonly the -case. The books which come here in favour of -deism and atheism strengthen the opinion. Most -of these are printed in France, but some of them,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_79"></a>[79]</span> -I am sorry to say it, are printed in England. From -all I have seen here, both in the Congress, and out -of it, I am strongly inclined to think that those -who oppose toleration, or at least many of them, -do so with a view to prevent the influx into the -country of such as oppose or scoff at religion. -As a proof of this, I refer to the member of Congress, -of whom I have just been speaking. This -man opposed toleration when it was discussed in the -Congress, and spoke publicly against it; yet when -conversing with him upon the subject, he told me -that he was not opposed to the toleration of Protestants -in the country. I have taken occasion at -different times to point out to some of the members, -in private conversation, that their law prohibiting -the public religious exercises of those who differ -from the Catholic church, does not hinder atheists -and deists from settling in the country, as these -have no form of religion they wish to practise; -and that this law serves only to prevent the coming -of those men who are sincerely religious and moral, -and who, as they themselves admit, would be of -great use in the country, by bringing into it many -branches of the arts and manufactures. I think I -have observed some good effects arising from these -conversations, and I wish it may so appear when, -the subject comes before Congress a second time.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_80"></a>[80]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 26th May, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>A considerable time has now elapsed since -I last wrote you. I confess I have acted wrong -in delaying so long; but I know that yourself and -the Committee of the British and Foreign School -Society are ready to forgive. The truth is, I have -had no heart to write you; I have had nothing encouraging -to communicate; and I am never fond -of being a messenger of evil tidings. I have been -bandied about these many months past, without -being able to make any progress in those highly -important affairs in which you feel so deeply -interested. I have been more than once on the -eve of leaving this part of South America, but one -little encouragement or another called me back -just as I was going to embark, and flattered me -into a belief that all would go on well. I shall not -detain you with a long list of grievances, but shall -pass at once to the more pleasing task of calling on -you to join with me in thanksgiving unto Him who -comforteth those that are cast down, and who hath -turned my darkness into light. Blessed be his -name, the prospects of something being done in this -place brighten daily, and I hope yet to communicate -to you something gladdening from the land -of the Incas.</p> - -<p>We have, at length, got our school fairly begun, -and under very favourable auspices. I formerly -mentioned to you that the government had given<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_81"></a>[81]</span> -us for our schools, the College belonging to the -Dominican Friars. The whole of the edifice is at -our disposal for school objects. We have fitted up -for our present school-room, a large apartment, -formerly the college dining-room, which will contain -300 children. The number attending at -present is upwards of a hundred; and we intend -to increase it gradually rather than rapidly, -as we might do were we inclined. The experience -I have had has taught me the necessity of this. It -is an easy matter to tell what the system is, and to -say things are to be managed in such and such a -way; but the great difficulty consists in reducing -it to practice, in training the children to method.</p> - -<p>The Congress and the Government here are decidedly -in favour of education. Their object is not -merely the education of the few, but the education -of the many, namely, of every individual in Peru. -The attention of the Congress is, at present, engaged -in drawing up a constitution for the nation. -One of the articles already sanctioned is, that no -one can vote for a member of Congress unless he can -read and write. From the consideration, however, -of the shameful neglect of the Spaniards in promoting -education in the country, these literary -qualifications are not to be exacted until the year -1840. Time is thus given for every individual to -qualify himself in these matters; and the anxious -desire of the Congress is, I am fully persuaded, to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_82"></a>[82]</span> -carry forward education with all possible rapidity.</p> - -<p>You are aware, I suppose, that the inhabitants -of Peru do not all speak the Spanish language. -The descendants of the ancient Peruvians are very -numerous, and most of them speak the language -of their ancestors. In some parts of the country -they have assumed the manners and the language of -their conquerors and oppressors; but in other parts, -and these by far the most populous, their ancient -tongue is their only medium of communication. I -have long had my eye on this interesting part of -the population of this country. I have, at length, -obtained a fair prospect of being able to plant -schools among them, and also to hand to them the -word of God in their native tongue. An officer -belonging to a regiment, called the Peruvian -Legion, and who thoroughly understands the -<i>Quichua</i>, or Peruvian, language, has taken a great -liking to our system, and is extremely desirous of -benefiting his countrymen by communicating instruction -to them. He is, at present, attending our -school for this purpose, and I entertain a pleasing -hope regarding the future results of his operations.</p> - -<p>I beg you to express to your Committee my sincere -respect and gratitude for the very obliging manner -in which they have come forward in aid of the -great work of education in South America.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_83"></a>[83]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Truxillo, 15th July, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>When I wrote my last letter to Mr. S. I -little thought my next letter would be written in -this place. Such, however, is the case, and I -proceed to mention the circumstances that have -brought me here. It is probable that what -has lately taken place in Lima will reach your -ears some days before this comes into your hand. -The Spanish army entered that city on the 18th -ultimo, the Government, the Congress, and a -great number of the inhabitants having left it on -the preceding day. You will wonder at this, I -dare say, after the favourable account of our affairs -in my last letter. It has also been a subject of -wonder unto us all, and of consternation to -not a few. I mentioned in my last, that the -Spaniards had collected a considerable force in -Jauja. They had left Arequipa, and collected -in Jauja with the intention of coming down upon -Lima. They had made this movement when the -independent army was sadly crippled, and when -there was no efficient force to oppose their taking -possession of the capital. When, however, reinforcements -had arrived from Colombia, and an expedition -had been sent off to Arequipa, we little thought -they would persevere in their intention of attacking -Lima. On the contrary, we thought they would -immediately retrace their steps with all speed -towards Arequipa or Cuzco, to secure to themselves<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_84"></a>[84]</span> -the possession of these valuable provinces. -The event, however, has turned out otherwise, -and we now understand that they were badly -informed as to the real state of their opponents. -The Spaniards crossed the Andes, and came down -towards Lima in a very rapid and unexpected -manner, with a force of seven thousand well disciplined -men. Upon their presenting themselves -in the neighbourhood of the city, they were reconnoitred -by the Independent Generals, and as -soon as the number and discipline of the Spanish -army were known, it was judged imprudent to -risk a battle with them, as the patriot army is but -about five thousand strong, and many of them recruits. -The independent army considered it most -advisable not only to avoid a general battle, but -also to avoid defending Lima, and chose to retire -to the forts in Callao. The Government and the -Congress, together with a great number of the -principal inhabitants, retired at the same time to -Callao. A few days after, the President and -Congress judged it most suitable to remove from -the scene of military operations, and to take up -a temporary residence in this city. They accordingly -sailed for this place, and arrived about a -fortnight ago.</p> - -<p>We were going on with our schools in a prosperous -way on the 16th (June) when the reports of -the rapid approach of the enemy, and the general -confusion throughout the city, induced us to suspend<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_85"></a>[85]</span> -our operations on that day for a week, till -we should see what would take place. It was -on that day quite uncertain whether the city would -be defended, (for it is surrounded by a good wall,) -or whether the army would retire from the city -to Callao. On the following day, however, all -doubt on these points was removed, as it was -agreed in a council of war to abandon the city, -and the army accordingly left it on the same day. At -three o’clock I left Lima and went down to Callao, -being assured that the enemy would enter the city -that night, or at all events on the following day. -I slept that night (the 17th) on board of an English -vessel, lying in the harbour. It was my intention -to return to Lima in four or five days, in which -time I supposed the Spaniards would be in quiet -possession of the place, and that order would be again -restored, so that as an Englishman I might pass to -Lima with a passport from the English Commodore -on the station. I accordingly remained some days, -on board the vessel, but there was no possibility of -passing from Callao to Lima with any safety during -that time. On the 20th the vessel I was in cleared -out for the port of Casma, about 200 miles -to the north of Lima, and I conceived it most advisable -to go along with her, as there was no -prospect of re-entering Lima for some time. I -therefore supplied myself with some dollars from -a friend, as I had left Lima without money, and with -scarcely any other clothes than those I had on. In<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_86"></a>[86]</span> -two days we arrived safely in the port of Casma, and -on the day after our arrival I went up to the village, -which is about 8 miles distant. I was accompanied -from Callao by an old friend, a priest, and a prebendary -of the cathedral of Lima. We made ourselves -acquainted with the Vicar, and were most -hospitably lodged in his house. Here we staid a -week. During this time the accounts from Lima -continued as unfavourable as before, and numbers -of people who had fled from it were arriving at -Casma, and others coming on towards it. I resolved, -therefore, to come on to this city, where -I arrived safely after four days travel through roads -of burning sand, which were very fatiguing to our -horses and to ourselves. The roads all along the -coast of Peru are of this description. Here and -there, at distances of from twenty to forty miles, -there is a river, and in the valley through which -it runs, vegetation of every kind shoots out -luxuriantly, and nothing is wanting but hands -of industry to raise cotton, sugar, coffee, and -all the tropical fruits. My friend, the prebendary, -remained in Casma, but I was accompanied -to this place by two other emigrants from Lima, -and on our arrival here we found not less than -a thousand people of all conditions under similar -circumstances with ourselves. Numbers have since -arrived, and reports say that nearly ten thousand -have left Lima, some having gone to one place and -some to another. Notwithstanding these unfavourable<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_87"></a>[87]</span> -circumstances, we expect all to return -to the capital before long; it may, however, be -three or four months.</p> - -<p>From what has been stated, you may perhaps -think that the cause of independence here is losing -ground fast, or that it is in a hopeless condition. -This, however, is not the case. The Spaniards -will, I believe, be under the necessity of leaving Lima -in the course of a very few months; and in the -mean time they have lost the valuable province of -Arequipa, as there are accounts of the safe arrival of -the expedition which sailed some time ago for that -quarter, and of some advantages they have already -gained, and also of the speedy prospect of taking -possession of all that place, the Spanish force -there being but small. The independent army -will probably march on towards Cuzco, where -the Viceroy is stationed with a force of about -3,000 men, and the ancient capital of the Incas -may very soon become the scene of the contest for -liberty—the contest of truth and freedom, with -ignorance and oppression; and may the righteous -cause prevail.</p> - -<p>I have long had a great desire of visiting some -of the interior parts of this country, and present -circumstances offer a favourable opportunity. I -intend, in a day or two, to leave this city for Caxamarca, -and from thence I purpose to go to Jaen -de Bracamoros. If the accounts I there obtain -are favourable, I shall go down the great river<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_88"></a>[88]</span> -Marañon or Amazon, as far as the mouth of the -Huallága or the Ucayáli. I may then perhaps ascend -some of the rivers which fall into the Marañon -from the north, and go on in this way towards -Quito. If I should be able to get on so far, I -shall then descend from Quito to Guayaquil, and -from thence by sea to Callao. I have got leave -of absence for four months, and have obtained a -letter of recommendation from the President to -the governors of those places through which I -intend to pass. I trust this journey is undertaken -with the same views which induced me to leave -my native country. I trust the Lord will protect -me from every evil, will surround me with his -almighty arm, and will guide and comfort me by -his Spirit.</p> - -<p>P.S.—<i>21st July, 1823.</i>——On the day after -writing the above, some accounts reached this -place that the Spanish army was beginning to -retreat from Lima. In consequence of this, I -deferred my journey until certain accounts upon -this subject should arrive. These accounts have -now been fully confirmed. The Spaniards began -their retreat on the 8th current, and the -last division of their army was to leave Lima -on the evening of the 16th, or on the day following.</p> - -<p>As Lima is now open, from the retiring of the -Spaniards, I have given up for the present my<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_89"></a>[89]</span> -journey to the river Amazon, and to-morrow I -set out for Lima overland.</p> - -<p>The day before yesterday the Congress was dissolved -here, and a Senate has been appointed in -its stead.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 8th August, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>My last letter to you was dated 9th November -last, and which I hope came safely into your -hands. Though the interval between my letters to -you be considerable, yet I always suppose you -acquainted with what occurs to me here during these -intervals, through my letters to our mutual friends -in Edinburgh. I therefore consider it unnecessary -to go over all that has happened here since I -last wrote to you, and shall confine myself to what -is going forward at the present time. I am sorry -that I have so much to say that may be called of -an unfavourable nature. In my letter to Mr. H. -from Truxillo, I stated the cause of my removal -to that city, and also the favourable change -which had induced me to return. I arrived -safely in this place on the 2d instant, after an -absence of nearly seven weeks. I found, on my -return, all that I had left behind safe, nothing -had been touched. The Spanish army continued -in possession of Lima just twenty-eight days, -during which they did considerable injury to the -place, by levying contributions, confiscating property,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_90"></a>[90]</span> -&c. The amount of the loss sustained, in -one shape and another, is reckoned at two millions -of dollars. All the property belonging to the -English merchants, which was in their own warehouses, -was respected, and no loss was sustained -thereon. What goods they had in the Custom-house -they were allowed to withdraw, upon paying -a duty of forty per-cent. The other goods in the -Custom-house, belonging to the natives of the -country, were confiscated and sold on the spot. -The favour thus experienced by the English, was -owing to the intervention of the British Naval Commander -in this place. The Spanish General, however, -intimated to the English merchants that although -he had respected their property at this -time, yet in future he would not do so, but would -confiscate all that belonged to them, should he -return again to Lima, and that thus they might -consider themselves as warned beforehand, of what -they might expect. I had heard in Truxillo -that the Spaniards had destroyed the palace, the -mint, and some other public buildings. This, however, -I am happy to find, was incorrect: they have -destroyed no buildings. The machinery of the -mint was destroyed; and they have carried -off or destroyed all the printing-presses and -types they could lay their hands on. The government -printing-presses and types have escaped, as -they had been removed to Callao in good time. -One or two presses also, belonging to private individuals, -have likewise been saved, having been hid<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_91"></a>[91]</span> -at the time the rest were carried off. I suppose -you have read (and correctly too,) in the descriptions -of this city, that the churches are immensely -rich in silver. This, however, is not the case at present, -I assure you. They are now completely stripped -of all their former grandeur in that respect. The -independent government at different times ordered -considerable quantities of the silver in the churches -to be taken to the mint, which was accordingly -done. Upon their retreat from the city on the -approach of the enemy, a few weeks ago, nearly -every thing of silver that could be well spared from -the churches, was carried to the castle in Callao, -to prevent its falling into the hands of the Spaniards. -This proved a proper foresight, for the enemy took -almost every thing that had been left in the churches, -and thus thoroughly stripped them. A priest observed -to me the other day, that it should seem the time -is now come when God chooses to be served with -less splendour, and with more humility. The observation -was good; and I wish the time were indeed -come when the supporters of this system would -lay aside their own riches and righteousness in -every respect, and would clothe themselves with -the righteousness of Christ, and with true humility. -That period is, I trust, advancing, although perhaps -not so fast as we could wish. The Lord, however, -will bring it about in due time. The way we -generally wish to do things, in our impatience, is -to jump to our object; or in other words, to gain<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_92"></a>[92]</span> -our benevolent ends all at once. This, however, -is not the way the Almighty has established matters -in the depth of his wisdom. The end, he tells -us, may be gained, yea, and shall be gained, but it -can be gained only by the use of the appointed -means, and by patient continuance in well doing.</p> - -<p>The Spanish army has marched towards Arequipa -along the coast. The first division under -General Valdes is already at some distance, but -the second division, under Canterác the Commander -in chief, is only about 100 miles to the south of -us. There is, however, I believe, little danger -at present of his returning to Lima, as the main -object of the Spaniards is to attack as early as -possible the patriot army in Arequipa. That -army is now of considerable strength, and much -better equipped every way than the former one -in that place, which was so completely defeated -by the Spaniards at Moquegua. I wish the result -may be favourable to the independent cause, as -much certainly depends on the result.</p> - -<p>I mentioned in my letter to Mr. H. that -the Congress had been dissolved in Truxillo, and -that a Senate had been appointed in its place. -This was the single act of the President, and it -was certainly a very bold and imprudent step, not -to say any thing of its injustice. The President -has not yet returned to Lima, and in the mean -time a strong opposition has been stirred up against -him here for having dissolved the Congress. The<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_93"></a>[93]</span> -representatives now in Lima have solemnly protested -against this measure, have re-installed themselves -as the supreme council and government -of the nation, and have elected the Marquis of -Truxillo to exercise the executive power. What -will be the result of these operations I know not. -It is probable, I think, that Riva Aguera, the President, -will give in, and be banished from the country -for some time, it is certainly a very unfavourable -time for internal disputes. A short time, I -hope, will make all things wear a more smiling -aspect, and may the Lord who reigneth in the -earth, grant that this may indeed be our case. All -things are in his hand. He ever reigneth, although -his benignant hand may at times be invisible to -us.</p> - -<p>During the time I was at Truxillo, I formed the -plan of visiting some of the aboriginal inhabitants -of America, on the banks of the river Amazon. I -had calculated that the Spaniards would keep possession -of this city for about three months, and I -supposed, that time would about suffice me for my -intended tour. I had bought a number of glittering -buttons, needles, scissors, knives, fish-hooks, -ribbons, &c., for presents to the natives. I had -also taken out my passport, and was arranging for -setting out, when accounts reached Truxillo, that -a part of the Spanish army had evacuated this city. -In consequence of this, I put off my intended journey, -though with regret, in order to return to my<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_94"></a>[94]</span> -duties in this place. I have long had a desire to -visit those parts, and though I have not been able -to effect my object at this time, my purpose is not -laid aside, but only postponed until a more favourable -opportunity occur; and in the mean time I -will go on collecting all the information I can, regarding -those quarters. I have a considerable desire -to spend the greater part of my remaining days -on the banks of that great river, or on the borders -of some of its tributary streams. In the Mercurio -Peruano, a work of which I dare say you have -heard, there are some very interesting accounts of -the entrance of the Jesuits and of the Franciscan -Friars into that part of the country. Their success -was various. Numbers of the missionaries -lost their lives in prosecution of their object, -through the cruel hands of those whom they went -to instruct. At length the missions in those parts -made some progress, but they never were very -flourishing; and even in their best state, missions -under such a system were open to many objections. -One single Moravian village in the midst of some -wilderness would be a more gratifying sight than -all the Jesuit missions put together. Though we -may thus condemn their system, because truth requires -it, yet the Missionaries themselves, generally -speaking, in point of zeal and devotion to their -object, are worthy of great commendation, and in -many instances their conduct forcibly attracts our -admiration. The accounts they have published are<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_95"></a>[95]</span> -extremely interesting. In another point of view, -also, the Missionaries have done a great service, -by their study of the original languages, and by -the grammars and dictionaries of these which they -published. The whole of these works are by the -Jesuits, and not a volume has been published -since their fall. These grammars and dictionaries -are now extremely scarce in this place. It has -cost me a great deal of labour to obtain some of -them, and others I have not yet been able to -procure, but hope in time to get a copy of all -their writings on those subjects, as well as of the -geographical works they have published.</p> - -<p>I believe it is not generally known in Europe -that a great part, the majority of the inhabitants -of Peru, are of the descendants of the ancient -Peruvians under the Incas. An idea is, I believe, -pretty general with you, that the Spaniards nearly -exterminated this race, as they did the inhabitants -of St. Domingo and Cuba. That they destroyed -vast numbers of the indigenous inhabitants of this -part of the world is, alas! too true; still, however, -the majority here are Peruvians, and not Spaniards. -There are, of course, a good many of a -mixed race, and on the coast there are not a few -of the sons and daughters of unhappy Africa, and -their descendants. The Peruvians who live in the -towns on the coast, all speak the Spanish language, -and know nothing of the ancient language of Peru, -called the Quichua. Between the coast and the ridge<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_96"></a>[96]</span> -of the Andes, called the Cordillera, there are many -towns, the inhabitants of which generally speak -the Quichua and the Spanish, with, however, a -predilection for their own native tongue. On the -east of the Cordillera of the Andes, the Spanish language -is but little spoken, and both Peruvians and -Spaniards speak the Quichua. It is spoken, of -course, with more or less purity, in these different -places, a circumstance to be fully expected of an -unwritten language, and among an uneducated -people. I have had my attention turned to those -parts of this country where the Quichua language -is spoken ever since I came to Peru. I have had -a great desire to communicate, in one way or another, -to this ancient people, the blessings of education -and the light of the Sacred Word. The -Spaniards have kept them in the lowest state of -mental existence, and it may be truly said, that -under the Incas, the Peruvians were less ignorant, -and more virtuous, than they are at this day. -At the time the Spaniards (these enemies of knowledge) -drove us from our post here, on their entrance -into Lima, we had in our school two descendants -of the ancient Peruvians studying our -system, with a view to carry instruction among -their countrymen; whilst another of the same people -was actually engaged in translating one of the -Gospels into the Quichua language. I hope we -shall be able to muster our forces again, and to -go on in this good work. Pray for us that the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_97"></a>[97]</span> -blessing of the Almighty may be upon us, to crown -us with speedy and certain success.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 1st September, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>I mentioned in a former letter, that the members -of the Congress who were in Lima had united -and re-installed this assembly. Their number -daily increased, by the arrival of those who had -fled to various quarters upon the arrival of the -Spaniards. Riva Aguera was left in Truxillo with -a very few only of those he had chosen for his -senate. The public opinion in favour of the Congress, -is very strong, and all seem to rejoice in -its restoration.</p> - -<p>Several accounts have reached us of advantages -gained by the patriot troops in the south, but the -good effects of these upon us are greatly lessened -by the continual dread we are in of the operations -of Riva Aguera, who has got collected together -about 3,000 men. Fulminations by the Congress -have been issued against him, calling him tyrant, -&c. &c. and exhorting every good patriot to use -his endeavours to bring him to this city, dead or -alive.</p> - -<p>This commencement of internal war is looked -upon by all who feel an interest in the independence -of the country, as a very unfortunate circumstance. -A powerful enemy is at hand, and -ready to seize every opportunity which such divisions<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_98"></a>[98]</span> -may occasion, in order to subject the country -to its former state. In fact we were, about -a fortnight ago, in great alarm for some days, -from a rumour of the return of the Spanish army. -A happy circumstance, however, has this day taken -place, which will, I trust, unite all parties in one. -This fortunate circumstance is the safe arrival of -Bolivar. He landed this morning in Callao, and -entered Lima this afternoon, to the very great satisfaction -of all. He has brought with him upwards -of 2,000 men, and more it is said are to -follow. The general aspect of the war is now greatly -in our favour, and I think the Spanish army is -rather critically placed. Some letters have been -intercepted from one of the Spanish Generals to -La Serna, giving rather a sad account of his -situation, and mentioning some of his officers of -whose loyalty he had not great confidence. From -all these circumstances, I trust the time is not far -distant when this unhappy and destructive war -will give way to peace and to liberty.</p> - -<p>When in Truxillo, I made some arrangements -for the circulation of the Scriptures in that quarter. -There is a medical gentleman there, a native of -Ireland, of the name of O’Donovan. He is of -the Roman Catholic religion, but he has none of -those prejudices against the Bible which many -of the Catholics have. So far is he from being -prejudiced upon this point, that he takes a very -great interest in its circulation, and recommends<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_99"></a>[99]</span> -it strongly to all his friends. This is a very happy -circumstance, and I hope the results will be truly -beneficial. Being a Roman Catholic himself, -what he says upon this subject has more weight -than the same things would have from a Protestant. -Since my return to Lima, I have sent -him 50 Spanish New Testaments, and a number -of Spanish tracts, which I got some time -ago. He mentioned to me the effects produced -by some tracts which he formerly had. He -said he gave a few of them to his neighbours, -and some time after inquired how they liked them. -Some of them told him plainly that they did not -like them at all, and that these tracts were not -<em>the Gospel</em>, because there was nothing said about -<em>the Sacraments</em> in them. You would not, he -replied, have the Sacraments spoken of <em>every -where</em>, and nothing but the Sacraments? Let -me read, continued he, a chapter of one of the -Gospels to you. He then took his New Testament, -and read to them accordingly a chapter from -one of the Gospels. Now, said he, is there any -thing about the Sacraments in what I have just -read to you? They said there was not. And is -not <em>this</em> the Gospel, said he? They agreed that -it was. Well then, he continued, may not these -tracts be Gospel too, although there is nothing -of the Sacraments in them. I trust the Lord will -bless the exertions of this worthy individual to -circulate the knowledge of God around him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_100"></a>[100]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 25th November, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>What a cheering thought it is, to contemplate -the glorious exertions of the present day, to put the -Sacred Scriptures into the hands of <em>all</em>. The -names of barbarian, Scythian, bond and free, have -disappeared in the distribution of this noble charity; -and the only distinction known is, those who -have this volume, and those who have it not. The -present mighty efforts bid fair to make this only -distinction among mankind disappear also; and -may it be soon fulfilled; thus leaving every soul in -possession of that treasure which can alone make -his soul valuable.</p> - -<p>I am happy to say that something has already been -done here, and that the prospects for the future -are encouraging. Perhaps there have been circulated, -during these few years past, about one -thousand copies of the whole Bible, in the Spanish -language, and considerably upwards of that number -of New Testaments, in the same tongue. It is -true, this is but a small number among so many; -yet it is a good beginning; and you know we -ought not to despise small things, but receive them -with thanksgiving, and as encouragements to perseverance.</p> - -<p>Immediately after the rapid sale of the 500 -Spanish Bibles, and 500 New Testaments in this -city, as mentioned in my letter of October 18th, -I wrote to London for a large supply, although I<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_101"></a>[101]</span> -was then in daily expectation of some arriving. -The supplies sent by the British and Foreign Bible -Society, and which I was then expecting, arrived, -as I afterward learned, in Buenos Aires and in -Chile, but none of them reached this place. I remained -for a long time in great anxiety about the -arrival of a supply for this city, and country adjacent. -After waiting for several months, I received a -letter from the Society, informing me that the whole -edition of the Bible had been disposed of, but that -5000 New Testaments would be sent me as soon as -they could be bound. These have not yet arrived, -but I am in hourly expectation of them.</p> - -<p>I come now to speak of a new translation of -the New Testament, which I am endeavouring to -procure in this place. I suppose you are aware that -the greater part of the inhabitants of Peru are the -descendants of the ancient Peruvians. The language -spoken by the Peruvian nation in the time of the -Incas is called the Quichua; and this language, -with some variation, continues to be spoken to the -present day by two-thirds of the inhabitants of this -country. Since my arrival in Peru, I have been -desirous of procuring a translation of a part or the -whole of the New Testament into this language. -I have, at length, got it begun, and under favourable -circumstances. Two of the Gospels, the -Acts of the Apostles, and the two Epistles of -Peter, are already translated into this ancient -tongue. The translation of the rest of the New<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_102"></a>[102]</span> -Testament is going forward, while the parts I have -mentioned are a revising by four gentlemen, who -have cheerfully offered to take this labour upon them. -I am much pleased to see the interest these individuals -take in this matter; and it will, as it -were, authorize this translation, when it is considered -that they have revised it. All the four are -members of Congress, and one of them is a clergyman. -The gentleman who is engaged in the -translation is a descendant of one of the Incas, or -kings of Peru, and a native of the city of Cuzco. -As soon as the parts I have mentioned are thoroughly -revised, I intend to print them at the expense -of the British and Foreign Bible Society. -In the mean time, the translation of the whole -New Testament will go forward until it is completed. -I am also desirous of beginning with the -Old Testament as soon as the New is translated. -This translation of the whole Bible, and the printing -of an edition of two or three thousand copies, -will cost a considerable sum, especially as printing -is expensive in this country. I have written to -the British and Foreign Bible Society, requesting -their instructions regarding the extent to which they -might wish me to go in this matter at their expense. -I trust they will authorize me to go forward in this -work, and to carry it into completion. As this, however, -is an <em>American</em> work, I believe the American -Bible Society would gladly come forward with -their aid to carry it into effect. This language is<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_103"></a>[103]</span> -spoken by about a million of people; and no other -inducement should be necessary to interest Bible -Societies in regard to it. There are also two other -languages spoken in this country, namely, the Aimará -and the Moxa.<a id="FNanchor_3" href="#Footnote_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a> About four hundred thousand -people speak these two languages. I am desirous -of getting, at least, one of the Gospels translated<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_104"></a>[104]</span> -into each of these, but have not yet got any thing -done. It is my intention to take a journey through -the interior of Peru; and, when passing through the -places where these two languages are spoken, I -shall endeavour to procure the translations when on -the spot.</p> - -<p>Thus, you see, the Lord’s work goes forward, -even in this remote corner. South America has -hitherto been a neglected and benighted country; -but thanks be to God, this long night of darkness -is now far spent, and the day is at hand. From -the time I set my foot on board on my voyage to -South America, I have considered myself as an -American. Ever since that day the interests of -America are the uppermost in my heart. You too, -my dear Sir, and the members of your Society, -are Americans. I would, therefore, call upon you, -as my fellow-citizens, and would rouse you up to the -mighty importance of that sacred work in which -you are engaged. America, North and South, is -the field for your operations. Lo! the poor Indian, -begging from you the “bread of life.” Can -you shut up your bowels of compassion?—“Come -over and help us,” breaks upon our ears from every -quarter. Surely this is not the time to sit down -with folded hands, to rejoice in what has been accomplished. -No. It is the time to blush, and to be -ashamed for our past supineness: it is the time for -calling forth all our energy, for plying every -nerve, in order to make the Light of Life shine -from one end of the earth to the other.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_3" href="#FNanchor_3" class="label">[3]</a> Although I resided upwards of two years in Peru, yet -during that time I did not meet with any person qualified to -translate the Scriptures into either of these two languages. -But after leaving that country, I met with a person fitted for -translating into the Aimará, in a place where I little expected -to find one. In London, last year, when in one of the Paddington -coaches, I perceived that one of my fellow passengers was a -foreigner, from his countenance and manner of speaking. -After we had conversed a little with each other, I took the -liberty to ask him from what part of the world he came. He -told me he was from South America; and upon inquiring -more particularly, I found he was a native of La Paz, in Peru, -the very spot where the Aimará language is spoken. This individual -I found to be perfectly acquainted with this language, -having spoken it from his infancy; and from his education -and other circumstances, I conceived him to be a suitable -person for translating the Scriptures into that language. Our -acquaintance increased, and led to his being engaged by the -British and Foreign Bible Society to translate the New Testament -into his native tongue; and he has now nearly completed -this work.</p> - -<p>We call a meeting of this kind accidental, and it was truly -so, in the common sense of the term. But the Christian looks -higher, and finds the directing hand of God in such matters. -What adds to the interest of this circumstance is, that besides -the person mentioned, there is not an individual in England -who understands a word of the language referred to.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_105"></a>[105]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 1st December, 1823.</i></p> - -<p>I mentioned to you in my last, that Bolivar -had safely arrived in this city. Some days after -his arrival, I was introduced to him, and was -very favourably received. He is, in appearance, -a very modest unassuming man, as far as I can -judge from the short conversation we had together. -He appears very active and intelligent, but I could -not read any thing of an extraordinary nature in -his countenance. He has not the eye of San -Martin, whose glance would pierce you through -in a moment. Bolivar’s weather-beaten face tells -you that he has not been idle. No man, I believe, -has borne so much of the burden, or has toiled -so hard in the heat of the day, in the cause of South -American Independence, as Bolivar. His labours -in his own country are already crowned with nearly -complete success; Colombia may be considered -free and independent. According to all the accounts -which reach us, the Congress of that country -is going on with great steadiness. The following, -I conceive, is a very pleasing trait in -Bolivar’s character. When invited to come here, -he replied, that he would very gladly come without -a moment’s delay, but that he could not allow -himself to obey his feelings in the matter, -as an article of the constitution of Colombia prohibits -the President from going out of the state<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_106"></a>[106]</span> -without leave from the Congress. From this circumstance, -he said, and from a desire to give an -example of subjection to the laws, he could not -come until he should obtain leave. He accordingly -wrote to the Congress for permission, and -although, from the distance of the capital, he -was long in receiving an answer, and in the interval -was urgently solicited from this quarter, -yet he remained in Guayaquil until the permission -from the Congress came, and immediately after -sailed for this place. Since his arrival here, he -has been chiefly occupied in military occupations, -and in endeavouring to make an accommodation -between the Congress and Riva Aguera. Every -thing has been done by him in this matter, and -I am sorry to say without effect. The last remedy -only remains, and it has been resorted to; -Bolivar in person and 6,000 men have gone -against him. I am told he is pretty confident -of reducing him in a very short time, and that he -expects to return in three or four weeks.</p> - -<p>Lima is no longer that city of wealth it formerly -was. The number of people who have been reduced -from tolerably comfortable circumstances -to poverty, is not a few. The affairs of our school -suffer greatly from the present state of this place. -The Government is very friendly towards us, and -very desirous of giving us succour, but they cannot -do all they wish, as this war rivets the attention -of all, and devours all the resources. But -the Lord reigneth, and all shall yet be well.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_107"></a>[107]</span></p> - -<p>The Congress has, for some months past, been -busily occupied in framing a constitution for -Peru, and which they have now brought to a -close. A few days ago it was published, and it -has since been sworn to with great formality by -the members of Congress, the Members of Government, -and other public functionaries. It is -very probable that this constitution will be translated -into English, and published in London. -You will, in that case, have an opportunity of -seeing it, and of forming your opinion regarding -its merits. When you have passed your judgment -upon it, I shall be obliged to you to state -particularly what that judgment is, in order that -I may inform my friends here of the result. In -this manner you may perhaps contribute to its -improvement afterwards, as the opinions of foreigners -upon the subject will, I am persuaded, -have some weight. To find a perfect constitution -would be as difficult, perhaps, as to find a perfect -man. The political constitutions of most countries -might be altered for the better, I believe, -especially on your side of the world. There is -certainly a striking difference between the old -world and the new in reference to these matters. -You Europeans, generally speaking, may be -compared to an old man, whose evil habits have -grown up with him from the days of his ignorance -and foolishness, but which he either cannot see, -or seeing, is unwilling to correct. If you point<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_108"></a>[108]</span> -out these to him, he gets impatient and angry, and -then draws his sword, by dint of which he convinces -you that he is in the right. We, on the -other hand, who live in a new world, have new -ideas, and, I may add, true ideas, upon these -subjects. America may be compared to a young -man just come of age, and inexperienced, but who -is endeavouring to learn wisdom from seeing the -stubbornness of old age on the one hand, and from -the true principles of philosophy on the other. -We are not fettered down by old habits, and we -are endeavouring therefore, and I think with some -success to look upon the subject of government -philosophically, and as free as may be from -the influence of prejudice. The single object, I -believe, of the rising states of South America is -the forming such laws or constitutions as may -truly secure the liberty and protection of every -member of the political body, to the greatest degree -possible. Political codes have been drawn -up with this view, and all of them, I believe, -have an article of great importance, namely, that -the constitution shall be revised and improved from -time to time, in order that it may move on towards -perfection, as science and wisdom increase -in the world. You will be saying to yourself, perhaps, -that I am too favourable to my new friends, -and you will be ready to produce against me -the article upon religion as found in most of the -constitutions of this southern continent. You are<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_109"></a>[109]</span> -likely, I believe, to form an improper judgment of -this country in reference to that article. You -may be sure I feel the want upon this matter -more than you do, but I endeavour to look upon -the subject with as little prejudice as possible. -When toleration was obtained in England, it was -wrung from the government, I may say, by main -force. The safety of the state demanded it, and -this I suppose had more weight in obtaining for us -this precious blessing, than any qualms of conscience -or political wisdom. Things are quite different -here. There is nobody, I may say, who needs -toleration, and of course nobody is asking it for -himself. I speak of the inhabitants of America, -exclusive of the few foreigners who reside in it. -One of the members of Congress, at the time of -discussing this subject, very pertinently said, -“Why such ado about toleration? Who is asking -for it? or who stands in need of it? We, ourselves, -do not need any such thing, and foreigners, -who are here, seem very little concerned -about the subject. It was not religion that brought -them to this country, but commerce. Give them -money, therefore, in exchange for their goods, and -they will seek nothing else.” Now all this was very -true, however unpalatable. Yet, notwithstanding -the real state of the country in regard to the need of -toleration, a very strong party exists in the Congress -in favour of it; so strong indeed, that it was thought -at one time that it would be gained; and when it<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_110"></a>[110]</span> -was lost, a considerable number entered their protest -upon the subject; the first of whom was an -aged priest, and the head of the principal college in -Lima. Now can you tell me when such things took -place in any other country, and originating wholly -from a philosophical view of the matter? Having -seen these things take place, under my own eye, -and having conversed with several members of -Congress and others upon the subject, I feel confident -in stating, that liberal views upon it are -pretty general, at least in this city, and I believe -that this evil will be removed from the Constitution -ere long, perhaps at the first revival of it.</p> - -<p>P.S.—Riva Aguera and his friends, are now -prisoners, and his troops have returned to their -duty.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 1st March, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>I stated to you, some time ago, my expectation -of being able to introduce the New Testament -undisguised into our school. Blessed be God, -that object is now accomplished. I have sold several -copies to the children publicly in the school. In -the usual course of our lessons, we have occasion -to speak of several incidents in the Gospel history. -On these occasions, I desire our pupils, particularly -on Saturdays, to find out in their New Testaments -where such a thing is spoken of, giving them certain -limits. On the Monday following, a number<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_111"></a>[111]</span> -are well prepared with their New Testaments -marked with slips of paper at the places in question, -and often through their pretty impatience -to communicate their discoveries, they tell me before -we get into the school, that they have found -out the parable of the sower, the conversion of -Paul, &c. You may easily imagine that these -circumstances are great sources of enjoyment to -me, and make up for many disadvantages. I have -said that we have got the New Testament introduced -into our school <em>undisguised</em>. You probably -perceive what I mean by using the word undisguised. -The truth is, the New Testament, in one -sense, has all along been used in our schools in -South America, not however in the open manner -we now use it in Lima, but, as I may say, disguised; -that is, we have used for lessons extracts -from it, printed on large sheets, and in little books, -thus introducing the Scriptures as it were by -stealth. Each part of these lessons I cause to -be read repeatedly in the classes, until the children -can read them readily. By the time they can do -so, the substance of what they have read, and the -instruction contained in it, is tolerably imprinted -on the memory. Children, you know, have a -habit of repeating to themselves what they have -been saying or reading frequently. In consequence -of this, what portions of Scripture they -have read in the school, they repeat in this way at -home. My excellent friend and companion, the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_112"></a>[112]</span> -clergyman, already well known to you, informs me -that several of the parents of our scholars tell him -that their children are talking about the Gospel at -home all the day long. From other quarters I have -heard the same thing, and always with satisfaction -expressed on the part of the parents. Some of the -elder boys, at times, have requested me to lend them -the little books of Scripture extracts, that they might -read them at home; and sometimes the request is, -“My mother desired me to ask you for one of the -little books, as she wishes to read it.” These requests -have been listened to with satisfaction, and -you may be sure, complied with. Seeing this good -disposition in regard to this matter, and considering -the advantages which might flow from this silent -unpresuming introduction of the Holy Scriptures, I -intimated to the children that the little books would -be sold to them at a small expense, and the consequence -was, that many of them were bought immediately. -I mentioned to my clerical friend what I -had done, and my motive for doing it, namely, that -the children and the parents might be improved. -He replied, the books must prove useful to both -parents and children, as what they contain is <em>the -word of God</em>.</p> - -<p>You will, perhaps, think I am lengthening out -this subject too much, in talking of our school -affairs. It is a subject, however, of some interest, -considering where our school is, and I am persuaded -you will look upon it as such. I shall,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_113"></a>[113]</span> -therefore, proceed a little farther, even at the risk -of being tedious. We have, at certain times, an -exercise for the more advanced boys, which I conceive -to be very useful, and in which they take a -great deal of interest. A Scripture narrative, or -parable, is proposed, which they are required to -read over, by themselves, with great attention, and -to note in their memory all the circumstances and -instruction contained in it. Thus prepared, as -many as <em>choose</em> to exhibit, sit down on a form by -themselves, and one after another stands forward, -without book, and delivers the parable or narrative, -not in the very words of the text, but giving all the -circumstances of the parable in their own artless -way. It is pleasing, and not uninstructive, to hear -them go over their exercise in this manner. Instead, -for instance, of saying that the servant in Matthew, -chap. 18, owed his Lord ten thousand talents, one -will say, he owed him a thousand dollars, another, -perhaps, will say a hundred dollars; whilst, on -the other hand, they will say that the one servant -owed the other “<i>unos pocos cuartillitos</i>,” or, as we -would say in English, a few halfpence. By this -way of saying it, they get into the sense of the passage -themselves, and it is thus also brought down to -the level of the understandings of their younger companions, -all of whom are listening, whilst the attention -of many is rivetted. One of the boys the other day, -in noticing the concluding verse of the 18th of Matthew, -made a very beautiful allusion to the corresponding<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_114"></a>[114]</span> -petition in the Lord’s Prayer, forgive us -our trespasses as we forgive others. A premium of -two rials (equal to a shilling) was awarded to the -boy who delivered his parable in the best manner. -Several times this reward was proposed and given. -One day they asked me what parable we should -have. I told them I was not sure that we should -have any at all that day, because money was very -scarce with us, and I did not know if we could -spare two rials. But, said they, we may say the -parable, although there be no premium. You take -a pleasure then, said I, in this exercise, do you, -independently of the premium? Yes, said they, -with one accord. Well, I continued, it gives me -great pleasure to see you take so much interest -in this matter, and I can assure you, it is a very -useful exercise, as well as a pleasing one.</p> - -<p>I now go on to notice what has occurred here -since my last, in reference to supplies of the Holy -Scriptures, and their distribution. I stated to you -formerly, that we were entirely without a supply of -the Spanish <em>Bible</em> here, and that we had but a few -New Testaments. In hopes of obtaining some -Bibles which were much sought after, I wrote to a -gentleman in Valparaiso, to whom some Bibles -and Testaments had been consigned some time -before by the British and Foreign Bible Society, -with an intimation that they should be at my disposal, -if I wished for them. On learning this, I -immediately wrote to Valparaiso upon the subject,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_115"></a>[115]</span> -requesting the whole to be sent me without delay. -After more than the time necessary for their arrival -had passed by without their appearing, I wrote a -second time, making the same request. I received -an answer to my second letter, as it seems the first -had miscarried, but I was sorry to learn that the -Bibles were all gone. When I say I am sorry for -this, I speak rather in reference to the supplying -of this place, than in reference to the grand object -of distributing the Scriptures in South America. -These Bibles, to the amount of 200, were all distributed, -and mostly by sale, in Valparaiso, so -that, if I am sorry in not being able to supply -those who want here, I am, on the other hand, -glad that my friends in Chile have obtained so -many copies of the sacred word in their own -tongue.</p> - -<p>After the accounts which I have now given you, -which are of an encouraging nature, I am sorry in -being under the necessity of giving a gloomy close -to my letter. The Spanish army entered this city -yesterday. I feel as if I were no longer in South -America, but as <em>transported</em> to Spain; and as one -in the visions of the night, finds himself in foreign -climes, he knows not how, and sighs to return -home, so do I sigh to return to South America. -My next letter may, perhaps, inform you, that our -school has been shut up, and that I have taken -my departure for—heaven knows where. There, -however, I shall be, as now, affectionately yours.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_116"></a>[116]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 3d March, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>Soon after the arrival of the Bibles here, there -were many observations made regarding the faithfulness -of this reprint from the Madrid edition; and many -observations were made also as to the reading the -Scriptures without notes, for the Spanish Bible had -never been seen before without these in this country. -On one of these occasions, in the street one day, when -a priest was speaking freely to some people about him -against reading the Scriptures without the notes, a -friar came up and joined them; and, hearing the observations -of the other against reading, the Bible -without notes, he took up the other side of the -question, and by strong arguments and some wit, he -put his adversary to shame, and convinced those -who were present that it was the best and most -natural way to read the divine instructions just as -they proceeded out of the mouth of him who spoke -as never man spoke, and just as they flowed from -the pens of the inspired messengers.</p> - -<p>I have very great satisfaction in stating, that -many of the clergy in this place encourage the -reading of the word of God. This is a cheering -circumstance, and affords good grounds to expect -a large diffusion of divine knowledge; for the word -of God cannot return unto him void, but will accomplish -his gracious will in the instruction and -salvation of mankind wherever it is read. I have -leaned this friendly disposition of the clergy upon -this subject more particularly, since I set agoing -the translation of the New Testament into the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_117"></a>[117]</span> -Quichua language, as mentioned in my last. All -with whom I have talked upon this subject, both -clergy and laity, are pleased with the object, and I -have not yet heard of any one condemning the -doing of it.</p> - -<p>I spoke to a canon, in this place, some time ago -upon the subject, and he voluntarily offered to correct -the proof-sheets in passing through the press, if -I should be at any loss for one to do it. Blessed -be God for this encouragement. May he carry on -and prosper this work, and make it a blessing unto -thousands. In about three months, or less, I expect -the whole of the New Testament will be -translated into the Peruvian tongue. The revision -also is going forward, and from the character and -qualifications of those who are revising it, I trust -the translation will be very faithful, and at the same -time adapted to the capacities of the poor, to whom, -in an especial manner, the gospel is preached.</p> - -<p>You will observe by my former letter, that besides -the Quichua, there are two other languages -spoken in Peru, into which it would be desirable -to get a part or the whole of the New Testament -translated. I mentioned to you my application to -the British and Foreign Bible Society for means -to carry forward these translations. I also hinted -that this is properly an <em>American</em> work, and that it -would not be unnatural to look for some assistance -in it to the American Bible Society. Will you -therefore have the goodness to lay this matter before<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_118"></a>[118]</span> -the board of managers, and request them to favour -me with a communication upon the subject, as early -as convenience will permit. The object is, to -translate the whole Scriptures into the Quichua -language, spoken by upwards of a million, and also -into the Aimará and Moxa languages, spoken each -by upwards of two hundred thousand souls. I add no -more upon this subject for the present, but at the -same time, think it not improper to hint, that I shall -probably have another claim upon your liberality, -in regard to the native languages of Mexico. This -claim may come before you perhaps some twelve -months hence, should our heavenly Father be -pleased to uphold me so long.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 25th March, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>My last letter to Mr. S. closed with a foreboding -in regard to our concerns here, from the circumstance -of the Spanish army having entered this -city. On the 29th of February, the Spanish troops, -to the amount of about 2,500, took quiet possession -of this place, there being not the smallest opposition. -The patriot troop had retired a few days -before, leaving us altogether unprotected, and -exposed to those depredations which never fail -to take place in a large city where there is no -government to restrain. We were, in fact, in a -very unpleasant state for some days, and the first -sound of martial music from the Spanish army<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_119"></a>[119]</span> -filled me with thanksgiving, as a deliverance from -the anarchy and confusion we had lived in for -some time.</p> - -<p>A few days after the arrival of the Spanish -army, and as soon as things were a little tranquillized, -I wrote to the Spanish General, in reference -to our school, telling him what we had done, and -the state in which we were at the time. I represented -to him the nature of our schools, and stated -that establishments of a similar kind had been -introduced and encouraged in various parts of the -world. I of course mentioned particularly what -had been done in Spain. After stating these things, -I requested him to inform me whether we should -go on, or whether we should immediately shut up -our school. In answer to this, I received from -him a very polite letter, saying, that he was -informed and fully persuaded that the school -under my direction was a very useful establishment, -and that he wished it to go on until the -Viceroy should communicate his mind upon the -subject. In my letter to the General I inclosed -a copy of a letter, which I intended to forward -to the Viceroy, and requested his opinion of the -letter, and whether I should send it on to Cuzco. -He replied, that he thought the letter was suitable, -and that if I wished he would himself forward it to -the Viceroy, in order that it might go with greater -security. You may be sure, I thankfully accepted -his offer, and sent him immediately my letter to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_120"></a>[120]</span> -forward. Next day I called on the General to -thank him for his kindness in protecting our school, -and in taking the trouble of forwarding my letter -to the Viceroy. I was very kindly received by -him, and encouraged to go on. Thus, you see -we have a new instance of the gracious goodness -of our God in giving me favour with the Governors -of this quarter of the world, however much -opposed to each other.</p> - -<p>I informed you, I think, soon after my arrival -in this place, that the government had ordered the -college belonging to the Dominican Friars in this -city to be put at my disposal, for the use of our -school establishment. The removal of the Friars, -and the giving up of the college, was accomplished -without the smallest murmur, or at least audible -murmur, on the part of the monks. This college -is an extensive building, and very well adapted to -the purposes of a central school. We have a large -school room, which will hold very conveniently -300 children, and another large room connected -with it, which would contain 200 more. We -have also several other rooms, very suitable as -lodgings for the masters whilst studying the system, -and there is convenience for a printing office, &c. -&c. The apartments formerly occupied by the -Rector of the college, have formed my own lodging -the greater part of the time I have been in -Lima. Besides the places now mentioned, which -are all connected with each other, we have a large<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_121"></a>[121]</span> -hall, finely adapted for a female school, with rooms -for the mistress and her assistants. These are entirely -separated from the parts mentioned before, -so that though in the same building, they are -quite distinct places, with separate entrances a -gun-shot from each other. Our boys’ school contains, -at the present time, 230 children, and we have -often been talking of commencing a girls’ school -as a thing greatly wanted in this place. But such -has been the unhappy state of public affairs here -for so long a time, that nothing has yet been done -in it. From the description I have given you of -the building we occupy, and the use to which it -was formerly destined, you might naturally expect -that the Friars gave it up reluctantly, though -without complaining, and that they would still -have their eye upon it, if a favourable opportunity -should present itself for reclaiming it. I am told, -that when the Spaniards were in possession of this -city in June last, the Friars had resolved on petitioning -the government upon the subject, but -the short occupation of the city by the Spanish -troops did not allow them to carry their purpose -into effect. At the present time, the Spaniards -seem to have taken a more permanent possession -of the place, with the intention of continuing in -it for some time, and their possessing the fortresses -of Callao will enable them to do so. We were, -therefore, in greater danger than ever of losing -our college, and indeed application, as I am informed,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_122"></a>[122]</span> -was actually made to that effect to General -Monet, the commander of the division in this -quarter. But from what I have stated above, -you will see the happy resolution of the General -in our favour. I should have mentioned, when -describing the college, that there is a church connected -with it, as there is with all the colleges -here. The church and the court connected with -it, are separated by a wall from the parts formerly -mentioned. They were formerly not entirely separated -from each other, as there were two openings, -like gate ways, between the two places. -These, however, I caused to be built up, as I did -not know what kind of companions I might have -in the two Friars who were left to perform the -service of the church; and from the character of -some of this class, and the circumstance of -the loss of their college, and its being put into -the hands of a Protestant, I did not augur much -good from their neighbourhood. We have, however, -lived all along on good terms, and our longer -acquaintance with each other has grown, I think, -into friendship. I met with a proof of this friendship -since the entrance of the Spaniards, which -I did not expect. The Friar who has the principal -charge called upon me one morning, and -informed me that he had heard that the Conde -de Villar de Fuente was to be appointed Governor -of Lima. Now, says he, although he is -a very good man, yet being very friendly to the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_123"></a>[123]</span> -Friars, it is very likely they will press him hard to -regain their college. You should therefore, continued -he, endeavour to see the Governor as early as -possible, lest they get the start of you to your disadvantage. -I thanked him very kindly for his -intimation and for his advice, and told him that I -was very happy in having this proof of our living -in such friendship with each other. I called upon -the Governor soon after his appointment, agreeably -to the advice of my friend, and found him very -well disposed to continue our establishment and to -encourage it.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 29th March, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>The Grecian which brought your letter of 24th -April, and the cases of New Testaments therein -mentioned, arrived at the port of Callao at a very -unfavourable time. The garrison in the castles of -that place had mutinied some ten days previous to -her arrival, and every thing there was in confusion. -The fortresses and town of Callao were in the hands -of the Spaniards, whilst the patriots governed in -Lima. Under these circumstances, I thought it -most prudent not to land the New Testaments, but -to wait some time to see what turn things would -take, and for the same reason I deferred writing -you. On the 29th ultimo, the Spaniards took -possession of this city; they have continued here<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_124"></a>[124]</span> -since, and seem likely to do so for some time. -From various circumstances, we have been led to -believe that the Spanish government will not allow -those freedoms which the Patriot government allowed, -in reference to the introduction of books, -&c. In consequence of this, I still considered it -hazardous to land the New Testaments, and therefore -kept them on board so long as the Grecian -continued here; and when she sailed for Chile, -which she did a few days ago, I got them put on -board his Majesty’s ship Fly, now lying in Callao. -I shall thus keep them afloat until I see something -like a certainty of landing them safely. What I -have just said refers only to the 2,500 copies addressed -to the care of Mr. Thwaites, as the rest which -were addressed to Mr. Lynch have been carried -back to Chile in the Grecian, and are to be delivered -there according to instructions given. After -being landed in Valparaiso, they will be forwarded -to Santiago, the capital, and put into the hands of -Mr. Christopher Collis for sale. I have offered -the whole to Mr. Collis at 850 dollars, to be paid -in one month after receiving them; or should he -decline taking them at the rate mentioned, I have -desired him to sell them on my account, charging -the commission he usually takes. The price I have -put upon the New Testaments, when sold one by -one, is eight rials each, and when sold in quantities -to sell again, at six rials each. This you see -will about cover the original cost and expenses<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_125"></a>[125]</span> -if the whole are taken by Mr. Collis, and if he -retails them they will bring something more. I -think this is a rule that should pretty generally be -attended to, and as few as possible given gratis. -What I have said, applies to these countries of -South America, but other rules may be better -elsewhere. I do think it injurious to make a -general distribution gratis. Individual copies may -be given in this way by a time, but it should be -only at times, and when a clear case presents itself. -The committee will correct me in this if I am -wrong.</p> - -<p>On the very day that I received the 610 New -Testaments from Valparaiso, I received a letter -from Truxillo begging most earnestly, and “for -God’s sake” that I would send to that place without -delay a supply of the Holy Scriptures. With -the writer I am well acquainted, and we had many -pleasing interviews during the few weeks I remained -in that place, in June and July of last -year. My friend and correspondent in Truxillo -is a medical gentleman and a native of Ireland. -He has been long in this quarter of the world, and -may be considered rather as a South American, -than a native of the British Isles. He is of -the Roman Catholic religion, but is free from -those prejudices to be found among many of -his own communion. He studies the word of -God himself, and recommends the study of it -most earnestly to all his friends around him. I<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_126"></a>[126]</span> -found him with a single Spanish New Testament -of one of your earlier editions. This was to him -quite a family piece, and his wife and children take -great pleasure in reading it. A copy of the whole -Bible in the Spanish language he had not been able -to procure at that time, but in the letter referred -to, he tells me he had obtained one from a friend -who purchased it in Lima at the time of Mr. -Lynch’s sale. When we were together in Truxillo, -I inculcated upon him strongly the importance of -doing every thing in his power to make the Word -of God have free course and be glorified as far as -in him lay. To this he most cheerfully agreed, and -indeed was more ready to enter into it than I could -be to lay it before him. He told me that he was -personally acquainted with most of the rectors in -the various districts throughout the extensive province -of Truxillo, which contains a population of -about 300,000 souls. To each of these rectors he -promised to write upon the subject, and was pretty -confident that they would, in answer to his letters, -request large supplies of the Scriptures. I promised -on my part to supply him amply with New -Testaments very soon, and with Bibles as soon as -I could have a supply from England. Upon my -return to Lima, I sent him 50 Spanish New Testaments, -some of the Annual Reports of the Society, -some religious tracts, &c. These were sent under -the particular care of a mutual friend, who sailed for -Santa, and intended to send them overland to Truxillo.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_127"></a>[127]</span> -This happened to be at the time of one of our civil -commotions, and when our friend landed at Santa -all communication was interrupted between that -and Truxillo. From Santa he sailed to Guayaquil, -and not finding a convenient opportunity for -sending them back to Truxillo, he sold them there, -and wrote our friend to that effect, saying he would -account to me for the price of them. This was a -great disappointment to Mr. O’Donovan, for that -is the name of our fellow-labourer; and to remedy -it, he wrote me the letter above mentioned. He -urges his claim from the circumstance of the great -need there is of the Word of God in that quarter, -from his having promised to send copies to his -friends, the rectors, agreeably to what was before -stated, and from the circumstance of a number of -copies of two infidel books which had been just -landed from a French ship in that place, and which -have done much evil in these countries. Often do -I think, my dear Sir, and often do I say, that this -is a most critical time for South America, in a religious -point of view.</p> - -<p>Two days after having received his letter, I -sent him off 250 copies, in common binding, and -ten in calf extra. The patience, however, of our -friend has again been put to the trial, for notwithstanding -that the box containing this supply was -sent down to Callao immediately, yet on account -of the confusion in that place, as above mentioned, -it only went off a few days ago. I imagine him<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_128"></a>[128]</span> -just now opening it, and satiating his eyes with -its sacred contents. In the conclusion of his -letter, he says he intends to go from house to house -to urge these “ignorant but docile Christians” to -receive the treasure offered them. Let us pray that -his benevolent and zealous efforts may be crowned -with happy success.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 30th March, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>We have at present three masters learning our -system, and whom we expected to place in other -schools before now; but this war literally devours up -every thing, and ties us down to a spot. When we -shall clap our wings and fly over the Andes, to teach -the poor Peruvian in his native tongue, I cannot -tell: God may, perhaps, bring this about sooner than -we expect. In the course of a week, the whole of -the New Testament will be translated into the vernacular -language of Manco Capac, and by a descendant -of that ancient race of kings.</p> - -<p>I have written to the Viceroy La Serna, who -resides at present in Cuzco, requesting to know his -determination regarding the continuing of our -system, under his government, in this city, and -whether he is desirous of extending it throughout -the country. In something less than two months -I shall probably hear from him, and shall communicate -to you the result. If the answer be favourable,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_129"></a>[129]</span> -I shall most likely repair immediately to -Cuzco, leaving one of the masters before mentioned -in charge of this school; and should his answer be -unfavourable, I shall leave this place and go northwards.</p> - -<p>We have often been very desirous of commencing -a girls’ school in this city, and we have very good -accommodations in our college for this purpose; -but we have never been able to effect it, in consequence -of the extreme scarcity of money at -present in this city. If Lima had been in its former -state of abundance, we could have effected it -with great ease; and it would have been a very -great blessing to this place. We would, in that -case, have been very desirous of receiving a well-qualified -teacher from your Committee, to direct -our female department. It would still be preferable -to send two, as one of them could attend to -the public school, and the other might keep a -respectable boarding-school for the higher classes. -Regarding this last-mentioned part, several parents -have spoken to me; and on the whole, I think it -would turn out well for those who might come out -for that purpose. Such an establishment I am -sure would be the means of doing a great deal of -good in this country. Female education, in my -opinion, is the thing most wanted in every country; -and when it shall be properly attended to, the -renovation of the world will go on rapidly. Let us -know if you could aid us in these matters, if we<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_130"></a>[130]</span> -were directly to apply to you. I notice these things -that you may write me upon the subject, and -knowing, from experience, how ready you are, at -all times, to listen to every proposition which bears -on knowledge and benevolence.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 12th April, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>You have, more than once, requested me to state -to you any interesting conversations I might have at -times with individuals of this country, upon the subject -of religion. I have not, I believe, been very -communicative in my letters to you on this subject. -I believe such details might, in many cases, be interesting, -but generally speaking, the questions -and answers upon these matters are so nearly what -we might expect them to be before hand, under the -given circumstances, that little of what can be -called solid information is derived therefrom; besides, -I understand you print some of my letters, -and there is some delicacy and caution to be used -under such a consideration, more especially as I -have never seen any of your printed accounts, and -am thus unable to judge of the freedom you use in -such matters. I hope in your selections for the -press, you will be wise as serpents, and harmless -as doves.</p> - -<p>I shall now detail to you a conversation which I -had a few days ago, with a particular friend, upon<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_131"></a>[131]</span> -the subject of religion, and more particularly upon -the Catholic and Protestant controversy. The -gentleman, with whom I had the conversation, is a -man of superior education and abilities, and holds an -important situation in one of our colleges. We have -been acquainted with each other ever since I arrived -in this city. We have visited each other occasionally -during that time, and have talked upon religious -subjects, but almost always upon those things in -which we were agreed. A few days ago I had a -visit from him, and we entered almost immediately -into a close conversation or controversy upon some -of the points of the Catholic religion. I had -lying on the table one of the Pope’s bulls, which a -young man had brought me a day or two before, as -I had expressed to him a desire to see it. I enquired -of my friend, where I could obtain a set of -these bulls, as I wished to see each of them, in -order to ascertain their nature, and what it was -they promised to those who should purchase them. -After he had informed me where this article was to -be found, I told him that I understood that those -who purchased one of these bulls at a certain -price, namely, eight dollars and a half, were -assured that they would get out of purgatory in -two or three days after death. He said it was so -as I had stated. Do you then really believe, said -I, that the Pope can thus pardon the sins of men, -and that men can obtain the pardon of their sins -by means of expending such a sum of money in the -purchase of this bull.—He said he believed the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_132"></a>[132]</span> -forgiveness of sins could be obtained in the way -mentioned, and that the Pope had such authority -in virtue of being the successor of the prince of the -apostles, to whom Jesus Christ had granted the -keys of the kingdom of heaven, and power to remit -or to retain the sins of men. It is to be supposed, -however, continued he, that confession of sins is to -be made in order to this forgiveness. And in confession -to whom can the penitent go but to the -minister of Christ, in order that they may instruct -him in the nature of repentance? To prevent him -from deceiving himself, and believing he has repented -when he has not, it is necessary to show -him what are the signs of a sincere repentance; and -when the priest finds the penitent as he ought to -be, then in virtue of the power given by Christ to -his ministers, they absolve him from his sins.—In -answer to what he said, I told him that I considered -it to be the duty of man to confess his sins unto -God, as it is with him alone we have to do, and -not with one another; and that the Scripture assures -us, that if we humbly and sincerely confess our sins -unto him, and beg forgiveness through the Lord -Jesus Christ, we shall obtain the mercy we ask for. I -then said, that I believed none could forgive sins but -God only; and that as to the power given to the -apostle Peter, and also to the other apostles to forgive -the sins of men or to retain them, I conceived -it to be a power of doing this only in a certain way, -namely, in the way corresponding to the instructions -which they had received from their divine Master.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_133"></a>[133]</span> -I illustrated this by the case of an ambassador -sent by his sovereign with terms of peace to a -neighbouring prince. The Ambassador, I said, is -authorized to make peace between the two nations, -that is, to put an end to the war or to continue it. -He is not, however, at liberty to do this in any -way he chooses, but only in that way which the -instructions of his sovereign authorize. So was -it, I continued, with the ambassadors whom the -Lord Jesus sent into the world; they were sent to -proclaim and to celebrate a peace between God -and man, but they were to do so only in one way, -that is, in the way prescribed to them, and of which, -I observed, we shall presently speak. As to the superiority -of the Apostle Peter, said I, to which you -refer, or to speak more properly, the superior honour -conferred upon him, it is easy to see in what it consisted, -and how far it extended. To him were promised -the keys of the kingdom of heaven, and also -the power of remitting and retaining sins; this latter -power was also conferred upon the other Apostles, so -that the difference, or the superior honour conferred -upon Peter, consisted in having the keys put into -his hands. Keys are for the unlocking of doors, that -a free entrance may be had to a place inaccessible -before the gates were opened. Now, said I, the -Apostle Peter was honoured by his Lord, to open -the gates of the kingdom of heaven, in the first -place unto the Jews, and which he accordingly did -in his sermon on the day of Pentecost, and by<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_134"></a>[134]</span> -which means three thousand entered the church of -God at one rush. The same individual was afterwards -honoured <em>to open the door</em> of faith unto the -Gentiles, by a special commission from heaven to -that effect. Having thus opened the gates of the -kingdom of heaven unto the Jews, and also unto -the Gentiles, there was no farther use for these keys. -The Apostles of our Lord, in regard to authority in the -church, were exactly upon a level, none was superior -and none was inferior. And now, I continued, with -regard to what we were speaking of before, namely, -the forgiveness of sins, I conceive the Apostles could -do it only by making known the message of peace -and reconciliation to their fellow sinners, and by declaring, -in the name of their Master, to those who -believed their testimony, the remission of sins consequent -upon their belief; and on the other hand, -they retained the sins of men, by declaring unto -those who disbelieved their testimony, that the -wrath of God remained upon them. Further, I -said, regarding the successors of the Apostles, I -conceived that strictly speaking they had none, nor -were there any required. In their life time they -exercised their authority, and fulfilled their commission -in the way I have stated. And knowing -that they were not to continue long upon the earth, -and being desirous that these sacred truths which -they preached into men should always be held in -remembrance, they committed them to writing, and -these writings, through the blessing of God, remain<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_135"></a>[135]</span> -unto this day. The Apostles, therefore, have made -their own writings their successors, and thus, -through them, they continue still to speak to mankind; -they still publish the message of reconciliation, -and whose sins soever <em>they</em> remit, they are remitted, -and whose soever sins <em>they</em> retain, they are retained. -I remarked a little before, I continued, that it was -at their peril that the Apostles acted in any other -way in the forgiving and retaining of sins, and I -now add, that it is at the peril of men to receive -the remission of sins in any other way than in that -which the Apostles taught. The great and eventful -day that awaits us all, will declare on what authority -and foundation we have enjoyed peace in -this weighty affair. The precious stones, the gold -and the silver will stand the fire which is to try -them, but the wood, the hay, and the stubble shall -be burned up.</p> - -<p>When I had finished the observations which -I have now mentioned, my friend took his turn -to speak, and stated his mind upon these topics -with great clearness and eloquence to the following -effect:—My dear Sir, in regard to the explanation -of the passage on which you have now given your -opinion, and also with regard to the explanation -of the Scriptures in general, I conceive our best -and surest plan is to have recourse to the uniform -explanation and judgment of the church. If -every one is at liberty to form his own opinion -of the meaning of Scripture, there will be nearly<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_136"></a>[136]</span> -as many opinions as there are individuals. Witness -the divisions which exist among the Protestants, -in consequence of this liberty which they -take of explaining the Scripture, every one as -appears best to him. One believes a certain thing, -another denies it, and a third believes something -different from both. Every truth in the Scripture -has thus been defended and opposed, and torn in -pieces by this principle, of every one explaining -according to his own judgment and fancy. Under -these circumstances, what a consolation it is to have -an authority to which we can in all cases recur, -and in whose decision we can rest fully satisfied. -This authority is <em>the church</em>,—which Jesus Christ -has invested with full power on all these points. -In consequence of this, the noble truths of our -religion continue as they were in the beginning. -The judgment of the church has never varied upon -them as it has done among the Protestants, neither -can it vary. We have the promise of Jesus Christ -that he will be with his church to the end of the -world, and that whatsoever shall be bound by its -judgment upon earth, shall be bound also in heaven, -and that whatsoever shall be loosed by it on -earth, shall be loosed in heaven. My dear friend, -here is our foundation, here is our authority and -consolation. The Catholic church has continued -since the days of the Apostles and has had an uninterrupted -succession of Bishops, from St. Peter -until the present day. The Protestants cannot<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_137"></a>[137]</span> -plead such a succession. They are but a sect -which left the church a century or two ago, and -still occupy a small portion of the world; whereas -the Catholic church, descending from the Apostles, -has spread on every side, and its doctrines have -continued pure and uncorrupted from the beginning -until now, yea, and they will continue so until -the end of the world, for Jesus Christ has promised -it. Here, my friend, is firm footing, and all else, -be assured, is quicksand and uncertainty. I was -born a Catholic, and I adhere to the religion of my -country, and in which I was educated. It is not, -however, from the circumstance of being brought -up in this religion that I now adhere to it. No, -Sir, on the contrary, when I came of age I began -to entertain doubts about our religion. Upon this, -I set myself to examine the subject with diligence -and attention, and the result was a thorough persuasion -of its firm and unalterable foundation, and -of the beauty and grandeur of the structure. I look -upon the Catholic religion, therefore, with great delight -and confidence. It appears to me like a great -and majestic river running through an extensive continent. -On one hand it makes its way, tumbling -over rocks, yet uninterrupted in its course by such -impediments; again, it meets in its course with -shelves and dykes, and after being retarded a little -by these hindrances it breaks its way over, and then -holds its noble and majestic course until it reaches -the ocean, enriching and beautifying every place<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_138"></a>[138]</span> -through which it flows. Such is our religion, and -I clasp it to my bosom and esteem it my best and -only treasure.</p> - -<p>When he had finished, I observed to him, that -the plan of the Church explaining all doubts and -difficulties regarding the meaning of every part of -Scripture, and of our resting in that decision, had -the appearance of possessing many advantages. -How desirable is it that we should be able to set -our minds at rest on subjects of such importance, -and wherein a mistake or an error might be attended -with very serious consequences. But there -appears to me, I said, a great difficulty to be got -over, before we can allow our minds to enjoy the -ease and confidence referred to, by resting in an -infallible interpreter. The difficulty I speak of -is this: How shall I know that the church has -indeed the authority you speak of? If I were -fully satisfied that the church possesses this authority, -I would, I assure you, fully confide in it. -You remember that, in a former conversation, you -promised to prove your positions regarding the Catholic -Church with evidence as satisfactory as the -proof, that the three interior angles of a triangle -are equal to two right angles. Now, I continued -to observe, I cannot see evidence for believing that -the church has the power in question, and I cannot -receive it as a doctrine until I be convinced. -On what then do you build this doctrine?</p> - -<p>I build this doctrine, said he, in the first place,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_139"></a>[139]</span> -on the promises of Jesus Christ to his church, which -are these: “whose sins soever ye remit, they are -remitted, and whose soever sins ye retain they -are retained; whatsoever ye shall bind on earth -shall be bound in heaven; and again, I will be -with you always even unto the end of the world.” -In the second place, said he, from the consideration -that the promises of Jesus to his church, must -necessarily have been fulfilled, I maintain that the -church has been guided by the Spirit in the manner -I have stated, and in consequence thereof, -she has held the same doctrine from the days of -the Apostles until the present time.</p> - -<p>I differ from you, I replied, regarding the meaning -and application of the passages you have quoted -from the Scriptures. But as you will have the church -to explain them, and as the church does actually -explain them as you have stated, we cannot therefore -meet each other here, on open ground. -Let us then pass on to the other fundamental -principle which you hold, namely, the fulfilling -of this promise in the way you have explained it. -How then do you prove to me, that the church has -never varied in her doctrines?—I prove, said he, -the constancy and stability of the church by the -uniform voice of ecclesiastical writers, from the -days of the Apostles until now. No sooner did -any pastor or bishop broach any new doctrine, than -his own flock, and the whole body of Christians, -every where raised the cry against him. Errors<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_140"></a>[140]</span> -now and then arose, continued he, and errors too of -great consequence, but in this manner they were publicly -reprobated, and the individuals who had erred -were thereby brought to repentance, or else expelled -the church.—As I wished to drive this subject -to its proper issue, and to fix upon the very -point upon which we differed, and which point it -was necessary to settle before we could proceed -farther with any advantage, I put this question to -him: Do you maintain that the writers upon ecclesiastical -affairs, from the days of the Apostles downward, -have all held the same opinions regarding -the interpretation of Scripture? Not exactly so, said -he, for there have been differences among them regarding -the interpretation of several passages of Scripture; -and he here instanced several opinions of St. -Augustine, St. Cyprian, &c. But so far, continued -he, as respects what are strictly and properly called -the <em>doctrines</em> of the church, I maintain that there -is no difference among them, although in points of -discipline they are not all agreed. You hold then, -said I, do you, that so far as the <em>doctrines</em> of the -Roman Catholic church are concerned, the writers -we speak of do not vary? I expected he would here -give an answer at once in the affirmative, but he withdrew -a little farther, and said that he would not -affirm to the question I had put, as to <em>all</em> that -these writers had said; but so far only, as they -had given their <em>testimony</em> to the doctrines in question -as existing among them, he wished to speak, and not<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_141"></a>[141]</span> -as to their own opinions of these doctrines. He here -stated some <em>opinions</em> of the fathers, and said, that so -far as they acted as <em>witnesses</em> to what existed among -them, and in the ages previous to their time, thus far -and no further were their writings to be considered -respecting the argument in hand. I here reminded -him by the way, of what I had before urged, but -which he did not concede, namely, that there were -a great variety of opinions among the Catholics as -well as among the Protestants. I stated, at the -same time, that I did not urge this particularly as -an objection to their system, but merely as a counterpart -to his objection to the Protestants, arising -from their differences. I then put the question: -Do you maintain then, that so far as ecclesiastical -writers have given testimony to the doctrines of the -church, they do not vary, nor can vary?—Yes, said -he, I do maintain that position.—I then replied, I -am glad we have come at length to this one definite -point, and I am glad, also, that you have excluded -the opinions of the writers on these subjects, and that -you rest solely on them as witnesses. I now see the -point you maintain, and here we will come to issue. -My answer, for the present, shall be short. This -position which you maintain, is a position which I -believe to be insupportable, and which, in consequence, -I deny. Here, then, let the subject for -the present rest; we have got a great length in -seeing the very line which divides us, and we have -now the matter free of mystery. It is reduced to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_142"></a>[142]</span> -a mere historical question. We shall, therefore, decide -it as such on some future occasion, when I shall -take in hand to prove that the church <em>has varied</em>.</p> - -<p>We have now seen, said I, the very point in -which we differ, let us also see where we agree. -I believe, said I, that all mankind are sinners, and -stand in need of a Saviour. I believe that God -pitied our race, and sent his only begotten Son to -seek and to save the lost. I believe that the Lord -Jesus Christ is the true Mediator and Saviour of -mankind, and that there is no other name under -heaven by which we can be saved. I do sincerely -believe, I continued, in the Lord Jesus Christ as -my Lord and my Redeemer; and, I trust, also that -I desire to know all his precepts and instructions, -and to conform my thoughts, and words, and -actions thereunto.—I then said to him, is not this -exactly what you believe?—He said it was so. -Well then, I replied, may not we look upon each -other as fellow disciples, and may not we each -expect, if we hold on, that the Lord will give unto -us both that crown of righteousness which he hath -promised to them that love him? He here seemed -to hesitate, and did not give a direct reply. You -see that I was here touching upon the point of -there being no salvation out of <em>their</em> church.—He -said that what I had stated regarding my faith was -well, but that there was something farther necessary, -and upon saying so, he seemed to digress a little, -or, at least, not to speak directly to the point in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_143"></a>[143]</span> -hand. My dear Sir, said I, pray let us settle this -point. Have the goodness to speak your mind -freely; speak out, what do I still want, what more -must I believe, than what I have stated, in order to -obtain eternal life. Did not the Lord Jesus himself -concede eternal life to those who believed what I -have told you in my belief? And did not the -Apostles, according to the power invested in them, -remit the sins of those who believed and acted in -the manner I have stated? He then said something -about the necessity of believing the church, -in order to salvation.—Can I not look for salvation -without this? said I.—Take care that you do not -put obstacles in the way to heaven, which the God -of our salvation has not put. Strait is the gate, -and narrow is the way which leadeth unto life, -pray then, do not with stumbling blocks fill up this -narrow way. Let the Lord Jesus and his Apostles -guide us in this, and in all matters that concern the -kingdom of God.</p> - -<p>Upon arriving here we found our time was gone, -and that we had been upwards of two hours in a -very close conversation. As my friend could stop -no longer, we broke up our conversation at this -point, he still stating it as necessary to salvation, -that I should believe the church. When we thus -dropped our disputation, he arose, and as I accompanied -him out, he threw his arms around me, and -said, “We shall yet, I trust, be united together, -and companions in our Lord Jesus Christ.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_144"></a>[144]</span></p> - -<p>I have lengthened my account of this interview, -perhaps unnecessarily, and it may be till I have -tired you. By way of excuse, I would say that I -felt real interest in the conversation, and my endeavour -has been to make you participate with me, -as I believe what interests and pleases one of us is -not unpleasing, nor without interest, to the other. -It often happens, however, that what interests us -in a conversation or narrative loses its effect upon -others by the imperfect way in which we repeat it. -In the present instance, this is very likely the -case, but I leave you to judge.</p> - -<p>I have only to remark, before I conclude, that -the point in dispute between us is now reduced to -narrow limits; and it was my main endeavour to -bring it to this bearing, nor was he averse to it. -He is, as I said at the outset, a man of good -talents, and reasons clearly. I do not promise to -you that we shall be able to set the subject at rest -in our next conference, notwithstanding all the -accuracy and honesty of my good friend. You -know there are many things which prevent such an -anticipation. I shall, however, endeavour to prove -to him, in the first place, that the church <em>at</em> Rome, -and other churches in the days of the Apostles, -held the doctrines and followed the practices which -are contained in the New Testament. With these -doctrines I shall then compare the doctrines of the -church of Rome in the present day; and if I can -show a disparity between them, I think impartiality<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_145"></a>[145]</span> -should give the judgment in my favour, even without -entering upon ecclesiastical history; as I shall -thus have proved that the church <em>has varied</em>, and -hence that those passages he referred to, must be -misinterpreted by Romish writers, and that they -do not apply to their church, whose infallibility -must, of course, fall to the ground, agreeably to -the principles stated in the preceding conversation. -Should, however, justice not speak out in my -favour, I shall pass on to show, from ecclesiastical -writers, that the doctrines of the Church of Rome -differ in the present day from what they were in the -first and second centuries, and even later. By this -means I hope to arrive at the same conclusion, as -in the way before mentioned, and thus to disprove -my friend’s position of the church never having -varied, by the very means by which he maintains it. -This I conceive, is the only way of managing the -controversy between the Catholic and the Protestant. -Until you settle this point about the authority -of the church, you can do nothing effectually. -If you cite, for instance, a passage of -Scripture to disprove any one of the doctrines of -the Catholic church, you are met immediately with -the interpretation which the church puts upon that -passage, and there is an end of it. If you should -allege that the passage plainly and evidently means -something very different from each interpretation, -then you are reminded that our judgement is weak<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_146"></a>[146]</span> -and erring, and that the judgment of the church is -infallible. So that to whatever hand you turn, -you never can get out of this circle. It is therefore -necessary to demolish this outwork entirely. -What I have said of course applies chiefly to the -mode of reasoning with those who are thorough-paced -in their theological arguments; but with -regard to others, you can attack them in any particular -part, and carry your argument forward on -the principles of common sense, and by the doctrines -of Scripture taken in their plain and obvious -meaning.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 1st June, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>In the conclusion of my letter of the 1st of March, -I noticed that this city had been taken possession -of by the Spanish army. It is still in their possession, -and there does not appear, at present, any immediate -prospect of a change in this respect. You -will not expect from me political news under present -circumstances, and I pass on to note what little -affairs have come under my observation during -these two or three months past, respecting that -kingdom which cannot be moved by the strifes of -men, nor the clangour of war.</p> - -<p>My letter to Mr. H. of 25th March would inform -you of the protection which the Spanish General<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_147"></a>[147]</span> -granted to our schools. In consequence of that -encouragement, I resolved to remain her some -time longer, in order to put our establishment upon -as sure a footing as possible. Nothing material -occurred in our school upon the arrival of the -Spaniards, except the losing of some of our scholars. -The cause of this was the dread their parents were -in, lest their children should be seized on their -way to and from the school by the recruiting parties, -who not infrequently take some of the bigger boys -as they find them in the street, in order to make -drummers of them. Our number, in consequence -of this, is less than it was about three months ago. -In these times, when party spirit runs high, we -endeavour in our school to maintain a strict neutrality -in words and actions. We found some -difficulty during the first days, after our change of -rulers, to establish this neutrality among the children -themselves. They would, from time to time, -be forming themselves into sides, and calling each -other respectively Patriots and Goths. We have -in the school, children whose parents have taken -opposite sides in this contest, and as might naturally -be expected, the children on the one hand -and on the other have imbibed the sentiments of -their parents. We succeeded at length in putting -an end to these strifes among the children, and -we now all live in peace and unity. The government -holds out to us no immediate encouragement,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_148"></a>[148]</span> -and on the other hand, it never in any shape interferes -with our operations. On the whole, this -school is going on very well. The children are -making progress in their learning, and advancing -in moral dignity; and some are lisping out, and -some are reading with readiness, the gracious -words which proceeded out of the mouth of our -blessed Saviour, as they were taken down by the -Holy Spirit. I may add, that we are not losing -the estimation of our friends here, but on the contrary, -if I mistake not, we are gaining more friends -in both parties, and making advances in public confidence.</p> - -<p>About three weeks ago I was on the eve of -leaving this place, and had, as on a former occasion, -every thing packed up with that intention. -I had indeed resolved to sail for Guayaquil with -the first ship, and was inquiring for a passage. My -reasons for doing so were quite solid. My salary, -as I suppose you know, is paid by the government. -Under present circumstances, the payment -of the troops is the first thing attended to, and to -procure funds sufficient for this purpose, requires -great exertions in the present exhausted state of -this place. To obtain this supply, all the ordinary -sources of revenue are laid hold of, and pretty -heavy contributions also are laid on the inhabitants -to make up deficiencies. This being the case, -there was no prospect of my obtaining any supplies,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_149"></a>[149]</span> -more especially as persons in the immediate employ -of the government, and who have salaries -assigned them, could obtain nothing. To make -certain, however, I made application, and found -it impossible to obtain any thing, on account -of the circumstances mentioned. As you know -I have no supplies but what my own hands provide -me with, it became an imperative duty to -remove when my usual resources were dried up. -These were my reasons for going, and I suppose -you will consider them sufficient, especially if you -take into consideration the high price of all kinds -of provisions in this city. Sugar for instance, -which grows and is manufactured within a few -miles of the city, is now selling at twenty-pence -and two shillings the pound.</p> - -<p>Being ready for setting off, as above mentioned, -and having given notice to the children -to that effect, I waited only till the following -day to send my luggage down to Callao, and to -follow it immediately. Whilst I was thus prepared, -my good friend the clergyman, whom I have frequently -mentioned in my former letters, called -upon me, and said that he believed I would not -go away yet, notwithstanding all my preparations. -I smiled at what he said, and replied, that my -going appeared very certain and very near too, -for I intended to send my luggage to Callao -next morning.—Well, I do not think you will<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_150"></a>[150]</span> -go away for all that, said he.—Upon my asking -him what reasons he had for saying so, he stated, -that he had been speaking with some of the parents -of the children, and that they had expressed to him -their concern at my going, and said they would -very willingly contribute what they could, and -would speak to some others who had children in -the school, and that they hoped by that means -something might be raised, which might, in a great -measure, remove the reasons I had stated for my -going. Whilst my friend and I were talking to -this effect, a person came in who had a son at -school, and repeated the same things. I replied, -that I felt very much obliged by the confidence -they reposed in me, and for their friendly interference -for my continuance in this place. I noticed -also that I had candidly stated my reasons -for going away at this time, and that though -they had kindly proposed a way of removing these -difficulties, yet I felt a delicacy in calling on the -parents of the children on my own behalf. They replied -to this by saying that they would speak to some -of their friends upon the subject, and that in fact -they had spoken to some of those of most influence -who were very cordial and anxious in the matter; -and my friend the clergyman proposed to write -notes to others of the parents, in his own name, to -remove any delicacies I might have as to the application. -Upon seeing so much interest taken in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_151"></a>[151]</span> -this matter, I recognized the hand of God in it, -and agreed to their proposal. Their plan has been -carried into effect, and this has the Lord opened, -as it were, a window in heaven, and let down before -me a sheet full of supplies. In this same -manner, I may say, has the Lord provided for me -during the years of my pilgrimage in this foreign -land. He has set a table before me, he has -anointed my head with oil, he has made my cup -to run over. Surely goodness and mercy will -follow me all the days of my life, and O may -I dwell in the house of the Lord for ever.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 15th July, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>Your very acceptable favour of 6th January -last, came safely into my hands on the 22d ultimo, -and I have now the pleasure of writing you a few -lines in reply. Your notice of the progress of -Bible Societies in France is very interesting, and -it is not less so what you mention regarding the -circulation of the Holy Scriptures in Egypt, and in -Jerusalem, the city of the great King. To whatever -quarter we turn our eyes, we behold the word -of God silently making its way into the hands of -men of every nation and of every language, saying -unto all, Fear God, and give glory to his name, -for the day of his merciful visitation is come. The<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_152"></a>[152]</span> -strains of the Bible Society remind us of the song -of the heavenly messengers upon their announcing -the Advent of our great Deliverer. The language -of both is, “Glory to God in the highest, and on -earth, peace, good will towards men.”</p> - -<p>It affords me much satisfaction to observe the -interest which the Society takes on behalf of South -America, and I hope the day is coming when we -shall be more sensible of your favours to us, and -when we shall join together in grateful acknowledgment -of your godly benevolence. Have the -goodness to convey my sincere thanks to the Committee, -for the readiness with which they have acceded -to my request respecting the translating and -printing of a part of the Holy Scriptures into the -ancient Peruvian tongue. I thought I should, by -this time, have been able to give you a very favourable -account of the progress of this work, but -we are subject here to sad vicissitudes, for war -rages in the land, and of late the sword has reached -unto our very soul. How long we shall be visited -with this scourge I cannot tell. The Judge of all -the earth will do right, and it is our duty to submit -to his holy will.</p> - -<p>The translation of the whole of the New Testament -into the Peruvian language was finished -about two months ago. The Gospel by Luke has -been very carefully revised and corrected by four -individuals, one of whom is a Clergyman, another -is a Theological Tutor in one of the colleges of this<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_153"></a>[153]</span> -city, and the other two are of the medical profession. -These four, along with the gentleman who -made the translation, went over this gospel verse -by verse, with great care. The present corrected -version, therefore, is the joint work of <em>five</em> persons, -and I trust it may be relied on with some confidence. -It has not yet been put to the press, for -we have not had a printing press in Lima during -these four months past. There are two indifferent -ones in Callao, one of them in the castle and the -other under its guns, but I have not yet been able -to ascertain, since I received your letter, whether -any thing can be done at these or not. In my next -I shall inform you more particularly upon this subject, -and if the printing shall be then begun, I shall -forward you a copy of the first sheet.</p> - -<p>In my letter to Mr. Ronneberg of 29th March -last, I noticed the safe arrival of the Grecian in -Callao, bringing the 2,500 Spanish New Testaments -addressed to me, and the 1,592 addressed to Mr. -Lynch. Of the six boxes which came to me, I have -sent two to Guatemala by a favourable opportunity -which offered. I have also sent one to Arequipa, -and one to Truxillo, and two yet remain on hand. -A few weeks ago I received from Captain Robson, -of the Sesostris, two boxes of New Testaments, -(Paris edition,) containing about 500 each. These -he received, I believe, from the Merchants’ Bible Society, -or from some other of the Societies in London.</p> - -<p>In the letter already referred to, I noticed what<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_154"></a>[154]</span> -had taken place with regard to 50 New Testaments, -which I sent to Truxillo some time ago. -I mentioned the impossibility of getting them conveyed -to Truxillo under the circumstances then -existing in that place, and that in consequence -they were carried to Guayaquil. I have since -received a very pleasing letter regarding their reception -in that place, of which the following is an -extract.</p> - -<p>“It is with the utmost pleasure I sit down to -write these few lines to you, to inform you of the -hunger and thirst after the word of God in this -part of the world. You may remember, that when -I last left Lima you gave me a box containing -Tracts and Testaments, for Dr. O’Donovan in -Truxillo, but from the then existing state of the -country it was out of my power to forward the -above mentioned box to Truxillo, and as we were -not allowed to enter that port, we were consequently -obliged to proceed to Guayaquil. I -wrote you from that place, saying, that I was -bound for the coast of Mexico, but as affairs would -not permit it, I made a trading voyage to Jipijapi, -Monte Cristi, and the Bay of Caracas. But before -leaving Guayaquil some one got knowledge -of my having these Testaments, and the demand -was so great, that it was almost out of my power to -save any of them, although it was my intention to -do so, for the other above mentioned parts; and as -I had no likely opportunity of forwarding them to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_155"></a>[155]</span> -Mr. O’Donovan, I thought it best to circulate -them, and not to let such a treasure lie hid in darkness; -and I am convinced that it is in general considered -as a treasure; for with pleasure have I -seen, in passing through the streets of Guayaquil, -not once or twice, but mostly every day, the shopkeepers, -and the poor people who have stalls, read -in the blessed Gospel of our Lord and Saviour -Jesus Christ. If I had had ten times as many, I am -persuaded I could have sold them all. On my -arrival in this port, (Monte Cristi, latitude 3° -south) I had no Testaments, but a few tracts, and -some of the instructions of the Lancasterian system -of teaching; I gave the latter to different school-masters, -and likewise a few tracts along with them. -A day or two after it was known that I had tracts -on board, it was astonishing, but at the same time -pleasing, to see both old and young coming after me -in the street, and to where I lived, requesting me -either to sell or give them one of each kind. -There was one tract in particular, which, to my -knowledge, was sent twenty leagues to a curate, -an acquaintance of mine, and on my going to some -of the inland towns, which I had occasion at times -to do, there was always particular inquiry for -Tracts and New Testaments. I had once, about -four years ago, distributed a few Testaments in -Monte Cristi, one or two of which I saw this time. -Such is the thirst after the word of God, that the -Governor and two or three more, requested me as a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_156"></a>[156]</span> -particular favour, that I would leave a New Testament -I had for my own use, until I should return, -and begged and even offered money, so that I -would bring either the New Testament or the -whole Bible on my return. The Governor, after -reading the rules of the Lancasterian plan of teaching, -gave orders in my presence to some of the -school-masters to conform to some of the rules as -near as they could. He seems to be a young man -very much inclined to forward any thing that tends -to promote the education of youth. At this moment -I am surrounded with children requesting -tracts, but as my stock is small, I am very particular -to whom I give them, making every one -read a sentence or two before they get a tract.—It -gives me infinite pleasure to be thus employed in -distributing the word of God to those that hunger -and thirst after righteousness; and after the fatigues -of the day, I feel refreshed to be thus employed.”</p> - -<p>The information contained in the above extract -is very interesting, and I trust many other instances -will be witnessed upon this continent, of a sincere -desire to possess, and to read the Holy Scriptures. -I shall take care to seize the first opportunity of -sending a supply of New Testaments to Guayaquil -and parts adjacent. It often occurs to me that it -might prove very useful to make journeys through -various parts of this country, in order to dispose of -the Scriptures to the best advantage, and to the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_157"></a>[157]</span> -greatest extent possible. I felt much inclined to -employ a person in whom I have confidence, in -such journies, but did not like to do so at your -expense without orders, and my own funds at -present cannot afford it.—I have as yet received -no answer to my letter to the Viceroy, and am -quite uncertain as to the time I remain here. I -had almost forgot to mention to you the safe arrival -of the parcel containing the Brief View, in Spanish. -Many copies of this have already been circulated, -and they have produced a good effect.</p> - -<p>I conclude, my dear Sir, by praying that an -abundant measure of the Holy Spirit may be -poured out upon yourself, and upon all your associates.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Lima, 1st September, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>Many feelings, my dear friend, rush upon my -mind on the present occasion. I shall, at once, -give you to understand something of the number -and the nature of these, by telling you,—that -I have just now shut up my house, have taken -leave of the children and of several warm friends, -and go down immediately to Callao, to embark for -Truxillo and Guayaquil; and from the latter place -I intend to go to Bogotá; and thence onward from -one place to another, until perhaps, and if the Lord -will, I shall see you face to face. In consequence of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_158"></a>[158]</span> -these things, as you may easily suppose, I have my -mind full of past, and of present, and of future objects. -I think of my parting from you more than six -years ago; I think of the wonderful way by which -the Lord has preserved me, and led me, and blessed -me in this foreign land; I think of the goodness of -God in having allowed me to drop a seed here and -a seed there in this continent, which appears a -world of itself; I think of the affectionate parting -I have this day had with many warm friends, and -who are mostly priests, and of their sincere and -earnest entreaties for my speedy return to them; -and further, I think of the prospect of sowing the -word of God on my journey,—of the pleasure, if -such be the will of our Saviour, of seeing again -all my dear brethren and friends in England,—of -spending a few months with you in endeavours -to forward the cause of our Redeemer in South -America; and finally, I think of parting from you -once more, and of returning again to this quarter -of the world, to spend in it the remaining days of my -life in seeking its welfare.</p> - -<p>It is time to tell you the immediate cause of -these projected movements. I say the <em>immediate</em> -cause, for I suppose you know that these are not -new arrangements. The reason, then, of my setting -off at the present time is, because I conceive it the -most favourable time I am likely to have of reducing -these arrangements to practice. You know -how the war rages here, and how it defeats every<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_159"></a>[159]</span> -attempt to forward the education of youth, and the -promoting of general improvement. What I have -said applies to Peru in general, but more particularly -to this city, where the sword has truly reached -to the heart. We are here, I may say, in a beseiged -city, having the enemy on all sides. Guerilla -parties surround the city by land, and have -several times come in at night, and carried off -people and property; and on the other hand the -port of Callao is actually blockaded by the Peruvian -squadron under Admiral Guise. The distress -which prevails in this city, in consequence of every -thing being thus at a stand, is <em>very great</em>, and it -is augmented by heavy contributions. This, perhaps, -in former times, was, without exception, -the richest city in the world, but <em>now</em>, I may say -with equal certainty, that it is the poorest. The -luxury and dissipation which prevailed, in consequence -of this abundance of wealth, may be -easily imagined; and I have often thought upon -that passage in the 18th chapter of the Revelation, -and have seen it applied, I think, to our case, -“How much she hath glorified herself, and lived -deliciously, so much torment and sorrow give -her.”</p> - -<p>Until, therefore, some change take place here, -nothing more can be done than has already been -done. Our school goes on, and I may say, with as -much prosperity as could be expected under the -circumstances above mentioned. The number of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_160"></a>[160]</span> -scholars has decreased from 230 to about 200. -There are two causes for this decrease; the one is, -that the bigger boys are afraid to go out lest they -should be taken up by the recruiting parties; and -the other is, the real poverty which exists, and -which prevents many parents from sending their -children, as they are unable to procure them shoes -and clothes to enable them to appear decently -among others. Whilst these two causes exist, the -number may diminish, perhaps, still more, but the -school will continue to maintain itself, and to support -its character, I expect, in the progress of those -who attend. There are two masters in it, who are -well instructed in the plan, and the whole is under -the direction of my good friend, the clergyman, of -whom I have often spoken to you. What I have -said applies to the model or central school. There -is also another school in the city on the same plan, -with about eighty scholars, which, I hope, will also -continue to go on well, though subject, of course, -to the same disadvantages.</p> - -<p>I have thought, then, that I was called upon to -seize this time as the most suitable for visiting -other parts of this Continent, and for the objects I -have in England. My principal business upon my -journey will be the circulation of the Scriptures in -the different places I may visit, and I hope that -something may be done in this way, so as to make -my journey not unprofitable. Of my progress on -my road, and in my objects, I shall endeavour to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_161"></a>[161]</span> -inform you from time to time. I shall only farther -observe, in regard to my intentions, that my route, -&c. will be a good deal determined by the circumstances -which may occur in the way by which the -Lord may lead me.</p> - -<p>These movements have, I trust, been entered -upon in the fear of God, and after mature deliberation, -and fervent supplication to the Father of -lights, who has promised to guide in judgment those -who seek his face in sincerity.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Guayaquil, 5th October, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>I arrived in this place a few days ago, and -seize the earliest opportunity to state to you the -cause of my being here. You already know that -the single object which I have in view in South -America, is the promoting of the kingdom of our -Lord Jesus Christ. There are, of course, various -ways of doing this, and I have thought it best to -allow myself to be guided in the manner of doing -it, by the various circumstances and occasions -which the providence of God opens up to me -from time to time. The two things to which I -have more particularly given my attention all -along are, the education of youth, and the circulation -of the Holy Scriptures. In regard to -the latter, with which you are more immediately -connected, I have stated to the Society, at different<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_162"></a>[162]</span> -times, my desire of forwarding their work in this -quarter, in every way which lies in my power. -I have also informed the Society, on various occasions, -as to the progress of their work in this -continent. It has afforded me much satisfaction to -observe the interest taken by you all for supplying -South America with the sacred volume, and to read -the repeated assurances you have communicated -to me of your desire to carry forward this object -in the most extensive and effectual way possible. -The confidence I reposed in the Society in regard -to this country, induced me to commence the -translation of the New Testament on your account -into the Quichua, or ancient language of Peru, -and the answer I received from you some time -ago, has shown me that I was not mistaken in -regard to your views.</p> - -<p>The same confidence as to the views of the -Society, and a hope of being able to do something -in the way of circulating the word of God, in places -not yet visited, or but very partially, by this -messenger of peace, has induced me to come to -this city at the present time. It is my intention -to set out from this place in two or three days for -Bogotá, the capital of Colombia. In my way -I shall pass through Riobamba, Ambato, Tacunga, -Quito, and Popayan, all of which are populous -cities, and where I expect to sell a considerable -number of copies of the Spanish New Testaments.</p> - -<p>The present state of the war in Lima renders<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_163"></a>[163]</span> -abortive every attempt to forward education there, -and very little can be done in the circulation of -the Scriptures by sale, on account of the very -great pressure of the war, which has reduced the -city to much distress. Under these circumstances, -I thought the best time I could find for visiting -the quarters above mentioned, and perhaps for -visiting my native land, was the present. I set -out then from Lima with this intention, and to -perform the part of an agent of the British and -Foreign Bible Society. I am not sure, but I may -feel myself under the necessity of petitioning you for -my <em>travelling expenses</em>. I never intended to charge -you for any services I might be honoured in doing -for your Society, if possible to avoid it; but the -low state of my funds at present, on account of -the war here, may urge me to do what otherwise -I should not have done. I mention this at present, -only in case it should be necessary. The -prosperous turn the war has lately taken in Peru, -encourages me to hope that what is due to me by the -government of that country will be paid in due -time, and in that case my little services shall cost -you nothing.</p> - -<p>I left Lima on the 5th ultimo, and at that time -the supply of New Testaments, and of the four books -of the Old Testament, printed with a small type, -of which you wrote me, had not arrived. I had -anxiously looked for their arrival for some weeks -before my coming away, as by the date of your<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_164"></a>[164]</span> -letter, I thought there was sufficient time for their -reaching that place. I was very sorry in not -having been furnished with this supply before -entering upon my present journey, as I think the -volumes printed with the small type would have -been very acceptable, and the whole Bible also -would have been equally so, as it has been often -sought for. I have just one Bible with me to show -as I go along, by way of specimen, in order to -incite curiosity, and a desire to possess it, when -it may be supplied to all those places. This copy -I bought in Lima for this express purpose, and -hope it will serve the end in view. I have brought -about 800 New Testaments with me, and in this -place I have found the supply you sent by the -Grecian to Mr. Lynch, and which I thought had -gone to Chile. I am glad at finding these here, -as it enables me to send a quantity to Guatemala -by an opportunity which offers from this -place in a day or two. The rest I will dispose -of otherwise. I mentioned to you some time ago, -that I had sent two boxes to Guatemala of those -which came to me by the Grecian. I have however -learned, that the vessel in which they were -sent had changed her destination, and that they -have not yet arrived at that place. The accidental -finding, in this place, the cases brought by -the Grecian, enables me now to supply this deficiency, -and also to send by the same person a -supply to California. As to the boxes formerly<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_165"></a>[165]</span> -sent, though they did not arrive at the destination -intended, I entertain no doubt of their safety, and -of their being profitably disposed of somewhere, -and of which I expect to hear in due time.</p> - -<p>I shall now state to you what has occurred in -the part of my journey already performed. The -first object I had in view, was to visit Truxillo, -where I expected to find my good friends who -take so much interest in the Peruvian translation -of the New Testament, and who had laboured -so diligently to accomplish it. I accordingly embarked -on board a vessel bound for that place, -and where I safely arrived in due time. I was -sadly disappointed in not finding my friends there -as I expected. Not one of them was to be found, -nor could I ascertain with certainty where they -were, but heard that one had been seen going to -one place and another to another. The suddenness -of their leaving Lima prevented us from making -any arrangements about our translation, and we -had not even time to bid each other adieu. The -abruptness of our parting, rendered more severe -my disappointment in not finding them in Truxillo, -where I intended to make arrangements with -them for carrying forward thin work during my -absence. I had brought from Lima the manuscript -of the whole New Testament in the Quichua -language, together with the Gospel of Luke, -thoroughly revised and prepared for the press. I -mentioned to you in my last, that I would endeavour<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_166"></a>[166]</span> -to carry your resolution into effect regarding the -printing of 1,000 copies of this revised part. I -mentioned also that all the printing presses had -been removed from Lima, but that two were to -be found in Callao, and that I would ascertain -whether the work in question could be done there. -Upon enquiry, I found it could not. In consequence -of this, I wished to get the Gospel of -Luke printed in Truxillo, and for that end carried -the MS. to that place, that it might be carried -through the press there. And in regard to the -MS. of the other parts of the New Testament, -I expected that our friends, in their exile, might -go on revising and correcting it. All these plans, -as you see, have been frustrated. I therefore carefully -packed up the whole MS. and addressing it -to one of our translators, gave it into the hands -of an English gentleman going to Lima, to be -delivered according to the address, when the expulsion -of the Spaniards from Lima (which is -soon expected) would enable our friends to return. -I also wrote a few lines explaining my wish regarding -the revising of the MS., and regarding -the printing of the part already revised. The -English gentleman of whom I have spoken, has -kindly offered to advance all the money that may -be necessary for carrying this into effect. From -these arrangements I expect that the work will -be set agoing again in the course of two, or at -most three months from this date; for according<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_167"></a>[167]</span> -to the <em>present</em> aspect of the war, the Spaniards -will not be able to continue longer in possession -of Lima, although they may, and probably -will, retain the fortresses of Callao till a later -period.</p> - -<p>Having touched upon this subject of the Spanish -cause here, I cannot forbear mentioning to you the -singular interposition of Providence on behalf of -the cause of liberty in this quarter. On the 6th -of August last the two armies came in sight of -each other at a place called Junin, between Pasco -and Tarma. The consequence was, that a battle -took place between the cavalry of the two parties. -There were 1,200 of the Spaniards and 800 of the -Patriots. An eye witness says, “The concussion -was tremendous, as they came up to each other at -full gallop. In a quarter of an hour, upwards of -400 men lay dead upon the field, more than three-fourths -of whom were Royalists. All this havoc -and slaughter was caused by the lance and sword, -principally by the former. Not a shot of any -description, was fired.” In a short time victory -begin visibly to declare for the Spaniards, and the -General at the head of the patriot cavalry was -made prisoner. At this critical moment, by some -scarcely explained movement, the Spaniards got -somehow into disorder, and began to give way. -This was followed up by the Patriots, and in -a very short time they obtained a complete victory. -The whole of the Spanish army was, in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_168"></a>[168]</span> -consequence of this defeat, struck with a panic, and -by forced marches endeavoured to get out of the -way of the enemy as fast as possible. Bolivar immediately -advanced, and the Spaniards continued -to flee before him with all speed. On the 22d -August, only 15 days after the battle, the advanced -guard of the patriot army entered Guamanga. -Five of the finest provinces of Peru thus fell into -their hands in the short period of about a fortnight. -The Spanish army has been sadly reduced and -dispirited by their rapid retreat, and the army of -Bolivar has increased in numbers and in strength. -I consider this to be <em>a deadly blow</em> to the Spanish -cause in this quarter of the world, from which I -think and hope they will never recover. With -this cause will terminate, I trust, the reign of -oppression and violence, of ignorance and fanaticism -in Peru, and by which it has been borne down -for these three hundred years. So perish all -tyranny and ignorance from the earth!</p> - -<p>I should perhaps beg your pardon for having -drawn your attention so long to the concerns of war -and of politics, as you are men of peace and of no -party, and your only occupation is speaking peace -to them who are far off and to them that are nigh. -Still, however, you will remember that the book -whose circulation we are engaged in, detains our -attention in many places with the account of wars -and revolutions. But you will say that all these -are related there merely from their being connected<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_169"></a>[169]</span> -with the grand moral and religious revolution of -the world through that great prophet who was to -come. This is certainly a right view of the -subject; and motives of a similar nature, I trust, -and not party nor malicious principles, have induced -me to detain you a moment upon the wars of this -quarter of the world. I firmly believe that the -deliverance of this country from bondage and -oppression, and the mental emancipation of its -inhabitants, depend upon the success of this revolution. -The Spaniards, as is well known, have -greatly impeded, not to say prohibited, the progress -of knowledge and of true religion in America. -It is not easy therefore, nor is it proper, to remain -indifferent as to the issue of this struggle.</p> - -<p>I now return to our work of peace, and to Truxillo. -I wrote the Society some time ago, of having -found a useful and zealous co-labourer in that city, -and that I had forwarded to him from Lima a -supply of New Testaments. At the first he met -with some difficulties, owing to the ecclesiastical -authorities of the place. These were at length -overcome, and he was allowed to commence the -sale of the Scriptures publicly. When he had -obtained leave to do so, he printed an advertisement, -and posted it up in the public places of the -town, intimating the sale. The consequence was, -that he had sold when I was there about 100 -copies. He had also written to his friends the Vicars -in the provincial towns, but he had not then, from<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_170"></a>[170]</span> -the shortness of the time, received the answers -to his letters. When these arrive, he expects several -orders for New Testaments to be sent to the -various towns in the department of Truxillo, which -contains a population of upwards of 300,000. In -addition to this mode of circulating the Scriptures, -my friend informed me that he was about to put -in practice a method of lending the New Testaments -in the different houses which he is in the -habit of visiting, and in others which he intends -to visit for that purpose. Our friend’s medical -duties give him a facility for carrying this into -practice. He intends to lend the New Testament -for a day, or for two or three days, as circumstances -may direct, and to call again for it -himself at the given time. Upon calling for it, -he says he will ask them if they wish to purchase -it, and if so, he will sell it at a price corresponding -to the circumstances of the individual; and if they -do not wish it, he will take it with him and lend -it to some other, to whom in turn he will put the -same question, and thus sell it or take it with him, -as circumstances require. You will easily see -that this way of doing will cost him a good deal -of labour and care, but he seems to count nothing -of these, if in this manner he may be the means -of circulating the word of God, and of drawing -the attention of the people around him, to its all-important -contents. As he makes all his rounds -on horseback, he will, I hope, be enabled fully<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_171"></a>[171]</span> -to verify his benevolent purpose. He showed me -a pair of saddle-bags, which he told me he had -got made for the very purpose of always carrying -about with him a supply of New Testaments. He -gave me one hundred dollars to account of sales, -which was rather more than what he had received.</p> - -<p>The next thing I have to notice in Truxillo, -is, I conceive, of some importance, and will prove, -I trust, the means of greatly extending the operations -and diffusing the blessings of the British and -Foreign Bible Society. What I refer to is, the -finding of an additional agent who takes a lively interest -in the diffusion of the Scriptures, and in every -other means by which his countrymen may be benefited. -The individual in question is a clergyman, -and a man of rank in that order. He is Vicar-general -to the army, and possesses a considerable -influence. His residence, at present, is at Moche, -a little village about four or five miles from Truxillo, -and of which place he is rector. This, however, -is only a temporary residence, during the occupation -of his home by the Spaniards, and from -which, in consequence, he was obliged to flee. The -place of his nativity and of his permanent residence -is in the province and near the city of Arequipa, -towards the southern extremity of Peru. It is this -circumstance in particular, that will render his -services valuable, as we have already an active -agent in Truxillo. He intends to return to his<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_172"></a>[172]</span> -native province as soon as the course of the war will -permit. Arequipa is in the centre of a populous -country, and he will have an extensive field of -operation. Another circumstance renders the acquisition -of this gentleman very valuable, and that -is his thorough knowledge of the Indian or Peruvian -language, which is very extensively spoken in -that quarter. To this I add another feature in his -character of yet more importance, which is, his -compassion for the oppressed and degraded state of -the indigenous population of Peru, and the lively -interest he takes in ameliorating their condition, by -his representations to the government upon the -subject, and by his personal labours. No individual -I have yet met with in these countries, has -offered himself so decidedly and so heartily to promote -the cause of your Society, as this gentleman; -and from all the circumstances I have mentioned, -you will see that his good will and his services -must be considered a great acquisition.</p> - -<p>I considered the time spent in visiting Truxillo -abundantly recompensed in meeting with this -fellow-labourer, and I found, in this circumstance, -some relief from the disappointment I had met with -in not finding there the friends I had expected. -My falling in too with that individual was perfectly -accidental, for I had no knowledge of such a -one being in that place. But then again we must -remember, that “all chance is but direction which -we cannot see.” Blessed be God who leadeth<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_173"></a>[173]</span> -us by ways <em>we</em> know not, but which <em>he</em> knows, -and which will lead us to the glorifying of his -name, when that is our object. I must not omit to -give you the name and address of our fellow-labourer. -It is “Dr. Don Manuel Fernandez de -Córdova, Vicario General del Ejército del Peru, y -Cura de Salamanca del Obispado de Arequipa.” -I have given you this address in Spanish to enable -you to write direct to our friend, should you feel -so inclined.</p> - -<p>I shall now leave Truxillo, but before I go on -board, shall just notice a little incident. Truxillo -is about six miles distant from Huanchaco, which -is the sea port town of that quarter. In going -down to this port, I happened to get a very bad -horse, which soon becoming restive, I was obliged -to leave it at a house upon the road, and to walk -down under a burning sun. After I had walked -more than half the way, a person came riding up -to me and offered me a horse, which of course I -accepted. He told me he had observed me on -foot from a distance, and had pushed forward to -offer me assistance. Upon entering into conversation -I found my obliging friend was a peasant, -belonging to a neighbouring village, where he had -a family to which he was returning. We spoke -a little about education in general, and of his -family in particular. I learned from him that -he could read, and was anxious that his children -should be well instructed. I asked him if he had<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_174"></a>[174]</span> -ever seen the New Testament, to which he replied -in the negative, and from less to more, he intimated -to me that he would be glad to purchase one if -he could find it, for the use of himself and of his -children. When we arrived at Huanchaco, he -would accept of no remuneration for his kindness, -and as I found my luggage there not embarked, -I brought him a New Testament and made him -a present of it, in return for his unsolicited and -friendly attentions. He received it most thankfully, -and we parted.</p> - -<p>On the 24th we sailed for Guayaquil, but as we -carried a gentleman with us at the request of the -government, we had to call at Paita to land him -there. We cast anchor in that port on the 26th, -after sun-set, and early next morning I went ashore -to see the place, and took three New Testaments -with me. I went into a store near the landing-place, -and being invited, took a seat upon a bale -of cotton. After some general conversation, I -opened my treasure, and offered the New Testaments -for sale at one dollar each, and in a few -minutes they were bought. Some little time after, I -was asked if I had any more. I replied that I -had, but that they were in the ship. I immediately -went on board, and just as we had got our anchor -up, a boat came along-side, in which I recognized -the person who had asked me for more New Testaments. -He came on board and bought two dozen, -for which he paid me eighteen dollars. As<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_175"></a>[175]</span> -we were by this time under way, the boat had -to return ashore without loss of time, whilst we, -with a most propitious gale, made for this port.—On -the evening of the 29th we cast anchor off the -small town of Puná, on the island of the same -name. You will remember that this island is -famous in the conquest of Peru, by the Spaniards. -According to the accounts of it that remain, -it seems to have been very populous at that time. -It is not so now. There is, on the whole island, -only one little village, namely, the one I have -mentioned, and which does not contain above 200 -inhabitants. We landed at this little place for -a pilot to conduct us up the river. I took with -me, as I had done at Paita, three New Testaments. -When we landed, we found some people -on the beach, to whom we communicated intelligence -of the rapid progress of Bolivar. We -were invited into one of the houses, and after -having talked a little upon various subjects, I -opened my casket and presented my New Testaments, -which they were all very curious to see. -Whilst they were looking through them, one of the -neighbours came in. “Here!” said one who was -examining the New Testament, “here is a book -that will tell you about the beginning of the world, -and a great many other things.” His friend replied, -that he cared very little about the <em>beginning</em> -of the world, but that he wished to know something -about the <em>end of it</em>. Upon hearing this, I told him<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_176"></a>[176]</span> -that the book he had in his hands was the very -book that would suit him, as it would inform him -particularly about the end of the world. I sold -the three New Testaments in this same house, and -as our captain had by this time made arrangements -with the pilot, we got on board again, and set sail. -On the following night (the 30th) we arrived at -this place, at eight o’clock. Before we cast -anchor, an English gentleman came on board, to -whom I had a letter of introduction. He kindly -invited me to his house, where I am comfortably -lodged, and from which I now write you.</p> - -<p>I intend to stop in this place only a few days, -during which I shall endeavour to dispose of as -many New Testaments as I can, and in the way -that may be most profitable. I now close this -letter, and shall inform you of the success I meet -with here, in my next communication.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Guayaquil, 11th October, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>My letter of the 5th current will inform you of -the motives and objects which have brought me to -this place. It will also inform you of what progress -I have made in the circulation of the Holy -Scriptures, and in objects connected therewith, -from my leaving Lima till my arrival in this -quarter. I proceed, therefore, to state to you the -occurrences of Guayaquil in reference to these -matters.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_177"></a>[177]</span></p> - -<p>Some time ago, and of which I believe I informed -you, I sent from Lima twenty New Testaments -to a Gentleman here, to be sold at one -dollar each, if opportunities should offer, of disposing -of them among his friends. This gentleman -holds a principal situation in the government, and -had been recommended to me by a relation of his -in Truxillo, as a person desirous of doing good. -Upon my arriving here, I called upon him, and -found him to be a person worthy of the honourable -appellation just mentioned. He told me he had -disposed of the New Testaments, and he gave me -twenty dollars which he had received for them.</p> - -<p>As soon as I had reached this place, I mentioned -to some persons that I had a supply of New Testaments -for sale, and in consequence I sold one -hundred and sixty-eight copies. After thinking -for some time upon what would be the speediest and -most effectual way of disposing of the New Testaments, -it occurred to me that the best thing I -could do would be to print an advertisement, and to -give notice of the sale by posting these up in the -public places of the different towns I pass through -on my journey. This, you will see, would at -once draw the attention of the <em>public</em>. The only -objection that occurred to me was, that it would -be a kind of challenge to our opponents, or at least -an intimation of our hostile operations. This -obstacle I kept in mind, but did not think our adversaries -would be able to make any effectual<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_178"></a>[178]</span> -resistance. More powerful, I believe, are those -who are for us than those who are against us. The -encouragement to make such an attempt as this, -arises from the great and happy changes already -effected by the revolution going on in this country, -and, I trust, now concluding. I could not have -ventured upon such a thing under the Spanish -government. What is going forward in these -countries is truly a <em>revolution</em> in every sense of the -word.</p> - -<p>I accordingly wrote out an advertisement, and -got it printed in the government printing-office -in this place. Translated into English it runs -thus: “To be sold in (<i>a</i>) the New Testament -of our Lord Jesus Christ, in one volume, well -printed, and neatly bound, at the low price of -<em>eight</em> rials. This sale will continue for (<i>b</i>) days -only, and it is expected that those who wish to -procure for themselves this sacred code of our Holy -Religion, will improve the occasion now offered -them.” As this advertisement was intended not -for this place alone, but for others also, I left -the blank (<i>a</i>) to be filled up with the pen to suit -each place, and the blank (<i>b</i>) I leave for the number -<i>one</i>, <i>two</i>, or <i>three</i>, as my time will permit, and -as the importance of the town visited may require. -When these notices were finished, I caused some -to be put up in this place, saying that the sale -would be for <em>three</em> days only. In a few minutes -after putting them up, I enjoyed the great satisfaction<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_179"></a>[179]</span> -of seeing it produce much better effects than -I had anticipated. At <em>noon</em> the notices were put -up and at <em>one o’clock</em> I had sold <em>fifteen</em> copies. In -the next hour I sold <em>forty-seven</em>. In the course of -an hour and a half during the time the store was -open in the afternoon, I sold <em>one hundred and twelve</em>. -Next day I sold 262 copies. The day following, -which was also one of the three days of sale, happened -to be a festival day held to celebrate the declaration -of independence in this town four years ago. The -stores in consequence were all shut, and public -business suspended. Nevertheless, there were -<em>eleven</em> copies sold during a few minutes before -breakfast, when the store was open for some particular -purpose. To-day I set out on my -journey to Quito, bu I may perhaps sell some -before I go, as I cannot go off before four o’clock -in the afternoon, having to sail up the river with -the flood tide.</p> - -<p>The whole number disposed of in this place -is 615, and for these I have received 542 dollars -2 rials.—The greater part were sold one by one at -eight rials each, but sometimes I sold a dozen or -two together, and in that case sold them somewhat -cheaper. To the number of copies already mentioned, -I add the 30 disposed of, as noticed in my -last, and three copies sold in Truxillo of those in -superior binding, making in all 648 copies since -the commencement of my tour. To the amount of -monies received in the same time as above, I add,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_180"></a>[180]</span> -what I received from Dr. O’Donovan, from the -gentleman here as previously mentioned, and for -those sold in Paita and Puná, and the three just -noticed, making 153 dollars, amounting in all to -695 dollars 2 rials. Of this sum, I have remitted -500 dollars to Messrs. Cochran and Robertson, of -Lima, with whom I keep my accounts. This sum -will be applied to carrying forward the translation -and printing of the Scriptures into the <em>Peruvian</em> -language, agreeably to your resolution upon the -subject, communicated to me some time ago.</p> - -<p>Need I add anything to the above by way of -comment or observation? Is it not most gratifying -to see so many seeds sown in this town? Let us -join together in prayer, that He who causeth the -rain to descend from heaven to fertilize the ground, -and to raise into fruit the puny efforts of man, may -cause his blessing to be upon the seed sown in this -place. As it is sown in weakness may it be raised -in strength, and produce at least a hundred fold.</p> - -<p>P.S.—<i>12th October.</i>—Our boat did not sail -yesterday, and thus gave me the opportunity of -adding 71 to the number of copies formerly mentioned, -and 71 dollars to account.</p> - -<p>The preceding sentence was written in the morning, -and now, in the afternoon, I add 52 copies -more, making in all, in Guayaquil, 738.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_181"></a>[181]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Guaranda, 25th October, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>My last letter to you was written in Guayaquil -on the 12th instant. On that occasion I noticed -that I had taken that freedom with you in regard to -writing, which we often take with our friends without -the danger or the thought of offending on the -one hand or on the other. The letter referred to -was short and could not well be longer from the -circumstances in which I was then placed. Before -I had finished it, the master of the canoe in which -I was to leave Guayaquil, had knocked at the -door according to appointment, at four o’clock in -the morning. Although, however, that letter was -short, I did not consider that I had left you uninformed -as to the circumstances that had occurred -during my journey from Lima to Guayaquil, as -well as those that had occurred in the place -last mentioned. I wrote upon that subject two -letters of some length, to the British and Foreign -Bible Society, detailing these matters with some -degree of minuteness. Of these two letters I requested -Mr. B. to forward you copies, and doubt -not that such will be forwarded to you immediately -upon their arrival.</p> - -<p>In the two letters referred to, I stated the measures -I had taken in circulating the Scriptures in -Guayaquil, and the unexpected and happy results -which followed in the sale of 738 copies of the -New Testament. It was gratifying, I assure you,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_182"></a>[182]</span> -to see in this manner almost the whole city come together -to hear the word of God, and it was not less -so, to pass along the streets and to count one, two, -three, a dozen perhaps, diligently engaged in reading -their New Testaments. Who could pass along under -such circumstances, in any other frame than that of -thanksgiving and prayer?—thanksgiving to God -for having disposed so many to attend to the things -which belong to their everlasting peace, and which -I may say, have been hitherto hid from their eyes,—and -prayer, that the eyes of their understanding -might be enlightened, that they might be turned -from darkness to light, and might enjoy that inheritance -which the Lord hath prepared for them -that love him. Nor could I feel otherwise, nor -withhold from expressing those feelings, as I -walked over the spot where sin has deposited his -spoils won in that place. The small and the great -are there. My prayer to God was, that through -means of the word of life then circulated, many -from that spot might, at the voice of the Archangel, -awake to life and everlasting glory.</p> - -<p>We read in the sacred page upon a certain occasion, -some thousands of years ago, when the sons of -God came to present themselves before him, Satan -came also among them. The same seems to have -been his practice in Jerusalem, in Antioch, in Philippi, -as well as upon other occasions of ancient -and modern date. That he was not absent -on this occasion in Guayaquil, we may <i>a priori</i> be<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_183"></a>[183]</span> -assured of. That he was successful, however, I -have not yet learned. I did, indeed, overhear that -some priest had said something against the reading -of the New Testament, but I had some suspicion -that the information was not quite correct. As a -counterpart to this, several priests and friars bought -of the New Testaments. At one time, I think -there were <em>five</em> friars in the store at one time to -purchase, and one of these took <em>thirteen</em> copies. -At another time, a friar, who had bought a New -Testament, came afterwards inquiring very anxiously -for the whole Bible, and was much disappointed -upon learning that there was none. I told him -that some two months after, some Bibles might be -expected, and that as only 50 copies were ordered, -he had better put down his name if he wished to -secure one for himself. Upon my telling him so, -he immediately subscribed for <em>two</em> copies. This -person told me that all the friars in his convent -had bought New Testaments, and that they -were all highly pleased with them. It is really -encouraging to see the word of God circulate in this -quarter with little or no opposition.—I may add -further regarding this matter, that I was upon very -good terms with the rector of Guayaquil during the -few days I remained there. I paid him a visit, -accompanied by a friend to introduce me, and next -day I received a very courteous visit from him in -return, accompanied by the ecclesiastic next in -rank to himself. He has, besides, given me two<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_184"></a>[184]</span> -letters of introduction, warmly recommending me to -his friends in Quito. Do not all these things, my -dear friend, lay us under obligations to give thanks -unto him in whose hands are the hearts of all? And -are not such occurrences calculated to encourage -us to labour in this sacred cause and to ask of the -Lord <em>liberal things</em> according to his promise? I -am persuaded you so feel, and so act, but still it is -not unnecessary to remind you of these matters, to -stir up your pure mind by way of remembrance, -and thus to add line upon line. Let us then continue -instant in prayer, that the Lord would pour -out his blessing upon this country, already white -unto harvest.</p> - -<p>A little after four o’clock on the morning of -the 14th, I got into the canoe which was to conduct -me from Guayaquil to Babahoyo. The river -Guayaquil is navigable at all seasons as far as the -latter place, a distance of about 40 miles, and in -the rainy season, when the river is high, boats pass -some 15 miles farther up. The navigation is performed -in balsas, and in large and small canoes. -The small canoes are made of a single tree hollowed -out, and the large ones are built like our -boats, and capable of carrying several tons, but -made in the shape of the small canoes. It was -in one of the large ones I took my passage to -Babahoyo. It is in general by no means a pleasant -voyage that is made between these two places. -On the one hand, the heat is very great; and on<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_185"></a>[185]</span> -the other, the mosquitos are numerous and active. -The effects arising from the bite of this troublesome -insect are still, at the distance of more than a -week, very visible on my hands, and also on my -legs, where they were defended by the stocking -only. On the first day, owing to the excessive -heat, I felt very unwell, but enjoyed good health -on the following day. On this occasion I experienced -from some of my fellow-passengers those -friendly and soothing attentions which adorn the -female character, and which, on several occasions, -I have seen exhibited in regard to myself and to -others during my residence in this country. We -were nearly three days in our passage. The river -<em>abounds</em> with alligators. I might almost say, it -is <em>full</em> of them. Great numbers lie basking on -the banks with their horrible mouths wide open, -and upon coming close up to them they plunge into -the river, and swim about like so many logs floating -around you. At one time I counted, in a very -short distance, all at one view, on one side of the -river, to the number of forty, and at another time -I saw twenty, close together. Very few are found -at or below Guayaquil, as the water is salt for -some miles above the town. In the rainy season, -however, when the great quantity of fresh water -keeps the salt water down below the town, the -alligator is found farther down. I made several -inquiries as to the feeling of this animal towards -man in this quarter, but could not get any well<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_186"></a>[186]</span> -authenticated information of its seizing upon human -kind, and the frequency of bathing in the -river speaks the same language. It seems, in -this river, still to observe that fear and regard to -man which all the animal creation once possessed, -but which has now in regard to several animals -been effaced, and in most cases, I believe, through -the cruelty of man towards the animal creation. -All accounts, however, agreed in affirming that the -alligators here often seize upon hogs, and other -small animals, when found close to the river. -Whilst speaking upon this subject I may also notice, -that in all the low lands between the sea and -the mountains in the parts subject to periodical -rains, lions, tigers, and serpents abound, particularly -the latter. The lions I am told do not attack -man, nor does the serpent, except when trode -upon.</p> - -<p>Many topics of conversation occurred during our -passage up the river. The sale of our New Testaments -was known to every body, and thus afforded -a subject of conversation in which we -could all take a part. Of course I had also something -to say upon this subject, as it was well known -that I was the seller of them. Two copies were -on board, one of which had been purchased by -the captain of our canoe, and the other by one -of the passengers. I have already told you of the -evangelical aspect of the streets of Guayaquil, -and the same aspect at times was exhibited on<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_187"></a>[187]</span> -board, both of the New Testaments being frequently -in use at the same time. During the -many things that were said, arising from what was -read, (the reading being frequently aloud,) a conversation -took place, the relation of which will -probably interest you, and more especially as it -affords a specimen of the progress of <em>thinking</em> upon -religious subjects in this country. The subject -was a delicate one, but so much the better, as a -specimen. The worship of saints was the matter -treated of, though I do not remember what gave -rise to it. I stated my views upon the subject, -appealing to the Scriptures and to common sense -in support of my opinion. A very keen and interesting -conversation immediately took place, in -which four, besides myself, took a part, and you -will be surprised when I tell you that three of -the four took my side of the question. The one -who was opposed to us happened to be a stout -disputant, and thus gave occasion to a thorough -discussion of the matter. Among other things -brought forward to show the incongruity and sinfulness -of the worshipping of saints, I stated that -the Apostle Peter himself, (who according to them -is the prince of Apostles and saints,) refused this -worship, and in proof of this, I referred him to -the tenth chapter of the Acts. This passage was -turned up and read by one of the company, and -it appeared to all of us, except one, conclusive -upon the subject. Our opponent, however, defended<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_188"></a>[188]</span> -himself, by alleging that although Peter, -upon that occasion, refused worship, he refused -it because he was not glorified, but that after death -things were otherwise.—You agree then, I remarked, -that worship is not to be given to the -saints when upon earth, but it is lawful, you say, -to give this worship to them after their death. -Let us then go to another passage, I said, and -see who of the inhabitants of heaven are to be -worshipped. I then referred to the last chapter -of the Revelation, namely, “When I had heard -and seen, I fell down before the feet of the angel -who showed me these things. Then saith he unto -me, See thou do it not, for I am thy fellow servant, -and of thy brethren the prophets, and of them who -keep the sayings of this book: <em>Worship God</em>.” -This passage cut off the refuge which our friend -had taken in his distinction between worshipping a -saint on earth, and a saint in heaven. He then -took refuge in <em>the church</em>, alleging that since authority -had been given to it by Jesus Christ to order -and direct the concerns of his kingdom after his -ascension, it was our duty to obey its orders, and -one of these orders was, the praying to the saints. -You know, of course, how <em>I</em> would have got rid of -this objection, that is, by sweeping away this authority -of the church altogether, and I stated this to -be my opinion. The captain of our canoe, who -took a large share in the conversation, and who -saw in the church an authority to which he considered<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_189"></a>[189]</span> -himself bound to submit, assailed our opponent -by another argument, and a very effectual -one. He came close up to him, and with an air of -having something in his mind worth saying, “Is it -not,” said he, “the duty of children to reverence -their parents, and to obey them readily and constantly?”—“Certainly -it is,” replied his friend. -Our Captain continued: “And if a parent should -tell his child to steal, to lie, and such like things, -should the child obey?”—“Certainly not,” was the -reply. “You are right,” says the Captain, “and -that is just our case with the church. It is our -duty to obey it, as it is our duty to obey our -parents, but if our parents or the church bid us do -what is obviously wrong, in that case it is our duty -to <em>disobey</em>.” You see what an excellent argument -this was, and it completely silenced the other, and -left him without any thing to say upon the subject, -except mere general talk and repetition. Our -Captain having gained this triumph, turned to one -of the four, who seemed rather to acquiesce in the -strength of our arguments from the Scripture, than -zealously to defend our side, and put this question -to him. “Can you tell me,” said he, “why the -priest reads all the service and prays in Latin, a -language of which I do not understand a word, and -thus leaving me, when in church, as a mere statue, -without knowing what I am saying or doing?” -This was a hard question, and it was answered significantly, -but without words. Our Captain next<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_190"></a>[190]</span> -comes up to me, and says, “You see every one sets -up his little machine to gain his dollar.” I thought -I understood his meaning, although couched under -a figure, but as I wished it to be well understood -by all, I asked him what he meant by it. After a -short delay he answered me, by stating, that the -church and the priests had made various laws and -ceremonies for their own benefit, and that they -might thus put a dollar into their pocket.—Various -other things were said, and among which the New -Testament was praised as a book any one might -read and understand, and not like the prayers of -the priests, which no one understood, perhaps not -themselves. One of the four alluded to, towards -the end of the conversation, said, in a very distinct -voice, and in the hearing of all, “If I were going -to die, this is my faith; I believe that there is one -God who made all things, and that there is one -Redeemer who died for us, and who rose again; -and as to the worshipping of saints, and all the -rest of it, I know nothing.” I should not omit an -observation of one of our female passengers. When -two of us were debating about the worship of saints, -she observed to me that she did not like such conversation. -Why so, I replied. Because, said -she, if saints are not to be worshipped, then it will -follow that we are not to pray to the Virgin Mary -neither. I said, in reply, that I thought her reasoning -worth being heard, as it was a fair deduction, -and requested her to put it in the form of a question,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_191"></a>[191]</span> -to the one of the four who appeared the coolest, -and who, as I said before, rather acquiesced in the -strength of our arguments than defended our side. -As soon as silence was obtained, the question was -put, and the answer returned was just what I -would have said if called upon to reply.</p> - -<p>You will see in the whole of this conversation -a freedom of thinking and of speaking, which you -probably did not expect, and I confess that I was -myself greatly surprised at it, notwithstanding the -many opportunities I have had of observing the -sentiments of the people of this quarter. In the -higher and more enlightened classes of society, I -have often met with liberal sentiments, but as the -two persons who took the chief part in the above -conversation were of the lower class, it was both -new to me and interesting.</p> - -<p>On our arrival at Babahoyo, I found lodgings -difficult to be procured, as the houses seemed all -occupied. As soon as this was known to one of -my fellow-passengers, he took me to his father’s -house, where I enjoyed comfortable bed and -board, kindly bestowed and free of expense, during -the two days I remained in that town. As I intended -to make no stay in this place, but push on, -I gave no public intimation regarding the sale of -New Testaments; yet, through means of my fellow-passengers -it came to be known that I had these -for sale, and in consequence I disposed of fifty-one -copies for which I received fifty dollars, one<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_192"></a>[192]</span> -copy being a present. I may mention, before -leaving this place, that it lies very low on the -banks of the river, and is overflowed in the rainy -season. The church stands upon a spot elevated -some feet above the surrounding parts; and I am -told it is common for the people in that season to -go up to the church door in their canoes. The -usual practice in passing from Babahoyo to Quito, -is to hire mules at the former place to Guaranda, -and again to hire anew from that to Quito. I -accordingly hired mules for this place, which cost -me five dollars each, on account of the badness of -the roads, though four dollars is the usual charge. -The weather at the present time is very unfavourable, -and it is singular to see it so at this season of -the year. I had counted upon fair weather in this -quarter during the whole time of my journey, according -to the information which I had obtained in -Lima, and am thus less prepared for rain than -otherwise I would have been had I expected it. I -may add also, that I like rain now worse than -ever, as during these two years past I have not -seen any. From Babahoyo to the base of the -mountains the roads were very deep and bad. -When we began to ascend the mountains, we found -ourselves still worse situated. The very steep ascent, -and the clayey slippery roads, rendered the -journey very unpleasant, and not a little dangerous -from the slipping of the mules, which were frequently -brought down upon their knees. I shall not detain<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_193"></a>[193]</span> -you for the present with a minute account of the -journey to this place, suffice it to say, that I arrived, -here, the day before yesterday in the afternoon -in perfect health and safety; and I feel, I assure -you, upon looking back upon the road over which -I have passed, a new motive for thanksgiving to -the Father of mercies for my daily and hourly -preservation. I shall just farther add, as descriptive -of the mountains, that on the first day of our ascent, -the barometer in the valley, in the morning, stood -at 29.950, and where we lodged in the evening it -stood at 26.141, which indicates a great rise. -Where we lodged on the evening following it stood -at 22.085. On the next day we passed the highest -part of the ancient Indian road, where the -barometer stood at 21.322.</p> - -<p>The situation of Guaranda, from which I now -write you, is about ten miles S. W. of the great -Chimborazo. This king of mountains raises its -majestic hoary head full in view. It is deeply -covered from the top, almost to the base, with everlasting -snow—snow which must have fallen, if not -in the days of Adam, at least in the days of -Noah. To-morrow I set off for Riobamba, when I -expect to have a fuller view of it, as the road passes -along it close to the skirts of its snowy mantle. -Guaranda contains about 1500 inhabitants, mostly -Indians, who all speak the ancient Peruvian language. -There are several little towns in the glens<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_194"></a>[194]</span> -within the district, containing in all 14,000 inhabitants, -and who all speak the same language. -You will recollect that this is the language into -which the New Testament has lately been translated -in Lima, as mentioned in my former letters, -and you will see here a still more ample field of -usefulness for this translation, and the more so, -when I add, that not only in this district is the language -spoken, but also in all the towns in this -quarter as far as Quito. What a wonderful extent -and uniformity must the ancient Peruvian empire -have had. The inhabitants of this town and the -Indians of Peru have exactly the same features -and countenance, at well as language.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Riobamba, 31st October, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>Soon after my arrival in the town of Guaranda, -I called upon the Governor, and made known to -him the object of my journey in this quarter. I -found him a man of intelligence, and a friend of -the British and Foreign Bible Society. Observing -him to be a person worthy of all confidence, and -very desirous of the instruction of his countrymen, -I made known to him, without reserve, the plans -and operations of the Bible Society, and that I -was travelling to forward its sacred object.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_195"></a>[195]</span> -He was much pleased with the brief view of the -Society which I gave him. He wished to see -the New Testaments, and became the first purchaser -himself. He also called upon those around to buy -for themselves, by telling them to come and learn to -be Christians from this book. I received many -friendly attentions from him during the two days I -remained in that place, and I think we formed -a kind of friendship which may contribute to -forward the objects of the Society in that quarter -on future occasions. Notwithstanding my printed -notices, and the encouragement of the Governor, -I sold but a very few copies in that place, -the whole number being thirteen. One cause of -there being so few sold is, that almost all the inhabitants -are Indians, and do not understand the -Spanish language, at all events cannot read it. To -which may be added the general apathy which -always exists in small towns. The few copies, -however, which have been circulated in that town, -will form a beginning (I may say of an era) in -that place, and will create a desire for more, both -there and in the villages around, when, on a future -occasion, some pilgrim from your Society shall -climb the Andes to visit their abode.</p> - -<p>On the 29th I left Guaranda on my way to this -town. You will see by the map, that in visiting -Riobamba, I was going out of the straight road to -Quito, but I was anxious to visit this place, if<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_196"></a>[196]</span> -peradventure the Lord would incline the hearts of -some here, as in other places to receive the word -of God; and, generally speaking, my wish is to -pave the way for future operations, as well as to -drop a few seeds whilst so doing, and thus to be a -pioneer in your service, in the service of this people, -and, I trust, in the service of God. I told you -that Guaranda, and the villages around it, lay upon -the Andes; they are not, however, at the top, but -lie on the western side or declivity of the great -ridge, or Cordillera. After leaving Guaranda, -there is nearly a whole day’s climbing before you -reach the top. Upon reaching the highest parts of -the ridge, you have something like a plain, though -of no great extent; and out of this plain, or rather -this mountain, and from your very feet, rises the -great Chimborazo. From Guaranda we turned our -faces towards this great mountain, and began to -ascend. As we approached it, it began to frown, -and to forbid our drawing nearer. The rain, in a -little time, began to fall very heavily; we pushed -on; the hail succeeded, accompanied by vivid -lightning, whose rapid flight, from our elevated -situation, we could trace from heaven to earth. To -crown the whole, the loud thunder rolled along as -if Chimborazo were tumbling down upon us. To -pursue our journey, under such circumstances, -would have been foolish, and perhaps fatal. We -accordingly turned our backs upon the mountain,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_197"></a>[197]</span> -and began to descend, and to seek refuge in the -first hut we could come to. After some little time -we descried a thatched cottage, but we could not -reach it, as the descent to it from the ridge, along -which the road lay, was too rapid for our mules. -Another and another we had to pass in this way, -without being able to take shelter from the storm. -We at length found a house to which we could -descend, and I rode on towards it, and made inquiry -if we could be lodged there. I received an -answer in bad Spanish, saying, they did not understand -what I said. I was obliged, therefore, -to wait till the guide arrived, who understood the -Indian language, and upon his putting the same -question which I had put, we obtained refuge from -the storm, and found, in our circumstances, the -cottage converted into a palace.</p> - -<p>I thus found myself in a cottage belonging to one -of the indigenous inhabitants of the country, and -had thus an opportunity of learning some things -which could not have been so well learned in any -other situation. I found that the inhabitants of -this hut understood only their native language; and -learned that this was the case with all the rural -inhabitants of these quarters. The language spoken -is that of Peru, into which, through your beneficence, -the New Testament has been translated, -and part of which will soon be printed. The need -of having the word of God translated into this language,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_198"></a>[198]</span> -is thus rendered more evident, and we see the -field to be watered by it increased.</p> - -<p>Towards the evening the sky cleared up, and as -the sun was setting, the aspect around became -beautiful. I stepped to a little distance from the -cottage, and reached the road on the ridge which -we had left some hours before. As I walked backwards -and forwards in this spot, enjoying the serene -and peaceful evening, I felt gratitude rise in my -heart to the Father of mercies, for my protection -and shelter from the storm. I had just gone over -that beautiful hymn, of which the first and last -verses follow:</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">“When all thy mercies, O my God,</div> - <div class="verse indent2">My rising soul surveys;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Transported with the view, I’m lost,</div> - <div class="verse indent2">In wonder, love, and praise.</div> - </div> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">“Through all eternity to Thee</div> - <div class="verse indent2">A joyful song I’ll raise;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">For, oh, eternity’s too short</div> - <div class="verse indent2">To utter all thy praise.”</div> - </div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>I had just repeated this companion of my travels, -and was beginning to descend to the cottage, when -I observed a person coming up, mounted on a very -good horse, and leading another still better. I -wondered to see him bend his course to the uninhabited -mountains at such a late hour, and had -the curiosity to wait his approach, to make inquiry.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_199"></a>[199]</span> -“Pray friend,” said I, “where can you be going -this way at so late an hour?”—“I am seeking you,” -was the reply.—“Seeking me!” I replied. -“Yes,” said he, “I have a letter for you from the -Governor of Guaranda.” I received and opened -the letter, and read, in the language of friendship, -that my good friend, dreading that I should be -worsted by the storm, had sent an excellent horse -for me, with orders to his servant to travel on until -he should find me, at whatever hour it might be, -and to see me safe in Riobamba. Whatever might -have been my feelings before, they were, at least, -now “lost in wonder, love, and praise.” I should -have mentioned, also, that the servant delivered me -a little basket, which I found to be filled with provisions -for our journey, and into which, also, the -hand of friendship itself had dropped a few sweet -cakes. All these things, under the circumstances in -which I found myself, had a powerful effect upon -my mind, and encouraged me anew to hope in -God and to persevere in his service.</p> - -<p>In a few minutes we stepped down to the hut, -procured some provisions for the horses, some repast -for ourselves, and passed the night as comfortably -as we could. Early next morning we began to -prepare for our journey. I had given our hostess -a rial now and a rial then to give her confidence in -my honesty; for there is some distrust in regard to -provisions bestowed upon strangers, and it is<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_200"></a>[200]</span> -founded, I believe, on experience. Before setting -out, I paid her all her demands, and gave her a -little more; upon which she lifted up both her -hands, and prayed for a blessing upon me, and thus -we parted. After travelling for some time, Chimborazo -looked out from the clouds, the first appearance -of which, I confess, filled me with a kind of -dread, more especially as I thought it frowned -upon us again. As we went on, however, the day -brightened, and we reached the mountain in due -time, and took up our lodging in an uninhabited -house on the side of it. During my evening walk -the clouds entirely disappeared from the mountain, -and it seemed to sit down in beautiful splendour -beside me, and thus we became more than reconciled -to each other. Next morning the same beautiful -appearance was exhibited as we set out on our -way to Riobamba.</p> - -<p>At mid day we reached this place, which contains -about 3000 inhabitants, with a considerable population -in the villages around. I called upon the -Governor, and presented him a letter of introduction -which I had brought from the Governor of -Guaranda. In this gentleman I also found a friend, -and an encourager of our object. He directed me -to the house of a friend, where I have a comfortable -lodging. Upon stating to him my object, and -showing him the advertisement which I wished to -fix up in the public parts of the town, he ordered<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_201"></a>[201]</span> -his clerk to fill up the blanks according to my directions, -and then sent one of the Alguazils to put -them up. He bought six New Testaments himself, -and during the two days of my stay here, I -have disposed of 35 copies. To-morrow I set out -for Ambato, accompanied by a soldier, which the -Governor has ordered to attend me by way of a -guide and a guard. Considering the shortness of -my stay here, and considering that many more -New Testaments would have been bought had time -been afforded, I thought it advisable to leave 50 -copies in the hands of the Governor, who kindly -undertook to dispose of them as circumstances -offered. For the same reason I left 50 copies with -him to be forwarded by the first opportunity to the -Governor of Guaranda. I have also had another -object in view in doing so, and that is to convert, -as it were, these individuals into members and -agents of your Society, the importance of which -you will at once see.</p> - -<p>I have already noticed to you that the rural -inhabitants of the district of Guaranda speak the -Indian language only. The same also may be said -of all the districts in this quarter, as far as Quito, -I formerly stated to you, that in Peru a million of -souls stood in need of the translation of the Scriptures -into the Quichua language, and you now see -how many thousands more may be added to this -number. I have no doubt but the importance of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_202"></a>[202]</span> -the translation in question will lead you to extend -your beneficence to the translating and printing of -the whole Scriptures into this language. When I -find persons, particularly clergymen, with whom I -can communicate with confidence, I state to them -what has been done in regard to this translation, -and the use that may be made of it in instructing -the indigenous inhabitants of this quarter, which is -by far the most numerous class of the population. -To such individuals I mention, also, the happy effects -produced by the schools in the Gaelic and -Irish languages. I have succeeded in convincing -many of the importance and practicability of educating -the native population, and am much encouraged -by the interest I find taken in this matter, by -many persons of name and influence in the places -I have visited. In this town, the prior of one of -the convents, and the rector of the town, have promised -to forward this object as far as lies in their -power, and on my part I have promised to forward -them some copies of this translation as soon us they -are ready.</p> - -<p>On the whole, there is great cause for thanksgiving, -in seeing the Scriptures meet with so ready -a reception in this quarter, and the more so when -we consider that this is the first time this treasure -has been offered them. Let us pray that the word -of God may have free course in this place, and -that it may be glorified.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_203"></a>[203]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Quito, 8th November, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>Through the tender mercies of the Lord I -arrived in this city yesterday morning in health and -safety. The same gracious hand who has guided -me hitherto has provided for me a lodging in this -place, in the house of the Marquis de San José, -where I enjoy all the comforts that kindness and -plenty can bestow. My last letter to you was -dated the 31st ultimo, from Riobamba, and detailed -the various circumstances that occurred in my -journey from Guayaquil to that place. It now remains -for me, therefore, to state the particulars of -my journey from Riobamba until my arrival in this -city.</p> - -<p>Early on the morning of the 1st current, I set -out for Ambato, and arrived there safely in the afternoon. -Ambato is a larger town than Riobamba, -and may contain 5000 people. In this place I -found myself comfortably lodged in the house of -the Governor. My luggage, along with the New -Testaments, did not arrive till the following morning. -Upon the arrival of the New Testaments, I -showed them to the Governor, and told him of my -intention of advertising them for sale, and inquired -in what shop or store I could conveniently do so. -He answered me, by saying, that his own house -was at my service for that purpose. I accordingly -stated in the advertisement, that the New Testaments -were on sale at the house of the Governor,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_204"></a>[204]</span> -and that the sale would continue but one day. It -afforded me much satisfaction to see the interest -taken in this matter by the Governor and by his -lady, both of whom took great pleasure in showing -the New Testaments to those who came to buy, -and when I had to go out to pay or return a visit, -they kindly supplied my place until my return.</p> - -<p>You cannot but have observed the liberality, -kindness, and encouragement I have met with from -the Governors of Guaranda, Riobamba and Ambato, -in the service of the Society. These circumstances -are very encouraging as to your future -labours and expectations in this quarter, and are -circumstances of which you will not fail to take advantage. -The three individuals mentioned, will -be most ready, I am persuaded, on any future occasion, -to forward in the most obliging and effectual -manner the holy object of your Society. They will -also readily lend their influence for the establishment -of Bible Societies in their respective districts, -as soon as a Society of a national character shall be -formed in the capital, to which they may become -auxiliaries. Of this Society in the capital, which I -have much in view and at heart, I shall inform -you afterwards, should it please the Lord to conduct -me safely to that place. That you may not, -however, lose the advantages already gained by -the acquisition of these gentlemen, as co-operators -in your work, I shall here give you their names and -addresses in the style of the country. “Sᵒʳ Coronel<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_205"></a>[205]</span> -Carlos Araujo, Gobernador de Guaranda; Sᵒʳ Ambrosio -Dávalos, Gobernador de Riobamba; Sᵒʳ -Nicolas Bácones, Gobernador de Ambato.” In the -preceding addresses, I have given you verbatim -what you should write in addressing any letter to -them. The best manner of communicating with -these gentlemen will be through Guayaquil, as that -is the nearest port, and with which there is constant -intercourse. During the time I remained in Guayaquil, -I stopped in the house of Messrs. Robinet -and Wheelwright, and found there every facility -afforded me in forwarding the work of the Society. -If you would communicate with that house in your -transactions with Guayaquil, Guaranda, Riobamba, -and Ambato, you will find, I am persuaded, -all attention paid to your concerns.</p> - -<p>I mentioned above, that my advertisement stated -the sale to last for one day only. I was, however, -detained another day, and thus gave an additional -opportunity for purchasing. The whole number -sold amounted to forty-seven copies; but a small -number, indeed, yet great as a beginning, and as -an encouragement. I may mention, also, that the -rector and several clergymen bought copies, and -that I heard of no opposition.</p> - -<p>In one of my letters from Guayaquil I told -you that the 200 Bibles you had ordered me -had not arrived in Lima when I left that place, -and to my no small regret. I have, however, -regretted that delay a thousand fold in the course<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_206"></a>[206]</span> -of my journey. I mentioned to you at the same -time, that I had bought one Bible in Lima to -carry with me, by way of a specimen, and to excite -an interest to purchase when a supply should -arrive. All my expectations in regard to this -have been fully realized. The many offers I have -had to purchase this Bible, have filled me with -pleasure and with pain; pleasure to see so great a desire -for the word of God, and pain in not being able -to satisfy that desire. Of the many occasions in -which I have been so placed, none was so pleasing, -on the one hand, nor so painful, on the other, as -that which I experienced with the Rector of Ambato. -He had been to visit me, and I went to -his house to return his kindness. After experiencing -much attention from him, he in a very formal -manner urged me to sell him the Bible. I -stated to him, upon this occasion, what I had -been called on to state upon so many other occasions, -namely, that the Bible I had was a -kind of common property, that my object in carrying -it with me was to show it to all, and to encourage -all who wished for it, by informing them -that a number of copies were coming, and that -their desire would be realized in the possession -of this precious volume. He however renewed -his request, besought me to let him have it, and -urged his claim in the name of all his flock, for -whose use he said he particularly wished it. My -difficulty here was great, yet I considered my<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_207"></a>[207]</span> -reasons for not parting with this volume still greater, -and was thus obliged most unwillingly to withhold -what, under other circumstances I would -most gladly have bestowed. He said, among -other things, to induce me to yield to his request, -that I would be able to find a copy in Quito, for -he had learned that some had been sold here some -time ago, as was actually the case, for 40 copies -of the 500 sold in Lima were brought here. I -told him that there were some doubts as to my -obtaining a copy in Quito, but that I would make -inquiry when I should arrive there, and in the -event of finding one I should send him my own -copy, and at the price at which I purchased the -other. Upon these terms we came to an agreement, -and he remarked that I should not make -any hesitation in regard to the price, for he -would willingly pay what should be charged.</p> - -<p>On the 4th current I left Ambato on my way -to this city. There is a town called Tacunga or -Latacunga about 20 miles distant from Ambato, -and on the straight road to this place. From the -consideration of having been much detained in -my journey from Guayaquil, I wished to reach -this city as quickly as possible, and on that account -I intended not to stop at Tacunga, but to -push on to a village called Mulaló, and to pass -the night there, in order that I might reach Quito -on the following day. I was the more inclined -to do so, as I understood that Tacunga was inhabited<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_208"></a>[208]</span> -almost wholly by Indians, none of whom -could use our books. Another arrangement, however, -had been determined on by a higher authority -than mine, and for a purpose which you will presently -see. I had scarce left Ambato, when a -Friar travelling for Quito, came up with me upon -the road. As he was accompanied by a servant -only, and unencumbered with luggage, he could -get faster on his way than I could, accompanied -as I was by the loaded mules. We, notwithstanding, -rode together for some time, and fell -into various conversation. He urged me to go -forward with him, and to leave the loaded mules -to follow us, which, after some hesitation, I complied -with, and we went on together at a gentle -trot. His intention was to stop all night at Tacunga, -as he had some concerns to arrange there. -He kindly invited me to stay there also during the -night, in order that we might go on together -next day towards Quito, offering me a hospitable -lodging in the convent of St. Dominic, to which -he belonged. I still, however, thought it my duty -to push forward, so as to reach Quito next day, -and which I could not do if I stopped all night -at Tacunga. Before we arrived at the place, in -passing a river, my horse, upon reaching the bank, -which was rather difficult of access, stumbled, -plunged again into the river, and nearly threw -me into it. I got safely out, though considerably -wet. This circumstance determined me to stop<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_209"></a>[209]</span> -at Tacunga till I got my clothes dried. Upon -reaching the town, I went with my friend to the -convent, where I got myself comfortably dried, -and prepared for the journey. Before I was ready -to set out, there came on a thunder storm, and -by the time the weather cleared up, it was too -late to set out. My good friends in the convent -strongly urged me to pass the night with them, and -which I consented to do.</p> - -<p>I found this town larger than I expected, and -as I was to pass the night in it, I was anxious to -seize the opportunity of offering the word of God -to them, although I had not much confidence as -to the success I should meet with. In carrying -this purpose into effect, I found myself rather -embarrassed. I was lodged in a convent, and -knew not what disposition the friars might have -to the distribution of the Scriptures, especially -to their being sold in the convent. I wished myself -lodged elsewhere, and indeed any where else, -but could not with any decency remove, as my -friends loaded me with kindness. Had I known, -upon my entering the town, that I was to have -a sale of the New Testaments there, I would not -have gone to the convent, more especially as I -had a letter of introduction to the Governor and -to another gentleman in the place. After some -hesitation, I resolved to make an attempt where -I was. I went pensively to the case in which -the New Testaments were, took out one, and went<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_210"></a>[210]</span> -direct to the Prior to show it to him, praying -all the while as I went, that the God of heaven -would dispose his heart and the hearts of the -rest to befriend the circulation of his holy word. -My prayer was heard. The Prior was much -pleased with the New Testament, and bought it. -He showed it to one of the rest, and recommended -it, whilst I did not fail to put in a word to the -same effect, pointing out the advantages of the -Scriptures to all, and how more immediately it -concerned them, as ministers of religion, to possess -it, and to recommend it to others. Yes, said one -of them, it is the very book which concerns us, -and we would gladly encourage others to receive -it. I then told them that I had a number of copies, -and that I wished to expose them to sale in that -town. I showed the Prior the advertisement, and -said, I should be glad to have the sale in the convent, -if it were agreeable to him. By all means, -said he, and immediately he filled up the blanks -in the notices with his own hand, and sent a person -to fix them up. The advertisements were scarcely -up, when one, and another, and another came -tripping in to purchase a New Testament. In a -little, the buyers thickened, whilst all the friars -stood around enjoying the sight, and warmly recommending -the sacred volume to all who came, -and assisted me in the sale when occasion required. -The result was, that in two hours and -a half, that is, till the night came on, I sold <em>one hundred<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_211"></a>[211]</span> -and four</em> copies, which was more than I had -sold in Guaranda, Riobamba, and Ambato taken -together, although I remained two days in each -of these places. You see, by this time, I dare -say, why superior arrangements called me to stop -at this place, contrary to my own intention.</p> - -<p>Among others, whom the sound of our horn -brought together, came the Vicar of the town -<i>in propria persona</i>. Upon learning who he was, -I made my obeisance, and entered into conversation -with him, as to the advantages of the word of -God, and the duty of making it known to all, -and to my great joy I found in him also a friend to -this object. At an early period of our sale, I -brought out the Bible, of which I have spoken -above, and for the purpose there mentioned. It had -the desired effect. It arrested the attention, -and could have been sold many a time. I told -all who wished to purchase it, that there would arrive -in a few months a number of copies, and that -all would be supplied. None being able to obtain -it, a little circle resolved to improve the occasion to -learn what it contained, while a friar in the middle -kept reading aloud for a considerable time.—There -was another attractive, namely, the Brief View -of the Bible Society. This also drew the attention, -and was eagerly read. Their approbation -of the object of the Society, and their wonder at -the effects already produced by it, alternately -drew forth corresponding expressions. You need<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_212"></a>[212]</span> -not be told that I relished the scene before me, -and enjoyed a high entertainment. I could not -refrain from silent thanksgiving to the God above, -as I brought out another and another parcel of New -Testaments, to which I joined a fervent prayer, that -on this occasion the word of God might be sown -in good ground, and might produce in some thirty, -in some sixty, and in some a hundred fold. I -felt also my heart warm within me, whilst the -contemplation of the British character, which was -thus brought under review, called forth the just -praises of my native land. O favoured isle! garden -of God! where the fruits of righteousness grow -more abundantly than in all the world beside. -Peace be upon thee! In thee may the will of God -be done—<em>as it is done in heaven</em>.</p> - -<p>By and by the night came on, and our sale -closed. After which we retired to one of the -cells and entered into general conversation. We -were all pleased with each other. My friends, -on the one hand, seized every opportunity to show -their kindness and attention, and I, on the other -hand, in return for their kindness, amused them -with my mountain barometer, thermometers, and -pocket compass, all of which were perfectly new to -them, and highly entertaining. At a proper hour -the friars retired to their cells, and I also retired -to mine, where I passed part of the night in contemplating -the scene which had just passed before -me, and the rest in repairing the fatigues of the -day.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_213"></a>[213]</span></p> - -<p>I told the Prior of the convent and the others, -that the sale which had been effected in that place, -so much greater than in the other places I had -visited in their neighbourhood, did great honour -to their town. I took occasion also to return them -my sincere thanks for the very active and friendly -part they had taken in this matter, and told them -I should have great pleasure in communicating the -same to the Society in London, and which I accordingly -now do. The Prior said that he should be -very glad, upon any future occasion, to forward the -objects of the Society as far as he could, and that -in regard to any other supply of the Scriptures -destined for Tacunga, he would most readily take -charge of them, and dispose of them according to -the directions which might be sent with them. -The other Friars heartily seconded the Prior in all -these matters. In conversing about the Bibles -that were to come to them from Guayaquil, it was -agreed that not fewer than fifty copies would be -required for Tacunga, and I promised to write to -Guayaquil in order that this number might be sent -to them upon their arrival there from Lima. At -the same time I write to Lima to forward a sufficient -supply to Guayaquil of your second edition, -which must, I should think, be already in Callao, -or near it.</p> - -<p>In the preceding part of this letter, I gave you -the names and address of some persons who would -gladly carry forward your object in the places<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_214"></a>[214]</span> -mentioned. I now add to this list another, -namely, the Prior already mentioned, “El R. P. -Fr. Manuel Peñaherrera, Prior de Santo Domingo -de Latacunga.” The person just named, as -well as all his colleagues, will be most ready to -establish an Auxiliary Bible Society in that place, -when the proper time comes for doing so. I give -you also the names of some others belonging to -this convent, as my duty and my promise require -of me, and could wish that in some corner of one of -your monthly extracts or annual reports their names -might be recorded, for I think they are worthy of -it; and in seeing their names in any of these publications -I shall feel myself as discharged from -what nearly amounts to an obligation, and which -my feelings of respect and gratitude towards my -friends led me into. The names are as follows: -Padre Mariano Quintana, Padre Narciso Molina, -Padre Matias Granja. To which I add, as the -last, but not the least, my travelling companion, -Padre José Celio.<a id="FNanchor_4" href="#Footnote_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a></p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_215"></a>[215]</span></p> - -<p>I conclude this letter, the writing of which -has been the means of my enjoying over again the -encouraging scenes which I have endeavoured to -describe, and which I lay before you that you may -comply with the pleasing duty of rejoicing with -those that rejoice.—I only add, May God Almighty -prosper you most abundantly in all your -undertakings; and unto whom in all things be -glory for ever: Amen.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_4" href="#FNanchor_4" class="label">[4]</a> These names were not inserted in the Society’s Extracts, -as the Secretaries thought the doing so might, perhaps, compromise -our friends there with their superiors. A letter, -however, was written to the Prior, in the name of the Society, -conveying to him those sentiments which his conduct, on the -above occasion, called forth. A few weeks ago an answer -was received from the Prior, in reply to this letter, in which -he expresses his continued interest in the object of the Bible -Society, and his desire to circulate the Scriptures in his -native country.—It may be mentioned here also, that a suitable -letter was sent by the Society to the Governor of Guaranda, -and that a very friendly reply to it has been lately received. -This gentleman continues a warm friend to the -Bible Society.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Quito, 19th November, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>A considerable time has elapsed since the -date of my last letter to you, and during the same -period, if I remember right, I have not been favoured -with any of your communications. So that, -as far as mere exchange of letters is concerned, I -am not so much in arrear as you may perhaps be -thinking. It is true, indeed, that it is my part to -write to you, rather than yours to write to me, but -that again supposes that I have something worth -communicating. Now, I am sorry to say that this -has not been the case during my partial silence, a silence -arising from a very natural cause, that of having<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_216"></a>[216]</span> -nothing to say. I mean that I have had nothing to -say about the <em>progress</em> of education in this quarter: -and though I have still very little to say upon that -subject, yet, knowing you take a great interest in -the well being of this part of the world, and in my -feeble efforts to promote it, I think it my duty to -let you know at least where I am, and what I am -doing.</p> - -<p>You will observe by the line at the top, that I -am in the city of Quito, and I shall now state to -you why I am here, and what I am engaged in. -You know how the war has raged for some time -past in Peru, and that Lima has been for a considerable -time in the hands of the enemy. I am -not sure that I have expressed myself correctly in -saying <em>the enemy</em>, a term applied by each party to -the other, but which in the mouth of a neutral is -an impropriety of speech. I beg leave to justify -myself in this, by informing you that I am not a -neutral in this contest, as all my feelings and my -wishes are on the one side, and of course the other -side is the enemy. I leave you to find out at your -leisure what side I am on, and shall proceed to give -you what information I have to communicate relative -to our concerns, the concerns of education.</p> - -<p>I left Lima in the beginning of September, with -the intention of not returning to it for some time. -The immediate cause was the impossibility of -moving forwards in our work under the pressure of -existing circumstances. The very utmost that<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_217"></a>[217]</span> -could be done was to keep hold of what we had -obtained, and even that was done with great difficulty. -Our model school in Lima, at the time I -came away, contained about 200 children, a number -somewhat less than what it contained some -months previous to that time. This decrease is -owing to the great poverty that existed there, on -the one hand; and on the other hand it arose from -a natural fear in the parents lest their children -should be picked up on their way to the School -by the recruiting parties, a fear not altogether -groundless. I may mention here, that there is -another School on our plan, containing about 80 -children.</p> - -<p>You know that, for a considerable time back, I -have had a desire to pass through that part of this -Continent where I now am, but I was prevented -from doing so, by the difficulty of leaving Lima in -the state in which things were, and by the prospect -of making a rapid progress in extending education -over Peru. At the time I came away, the difficulty -referred to was removed, and the prospect in -regard to the other circumstance mentioned was -altogether blasted, at least for a time. The difficulty -I have noticed was the want of a proper -master, in whose hands I could trust the school with -confidence. The school, however, at my leaving -Lima, was in the hands of a good master, with an -assistant to aid him, whilst the superintendence of -all is in the hands of my excellent friend the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_218"></a>[218]</span> -Clergyman, of whom I have often spoken to you -with approbation. From this good friend, notwithstanding -these favourable arrangements, I was -obliged to tear myself away. He urged me to -stop, and would at length only hear of my going -away in the expectation of my early return, and in -the hope of my visit to England being turned to the -advantage of the schools in Peru, as I trust it will, -should I have the happiness to reach your favoured -country.</p> - -<p>I thought it advisable, and my duty, to seize the -time that thus offered for verifying my long-intended -journey. You know, I dare say, that it -was not the mere desire of jaunting that led me to -propose this journey to myself. The two objects -which have hitherto more immediately engaged my -attention in South America are those which form -the work respectively of the British and Foreign -Bible Society, and the British and Foreign School -Society. With these two objects in view, I left -Lima for Bogotá the capital of Colombia. Though -I can never lose sight of any one of these two -objects, yet that of the Bible Society is the main -one in this journey.</p> - -<p>I have been very much pleased with my journey, -in the prosperity I have had in the distribution of -the sacred volume. I have observed a very general -desire to possess this book, and I have had the -pleasure of seeing great numbers flock together, -not to receive it as a present, but to buy it. Of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_219"></a>[219]</span> -upwards of 1500 New Testaments which I had at -the outset, not many remain. I had no Bibles, -and was very sorry for it, as, from its being generally -asked for, I am sure I could have sold many copies. -It is gratifying to know that a supply of them may be -expected in the course of a few months; and with -this prospect I have revived the spirits of many -who evidently felt disappointed when I told them -that I had none.</p> - -<p>It is truly a pleasing sight to see so many eagerly -seeking after God; and it cheers the heart of the -poor traveller, as he moves along now through the -woods, now over the mountains, to think that he is -the means of cheering the hearts of others, by -putting into their hands the only book which -can effectually cheer the heart with solid comfort. -I refer you for further particulars regarding -the circulation of the Scriptures to my letters -upon the subject to the British and Foreign Bible -Society.</p> - -<p>Before I speak of the state and progress of education -in Quito, I shall mention two circumstances -which have occurred to me since I left Lima. I -notice these because they are encouraging, as it -respects the progress of education, and because they -tend to prove what I have so often stated to you,—that -there is a very general desire throughout this -country for extending the benefits of education to -all, and with all possible speed. The circumstances -referred to occurred in Truxillo and in Guayaquil.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_220"></a>[220]</span> -In both these places I received proposals from the -magistrates to remain among them, in order to establish -schools on our plan, and to promote the -objects of education in general. In both cases I -had a struggle with my feelings, though not with -my judgment, in declining the honour offered me. -Though my duty bade me pursue my journey, yet, -in consequence of these proposals, I cannot help -taking an additional interest in the progress of education -in the places mentioned; and through the -intercourse that took place upon this subject during -my short stay in these tours, I expect some good -will result, of which I shall afterwards inform -you.</p> - -<p>I come now to speak of the state and prospects of -education in this city. The state of elementary -education here is, at present, very low, but its -prospects are more encouraging. Perhaps you are -aware that the Colombian Government is taking -active measures to extend education over all their -share of South America. Some time ago a Central -School on the Lancasterian plan was established in -Bogotá, the capital. This school was set agoing -by a friar who had been banished from his native -country on account of his then-called revolutionary -principles, and who had learned the system during -his exile. Upon his return to America he established -this school in the capital, which has now existed -two or three years. It is the wish of the government -to put a model school in the capital of each<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_221"></a>[221]</span> -department, and from these schools to send out -masters to all the towns and villages the department -contains. For this purpose the friar I before mentioned, -has lately arrived here, and is getting his -school-room prepared. I have had several conversations -with this individual, and have been -much pleased in observing the very lively interest -he takes in the education of youth, as well as in -the general progress of knowledge throughout his -native country. It is delightful to shake hands -with such persons, and to unite one’s heart with -them wherever they are found. I augur much good -from the establishment and direction of schools by -a person of this character. I do from my heart -wish him great success, and a success equal to the -desires of his own benevolent mind. The Intendant -or Governor of the department is an excellent -man, and very desirous of the progress of -knowledge throughout this quarter. He is urging -forward the school with all diligence; and to -supply the children with books, he has bought of -me 50 New Testaments.</p> - -<p>The next thing I have to notice is of some interest, -and respects female education. You are -aware, that the education of this sex is very -limited in South America. It is so in Quito, as -might be expected. From the consideration that -this is a large place, and the chief city of a large -and populous district of country, I was very desirous -of doing something towards establishing a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_222"></a>[222]</span> -female school or academy here. I spoke to the -Intendant and others upon the subject, and found -them all willing to do whatever was practicable in -carrying into effect such a desirable object. The -plan I proposed was, to send for a well-instructed -person or two from England, in order to establish -at once a school or academy of the best description; -and I promised to do, on my part, all I could -to procure such persons upon my arrival in England. -My proposition was very favourably received, -and a plan was immediately thought of for -carrying it into effect. The want of funds was the -only obstacle that occurred, and where to find them -was the object to which the attention of all was -directed. At length it was discovered that there -was a certain religious house in the city which had -good funds belonging to it. This house is not a -nunnery, though it is somewhat allied to it. It is -what is here called a Beateria; and if one were -called upon to give it a name corresponding to its -nature, it might be called a House of Idleness. -This name, at all events, would suit the character -given me of it by the Intendant. To get this -house and its funds was now the object of consideration, -and a petition to the general government of -Colombia was thought of for that purpose. You -know that respecting a matter of this kind, it is necessary -to interest the female sex themselves in it. -I accordingly spoke with some ladies upon the subject, -and found them very anxious to lend their influence<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_223"></a>[223]</span> -to obtain the object in question. I am -lodged and very kindly treated in the house of the -Marquis de San José, and I wished that the Marchioness -should take the lead in this affair, as a -matter of courtesy on my part, and principally because -she is the person of most influence in the -place. I stated to her the plan proposed, of establishing -a school or academy in the style of those -in England, and was happy to find that she entered -heartily into it. The way ultimately fixed upon -for carrying forward the plan is this: The lady -before mentioned, along with some female friends, -is to draw up a petition to the Intendant, begging -that something may be done for establishing a female -academy in Quito. As soon as this comes -into the Intendant’s hands, he will state his opinion -upon the subject, strongly recommending it, -and pointing out where the funds may be obtained -for the purpose. The petition thus prepared is to -be put into my hands, and I am to have the honour -of laying it before the Vice-President in Bogotá -upon my reaching that city; and such is the interest -taken by the Government in these matters, that I -have no doubt of its complete success.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Quito, 24th November, 1824.</i></p> - -<p>My last letter to you was written from this place, -and dated the 8th current, the day after my arrival.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_224"></a>[224]</span> -I then stated to you what had occurred to me from -Riobamba until my arrival in this city. I shall -now, therefore, proceed to give you an account of -the reception your cause has met with in Quito.</p> - -<p>When I set out from Guaranda on my way to -Riobamba, I left four boxes of New Testaments -behind me, partly because I was going out of the -straight road for Quito, and partly because mules -could not readily be had to carry them. These -boxes I left in the hands of my good friend the -Governor, who kindly undertook to forward them -direct to this city. Upon my arrival here, I found -that these boxes had not arrived, although there was -more than sufficient time. I waited for them with -some impatience, especially as I had disposed of the -contents of those I had brought with me, so that there -remained none in my hands for sale in this place. -During this delay of the New Testaments I had -many inquiries for them, as it had got abroad that -I had brought with me a good supply for this city. -At length a part arrived, when I learned that the -delay was owing to the owner of the mules. I -gave notice publicly of the sale, as I had done in -other places, and in a short time all were sold, -amounting to 137 copies. After these were all -gone, the inquiries after them continued, and I had -to put off the inquirers, with telling them that there -were two more boxes expected every minute. Day -passed on after day without the arrival of these, -until I was beginning a second time to think them<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_225"></a>[225]</span> -lost. Yesterday afternoon, however, they safely -arrived, and as soon as they were opened 80 copies -were paid for and carried off by a highly respected -clergyman. Fifty of these were for the use of the -schools here, and were purchased on account of the -government, agreeably to an order given to that -effect some days previous to their arrival. Twenty-five -of the eighty were purchased at the request of -the Provincial of the Convent of St. Francis, for -the express purpose of putting a copy into the -hands of each friar in the convent. I noticed in -my last the triumph of our cause in the convent of -St. Dominic, in Latacunga, and it affords me no -small pleasure to be able to record what I may -call a triumph of a similar kind, as just mentioned, -regarding the Franciscans in this city. To which I -may add, that the respected clergyman I before -referred to, has orders from, I believe, all the convents -to purchase one, two, or more <em>Bibles</em> for them -at the moment of their arrival. The remaining -five of the above mentioned eighty were for particular -friends.</p> - -<p>I have noticed to you, in my preceding letters, -the desire manifested in the places I have passed -through, for <em>the whole Bible</em>. This desire has also -been manifested in Quito, and in a strong degree. -In order to increase this desire, rather than supply -the wants of these places, I have written to Guayaquil, -directing the fifty Bibles which I formerly -ordered from Lima to that place, to be sent to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_226"></a>[226]</span> -these parts, in due proportions; only ten or twelve -of these will come to this place, and these are -already bespoken. I have also ordered to be sent -to the different towns mentioned in my former -letters, a considerable number of copies of the -small New Testament, and of the Books of Psalms, -Proverbs, &c.; the proportion for Quito is 200 of -the former, and 200 of the latter; these I expect -will meet with a very favourable reception, and -will fall short of the demand for them. I have -thus, you see, distributed the whole of the supply -sent me as mentioned in your last letter, yet this -supply, so distributed, will prove inadequate to the -wants and the demands of these quarters. To meet -this demand, we must have recourse to your <em>second</em> -edition of the Bible, of which you have advised -me, and of which I expect a good supply is already -on the way to Lima. In that city, and also in -Guayaquil, I have given the necessary directions -for sending proper quantities to each place. The -city of Quito is large, and contains upwards of -50,000 inhabitants. It is also surrounded by a -populous country, of which it is the capital and the -centre. On this account I have ordered to it -500 copies of the whole Bible, with a request to -our correspondent in Guayaquil to remit 500 more, -if the wants of the latter place will admit of it. I -have mentioned to you the names of different persons -who offered to manage your concerns in some of -the places I have passed through, and I am happy in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_227"></a>[227]</span> -having it in my power to say, that you have found -a warm friend and an agent here in the Marquis of -San José, a gentleman of the first respectability -in this city, on account of his personal character, -and on account of his large possessions in this -quarter. From this gentleman I have received -every friendly attention during my stay under his -hospitable roof. He allowed me to sell the New -Testaments in his own house, and encouraged his -friends to purchase them. In consequence of his -readiness to take the charge of the Society’s concerns -here, I have ordered the supplies for Quito, -already mentioned, to be forwarded directly to -him. You will also please consider him as your -correspondent for this quarter, and can address to -him accordingly. His address is “Sᵒʳ Manuel de -Larrea, Marques de San José, Quito.” I spoke to -this gentleman, also, regarding the formation of a -Bible Society for the district of Quito, whose seat -should be in that city. Into this matter he entered -fully and cheerfully, and promised to do every -thing in his power to commence and to carry forward -such an establishment, as soon as a suitable -opportunity should offer for doing so. I spoke also -to the Marchioness regarding a Female Bible -Society, and had the pleasure of being assured by -her, that nothing should be wanting on her part to -set such a Society on foot. I have thus endeavoured -to place things in such a state as to induce the -hope that the concerns of the Bible Society will<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_228"></a>[228]</span> -not be neglected here, but carried forward in a -prosperous manner. I should have mentioned -also, that several gentlemen, with whom I conversed -about the circulation of the Scriptures, -and about a Bible Society, much approved of both, -and expressed their readiness to lend their aid -in these matters, I trust these favourable circumstances, -which form an encouraging commencement -in this interesting and populous district, will -be followed by results truly beneficial to all the -inhabitants here, and gratifying to the members -of the British and Foreign Bible Society.</p> - -<p>There is a circumstance indirectly, or rather I -should say directly, connected with our main object, -which I should not omit to state to you. I -carried with me two copies of the late Bishop of -London’s Evidences of Christianity, in Spanish. -These I bought in Lima about the time I set off, -in the expectation of their doing some good in the -course of the journey. I showed this work to -the Marquis, who immediately bought it. This -he eagerly read, and was highly gratified with -its contents. I could have sold the other copy -frequently, but refused to sell it, as I intend to -carry it farther on, and to dispose of it in some -other place. The Marquis lent his copy to several -of his friends, who were also much gratified with -perusing it. From less to more, the interest in -this work was carried, till it was resolved to print -an edition of it in Quito by subscription, and this<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_229"></a>[229]</span> -subscription is to be solely among the ladies. This, -you see, is a feeling very friendly to the cause of -religion, and of the Bible Society. I suppose I -need not to tell you, that a work on the evidences -of the christian religion is not a little wanted in -many parts in this country, as there are many who -are verging towards, or are already gone into, deism. -On this account, as well as on others, it behoves -the friends of Christianity to bestir themselves in -behalf of South America. The present is a -very interesting and also a very critical period for -this country. Much, very much, may be done -at present, through prudent and zealous means, -to instruct and confirm the wavering, and even -perhaps to bring back those who have apostatized -from the faith. If these measures were connected -with means of instruction, as far as can be -done, regarding the true principles and practices of -Christianity, as taught in the Holy Scriptures, a -very plentiful harvest, through the blessing of God, -might be reaped. If it should please the Lord to -spare me, and to enable me to reach my native -land, I trust I shall find many ready to lend their -aid towards such a sacred object.</p> - -<p>P.S.—<i>26th November, 1824.</i>—I have now -disposed of 360 copies of the New Testament -in this city. May the Lord follow with his -abundant blessing this seed which has been sown, -and cause it to bring forth a hundred fold.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_230"></a>[230]</span> -To-day I set off for Popayan, and trust that -<em>He</em> who has preserved me thus far, will continue -to me his blessing to that place, and thence -onwards. I shall endeavour to drop a few seeds -as I go along, and pray that these may fall into -good ground.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Popayan, 1st January, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>You will perceive, by the date of this letter, -that it is a month later than it ought to be, according -to our epistolary agreement. You will -not wonder at this delay, when you consider that -I am in the middle of a long and incommodious -journey. The day on which I should have written -you, I was travelling from Otabalo to Ibarra, -and of course had neither leisure nor convenience -for conversing with you. I now seize the opportunity -of a few days rest which I enjoy in this -city, to write you a few lines.</p> - -<p>You will probably he expecting some account -of the country in which I now am, and through -which I have lately passed. I shall endeavour -to satisfy your curiosity in some measure upon -this point. I shall begin with Guayaquil. That -place contains from 12,000 to 15,000 inhabitants, -and is situated upon a river of the same name. -There are regular tides in the river opposite the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_231"></a>[231]</span> -town, twice in the 24 hours, and the same also -takes place for a considerable distance above the -town. The spot on which the town is built is -very low, being only a very little higher than the -river at the time of high water. The weather here -is very hot, considerably more so than in Lima. -This, together with a low and somewhat marshy -situation, makes the place unhealthy, particularly -in the rainy season. I could not help observing, -however, during the short time I was there, that -the want of cleanliness in the streets, and on -the banks of the river, are circumstances which -contribute, in my opinion, at least one half to the -unhealthiness of the town. This port is the place -on the Pacific which at present affords more -articles of exportation than any other, and every -succeeding year will make it more so. The cocoa -from which the chocolate is made is the principal -article, and of this several ship-loads go annually -to Europe, besides what is used in Peru, Chile, -&c. It is through this place that all the towns, -as far as Quito, are supplied with European goods, -and through this place also should these towns -be supplied with the Holy Scriptures, and with -other works which may contribute to enlighten -and to benefit them with respect to time and to -eternity. I have made arrangements there by -which the Scriptures may be supplied to these -quarters in future.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_232"></a>[232]</span></p> - -<p>The town of Guaranda is high up on the Andes, -and within a few miles of the great Chimborazo. -It enjoys a temperate and healthy climate, notwithstanding -its proximity to the Equator. I need not -state to you the causes of this, as you are well aware -of them. I may, however, say that Chimborazo -exerts a considerable influence in moderating the -heat which might be expected in this quarter. -If you should ask me more particularly what I -think of the climate, I would say, judging from my -own feelings, that it is cold. So I felt it to be, but -that arose partly from my having just come from -a very hot climate. It is curious to observe the -different feelings of two persons met together on -the declivity of the mountains, the one ascending -from Guayaquil, and the other descending from -Quito. If you ask one of them regarding the -climate, or weather, he says it is very cold; and if -you ask the other, he says it is very warm; and so -they respectively feel from the opposite climates -they have come from. Guaranda is situated on the -western side of the western Cordillera of the -Andes. You will observe that the word <i>Andes</i>, is -the general name of all these mountains, and -<i>Cordillera</i> means the high ridge or line of mountains -running nearly north and south. There are -two great cordilleras which extend from Cuenca to -about 100 miles to the north of Popayan. To the -south of Cuenca and to the north of the department<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_233"></a>[233]</span> -of Popayan, one of the Cordilleras disappears. In -going from Guaranda to Riobamba, you first -ascend the western cordillera to the top. On this -<em>top</em> is the <em>base</em> of Chimborazo. The road is close -along the base of the mountain and you would -think you could lay your hand upon it. From -<em>this spot</em> it does not appear a very high mountain, -and the reason is obvious, as this spot itself is at a -great elevation.<a id="FNanchor_5" href="#Footnote_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a> The whole of Chimborazo, except -perhaps, a few yards, is covered with snow—everlastingly -covered. Having reached this top, -you see, for the first time, the eastern cordillera, -vying with the western in height. You then descend -down till you come to Riobamba, which is situated -in a <em>level</em> plain between the two ridges, and at -nearly an equal distance from both. The whole of -my journey, from leaving Riobamba till my arrival -in this city, has been in this great valley, between -the two cordilleras of the Andes. In two days -or three after leaving this place, I will have to -cross the eastern cordillera on my way to Bogotá.</p> - -<p>The two principal towns between Riobamba and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_234"></a>[234]</span> -Quito, are Ambato and Tacunga, and of which I -have spoken in my letters to Mr. B.; the former -may contain 5,000, and the latter 6,000. The -greater part of this population consists of Indians, -who all speak the ancient Peruvian language. -The largest town in the whole of this extensive -valley, between the ridges of the Andes, is Quito. -It is a city of 50,000 inhabitants and upwards, and -will not yield to any city in South America in -point of population, except to Lima and to Buenos -Aires. Its public buildings are much superior to -those of the latter place, and not much inferior to -those of the former. Its site is unfavourable, as it -is placed on an uneven piece of ground.</p> - -<p>In travelling from Quito to Popayan you experience -a great variety of climate. Sometimes -you have the unmitigated heat of the torrid zone; at -another time you might imagine yourself in the -neighbourhood of one of the poles rather than the -equator; and again at other times you have a climate -of the most delightful kind, equally removed -from the extremes of heat and of cold. One of the -coldest nights I passed on the journey, was within -a few yards of the line. You will wonder, -perhaps, at this variety, but I will explain it to -you. Here and there, during the whole course of -this long valley, from Cuenca to Popayan, you -have, rising out of the one cordillera or the other, -an enormous snow-capped mountain. It is evident<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_235"></a>[235]</span> -that the cold reigns uninterrupted on these towering -summits, as the snow, its certain signal, is ever -spread over them. Of course when the wind blows -from these, it temperates (or perhaps somewhat -more) the heat of the sun wherever it passes. -Any place situated near these mountains is necessarily -temperate, or cold. The coldest place in the -whole road, is a place called Tiupuyo, some 20 -miles south of Quito, because there you have -Cotopaxi on the one side, and right opposite on -the other you have Ilinisa, both of which are -always covered with snow. I have thus noticed to -you the cause of the cold, and shall now point out -what is the cause of the heat in those places where -its effects are most felt. Wherever there is a deep -valley with sloping mountains around, and no -towering summits covered with snow, for a considerable -distance, there you have a climate of the -same kind as is met with in the same latitude on -the sea coast. As to the temperate places I have -spoken of, they are always to be met with in the -absence of these snow-covered mountains on the -one hand and the deep valleys on the other. In -these tracts the climate is delightful in the extreme, -all the year round. In none of these parts have -you Spring, Summer, Harvest, and Winter, but -one uniform temperature from one end of the year -to the other. In most of these places there are -periodical times of rain, which form what they call<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_236"></a>[236]</span> -the Winter, whilst the dry season is called Summer. -The farmer there may sow when he chooses, and -may have his harvest in any month of the year; -notwithstanding, however, there is some order attended -to in this respect, but it is not uniform in all -places.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_5" href="#FNanchor_5" class="label">[5]</a> The top of this ridge, or cordillera, cannot be less than -17,000 feet above the level of the sea. On arriving at this -height, I recollected what I had often read of, that persons -at great elevations felt much difficulty in breathing. I resolved -to try the correctness of these accounts: and for this -purpose, I alighted from my horse, and with a heavy great-coat -on, I walked with a quick pace for half an hour. The -result was, I felt not the slightest inconvenience in breathing.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Bogotá, 8th February, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>Since my last communication to you from Quito, -I have had a long, and by no means an agreeable -journey. The distance from Quito to this place -is considerable, the roads are very bad, and in -passing through one district, there is no inconsiderable -danger. On the 29th ultimo, I arrived -safely in this city, and now seize the first opportunity -that offers of writing you a few lines, to -inform you of occurrences in these parts since my -last, of the 26th November.</p> - -<p>I intimated to you in the letter last mentioned, -that it was my intention to drop a few seeds as -I went along, or in other words, to endeavour -to circulate the sacred volume, as opportunities -might offer, in the course of my journey. I accordingly -posted up my notices in those places, -where I stopped for half a day, or upwards. In -these country villages a great sale was not to be -expected. The inhabitants are in general poor,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_237"></a>[237]</span> -and very few of them are addicted to reading. -Some copies, however, were thus put into circulation, -and in such places, and under such circumstances, -I always think much has been done if a -kind of beginning has been made. I shall, in a future -communication, state to you the number sold in -each place, and the respective sums received since -my leaving Lima. I would give you this account -now, were it not that the scantiness of my time -at present will not allow me to extract these notices -from among my notes. I have now disposed of -<em>all</em> the New Testaments I brought with me from -Lima, and those which I found awaiting me in -Guayaquil. I bless the Lord for having counselled -me to undertake this journey, and thus to -put into circulation a considerable number of copies -of his holy word, and which would not likely -have been accomplished, but by means of making -a complete tour through these quarters. I have -thus cause of gratitude to Him who distributeth -his favours to whom he will, for having honoured -me with a share of this angel-work, of communicating -the revelation of God to man. I shall -be glad also to know, that the plan I have taken -meets with the approbation of the Committee of -the British and Foreign Bible Society. I thought -much about this journey before undertaking it, -and prayed much to the Lord to counsel me in -regard to it. And now, looking back over the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_238"></a>[238]</span> -road I have travelled, and reflecting on the number -of copies of the word of life, now in the hands -of many people who had never before seen it, I -feel my heart drawn out in thanksgiving and praise -for all the way by which the Lord hath led me.</p> - -<p>My labours in distributing the sacred volume -on this journey must now terminate, because I -have no more to distribute. In the multitude of -my thoughts within me upon setting off from Lima, -it occurred to me that I might, after reaching this -place, extend my journey in your service to Guatemala, -and from thence overland to Mexico. -Two objects I had in view in reference to this; -the one was the circulation of the Scriptures, and -the other was the procuring translations of the -New Testament into the native languages of those -parts. Of this latter object I wrote you some -time ago. This intended journey, however, must -now be given up, for various reasons. The first -is, because I have no more copies of the Scriptures -to distribute; the second is, because I feel -doubtful if it would meet with your approbation -to incur the expense of travelling through those -parts, with the single object of procuring the -translations referred to; the third reason is, the -happy change which has taken place in Peru, -in the termination of the war there, and which -induces me to visit England as early as possible, -that I may again return to Lima without loss<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_239"></a>[239]</span> -of time, in order to carry on the work of the Lord -there, according to the grace and strength he may -be pleased to afford me. I trust in the Lord that -we shall have an opportunity of seeing each other -face to face, before many months elapse, that -we may talk over all the doings of the Lord, in -making his word to circulate in this country and -in every place, and that we may make arrangements -for benefiting South America yet more extensively.</p> - -<p>I have spoken of the <em>termination</em> of the war -in Peru, and this to me is no small subject of -thanksgiving; for the deliverance of the country -from the Spanish yoke, and the rapid progress -of the Lord’s work, are closely identified. I wrote -you from Guayaquil some months ago respecting -this identification. It was then I gave you an -account of the battle of Junin, and of the very -important effects that followed. I then also ventured -to speak of what were likely to be the ultimate -and no very distant results of that battle. -All these things the Lord hath now brought about, -in scattering those who delight in war and oppression, -and in commanding the destroying sword -to return into its scabbard.—Rest and peace to -this destroying instrument—and for ever! May -it never more be drawn in this country, to cut -in sunder afresh the peace and the progress of -man! I send you an account of this late event -in Peru, which I think will prove interesting to -you and to your friends.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_240"></a>[240]</span></p> - -<p>I expected to find, on my arrival here, a large -supply of Spanish New Testaments, which I -thought you would have found an opportunity -of forwarding to some correspondent in this quarter. -I have spoken with Mr. Henderson, the -British Consul General here, upon the subject, -and he informs me that there are neither Spanish -Bibles nor New Testaments in this city, and that -there is a demand for them. He also informs me, -that he wrote about three months ago to Mr. Dowson, -a correspondent of his, requesting him to forward -some to this place. You will please make inquiry -of Mr. D., who lives in Welbeck Street, if he has -sent any; and in the event of none having been -sent, have the goodness to forward to this city, as -early as possible, a supply of each of your editions -of the Spanish Scriptures. I have talked with -Mr. Henderson upon this subject, and think he -will be a very suitable person to manage your -concerns here, and to correspond with you. He -takes a particular interest in this matter, and desires -me to assure you of his readiness to do all that -lies in his power to forward your good work.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Bogotá, 25th February, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>I have noticed to you, more than once, the very -favourable reception given to the Scriptures in -these parts. I am now to state to you an exception,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_241"></a>[241]</span> -and it is in a quarter where it should not have -been found. The only person whom I found unfriendly -to the circulation of the Scriptures without -notes, in the whole of the journey from Lima to -Bogotá, was the Bishop of Popayan. I have -stated his opposition in gentle terms, for truth requires -it. I heard, soon after putting up the advertisements -for the sale of the New Testaments, -that the Bishop had spoken against the reading of -them. I called upon him to know whether it was -so or not, and to learn what were his objections. I -had visited him before, and had had a visit from him -in return, so that we were, on this second visit, on -terms of a friendly intercourse, and we therefore -entered freely into the subject of the sale and distribution -of the Scriptures. I mentioned to him -what I had heard, and inquired whether I had -been correctly informed. He then told me the -whole of what had occurred upon the subject. -He said, a person who had bought one of the New -Testaments, brought it to him and asked his opinion -as to his using it. The person was a priest, and he -named him to me. The Bishop, upon his opinion -being asked, rose and brought the Acts of the -Council of Trent, and pointed out to the priest the -article there, prohibiting the use of the Scriptures -without notes. He concluded, however, by telling -the priest that <em>he</em> might keep his New Testament -and use it. This, said the Bishop, is all that occurred -upon this matter. He said farther, that it<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_242"></a>[242]</span> -was not his intention to oppose the circulation of -the New Testaments in any other way. If any -person chose to buy them, he would not interfere; -but if any one should ask his opinion upon the matter, -he would refer him to the same article, as his -duty required him to do. I said that I understood -the article in question was as he had stated it, but -that when I considered how many among all ranks -of the catholic clergy made no account of that -article, but freely encouraged the circulation of the -Scriptures among their flocks, I was inclined to -think that the article was qualified by something -subsequent to it, or that it was not generally considered -as in force. He replied to this, that there -was nothing subsequent to alter the force of that -article, but rather to strengthen it, and that whatever -others did, he considered his duty to be, to -follow the rules of the church in that and in all such -matters, as every good Catholic ought to do. I -said that I saw the force of what he said, considering -what were the principles of his faith. I added, -that notwithstanding his reasons, I could not but -be sorry to see any opposition to the circulation of -the Holy Scriptures, a book which God had graciously -given to all, and which should, of course, be -studied by all. I observed, also, that I was fully -persuaded that very great advantages would arise -from a general reading of the word of God, and -from these considerations I conceived it to be my -duty to put them into the hands of all, and to call<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_243"></a>[243]</span> -upon all to read them with serious attention. -“Amen,” replied the Bishop, “I also am of the -same opinion. I am sure that it would be advantageous -to all to read the Scriptures, but then let -them be read with the necessary directions. If -Bibles and New Testaments were to come here -with the notes, I would be the first to promote their -circulation.” Our conversation was extended a -good deal further upon this subject, and embraced -the usual topics of this question, but which it is -unnecessary here to repeat.</p> - -<p>I am labouring what I can to establish a Bible -Society here, and it is that alone which keeps me -longer in this city. I am not yet sure whether I -shall succeed or not, but my next letter will inform -you.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Bogotá, 1st March, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>My last letter to you was written from Popayan -on the 1st of January. I informed you at -that time of some of the circumstances that occurred -to me in the way, and gave you some account -of the peculiar situation of the country from -Guayaquil to Quito. I shall now resume this description, -which I was obliged to break off abruptly -in my last. I remained about three weeks in -Quito, experiencing the kindest attentions from -many friends. The remembrance of my short stay<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_244"></a>[244]</span> -in that place will always be agreeable. Thanks be -to God for providing me friends in every quarter, and -may they all be fully rewarded for all their kindness. -I had several very interesting conversations -with the Rector, and with some of the Professors of -the College in that city, upon religious subjects; -and one of the Professors who understands English -begged me to let him have, at any price, two works -I carried with me. These were Jones’s Biblical -Cyclopedia and Stewart’s Philosophy of the Human -Mind. He said that if I could not spare both -works, he particularly wished for the first, as being -in the line of his profession as a clergyman, and -because he wished to examine the subject of -religion, not merely from their own writers, but -from ours also. I let him have both of them, with -which he was much gratified. These gentlemen -belonging to the College, whom I have just referred -to, manifested an excellent and liberal spirit -in regard to the improvements necessary in their -mode of education in the seminary to which they -belong. There are about 300 students in this -college.</p> - -<p>Nothing very material occurred in the journey -from Quito until arriving at the province of Pastos. -This province has been for a long time past in a -very unsettled state. It has repeatedly raised the -standard of rebellion against the existing Government, -and has as often been reduced to subjection -by the force of arms. At each time it has suffered<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_245"></a>[245]</span> -severely, and at present it resembles a deserted -country; the finest fields and pastures are met with, -without a single head of cattle. This province is -still but ill at rest, and may be said to be subdued -and reduced, rather than tranquillized. A proof of -that is to be found in the banditti which exist in it. -At the time we passed, there were three or four of -these parties in different places, and one of them -consisted of one hundred men. On arriving at -Tulcan, which is about three days journey from the -city of Pasto, the capital of the province, we had to -take with us a guard of ten men. We passed from -Tulcan to Pasto, without meeting with any enemy. -But from what we heard afterwards, we may consider -ourselves as having made a providential escape, -as there was a party of 16 men seen in these -quarters, a few days after we passed. In the city -of Pasto, there is constantly kept a body of about -a thousand men; some of these are employed in -searching out and in persecuting these banditti; -and some of them are employed in escorting the -mail and travellers from that to the province of -Popayan. The Governor of Pasto gave us an -escort of forty men, and which was judged necessary -from the general state of the province, and from -a recent occurrence. This occurrence was the -assault and murder of a merchant travelling from -Popayan to Pasto, notwithstanding his having an -escort of twelve men with him. The soldiers we -brought with us behaved very well; we kept a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_246"></a>[246]</span> -good look out, and mounted our centinels every -night, particularly in that spot where the murder -was committed, and where we passed the night. -Had we fallen in with any of these parties we -would have been hardly put to it, and had we -been worsted, we should certainly not have escaped -with life. From this, however, and from every -other danger on the journey, the Lord delivered -us. For all these mercies, I feel my heart stirred -up with gratitude and thanksgiving, and I feel a -desire more than ever to devote my whole life to -the service of God, and to the service of mankind.</p> - -<p>I have already stated to you the unquiet state of -the Province of Pastos, and its desolateness in -consequence. The City of Pasto, the capital, -affords also a melancholy proof of this desolation. -Its population has been reduced from 15,000, to, -perhaps, not more than 4000, and in every street -you meet with numbers of houses waste and uninhabited, -with all the wood of the doors and windows -torn out, and which was used by the military -for firewood. You are not to consider this revolutionary -spirit as extending throughout the country, -but as confined exclusively to that province.</p> - -<p>Upon my arriving at Popayan, I found there an -English medical gentleman, of the name of Wallis, -who has been upwards of twenty years in the -country. Dr. Wallis shewed me much kindness; -he was very friendly to the circulation of the Scriptures, -and aided me therein as much as he could.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_247"></a>[247]</span> -The number sold there was very small, considering -the size of the place, on account of some little opposition -from the Bishop, of which I have spoken -in one of my letters to Mr. B. The topography -of Popayan is worth noticing. It is situated -in a very large plain, called the valley of Cauca. -It is by far the largest plain in those quarters, the -Cordilleras separating farther from each other there -than in any other part, and the space between them -is, in general, even, or nearly so. It is watered by -a beautiful river, called Cauca. The population in -the whole valley is exceedingly small, considering -its size and fertility. There is little doubt, I think, -but it will one day become a place of great population -and importance. Its climate is healthy and -delightful, with an everlasting summer, and its productions, -taking one part with another include -every thing, from wheat to the sugar-cane. There -is no part of Colombia which I have yet seen, nor, -perhaps, of America, in which I could wish to live -in preference to Popayan.</p> - -<p>No part of South America, I believe, has felt -more severely the effects of the revolutionary war -than the city of Popayan and its neighbourhood. -The city was taken and retaken, I believe, fourteen -times, and there is scarcely an individual in it who -has not a long tale of woes to relate, either of -himself or of his friends. It has now enjoyed peace -for some time, and is beginning to regain its former<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_248"></a>[248]</span> -state, but years of tranquillity are necessary to -restore it fully. There is a mint here, which coins -annually about one million of dollars, of the gold -of Chocó, and from the mines of the province of -Popayan. There is also coined there twenty -thousand dollars of silver. The Director of the -Mint is a gentleman of the name of Pombo, a -literary man, and who has published two or three -elementary works for schools, of considerable -value.</p> - -<p>From Popayan to Bogotá there are two roads -across the cordillera, but the one to the south is -the best. This is called the Pass of Guanacos, -and lies nearly east of Popayan; the other is called -Quindiu, and lies to the north. The cold on the -top of the mountain is generally pretty keen. The -ascent from Popayan is gradual, but the descent -on the other side is rapid, and you pass quickly -from a very cold climate to a hot one. It is a -frightful road in some places. You have frequently -to ascend and descend very steep places on this -side of the mountain, from the many deep glens -made by the rivers which you pass. You may be -said to be riding up stairs and down stairs in these -places, and in several of them it is literally so. -The mules are wonderfully steady, being accustomed -to these roads, so that they very seldom slip. Some -years ago an Italian doctor, passing that way, was -so frightened with the going down these stairs, that<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_249"></a>[249]</span> -he mounted his mule the reverse way, with his face -backwards, and then leaned him down flat upon -the mule. This attitude, together with his three-cocked -hat and queue, afforded no little diversion -to the muleteers who conducted him. This -kind of road continues till you come to the town of -La Plata, and after that you have a much better -road, the greater part of which is in the great valley -of the river Magdalena, and one of its contributaries. -The usual stages or places where you -hire mules, on the way between Popayan and -Bogotá are, La Plata, Neiva, and La Mesa. In -most places the mules are scarce, on account of the -great number of these animals destroyed by the -war. At proper distances on the road there are -houses called Tambos, which are the inns of the -place. These houses consist of a roof erected -upon poles, and without any walls, so that they -afford shelter from the rain, but not from the wind -and the cold. The town of La Plata is pleasantly -situated on the banks of a river of the same name, -on the first lowlands after getting out from the -great mountains. There is a great deal of fertile -land about the place, affording a great variety of -productions, including the sugar-cane, but these -fertile lands are almost all lying waste. The river -La Plata, about ten miles below the town, joins -the river Paez, a river on the banks of which we -travelled a good deal, and across which we passed<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_250"></a>[250]</span> -repeatedly. The La Plata and the Paez are -nearly of the same size, and make a fine stream -when united. When these two streams unite, the -whole goes by the name of Paez. After travelling -two days on the banks of the Paez, we saw it -fall into the Magdalena, and lose its name there.—From -the town of La Plata the heat begins, and -when you reach the Magdalena it is very great, -and continues so all along the banks of the river. -This is decidedly the hottest place I ever was in. -The thermometer every day rose to 97½, and remained -there two or three hours together. I was -in a constant state of perspiration during the 24 -hours, except, perhaps, from 2 o’clock in the morning -till 8. This was the only respite, if respite it -might be called. At Neiva we left the road and -the mules, and took to the river, down which we -went for some days. From Neiva to Honda the -river is navigable in what are called balsas. The balsa -consists of long poles or trunks of trees laid close to -each other, with others laid over then cross-wise, and -again, above this row, or above an additional one, -is a kind of flooring, made of the bamboo flattened -out. The wood of which these balsas are made is -exceedingly light, and very well adapted for the use. -In this vessel there is not a single nail used, nor -a single rope. The poles are tied together with -what are called bejucos, which is a species of -plant that grows abundantly in these quarters,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_251"></a>[251]</span> -and resembles a rope in length and thickness. -With these, which are of all sizes, the whole work -of nails and ropes is performed. Over the balsa -is raised a roof, thatched with what the wood -affords. This protects the luggage as well as the -passengers from the rain. In this rude vessel -we passed some days and some nights, sailing -when we had light, and at night fastened by one -of these ropes to a tree. The river was very shallow -at the time we passed, so that we frequently -got aground in the middle of the stream, at which -time our boatmen, or bogas as they are called, -had to get into the water and push us along. There -was another evil of a worse kind which we had -to encounter, namely, the trunks of trees sunk -deep in the bottom of the river, sometimes appearing -above the water, and sometimes not. It requires -a good deal of dexterity to steer among these -at times, as the current perhaps draws you straight -to them. Against one of these sunken trees we -drove one day, and fortunately broke it with the -blow. The shock pitched our bogas into the -river in a moment, but they were immediately -again on board. This blow, however, broke -some of our wooden ropes, and we were under the -necessity of fastening ourselves to a tree till we -got repaired. The bogas got into the wood, and -got, quite at hand, other ropes of a similar kind, -cut them down, repaired the bark, and in an<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_252"></a>[252]</span> -hour’s time we were again at sea. The general -landing place for travellers for Bogotá, is not as -far down as Honda, but at a place called Fusagasugá. -Here you leave the river, and begin -to ascend the hills, and afterwards the mountains, -and sensibly to change your climate from extreme -heat to temperature, but a temperature which, -under these circumstances, feels quite cold. On the -last day’s travel to this place, we began early in the -morning to ascend the mountain by a steep and -rugged road, closely wooded on both sides. We -kept ascending till about noon, when we reached -the top, and the wood disappeared. Here I expected -we would have had, as usual, to descend -again, but quite otherwise. On the top of this -mountain is a large beautiful plain, and at the -farther end of it stands the city of Bogotá.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="right"><i>Bogotá, 5th April, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>I had the pleasure of writing you on the 25th -of February last, and of giving you an account of -those places, in which the Holy Scriptures were -distributed in the course of my journey. I noticed -to you at the same time, the only instance -I met with of opposition to the circulation of -the Scriptures without notes. I also informed -you of my endeavours to bring about the establishment<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_253"></a>[253]</span> -of a Bible Society in this city. By the last -packet for England, I sent you a copy of No. 29 -of “The Constitutional,” a newspaper published -in this place, and which contained an advertisement -relative to the subject in question. By that advertisement, -you would see that something was -doing in the matter, and from the respectability -of the gentlemen who are there mentioned, you -would perceive that we had met with some valuable -supporters, and that there was a prospect -held forth of succeeding in this object. I now -send you Nos. 30, 31, and 32, of the same paper, -which will point out to you the different steps -we have taken, and you will be able to notice -also the progressive encouragement we obtained. -You will perceive by the two last numbers that -our Society at length obtained a fair and firm establishment. -I say a <em>fair</em> establishment, because -the whole of our transactions were done in open -day, and because all who wished to state their -objections were not only permitted, but encouraged -to do so. Our meeting on the 24th was -very well attended, and consisted of the most -respectable class of the community in this city, both -clergy and laity. We had, on that occasion, a -very warm and interesting discussion of the point -in question. A professor in one of the colleges -was the first who spoke, a man of very respectable -talents, and commendable for his Christian virtues, -but withal full of Catholic prejudices. This gentleman<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_254"></a>[254]</span> -opposed our object, as being contrary to the -acts of the general councils of the church, and as -being injudicious and hurtful, especially under present -circumstances. The next who spoke was the -very respectable rector of the principal college -of this city. In this gentleman we met with a -warm friend to our Institution, and we had the -pleasure of hearing him reply to the objections -of the preceding speaker. Both these individuals -are clergymen. The next who spoke was also a -clergyman, a well known and eloquent preacher -in this place, a man full of zeal, and who adorns -his profession by a very exemplary conduct. This -gentleman opposed our plans, as the first speaker -had done, and even went farther, and said, that -under existing circumstances, he considered it -improper to have a general circulation of the -Scriptures, even with the notes affixed. This last -observation relieved us a little, in respect to the -opposition we met with from this individual, as -it was plain that, as a Catholic, he proved too -much, and thus overshot his mark, and injured -his cause, inasmuch as he carried things farther -than either the Pope or the Council of Trent. This -ended our opposition, or at least finished the list -of our opponents, for no other individual present -spoke on that side of the question. The gentleman, -however, who had spoken first, was so full upon -his subject, that he rose again and again to advocate -his cause, until it was necessary to reply<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_255"></a>[255]</span> -to him from the chair as to order, and to the giving -an opportunity to others to speak as well as himself. -Several gentlemen spoke in succession, and -warmly advocated the cause of the Bible Society -in general, and pointed out to the meeting the -consistency of the object of the Society to be established, -with the laws and customs of the people -of Colombia, and stating at the same time -the great advantages that would certainly arise -to their country, from a general circulation and -reading of the word of God, not encumbered with -notes, but in its own native simplicity, as it was -delivered by the Almighty to mankind. The two -Ministers of Government who were present, Mr. -Gual, and Mr. Castillo, very ably, and at considerable -length, defended and supported the -object of the Society, and pointed out that there -was nothing of a clandestine nature in the establishment -of this Institution, but that it had the full -and open approbation of the Executive Government -of the country, and also of the ecclesiastical -authorities.</p> - -<p>After our plans respecting the Society had -thus been clearly and openly stated to the assembly, -and nothing kept back, and after we had -heard all that was to be said in support of its -adoption in Colombia, and also the objections -urged against it, the sense of the meeting was -taken by vote. The question put amounted to -this: Is it compatible with our laws and customs,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_256"></a>[256]</span> -as Colombians, and as of the Roman Catholic -church, to establish a Colombian Bible Society -in this capital as a national Society, and whose -only object is to print and circulate the Holy -Scriptures, in approved versions, in our native -tongue; and does such a Society meet with the -approbation of this assembly? This question was -triumphantly carried in the affirmative, and almost -unanimously.</p> - -<p>I need not tell you how much pleasure I enjoyed -in witnessing this triumph, nor how many anxieties -previously entertained respecting the result of -these meetings, were at once laid asleep, or were -changed into that tranquillity, that peace and joy, -which arise from seeing the name of the Lord -glorified among men. I know you will participate -in the same feelings, and will hail the establishment -of this Society as a new era in South -America. See here one of the happy effects of -the political revolution! and it is but one of many, -some of which are already visible, and the rest -come on in their natural order and beauty. Blessed -be God, who doeth all things according to the -counsel of his own will, who maketh the wrath -of man to praise him, and who in due time saith -to the wars, as to the winds and the waves, peace, -be still! and thus leaving us in the midst of the -calm, to exclaim, Who is a God like unto our -God, who bringeth order out of confusion, and -who maketh waters to spring up in the wilderness, -and streams to flow in the desert.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_257"></a>[257]</span></p> - -<p>Our last meeting to <em>establish</em> the Society was held -yesterday afternoon, and consisted of those who -had subscribed as members of this Institution. -The President, Vice Presidents, the Treasurer, -and Secretaries, were chosen at this meeting, and -you will find their names in the paper, No. 32, I -now send you. These gentlemen, you will see, -are of the most respectable inhabitants of this -place, and this gives at once a tone and a stability -to our Society. Besides the preceding office-bearers, -there was chosen a Committee, consisting -of twenty, one half clergymen and the other half -laymen. The gentlemen elected into the Committee, -are also of the same highly respectable -class as those whose names you have mentioned in -the paper. It is intended to publish, as soon as -possible, an account of the origin and actual state -of the Society. Along with this will be published -the Rules and Regulations adopted, the names of -the office-bearers and committee, and a list of subscribers. -To all of which will be added a short -address to the people of South America, upon the -object and the advantages of the Society. I have -much pleasure in saying that the subscriptions -already amount to 1380 dollars. I should not -omit to mention to you, that all the meetings upon -this matter have been held in the chapel of the -University, which is in the principal Dominican -Convent of this city. The Rector of the University -and the Prior of the Convent have been<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_258"></a>[258]</span> -and are our very warm friends and supporters. -With the former the subscription paper lies, and -is daily obtaining additional subscribers. One of -our secretaries is also a Dominican Friar, is secretary -to the University, and formerly filled the office -of secretary in the district tribunal of the Inquisition -of this quarter. It is this gentleman who has -written all the articles in the Newspaper about the -Society, and what you read in the English part is -merely a translation from the same article in -Spanish, as written by him.<a id="FNanchor_6" href="#Footnote_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a></p> - -<p>I have now to say a few words respecting the -conduct on this occasion of Mr. Gual, Secretary of -State for Foreign Affairs, and now President of -the Bible Society of Colombia. I wish to speak -of the conduct of this gentleman in the highest -terms, and in doing so, feel that I am not using the -voice of flattery and adulation, but complying with -the precept of rendering to every one his due. It -is an act of injustice to withhold the praise that is -due to any one, when a proper occasion offers of -mentioning it. I had occasion to call upon him -at different times, in regard to the preliminary -steps for setting the Society on foot, and notwithstanding -the hurry of business in his public situation, -I always found him ready to spend a few -minutes in listening to the propositions made to him<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_259"></a>[259]</span> -as to our mode of acting in this matter. He also -cheerfully attended and presided at all our meetings, -and constantly defended, with much judgment -and eloquence, the glorious work of circulating the -Holy Scriptures in their natural beauty, in every -corner of his native land, over all this continent, -and finally throughout the world.</p> - -<p>Mr. Castillo, the Minister of Finance, also -warmly advocated our cause, and these two gentlemen, -as well as the Minister of the Interior, have -given 50 dollars each by way of donation, and are, -besides, annual subscribers of 20 dollars each. -The Vice-President has also given us a donation -and his subscription of 24 dollars.</p> - -<p>I have much pleasure in noticing to you that -Colonel Hamilton, H. B. M. Commissioner to this -Government, and Mr. Henderson, the British Consul-General, -have lent the influence of their names -and of their purses to the forwarding of our Society. -Colonel Campbell also, the British Chargé -d’Affaires, just arrived in time to be present at our -last meeting, and both he and Mr. Henderson -were chosen members of the committee.</p> - -<p>I have requested Mr. Gual to write a few lines -to Lord Teignmouth, by way of introducing our -new Society to a friendly correspondence with that -great and venerable Society over which he has so -long presided, with so much honour to himself, and -with much advantage to mankind. I expect -Mr. Gual’s letter to-morrow, and shall forward it<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_260"></a>[260]</span> -with this. He is going also to write a few lines -in order to begin a correspondence with the American -Bible Society.</p> - -<p>I have now been detained in this city considerably -longer than I expected upon my arrival here, -but I have the satisfaction of thinking, that my -stay has been prolonged in the forwarding of a -good work. I now set off immediately, and expect -soon to have the pleasure of seeing the friends of -the Redeemer’s cause in the United States; and -not very long after, if the Lord will, I hope once -more to behold my native land, and to salute there -my friends and brethren in Christ Jesus.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_6" href="#FNanchor_6" class="label">[6]</a> These articles from the newspaper are added at the end -of this letter, as descriptive of the state of the country in -regard to these matters.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p><i>Articles regarding the Formation of a Bible Society -in Bogotá, extracted from “The Constitutional,” -a weekly Newspaper published in that City, in -Spanish and English.</i></p> - -<p class="right"><i>17th March, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>On the 15th instant, at half-past five in the afternoon, -a public meeting took place in the Chapel of the University -of this city, at which were present Dr. Pedro -Gual, Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs; Dr. Antonio -Malo, Member of the Senate; Dr. Joaquin Gomez -and Dr. Mariano Miño, Members of the Chamber of -Representatives; Dr. Jose Maria Estevez, Rector of -the College of San Bartolomé; Father Joaquin Galvez, -Rector of the University; Father Mariano Garnica, -Prior of the Dominican Convent; Dr. Nicolas Quebedo;<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_261"></a>[261]</span> -and the Secretary of the University. The meeting -was assembled at the instance of Mr. Thomson, -Agent of the British and Foreign Bible Society, with -the view of establishing a Bible Society in Colombia. -The Rules for the proposed Society were read, and after -some observations from Sr. Gual, it was resolved unanimously -to call a general meeting on Sunday next, the -20th instant, at four o’clock in the afternoon, in the -same place, in order to take into consideration the advantages -or inconveniences of such an establishment in -Colombia; to obtain the general consent for the incorporation -of a Society similar to that which has been the -source of so many spiritual benefits to the human race -in Europe, Asia, and Africa; and of which a correct -idea will be given to the public by means of the press. -In the mean time, it is distinctly stated, that the sole and -exclusive object of this Society is the dissemination of -the Holy Scriptures throughout the world.</p> - -<p class="right"><i>24th March, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>On Sunday last, the 20th instant, the meeting took -place which was advertised in the <span class="smcap">Constitutional</span> of -last week, for the purpose of establishing this valuable -and important Institution. Upon this occasion eloquent -and appropriate speeches were delivered by Sres. Gual, -Castillo, and Herrera; and, after a debate of considerable -length, it was agreed to convene a general meeting, -by means of circulars, for this day, (Thursday,) at four -o’clock in the afternoon. The principal object of this -invitation is to place the basis of the Society on the -most permanent and respectable foundation; to hear -the opinions, and be benefited by the judgment of the -gentlemen who may assemble; and to determine definitively<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_262"></a>[262]</span> -upon what may appear most suitable and in -conformity to the state and relations of Colombia. By -the blessing of Heaven we hope to see accomplished the -desires of those who have devoted their wisdom and -love of their country to the promotion of so benevolent -an undertaking.—We will have the pleasure of publishing -a report of the speeches delivered on the occasion, -also the rules and regulations of the Society, together -with the objections that may be urged against it.</p> - -<p class="right"><i>31st March, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>At length the setting on foot of this establishment has -been obtained, and its advantages will soon be known -to those who are alike the friends of the religion of -Jesus Christ, and of the true enlightening of the people. -Endeavours were made to bring together all the principal -persons of this city, by issuing upwards of 300 -cards of invitation; and notwithstanding the smallness -of the Chapel of the University, there assembled in it -two-thirds of those invited. It is our intention to publish -the speeches then made, together with the discourses -offered us by some gentlemen who had not time -to deliver them upon that occasion. This we promise -to do with the greatest correctness possible. The opposition -which has been made to this beneficent Institution -by sinister interpretations of its object, is not to be wondered -at, nor that strife of opinion which has already -been manifested upon this important subject. It is, -however, strange that any public writer should have -said that it would be better to print two millions of -copies of the Catechism, (the only book of instruction -afforded to the people by our old oppressors,) than to -print and circulate the Holy Bible. It is not suitable<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_263"></a>[263]</span> -in itself, nor is it consistent with our upright motives -to excite contention. The exclusive object of the Bible -Society which has been established in Colombia is, to -facilitate to all Colombians the reading of the divine -word, in our own native tongue, from approved versions, -such as that of Father Scio, or that of the celebrated -Torres Amat, which has just been published in -Madrid with all the necessary licences: and this object -will be accomplished without in any degree infringing -upon the Articles of the Council of Trent. If this plan -draw forth opposition—if this object is capable of producing -bitter and extemporaneous censures, then we -will be under the necessity of classing the people of -Colombia with the most uncivilized people of the world. -This Bible Society has been established with the consent -and approbation of the most distinguished persons, -actually entrusted with the Executive Government of -the Republic, and the Ecclesiastical Government of the -Archbishopric, to whom it belongs exclusively and -without dispute to watch over the spiritual and temporal -happiness of the people, and whose fidelity none without -injustice can call in question.</p> - -<p class="right"><i>7th April, 1825.</i></p> - -<p>On the 4th current there assembled in the Chapel -of the University, those Foreigners and Colombians who -have so generously contributed to the formation of this -establishment, and whose names will be furnished upon -another occasion. Rules and Regulations for this Society -were read, and were unanimously approved of as -the laws of its organization. In conformity to these -Rules, the subscribers proceeded to the election of President,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_264"></a>[264]</span> -Vice-Presidents, Treasurer, and Secretaries, -when the following gentlemen were duly elected.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>President.</i></p> - -<p class="center">Don <span class="smcap">Pedro Gual</span>, Secretary of State for Foreign -Affairs.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>First Vice-President.</i></p> - -<p class="center">Don <span class="smcap">Jose Maria Castillo</span>, Minister of Finance.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Second Vice-President.</i></p> - -<p class="center">Doctor <span class="smcap">Jose Maria Estevez</span>, Prebendary, and Rector -of the College of St. Bartholomew.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Third Vice-President.</i></p> - -<p class="center">Doctor <span class="smcap">Juan Fernandez de Sotomayor</span>, Rector of -the College del Rosario.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Treasurer.</i></p> - -<p class="center">Don <span class="smcap">Jose Sans de Santa Maria</span>, Senator, and Comptroller -of the department of Cundinamarca.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Secretaries.</i></p> - -<p class="center">Father <span class="smcap">Antonio Marco Gutierres</span>, Secretary of the -University.</p> - -<p class="center">Doctor <span class="smcap">R. N. Cheyne</span>.</p> - -<p>In the same manner the members present proceeded -to vote for a Committee consisting of twenty individuals, -one half of whom are Clergymen. The Society -wished to place among its principal office-bearers the -virtuous and worthy Governor of the Archbishoprick; -but this gentleman, with his accustomed moderation, -declined this honour, and very properly noticed, that -the third article of the Rules reserved to the Ordinary -of each diocese, the right of examining the edition of -the Holy Scriptures that should be published by the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_265"></a>[265]</span> -Society, in conformity with the decrees of the councils; -and that the exercise of this power would prevent him, -as Governor of this diocese, from accepting of the honour -that this respectable Society wished to confer -upon him.</p> - -<p>It was then resolved on to print, as soon as possible, -in the form of a pamphlet, the speeches made at the last -meeting, the Rules and Regulations of the Institution, -a list of subscribers, and the transactions of the Society. -It was also agreed upon that the advertisements of -the Society should be made through “the <span class="smcap">Constitutional</span>,” -in consequence of its Editors having cheerfully -employed their pages in promoting this Society. -Finally, it was agreed on that the Subscription List -should lie with the Rector of the University, at whose -apartments all who wish to subscribe, may have an opportunity -of doing so, on any day from eight to nine -o’clock in the morning.</p> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="center"><i>To the Committee of the British and Foreign School -Society.</i><a id="FNanchor_7" href="#Footnote_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a></p> - -<p class="right"><i>London, 25th May, 1826.</i></p> - -<p class="noindent">Gentlemen,</p> - -<p>Agreeable to your wishes I sit down to give -you a sketch of the progress, and of the actual -state of education in South America. I shall -begin at Buenos Aires, and shall take the different -states in the order in which I travelled through<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_266"></a>[266]</span> -them. When I left Buenos Aires, in May 1821, -there were eight schools for boys in that city, supported -by the magistrates, and all of them conducted, -more or less, on your system. There were, -I think, about as many more schools in the small -villages around the city. These were also under -the care of the magistrates, but had not been put -upon your system at the time mentioned. I had -visited some of them for the purpose of organizing -them upon this plan, but the never-ending revolutions -of that unhappy period, prevented the -proper measures from being carried into effect for -their improvement.</p> - -<p>Upon my leaving Buenos Aires, the schools were -put under the direction of a very respectable -clergyman, who, I thought, would conduct them -with much advantage, but, from his not being well -acquainted with the system, or from his being peculiar -in the application of it, the schools did not -improve, but rather grew worse. This state of -things lasted for several months, until the Society, -which had been formed some time before my leaving -that place, becoming re-organized, and arousing -from its lethargy, began to take a particular interest -in forwarding education according to this -system. Much was done through this means; and, -I am happy to say, that I have lately heard that -the Society continues its useful exertions, and is -likely to become more efficient from year to year. -As you wish me to mention some individual or individuals -in the different countries in South America<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_267"></a>[267]</span> -with whom you could advantageously correspond -in furtherance of your Christian object, -universal education, I give you here the name -of the Secretary to the above-mentioned Society, -Don Bartolomé Muñoz. This individual is a -clergyman of great respectability, he possesses a -spirit of active benevolence, and is a warm friend -to education. With this gentleman you may correspond -with great advantage to the furtherance of -your object; and I am sure it will afford much -satisfaction to the individual mentioned, and to the -rest of the Society, to hear from you, and to labour -with you in this good cause.</p> - -<p>I am not sure whether I mentioned to you in my -letters from Buenos Aires, the circumstances of -the meetings at the first formation of this Society, -being held in the chief Franciscan convent of that -city. This is worth mentioning, as it shows the -liberality of priests and friars on the subject of -education. The Provincial of the order, Don -Hipólito Soler, lived in this convent, and was -very friendly indeed to our object. The uniform -kindness and courtesy which I experienced in my -many calls upon him in his cell, I shall never -forget. The Prior of the convent was also very -friendly. To the list of our excellent friends among -the priests, I must not omit the highly respected -Dean of Buenos Aires, Don Diego de Zavaleta. -The nephew of this gentleman, Don Ramon Anchorez, -was also a very particular friend, and often<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_268"></a>[268]</span> -encouraged me to go forward when obstacles lay in -the way.</p> - -<p>I have mentioned the labours of the Society in -promoting Schools in that city. I must also -mention, and very particularly, that the interest -taken by the government, under the direction of -Don Bernardino Rivadavia, greatly contributed to -carry forward this noble object. The labours of -the gentleman now mentioned, in instructing his -countrymen in true political wisdom, by precept and -by example, and his exertions in forwarding the -cause of knowledge and general education, have -mainly contributed to give to Buenos Aires, (what -it indisputably enjoys) the first rank among the new -American states. His name will ever be associated -with the happiest part of the revolution of -that country; and he will long be looked upon as -its best benefactor. Accounts have just reached -London, that this gentleman has been recently -elected President of the United Provinces of the -Rio de la Plata, an honour justly due to him as -the regenerator of their independence of Spain, and -of their dependance upon each other. We may, I -think, fairly augur, that much good will be done -in the advancement of education by this individual -throughout the various provinces of the Union, at -the head of which he is now placed. I think a -letter of congratulation from the Society is justly -due to him, and, from what I know of his sentiments, -I have no doubt of his readily acceding to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_269"></a>[269]</span> -any plans the Society might suggest for the establishing -of schools throughout the provinces.</p> - -<p>Through the means above stated, the number of -schools has greatly increased in Buenos Aires since -I left it. The Rev. Mr. Armstrong, in a letter -lately received by the Bible Society, reckons them -to amount to about <em>one hundred</em>, and thinks they -may contain about <em>five thousand</em> scholars. In the -letter now referred to, Mr. Armstrong states, that -he had presented 500 New Testaments to these -schools on the part of the British and Foreign -Bible Society, and he expresses a hope that this -precious volume is likely to be generally used in all -the schools before long.</p> - -<p>At the time I left Buenos Aires, there was a -very good girls’ school, on the British system, containing -120 scholars. I have not heard particularly -of this school since that time, but hope it continues -to prosper as it then did. The person who organized -this school was Don José Catalá, a native -of Spain, and a zealous promoter of education. -This gentleman was the first who studied the system -at our schools in Buenos Aires. He was afterwards -appointed to be master of the central school, -and continued in that situation until a few weeks -before I left that place.</p> - -<p>I mentioned to you, in some of my letters, that I -had paid a visit to Monte Video, where I was kindly -received by the first ecclesiastic of that place, Don -Damaso Antonio de Larañaga, a priest of a liberal -and enlightened mind, and a friend to education.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_270"></a>[270]</span> -This gentleman laid the subject of the establishment -of schools on the British system before the -magistrates, and, in consequence, I was authorized -to send a master to them, who was to receive a -salary of 1200 dollars a-year, whilst engaged in -establishing and superintending the schools. The -person most qualified for this undertaking was -Don José Catalá, already mentioned. He was, -accordingly, sent there with a supply of the necessary -articles for making a commencement. I received, -whilst in South America, different letters -respecting his progress, which was at first slow on -account of the war in which that place was involved, -and the scarcity of funds consequent upon -it. Afterwards he was enabled to get on better. -The last letter I had from him is encouraging, of -which I shall give an extract:—</p> - -<p>“The school which I formed here has produced -upwards of eighty children well instructed in elementary -education. These have given satisfaction -to those best qualified to judge, and to the public -in general, in two public examinations which have -taken place. The number of children now in the -school is 208. Two years ago, I formed a private -school upon the Lancasterian system. It contains -at present forty children belonging to the best families -of this city, who pay for each child six -dollars a quarter. The master of this school is a -young man of excellent talents, and of good conduct. -He attended the central school for a whole -year, in order to learn the system well, and to approve<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_271"></a>[271]</span> -himself capable of conducting a school upon -these principles. He expected to be employed in -one of the schools which the magistrates were -about to establish, but as it was impossible for them -to carry forward their purpose, owing to the disturbances -of the times, I advised him to establish a -private school. The young man had not means to -do this, as he was the son of a poor widow. The -Society, however, gave him lessons, slates, and -pencils, and Mr. Noble gave him the wood to -make the seats and desks. Thus provided, he -offered to instruct, under the auspices of the Society, -and by my direction,—elementary education, -and also the principles of geometry, trigonometry, -and geography, and to hold a public examination -of his pupils every year. I am happy to inform -you that the children are making very great progress, -owing to the steadiness and fidelity of the -master, and to the six well instructed monitors -whom I sent him from the other school, each -of whom knows more than any of the masters of -this place.</p> - -<p>“I am sorry to inform you that the master of -the central school died about three weeks ago. In -consequence of this misfortune, I have been -obliged to take the school into my own hands until -another master be appointed.</p> - -<p>“I mentioned to you, in a former letter, that I -had organized Mrs. Hyne’s school in Buenos Aires -on the Lancasterian system, with this peculiarity -in the arrangement, that the children are taught<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_272"></a>[272]</span> -in English one day, and in Spanish the other; as -she has scholars who speak these languages respectively, -I sent her some of the lessons printed -here for the use of her school.”</p> - -<p>The school here referred to is kept by an English -lady, and was just beginning when I left Buenos -Aires. It was afterwards fully established on your -system as above mentioned. I have had frequent -information respecting the prosperity of this school, -and am told that the youth of that city show a -great desire to study the English language, and are -making progress in it. Their parents have thus -shown their desire for the education of their children, -in instructing them in our tongue, and they -have shown their liberality in sending them without -scruple to be educated by an English lady belonging -to the Protestant church.</p> - -<p>In the preceding review of the schools in Buenos -Aires, there is much to cheer the minds and hearts -of those who interest themselves in the welfare of -their fellow-men, and who use their best exertions -for this end, in the way in which they can be most -effectual, namely, in the instruction of the young. -To see the youthful flocks increasing in numbers, -and growing in the knowledge of the purest religion -and morality, by reading and imbibing the sacred -oracles, is a sight truly gratifying, and to hear of -this will, I am sure, afford much satisfaction to the -Committee of the British and Foreign School -Society. It will also, I trust, lead you to renewed -exertions on behalf of that country, and, knowing<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_273"></a>[273]</span> -your readiness to do so, I beg leave to suggest the -propriety of sending out a person possessing good -talents, and well acquainted with your system, that -he may be employed in extending education -through the various provinces of these United -States; and, in recommending this measure, I -repeat my conviction, that the gentleman now -elected President of these States, Don Bernardino -Rivadavia, will take a pleasure in seconding your -views.</p> - -<p>I now turn your attention to the provinces of -Mendoza and San Juan, as these form a part of -the United Provinces of the Rio de la Plata. In -March 1822, I visited these places, and found a -very great desire existing there, in regard to education. -Our excellent friend, Dr. Gillies, was at -that time (and still is) residing in Mendoza. He -had contributed much to create such a desire, and -was very active in using every means for satisfying -it. It was through his very urgent request, that I -visited these places, I was much gratified with -what I saw there, as regards a growing spirit of -knowledge and liberality. The governor of Mendoza -was very friendly to the establishment of -Schools. A Society for promoting them was established -a few days after my arrival, and a petition -was presented to the Governor, that a small -printing press, belonging to the town, might be -placed at their disposal, that they might print -lessons for the schools, and might otherwise gain a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_274"></a>[274]</span> -little for promoting their objects. This request -was immediately acceded to, and the press and the -types were transferred accordingly. A newspaper -has been printed at this press for some time, and it -has greatly contributed to enlighten that quarter. -A girls’ school was begun whilst I was there, and -measures were taken for establishing schools for -boys, which were afterwards carried into effect. -After these favourable circumstances had been -some time in operation, a storm overtook our -worthy friends. They were like to be overwhelmed -by a spirit of fanaticism, which had raised itself -against the promoters of education and reform, by -those of a contrary mind. The enemies of righteousness -prevailed for some time, but at length -they stumbled and fell, and truth and improvement -again appeared, and prevailed, and now reign -in triumph. Those individuals who had combined -together to benefit their country, and whose benevolent -arrangements were thus for some time impeded; -these very individuals are now the chief -persons in the government, and are thus enabled to -carry their measures into effect.</p> - -<p>In the Province of San Juan I found many enlightened -individuals who were warm friends of -education. There were, no doubt, many of other -feelings and wishes. A printed circular was sent -to the different persons of note in that place by the -Governor, inviting them to a meeting in his own -house, for discussing the subject of establishing<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_275"></a>[275]</span> -schools on your system. A good many attended, -and some were for the measure, and some against -it. The Governor was a warm friend to the object, -and the meeting broke up by his signifying, that it -was the intention of the government to use its best -endeavours to forward this object. I left some -Scripture lessons for the schools in that place, as I -had done in Mendoza, the price of which, together -with the expenses of my journey there, were paid -by the Governors of these two places.</p> - -<p>Before I leave San Juan, I wish to notice the -meritorious conduct of Don Salvador Carril. In -the meeting referred to, he was one of the principal -defenders of our objects, and strongly urged the -adoption of the proposed plan. Some time after, -this gentleman was appointed Governor in that province. -When holding that situation, he wished to -use all his influence for the establishment of religious -liberty in his native province. I have great -pleasure in stating that in this <em>he completely succeeded.</em> -He has thus had the honour of leading -the way in this important matter, and of making -his own province <em>the first part of South America, -to declare for Religious Liberty</em>. The date of this -<em>era</em>, for such it may be called to this new continent, -is the sixth of June, 1825. The province of -Buenos Aires has adopted the same wise and liberal -policy, but the first honour is due to San Juan, and -to its Governor Carril.<a id="FNanchor_8" href="#Footnote_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a> I must not omit to mention<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_276"></a>[276]</span> -here, Mr. Rawson from the United States, and -who has long resided in San Juan. His name is -connected with every measure for the improvement -of that country.</p> - -<p>In regard to the other provinces of the Rio de la -Plata, I can say very little, but I believe education -is in a very low state in all of them. The names of -these provinces are, Santa Fé, Entre Rios, Corientes, -Paraguay, Salta, Tucuman, and Córdova. -It is, however, very probable, from the general -spirit diffused through these countries, that plans -for the improvement and extension of education -would be very favourably received, particularly -under the recommendation and fostering care of -the President, Don Bernardino Rivadavia.</p> - -<p>I omitted to mention before stretching across the -Pampas, another Lancasterian School and Society. -This School and Society are situated about 500 -miles to the South of the City of Buenos Aires, -at the mouth of the Rio Negro, where there is a -small fort and town. Colonel Oyüela, who was -appointed Governor of that quarter some months -before my leaving the eastern side of the continent, -attended our central school to get acquainted with -our system, and on going to the place of his appointment,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_277"></a>[277]</span> -he carried with him a supply of lessons -for the commencement of a school. I afterwards -learned, that he had endeavoured to interest the -inhabitants of that place in the education of their -children, and that he had succeeded in establishing -a school, and in forming a small society for its support. -To this small society, contributions were -made by the inhabitants of such things as they had, -and these were turned into money, and kept the -school going forward. The conduct of Colonel -Oyüela in this matter is truly praiseworthy, as it -springs from a sincere desire to promote education, -and to benefit those over whom he is placed. If -all governors, <em>far and near</em>, were to act in the -same manner, we should soon see ignorance turned -into knowledge all the world over.</p> - -<p>The British System was begun in Chile, in July -1821. The Director, Don Bernardo O’Higgins, -manifested a sincere desire to extend education -throughout the country over which he was placed, -and was ready to listen to any improvements in the -manner of communicating knowledge, which -might be brought before him. The principal Secretary -of State, Don Rafael Echevarria, was also -much interested in the subject. Three schools -were established in Santiago, the capital, one in -Valparaiso, and one in Coquimbo. Some months -before I left Chile, Mr. Eaton arrived there, having -been sent from London, by Mr. Irisarri, to promote -education on the Lancasterian plan. The government -intended to send Mr. Eaton to Conception, in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_278"></a>[278]</span> -the south of Chile, to establish schools in that -province, but on representing to the director, that -it would be better to concentrate our labours in -the capital, and from thence to send qualified -masters to the various provinces, it was acceded -to that Mr. Eaton should remain in Santiago. -Our labours were continued there together until -I received an invitation from General San Martin -to go to Peru. Upon considering fully the importance -of this invitation, as affording an opportunity -for extending the blessings of education, -in that interesting country, I thought it advisable -to accept of it, considering that Mr. Eaton would -remain in Chile, and that thus what had been -begun there, would be maintained, and that by -degrees, through his labours, the system would -be generally extended in that quarter. These -expectations, however, were not realized, as Mr. -Eaton, in a few months after I went to Peru, fell -sick, and was obliged to return to England. In -consequence of this misfortune, the cause in Chile -began to decline, and I believe, at the present -moment, the schools formerly established are in -a very low state, if not given up altogether. It -is much to be regretted, that things should remain -in this state in Chile, and that the great work of -education should be retarded there, whilst it is -making progress in other quarters. During my -stay in Peru, I had some notices of how things -were going on, and where they might probably -end, unless I should accede to their invitation<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_279"></a>[279]</span> -to return there, or at all events send a well qualified -master to sustain the system. I could not -go myself to Chile, although I had a great desire -to go, because my leaving Peru at that time, might -have occasioned a retrogression similar to what -had taken place in Chile. In consequence of this, -I looked out for a well instructed master to go -there. Before I succeeded in obtaining one, the -Spanish army took possession of Lima, and General -Rodil, who commanded the fortresses of -Callao, refused to allow the master to go when I -called on him to obtain a passport.</p> - -<p>From the representatives of the Chilian government, -now in London, I have learned that there is -a great regret at the disappointment met with in -regard to the schools; and that there exists a -sincere desire to remedy the evil as much as possible, -and without delay. I mention this to the -Committee agreeable to your request that I should -point out the best means for forwarding education -in South America. I would suggest the propriety -of seeking out a well qualified person to go to -Chile, and if the one selected is well fitted for -conducting education, I have no doubt of his obtaining -a favourable reception, and of his being the -means of greatly benefiting that country. For -the encouragement of such a one, I would say, that -Chile enjoys a delightful climate, and its inhabitants -are, I think, more moral in general than in -any other part of South America where I have -been.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_280"></a>[280]</span></p> - -<p>The persons you might correspond with in Chile -upon this subject, are the present Director, General -Freire, Don Rafael Echevarria, Don Henrique -Camillo, and Don Manuel Salas. General Freire -was Governor of Conception when I resided in -Chile; but, on a visit he paid to Santiago when I -was there, I had an interview with him, in which -he manifested his satisfaction at the progress of our -schools on your system, and his readiness to encourage -the introduction of the same plan in the -province of Conception, when we should be able to -send a master there. I have, indeed, no doubt -of his hearty co-operation with any measures -which the Society may adopt on behalf of Chile. -The other three person mentioned will lend all -their aid in this good work. Mr. Echevarria was -First Secretary of State at the time I was there, and -encouraged education on this system by sending -his own son to our central school, and by a frequent -attendance himself in the afternoons when -his public business was over. Mr. Camillo was, -and I believe is, contributing to the enlightening -of his countrymen respecting education and other -improvements by publishing a periodical work which -had these things for its sole object. Don Manuel -Salas is already known to you by my letters from -Chile. He is a man up in years, and his only -desire is to benefit his countrymen in every way he -can, and he looks upon education as the most effectual -means of doing permanent good.</p> - -<p>I have only further to mention respecting Chile,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_281"></a>[281]</span> -that Mr. Egaña, the present envoy from that -government now in London, will be ready to give -the Committee any information or assistance in his -power to the furtherance of this object.</p> - -<p>My arrival in Peru, in the end of June 1822, -and the favourable circumstances in the establishment -of schools there, is detailed in my letters -written about that period. Some time after these -prosperous days, the war in that country greatly -hindered the progress of education. We had -often been scourged by this foe before, particularly -in Buenos Aires, but the occurrences in Peru were -to me, at least, new. Our former wars were -among ourselves, and whatever party gained the -ascendancy the schools went on unmolested, or -nearly so; but in Lima we came in contact with -the Spaniards, the well known encouragers of ignorance, -at least so far as South America is concerned. -Twice was Lima taken possession of by -the Spanish armies during my residence there. -On the first occasion I left the city along with -some thousands, who fled at that unhappy time. -The schools suffered an interruption of three -months by the first visit of the Spanish troops. -On the second occasion, to prevent a like interruption, -I remained in the city, and the schools -went on, though not so prosperously as we could -have wished. The protection we enjoyed at this -time was owing, I believe, in a good measure, to -the general feeling in the place in favour, of -education. After remaining six months under<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_282"></a>[282]</span> -the Spanish dominion, in that city, and finding it -impossible to advance, I left that place on my way -northward, and finally came to England. Of the -result of this journey you are already acquainted, -through the publications of the Bible Society.</p> - -<p>The Central School established in the College of -the Dominican Friars in Lima, contained, on the -entrance of the Spanish army, 230 children, and -was going on well; there was another school on -the same plan which had 80 scholars in it. In -both these schools printed sheets of extracts from -the Scriptures were used for lessons, the same as -in Buenos Aires and Chile. But in addition to -this, in Lima the New Testament entire, printed -by the British and Foreign Bible Society in London, -was used as our principal school-book. In -this precious volume the children in the higher -classes read, and were questioned as to its contents. -The same volume was carried home by the children, -and read by them there, and portions of it also were -committed to memory. These portions were recited -in school, and premiums were awarded according -to the accuracy of the recitation, and the clearness -of the views which the children gave in their own -language, of what they had recited. Besides the -sheet lessons, the Scripture extracts were printed -and used in the form of little books. Requests at -times came from the parents to have a copy of -these to read, which requests were complied with, -and thus the word of God became more known, -and I trust more revered and obeyed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_283"></a>[283]</span></p> - -<p>I am not sure whether I mentioned to you or -not, on former occasions, <em>the name</em> of an esteemed -friend and an able coadjutor in the work of education. -It would in me be a dereliction of duty -to pass over in silence the name and the character -of this individual. The gentleman I speak of is -Don José Francisco Navarrete, a clergyman in -Lima. After an acquaintance with him for about -two years, and experiencing during the half of -that time his able co-operation, I beg leave to -recommend him to the attention of the Society, in -reference to the furtherance of education in Peru. -I have had three letters from him since my return -to England, and am happy to find that he continues -his exertions unabated in promoting the -instruction of youth, and that the schools left under -his charge are doing well. He informs me that a -school has been established in Huánuco, and that -it is conducted by a native of that place, who attended -our school in Lima several months when I -was there. Huánuco is a very happy station for a -school. It is situated in an interesting country, -and is the key to the large uncivilized population -which inhabit the banks of the Huallága, Ucayáli, -and Amazon. From Huánuco as a centre I am -persuaded much may be done on behalf of these -poor creatures, who, though living in one of the -richest portions of the world, wander about almost -naked, half fed, and in complete ignorance of the -arts and comforts of life; and what is still more<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_284"></a>[284]</span> -to be regretted, no cheering ray breaks in upon them -of a world to come, and of the everlasting felicity to -be enjoyed there through our Lord Jesus Christ. -Let us hope, and let us pray for it, that education -may soon begin among them, that the Holy -Scriptures may be put into their hands, and that -the Spirit of God may descend upon these poor -Gentiles, as it did on us in former days, that their -sins may be washed away, and that they may -enjoy an inheritance among all them that are -sanctified.</p> - -<p>Another favourable circumstance has taken -place since my leaving Peru, in regard to the -quarter I am now speaking of. In Ocopa, not -far distant from Huánuco there has existed for -many years a College of Friars, most of whom -were natives of Spain. This College has been -made to change its object, and instead of being as -formerly a nursery of Friars, it has become a -seminary for the education of youth on the British -System, and its ample funds are now applied to -this object. This happy change has been effected -entirely through General Bolívar. After mentioning -this circumstance, as bearing on the character -of Bolívar, it might be thought unnecessary -to say more respecting him, as the instance now -mentioned very plainly indicates his desire to -benefit South America, not by his military exertions -only, but also by the gentler, more effectual means -of early instruction. I must however add two<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_285"></a>[285]</span> -circumstances more, in proof of Bolívar’s deep interest -and active exertions in the cause of education. -Some months subsequent to the decree referred -to for changing the object of the College of Ocopa, -he issued a decree for establishing a Central -School on the Lancasterian System, in the capital -city of each province throughout Peru, and from -which Central Schools, masters are to be sent into -all the towns and hamlets of the respective provinces. -This is a most effectual measure for speedily -enlightening all the inhabitants of that -country. The other circumstance I have to mention -in regard to Bolívar is a decree he issued -about a year ago for sending two young men from -every province in Peru to England, to receive -here, at the expense of the Government, the best -education that can be obtained. After finishing -their studies in this country, these young men are -to return to their native land, and to fill important -stations in the great work of general illumination. -I am sure the hearts of the Committee are by this -time warmly attached to this useful individual, -whom God Almighty has raised up to be so great -a blessing to his country, in breaking their chains -of oppression and of ignorance. Ten of the young -men sent by Bolívar have arrived in this country, -and are now pursuing their studies in the neighbourhood -of London. One of these was a monitor in -our central school in Lima. The rest of the young -men are expected to arrive here soon. I am<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_286"></a>[286]</span> -happy in being thus able to confirm, by unexceptionable -instances, the opinion I formerly gave -you of this great man, after enjoying the pleasure -of an interview with him, and conversing upon these -subjects.—To these things must be added the -appropriation of 20,000 dollars for promoting -schools in Caraccas through Mr. Lancaster.</p> - -<p>In the lustre of Bolívar, I had nearly forgotten -something more I had to say of our friend Navarrete, -a man who only needs the station of Bolívar to do -all that he does. In one of the letters I lately -received from him, he says, he has obtained from -the Government the grant of part of a nunnery for -establishing a girls’ school. This nunnery is close -beside the college where the boys’ central school is. -This school, about to be established, is to be the -model and the central establishment for the education -of the female sex, a branch of education very -much wanted in that country. May God speed -the labours of our dear friend in this matter, and -may mothers, and daughters, and sisters, embalm -his memory for ages to come!</p> - -<p>I believe the Committee is now aware that I -have given up any intention of returning to Peru, -and that I have fixed on another spot of South -America, where I intend to spend my remaining -days. I would beg leave, therefore, to solicit -the attention of the Committee to Peru, and would -suggest the propriety of their sending out a fit -person to that place, to be actively employed in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_287"></a>[287]</span> -the establishment of schools. I have no doubt -of such an individual meeting with a favourable -reception, and of his being immediately employed -by the Government in this work.</p> - -<p>Before leaving Peru, I wish to notice one of -the articles of the constitution of that state, as it -has an important bearing upon the cause of education. -The article in question states, that the -elective franchise is open to all, but with the -express preliminary qualification, that the voter -be able to read and to write. It is, however, -added that in consequence of the ignorance in -which the Spaniards have kept the people in -general, this pre-requisite shall not be required -until the year 1840. The measures which the -Government is pursuing for promoting general -education, bid fair, I think, to qualify all by the -given time, in the manner referred to.<a id="FNanchor_9" href="#Footnote_9" class="fnanchor">[9]</a></p> - -<p>In regard to education in Colombia, I have -hitherto said but little, and that little is contained -in a letter to you from Quito, in November 1824. -In that communication, I mentioned a plan for -establishing a seminary for the education of the -female sex in that city. The difficulties of converting -a monastery into such a seminary are -considerable, and although I am pretty confident -of the ultimate success of that measure, I cannot<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_288"></a>[288]</span> -speak definitely as to its progress. The last notice -I had upon the subject, was in a letter from -one of the members of Congress, in which he says, -that the question was to be forthwith discussed -in Congress. I hope no long time will elapse -before we have the gratifying intelligence of the -complete success of this measure, and, in expectation -of this, I suggest the propriety of having a -well qualified person ready to occupy this station. -I am thus particular upon this point, as I conceive -the carrying into effect the proposed plan, -will have a most beneficial tendency on the welfare -of that large city (the largest in Colombia), and -on that of the populous and interesting district -in which it is situated.</p> - -<p>In passing along from Quito to Bogotá, I found -three schools established on the British or Monitorian -System; one was in Yahuará, and the other -two were in Popayan; one of the latter was for boys, -and the other for girls. The establishment of these -schools, in the provincial parts of Colombia, is -the result of a general plan of education upon -this system in connection with a central school -established some time ago in Bogotá, the capital. -On arriving at that city, I visited this model school, -and hoped to meet there the director of the establishment, -to converse with him in regard to -the number and efficiency of the various provincial -schools. I was however disappointed of seeing -him, as he was then actually engaged on a tour<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_289"></a>[289]</span> -through some of the provinces to promote the -formation of new schools. I cannot, therefore, -state how many schools were then in operation, -but I have good reason to think the existing number -is calculated to encourage the friends of education, -and that it goes on increasing.</p> - -<p>I received from Mr. Restrepo, the minister -of the interior, a set of the lessons used in the -schools. One regrets to find the Scriptures not -there, nor any extracts from a volume so much -calculated to benefit us, in youth and in age, in -time and in eternity. With this important exception, -the lessons are good, and every way superior -to the trash formerly used in the schools of South -America. One part of the lessons is worthy of -notice. The constitution of the country is divided -into portions and sections, and is read in the schools. -By this means the children get acquainted in early -life with the real nature and circumstances of their -native land, and thus become better citizens, and -more useful to each other. This plan is worthy -of imitation in other quarters. It is to be hoped -that ere long this judicious plan, which has been -adopted for imbuing the early mind with a knowledge -of the statutes of their country, will be adopted -also with regard to the statutes of God unfolded -in the Holy Scriptures.</p> - -<p>The next part of what was formerly called -Spanish America is Guatemala. This is properly -neither in North nor South America, and it<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_290"></a>[290]</span> -has, in consequence, been denominated Central -America. Not having visited that quarter, all -I have to say of it in regard to education is but -little, and that is, of course, from the information -of others, I understand several schools have been -established in the capital and elsewhere, but none -of these are on the monitorian plan. In conversing -with Mr. Zebadúa the envoy of that government -in London, and with Mr. Herrera, a gentleman -from that country who feels a great interest in -education, I have learned that they are very -desirous of obtaining a person thoroughly versed -in this system, in order to establish a central and -other schools in that republic. I hope the Committee -will have this quarter in view as well as -the others recommended above, when properly -qualified teachers can be obtained.</p> - -<p>The only other part that remains to be noticed -is Mexico; and for information respecting the state -and prospects of education there, I beg leave to -refer you to the interesting communication of our -excellent friend, Don Vicente de Rocafuerte, -Chargé d’Affaires from that government.<a id="FNanchor_10" href="#Footnote_10" class="fnanchor">[10]</a></p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_291"></a>[291]</span></p> - -<p>In reviewing the state and progress of education -in South America, there is undoubtedly much that -is calculated to gratify and to cheer the hearts -of those who delight in the progress of knowledge, -and in the welfare of man. Besides the pleasure -that arises from seeing what has actually been -done in the few years in which these new states -have enjoyed the boon of liberty,—there is yet -more to cheer us in contemplating the general -feeling which pervades the country upon the important -subject of education. During my seven -years’ residence in that country, I have had intercourse -with all classes of society there, and, -through repeated conversations and otherwise, have -come, I think, to understand what are the actual -feelings and desires of the people upon this point. -<em>I have no hesitation in saying, that the public voice -is decidedly in favour of <span class="smcap">universal education</span></em>. -I never heard, even once, what is still to be heard -elsewhere, “that the poor should not be taught.” -The very opposite feeling most undoubtedly exists -and prevails among the clergy and the laity, the -governors and the governed. On a survey, therefore, -of the whole scene, and in looking into futurity,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_292"></a>[292]</span> -the brightest views may, I think, be entertained -as to the progress and best interests of man in that -large and interesting continent; and, from this -view of things, I am sure none will derive more -real gratification than the Committee of the British -and Foreign School Society.</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p><i>Report of Mr. Rocafuerte, Chargé d’Affaires in England -from the Government of Mexico, delivered in -a Speech at the Twenty-first Annual Meeting of -the British and Foreign School Society, May 15th, -1826.</i></p> - -<p>The independence of South America is the consequence -of that growing spirit of modern civilization -which, having crossed the Atlantic Ocean on the wings -of trade, has penetrated into those remote countries, -and liberated them from the Spanish yoke. What more -gratifying picture can there be for a true and liberal -Christian, than that which the new world now presents, -overturning a bad system, and establishing a good one, -without being attended with scenes of violence and -cruelties. It may truly be said that the characteristic -feature of the Mexican revolution is that spirit of moderation -and generosity which the maxims of the Gospel -recommend, and which are the best means for establishing -true liberty. Our revolution, in its object, its -means, and end, is very different from that of France: -among us, it is not an overthrow of all principles; it is -a natural tendency to create a new order; it is a general -combination to promote the happiness of a vast continent;<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_293"></a>[293]</span> -it is a necessary transition from darkness to -light, from superstition to christian morality. From -the ruins of Greece and Italy, sprung some rays of -light, which, illuminating the darkness of the middle -age, prepared the epoch of the discovery of the printing-press, -the mariner’s compass, and the new world. From -that time, the constant progress of the arts and sciences -has converted knowledge into power, and nations have -been more or less opulent and happy in the ratio of -their scientific attainments, of their industry, and above -all, of their moral and religious principles, which form -the solid basis of true freedom. To these effects of -liberty, England owes her greatness, her happiness, and -that very first rank which she holds in the catalogue of -civilized nations. Spain, that beautiful country, worthy -of a better fate, has been ruined by her ignorance and -monkish superstition; she has only one advantage over -the Turkish nation, and that is, that she lives under the -glorious standard of the cross; and this standard, I -hope, will soon lead the valiant and heroic Greeks to -victory, and thus enable them at length to spread Christianity -over the land of their tyrants.</p> - -<p>Those lessons shall not be lost in South America. -We are convinced that the foundation of our future -and permanent prosperity rests on the moral improvements -of the lower classes of society. It is not enough -for a man to know how to read and write, and gain -a livelihood; he must have religious habits, must know -exactly his duties towards God and towards society; -and no institution is so well calculated for obtaining -those great objects as the British and Foreign School Society. -What an admirable undertaking it is, to bestow -the blessing of scriptural knowledge on all mankind,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_294"></a>[294]</span> -to unite all the nations of the globe, by the brotherly -ties of science and religion. Ye noble promoters of -this institution! be assured you have many warm -friends in South America. The general desire with us -of all true and enlightened patriots, is for education; the -general cry all over our continent is, <em>give us education</em>. -This is the reason that the Lancasterian System has -been immediately adopted in almost every part of South -America.</p> - -<p>Mr. Lancaster is now living at Caraccas, and promoting -public instruction there.</p> - -<p>In Mexico, the first Lancasterian School was opened -on the 22nd of August, 1822; and by one of those singular -occurrences in revolutions, the halls of the Inquisition, -so inimical to this Institution, were converted -into a public school, into a nursery of free men, into -a true temple of reason. Three hundred children are -taught to read in this school according to this new -system of education, a system which will lead to the -moral perfection of the world, as the mariner’s compass -led to the geographical perfection of the globe. This -first school was called <i>Escuela del Sol</i>.</p> - -<p>Some time afterwards the Government granted to -the Lancasterian Association of Mexico the large and -beautiful convent of Bethlehem, and a second school -was formed there. This establishment is divided into -three departments, and directed by two professors well -acquainted with the system; one of them is a Frenchman, -who went purposely for that object from Paris to -Mexico.</p> - -<p>The first department is calculated for six hundred -and sixty children; they learn to read, write, and -<em>cypher</em>; they are also instructed in the political and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_295"></a>[295]</span> -religious catechism, orthography, arithmetic, and -Spanish grammar. The parents of the scholars who -can pay, give a dollar a month, which is about two -pounds ten shillings a year; the children of the poor -pay nothing.</p> - -<p>The second department will contain four hundred -scholars, who pay two dollars per month, or nearly -five pounds a year. It is a model or central school -for forming teachers and good professors; and these -are afterwards to be sent into the different provinces, -in order to fulfil the desire of our Government, which -is, to place in every village throughout Mexico a Lancasterian -school, a printing-press, and a chapel.</p> - -<p>The third department will contain three hundred -scholars; and these pay three dollars a month, or -seven pounds a year. The object intended in this department -is, to teach Latin, French, geography, and -drawing, on the principles of the Lancasterian system. -This trial has been made, but I am not sure whether it -has answered or not.</p> - -<p>In 1823, there were introduced into the Lancasterian -school of Mexico, the lessons used in your school in -London, taken from the Bible, without note or comment. -Some old priests opposed the introduction of -these, stating that it was prohibited to read extracts -from the Bible without notes. The Secretary of the -Lancasterian Association, Mr. Gandéra, a very enlightened -clergyman, and distinguished for his virtue -and zeal in the cause of religion, supported the opposite -opinion, and succeeded in establishing in the school the -use of these extracts. The consequence is, that our -children are acquiring a taste for the perusal of the -Scriptures, and they are hence learning to be virtuous,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_296"></a>[296]</span> -charitable, tolerant, and free. This moral education -will promote the cause of religious toleration, and will -effect that regeneration which our new political system -requires. We cannot remain as we are; we must go -forward; and, as said in Parliament by Mr. Canning, -(whose name is dear to all our hearts in South America,) -“we must go forward, and keep pace with the -growing spirit of the times, and the great change that -has been wrought in the opinions of the world.” This -great change in the general opinion is, that nations can -only be happy under the banners of liberal sentiments -and true morality; that, in short, the combination of -political and religious freedom is as necessary for the -moral happiness of mankind, as that combination of -the two gasses, forming the atmospheric air which we -breathe, is to our physical existence. This vast plan -of human improvement is the great object of your noble -Institution, an Institution which truly deserves the gratitude -of the world, and the most cordial support of all -who are influenced <em>by the love of their country, and the -principles of Christianity</em>.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_7" href="#FNanchor_7" class="label">[7]</a> Though this letter was not written in South America, -as all the preceding were, yet its evident bearing upon the -subject in hand entitle it, perhaps, to the place it occupies.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_8" href="#FNanchor_8" class="label">[8]</a> At <a href="#Page_32">page 32</a>, it is stated that religious liberty was publicly -acknowledged in Peru, under San Martin. This acknowledgement, -in Peru, of this sound principle of policy and of -justice, certainly preceded the one here referred to in San -Juan. But the circumstances were different. In Peru it was -the single act of General San Martin, as Protector, or Dictator -of Peru, and the people of the country had no share in it, -whereas in San Juan, the declaration of Religious Liberty was -a legislative act.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_9" href="#FNanchor_9" class="label">[9]</a> This notice, I find, is mentioned in a preceding letter, -yet I leave it here also, as I think the subject is not unworthy -of a repetition.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_10" href="#FNanchor_10" class="label">[10]</a> This communication, bearing upon the subject of education -in Spanish America, will be added at the close of this -letter. When this communication is considered as the production -of a native of that country, a gentleman intimately acquainted -with its concerns, and actually holding a high official -situation under the Government of the most populous of these -new states, it may tend to confirm the favourable accounts from -that quarter of the world contained in the preceding letters.</p> - -<p>The enlightened and liberal mind of Mr. Rocafuerte, and -his truly zealous endeavours to raise his country high in -political wisdom, in literature, in morality, and in pure -religion, are truly praiseworthy.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<p class="titlepage">FINIS.</p> - -<p class="titlepage"><span class="smcap">Dennett</span>,<br /> -Leather Lane, London.</p> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LETTERS ON THE MORAL AND RELIGIOUS STATE OF SOUTH AMERICA ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> -<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/67526-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/67526-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 40542c8..0000000 --- a/old/67526-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null |
